Federal electricity commission

Civil Works Design Manual

Section C: Structures
Topic 1: General Criteria for
Analysis and design

Chapter C.1.3 Earthquake Design

RECOMMENDATIONS

Mexico | 2015
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

DIRECTORY

Dr. Enrique Ochoa Reza Dr. Jose Luis Fernandez Zayas

Managing Director Executive Director

Ing. Luis Carlos Hernandez Ayala Dr. Jose Miguel Gonzalez Santalo
Director of Operations Director of Mechanical Systems

Act. Guillermo Turrent Schnaas Dr. Ulises Mena Hernandez

Director of Modernization in charge of the
Civil Engineering Management

Ing. Benjamin Granados Dominguez

Director of Financed Investment Projects

Cesar Fernando Fuentes Estrada

Deputy Director of Projects and Construction

Ing. Gustavo Arvizu Lara

Manager of Civil Engineering Studies

Jesus Enrique Mena Sandoval

Structural Safety Deputy Manager

©Rights reserved by: Federal Electricity Commission. Rhône river no. 14, Col. Cuauhtémoc, CP 06598, Mexico, DF
This edition and its characteristics are the property of the Federal Electricity Commission, Mexico.

Printed in Mexico, 2015 Copyright 2015

two
 RECOMMENDATIONS

FOREWORD

Today the Federal Electricity Commission is going through a historic moment. With the energy reform,
promulgated by President Enrique Peña Nieto, the CFE will be transformed into a productive State
company. To rise to this challenge, the CFE will have to implement major internal changes that meet a dual
objective: make the Commission more efficient and, at the same time, ensure that it has the tools and
resources to modernize itself, in order to continue contributing to the economic and social development of
the country.

The strengthening of the CFE is essential to continue guaranteeing the supply of energy at increasingly
competitive prices. This effort undoubtedly goes through the promotion of public and private investment
for the development of infrastructure, the generation of incentives for innovation and technological
development, and the formation of specialized human capital.

In this situation of important challenges for the National Electricity Sector, but also of great
opportunities, this work is inscribed. The Civil Works Design Manual contributes to the fulfillment of
the ambitious goals set by the reform and by the National Infrastructure Program 2014-2018, which
seek to promote not only the development of more and better infrastructure, but also the training of
highly qualified technical staff. trained in the design and construction of these projects.

Thus, this new edition of the Manual prepared by the CFE and the Electrical Research Institute provides the
design guidelines for all civil engineering works, and it does so by incorporating technological advances
and the technical experience accumulated by Mexican engineering since 1969, the year in which the first
version of this chapter was published.

Undoubtedly, this work, which brings together theoretical and practical elements of engineering in
the fields of Hydrotechnics, Geotechnics and Structures, constitutes an obligatory technical reference
not only for CFE engineers, but for all those in charge of building engineering works. in PEMEX and
dependencies of the federal and local public sector. Like its predecessor, this one-of-a-kind manual
will be of great technical assistance to engineers throughout Latin America.

I want to highlight that with the Civil Works Design Manual, the CFE endorses its commitment to the
training of new engineering staff. Indeed, this publication is designed to be consulted and used in the
classroom by our engineering students, not only in the civil field, but in various disciplines. I
acknowledge those who participated in the preparation of this important work that, without a doubt,
will allow the CFE to advance in its objective of consolidating itself as an increasingly competitive and
efficient company, which generates in a stable manner and at lower costs the electrical energy that
Mexico requires for its development.

DR. ENRIQUE OCHOA PRAYS

Managing Director

Mexico City, July 2015

3
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

PRESENTNTICAON
The Mexican Republic is located at the confluence of several tectonic plates, which continuously cause
earthquakes of important magnitude that affect all the constructions that are located in the vicinity of the
epicenters and hundreds of kilometers away from them. In order for the Structures to adequately resist
the effects of tremors, it is essential to carry out a rational design of them, considering all the sources that
can give rise to strong earthquakes, the distance at which they are located, the type of structure, its
importance and materials used, and the local conditions of the soil on which they are founded.

This version of the Earthquake Design chapter incorporates the most modern criteria to take into
account in the design the particular characteristics of each type of structure, its damping and
ductility, and includes new structures not considered in previous versions, such as wind turbines,
ports and tunnels. New options for the design spectrum consider the possibility of calculating it at a
return period different from the one considered standard in the chapter, according to the
specifications and characteristics of the work.
This review emphasizes the structures of the Electricity Sector, given the importance that its
generation plants, substations and main lines continue to operate even after an intense earthquake,
which will allow other centers, such as hospitals, fire departments, command centers, and vital lines,
such as water supply or pumping plants, can also operate for better emergency care.

Although this chapter is part of a work aimed mainly at the design of important structures due to their size,
purpose or content, its main objectives are: a) to reduce the loss of human life and the impact on the population
due to the occurrence of strong earthquakes, b ) establish levels of structural safety for the Mexican Republic,
and c) set the minimum requirements for civil works to be able to withstand medium earthquakes with little or
no damage, strong earthquakes without structural damage, and severe earthquakes with damage without
reaching the co lapse. For this reason, we have also included the

Simplified methodology for the design of small buildings.

The Earthquake Design chapter is used as a complementary textbook in engineering schools and
faculties of national and foreign universities, so its updating will help new civil engineering cadres, in
addition to practicing engineers, have in your hands the most up-to-date tool for the design of
earthquake-resistant structures. The chapter on Design for Earthquake constitutes a notable
achievement of Mexican engineering with which the Federal Electricity Commission ratifies its
technical leadership and contributes to updating and disseminating knowledge in seismic
engineering.

ENG. BENJAMÍN GRANADOS DOMÍNGUEZ

Director of Financed Investment Projects
Mexico City, October 2015

4
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Author Index

Institution
Elaboration Dr. Ulises Mena Hernández Dr. IIE
Luis Eduardo Pérez Rocha IIE

Collaboration Ing. Mitzi Danay Aguilera Escobar Ing. IIE

Norma Wallflower Alarcón Mazari Ing. IIE
Carlos Martín Albavera Ayala Ing. IIE
Ismael Eduardo Arzola Nuño MI Juan IIE
Carlos Corona Fortunio IIE
IM Jesús Salvador García Carrera Ing. IIE
Gualberto Hernández Juárez IM IIE
Nicolás Ageo Melchor García Dr. IIE
Yasser Picazo Gama IIE
IM David Porras Navarro González IIE
Ing. Roberto Ramírez Alcántar IIE
IM Roberto Alejandro Ruedas Medina IIE

External Collaboration Dr. Mario Gustavo Ordaz Schroeder II - UNAM

Coordination Ing. Jesús Enrique Mena Sandoval CFE - GEIC

Dr. Ulises Mena Hernández IIE

Technical Committee Ing. Sixto Fernández Ramírez † IM CFE - GEIC

Oscar J. Luna González Ing. Jesús CFE - GEIC
Enrique Mena Sandoval MC Edgar CFE - GEIC
Sánchez Álvaro CFE - GEIC
IM Jaime Camargo Hernandez CFE - CPH
MI Amos Francisco Diaz Barriga Casales CFE - CPH
Ing. Alfredo Luna Gonzalez CFE - CPH
IM Eduardo Martinez Ramirez CFE-CPT
MI Martin Sánchez Muñoz Ing. CFE-CPT
Cuauhtémoc Cordero Macías Ing. CFE - CPTT
Miguel Navarro Valle CFE - CPTT
Engineer Guillermina Vázquez de León CFE - CPTT

5
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Reviewer Index

External Review MI Leonardo Flores Corona Dr. CENAPRED

Raúl Flores Berrones Dr. Héctor IMTA
Sánchez Sánchez Dr. Fortunato IPN
Espinosa Barreras Dr. David de UABC
León Escobedo Dr. Roberto Arroyo UAEMEX
Matus UAGRO
Dr. Hans Isrrael Archundia Aranda UAM
Dr. Arturo Tena Colunga UAM
Dr. Amador Terán Gilmore Dr. UAM
Tiziano Perea Olvera Dr. Hugo UAM
Hernández Barrios Dr. Manuel UMSNH
Jara Díaz UMSNH
Dr. Jose Manuel Jara Guerrero UMSNH
Dr. Sergio Manuel Alcocer Martínez de Castro Dr. UNAM-II
Gabriel Auvinet Guichard UNAM-II
Dr. Luis Esteva Maraboto Dr. Roberto UNAM-II
Meli Piralla Dr. Sonia Elda Ruíz Gómez UNAM-II
MI Salvador Ismael Gómez Chávez Dr. UNAM-II
Hugo Oswaldo Ferrer Toledo UP
UPAEP

IIE Electrical Research Institute. CFE – Civil

CFE-GEIC Engineering Studies Management CFE –
CFE-CPT Coordination of Thermoelectric Projects CFE –
CFE – CPH Coordination of Hydroelectric Projects
CFE-CPTT CFE – Coordination of Transmission and Transformation Projects
II - UNAM Institute of Engineering – National Autonomous University of Mexico
UAM Autonomous Metropolitan University
UMSNH Michoacán University of San Nicolás de Hidalgo
UABC Autonomous University of Baja California Popular
UPAEP Autonomous University of the State of Puebla National
CENAPRED Center for Disaster Prevention Autonomous University
UAEMEX of the State of Mexico National Polytechnic Institute
IPN
IMTA Mexican Institute of Water Technology
UP Universidad Panamericana
UAGRO Autonomous University of Guerrero

Thanks
Staff from Petróleos Mexicanos (PEMEX), engineers Mario Macías Hernández, Juan Carlos Martínez Rojas, Víctor
Rene Mireles Gómez and Héctor Moreno Alfaro, from the Mexican Society of Seismic Engineering (SMIS)
participated in the development meetings. ), Mexican Society of Geotechnical Engineering (SMIG), Mexican
Society of Structural Engineering (SMIE) and the valuable contribution of practicing engineers.

6
 RECOMMENDATIONS

PREFACE
CHAPTER ON EARTHQUAKE DESIGN, 2015 EDITION

Since the first version of the Earthquake Design Chapter of the Civil Works Design Manual of the Federal
Electricity Commission (CDS-MDOC CFE) came out, it has been the only document that has provided the
criteria for calculating seismic forces in the Mexican Republic. For more than four decades it has been a
reference for the seismic design of structures, not only for CFE and PEMEX, but also for engineering
companies dedicated to the design of structures in general, for which it has served as the basis for the
preparation of municipal and state design standards in Mexico, and other countries.

The CDS-MDOC CFE was published for the first time in 1969, with updates in 1981, 1993 and 2008 that
have included technological and scientific advances in the areas of structural engineering, seismic
engineering, seismology and geotechnics, the contributions of the most recognized in these areas
and above all, it has been enriched by the opinions of practicing engineers.
The 1993 version of the CDS-MDOC CFE, in addition to providing recommendations for obtaining
seismic design spectra (based on seismic regionalization) and procedures for calculating seismic
forces for Building-type structures, extended its application to structures such as Inverted Pendulums
and Appendices, Retaining Walls, Chimneys, Tanks, Industrial Structures, Bridges, Pipelines and
Dams, including a great contribution to the seismic design of structures with the concept of soil-
structure interaction. This made the 1993 CDS-MDOC CFE version one of the most comprehensive
recommendations in the world.
In the update of the seismic design criteria of the CDS-MDOC CFE reflected in the 2008 version, it was
proposed to eliminate seismic regionalization and manage a continuous seismic hazard (contained in
the PRODISIS program), based on a probabilistic approach following design criteria. optimum.
Regarding the shape of the design spectrum, it could result from three or four branches depending
on the period of the terrain. On the other hand, the design spectra became transparent, eliminating
factors associated with the structures such as overstrength and ductility. The first implicit in the
design spectra and the second defined only for Building type structures. In addition, in the 2008
version, each of the structural systems included in the previous version were reviewed and updated,
and seismic design criteria were included for new structural systems, among which are: earth and
rockfill dams, tunnels, telecommunications towers, and seismic isolation and energy dissipation. This
was a great challenge, due to the implications that were presented to define these factors, but on the
other hand, it conceptually clarified the use of transparent design spectra.

The great benefits achieved with the 2008 version were limited in its application in small structures,
since for the construction of the design spectra it was required to have dynamic properties of the
ground obtained only with specialized geotechnical tests. This supposes a considerable increase in
the design cost, which can hardly be assumed for this type of structure.

To solve this inconvenience and to clarify some critical points identified in the 2008 version, the
decision was made to review it again, concentrating efforts on the issues of seismic hazard, structural
importance, factors that modify the transparent design spectra (overstrength and ductility),
particularly for industrial structures, in addition to including seismic design criteria for wind turbines
and skylights.

DR. ULISES MENA HERNANDEZ ENG. JESUS ENRIQUE MENA SANDOVAL

Head of the Civil Engineering Management – IIE Structural Safety Deputy Manager – GEIC
CFE

7
 RECOMMENDATIONS

GENERAL INDEX

Yo OBJECTIVE................................................. ........................................................... .............10

ii SCOPE................................................. ........................................................... ..............10

III LIMITATIONS ........................................................... ........................................................... .....10

SECTION 3.1 SEISMIC DESIGN SPECTRUM FOR THE MEXICAN TERRITORY .............11

SECTION 3.2 CHARACTERIZATION OF THE STRUCTURAL RESPONSE ...................................39

SECTION 3.3 STRUCTURES TYPE 1: BUILDINGS ................................................ ..........................59

SECTION 3.4 TYPE 2 STRUCTURES: INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES...................................99

SECTION 3.5 TYPE 3 STRUCTURES: INVERTED PENDULUMS AND APPENDAGES ...................117

SECTION 3.6 STRUCTURES TYPE 4: RETAINING WALLS ................................................ ...127

SECTION 3.7 STRUCTURES TYPE 5: CHIMNEYS, SILOS AND SIMILAR ................................165

SECTION 3.8 TYPE 6 STRUCTURES: TANKS, RESERVOIRS AND SIMILAR .................................181

SECTION 3.9 STRUCTURES TYPE 7: BRIDGES ................................................ .........................207

SECTION 3.10 STRUCTURES TYPE 8: PIPING ................................................ ..........................231

SECTION 3.11 TYPE STRUCTURES 9: DAMS............................................... ..............................259

SECTION 3.12 STRUCTURES TYPE 10: SEISMIC ISOLATION AND DISSIPATION OF

ENERGY ................................................. ........................................................... ..........311

SECTION 3.13 STRUCTURES TYPE 11: TELECOMMUNICATION TOWERS ..............................353

SECTION 3.14 TYPE 12 STRUCTURES: TUNNELS AND PORTS ............................................... .373

SECTION 3.15 STRUCTURES TYPE 13: WIND TURBINES .................................................. ....401

9
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Yo OBJECTIVE

The Recommendations of the Earthquake Design Chapter aim to:

1. Reduce the loss of human lives and the impact on the population due to the occurrence of
severe earthquakes, as well as avoid interruptions in the operation processes of the
facilities of the energy and industrial sector.
2. Establish levels of seismic intensity and structural safety for the Mexican Republic.

3. Set the minimum requirements for the seismic design of structures and civil works so that they
are capable of withstanding:
a. Low intensity earthquakes without damage,
b. Moderate earthquakes without structural damage, but possibly with some damage to
nonstructural elements and
c. A strong earthquake with damage to structural and non-structural elements, without
collapsing.

ii SCOPE

1. These Recommendations are mandatory for structures in the energy sector and/or
those related to it.
2. They are of national application. In those municipalities and/or states that have seismic
design standards, for structures in the energy sector, the most unfavorable transparent
design spectrum should be taken from among those obtained from these
Recommendations and from the local standard or regulation. The factors that modify the
design spectrum should be taken from these Recommendations.

III LIMITATIONS
1. These Recommendations are not applicable to the seismic design of offshore structures.

2. For structural systems not included in this chapter, a site-specific spectrum should be
constructed in accordance with these Recommendations. The reduction factors due to
overstrength and ductility, as well as the structural damping fraction, must be
obtained with experimental tests endorsed by the authorities responsible for
construction permits.
3. The factors and load combinations should be taken from Chapter C.1.2 ACTIONS, in the
section COMBINATIONS OF ACTIONS FOR DESIGN AND LOAD FACTORS.

10
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.1

SEISMIC DESIGN SPECTRA FOR THE

MEXICAN TERRITORY

eleven
 RECOMMENDATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 3.1. SEISMIC DESIGN SPECTRA FOR THE MEXICAN TERRITORY

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... ...14

FLOWCHART............................................... ................................................fifteen

3.1 DESIGN SPECTRUM .................................................. .........................................19

3.1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................. ........................................................... .....19

3.1.2 CLASSIFICATION OF CONSTRUCTIONS................................................... ...........twenty

3.1.2.1 Classification of constructions according to their importance and effects that
could occur in the event of a failure .................................................. .......................................twenty
3.1.2.2 Classification of constructions by their size and relationship with the sector
energy or industrial .................................................. ........................................................... twenty-one

3.1.3 TYPES OF SEISMIC DESIGN SPECTRUM ............................................ ............22

3.1.3.1 Probabilistic response spectrum ........................................................... ..........................22
3.1.3.2 Deterministic response spectra .................................................. ............................2. 3
3.1.3.3 Review of active local faults .................................................. ...................................2. 3
3.1.3.4 Seismic hazard contained in the PRODISIS application ................................................ .....24
3.1.3.5 Seismic regionalization.............................................. ..............................................25

3.1.4 SHOCKS OF DESIGN AND STRUCTURAL IMPORTANCE...................................26

3.1.5 CHARACTERIZATION OF THE FOUNDATION GROUND ..............................................27

3.1.5.1 structuresA+YA1 ................................................ ........................................................... .27
3.1.5.2 structuresA2YB1.............................................. ........................................................... ..28
3.1.5.3 structuresB2.............................................. ........................................................... ..........31

3.1.6 TRANSPARENT SEISMIC DESIGN SPECTRUM ............................................ .32

3.1.6.1 Spectral parameters for structuresA+YA1 (Site-Specific
Spectra).................................................... ........................................................... .............................33
3.1.6.2 Spectral parameters for structuresA2YB1 (Regional Spectra) ......................34
3.1.6.3 Spectral parameters for structuresB2 (Acceleration Spectrum
Constant) ................................................ ........................................................... ................36
3.1.6.4 Review of the type of design spectra that is recommended for each
structural classification ................................................ .........................................................37

3.1.7 ELASTIC DISPLACEMENT SPECTRUMSD Tand .........................................38

3.1.8 LIMIT STATES ................................................ ........................................................... ..38

13
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

NOMENCLATURE
a0 Maximum ground acceleration (cm/stwo) r Parameter that controls the fall of the
ar0 Maximum acceleration on rock spectral ordinates forTb≤Tand<Tc
Ta Lower limit of design spectrum plateau
corresponding to the reference level
a0r ,EPR Maximum acceleration on rock Tb Upper limit of design spectrum plateau
corresponding to a specified return
period Tc Beginning period of the descending branch
ac Total built area in which the spectral displacements tend
c Spectral Peak Acceleration (cm/stwo) correctly to the ground displacement
Dmax Maximum ground displacement Reference Tand Structural period
ER response spectrum (for optimal return Ts Dominant period of the equivalent land
period) stratum
EPR Response Spectrum for Specified vc Characteristic velocity dependent on the
Return Period seismic zone
EMC Response spectrum for the Maximum Credible vYo shear wave propagation speedYo-th stratum
earthquake
FIE Structural importance factor vs Shear wave propagation speed in the
FBeef Response factor equivalent soil stratum Volumetric
FBe Service factor -Yo weight of them–th stratum Structural
Fsit site factor -and damping
g acceleration of gravity
Functions
GYo Modulus of rigidity in shear ofYo-th
stratum to Tand,- Normalized spectral ordinate
hYo thickness ofm–th layer pcTand Factor to define the variation of the
H Structure height
Hc Characteristic thickness dependent on the
last ordered descending branch
seismic zone Sa Tand,- of the design spectrum
Hs Total thickness of the equivalent transparent
ground layer SD Tand Pseudoshift depending on the
k Parameter that controls the fall of the
structural periodTand
spectral ordinate forTand≥Tc
SD-max Spectral maximum displacement

14
 RECOMMENDATIONS

FLOWCHART

CONSTRUCTION OF SEISMIC SPECTRUM

CLASSIFICATION OF STRUCTURES

BECAUSE OF ITS IMPORTANCE

A+ A B. AND EFFECTS IN CASE
FAILURE

Class1:
Structures that belong to Class1:
the CFE or are related to the
energy or industrial sector H > 13meitherAc > 400mtwo

BECAUSE OF ITS SIZE AND

RELATIONSHIP WITH
ENERGY SECTOR

Classtwo:
Structures that are not Classtwo:
related to the CFE or to the
energy or industrial sector H≤13mYAc ≤ 400mtwo

- spectrum of
constant acceleration
(only required)

a) Probabilistic spectrum
a) Probabilistic spectrum for
for period of
return period - probabilistic spectrum
specified return
specified ER reference
SECURITY LEVEL
b) EMC maximum credible
b) EMC maximum credible (only required )
deterministic spectrum.
deterministic spectrum,
Less than or equal to the
less than or equal to the
probabilistic spectrum
probability spectrum
EPR for a return
EPR for a return
period of2,475 years.
period of10,000
years.
c) Reference probabilistic
c) Reference probabilistic
spectrum ER
spectrum ER
d) Envelope of items
d) Envelope of items
a, b and c
a, b and c

fifteen
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

a0r PRODISIS

A+ A B.

class 1 class 2 =FIEx class 1 class 2

SITE SPECTRA REGIONAL SPECTRA ACCELERATION

CONSTANT

detailed scan SEISMIC REGIONALIZATION

a) Probabilistic spectrum at specified

return period

b) EMC maximum credible deterministic spectrum, A B. C D

less than or equal to the EPR probabilistic spectrum < 50 50 < < 100 100 < < 200 > 200
for a return period of 10,000 years c) ER reference
probabilistic spectrum
d) Envelope of a, b and c

LAND CHARACTERIZATION
a) Probabilistic spectrum for specified
return period
b) EMC maximum credible deterministic spectrum,
less than or equal to the EPR probabilistic spectrum
for a return period of 2,475 years c) ER reference
probabilistic spectrum
d) Envelope of a, b and c
Hc(m) vc(m/s)

30 360

Type I Type II Type III

vs≥720 360 ≤ vs≤ 720 and Hs> 2 vs< 360

either either Y
Hs≤ 2 Hs> 30 yvs< 720 2 < Hs≤ 30

1 two

16
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Zone terrain type Ta(s) Tb(s) Tc(s) k r

Yo 0.1 0.6 2.0 1.5 1/2

A II 0.2 1.4 2.0 1.0 23

III 0.3 2.0 2.0 0.5 1
two
Yo 0.1 0.6 2.0 1.5 1/2

B. II 0.2 1.4 2.0 1.0 23

III 0.3 2.0 2.0 0.5 1

Yo 0.1 0.6 2.0 1.5 1/2

C II 0.2 1.4 2.0 1.0 23 Seismic zone Fsit FBeef

III 0.2 2.0 2.0 0.5 1 A 3.0 4.2

Yo 0.1 0.6 2.0 1.5 1/2 B. 3.0 4.2
D II 0.1 1.4 2.0 1.0 23 C 2.7 3.9
III 0.1 2.0 2.0 0.5 1 D 23 3.6

acceleration spectrum
Spectral parameters constant

FsitYFBeef. See tables 1.9 and 1.10

17
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.1 DESIGN SPECTRUM

3.1.1 INTRODUCTION
In this version of the Chapter on Earthquake Design of the CFE Civil Works Design Manual, three
levels of structural importance will be considered: conventional (b),important (A)and very important (
A+).In the structures of the GroupAthose that belong to or are related to the energy or industrial
sector are distinguished. In the structures of the GroupB.a division related to the size of the
construction is made. Depending on the structural importance, regional spectra are provided and
recommendations are given for the construction of site-specific spectra.

Regional design spectra are of great simplicity for practical application, since they can be built only
from seismic zones and terrain type. To this end, this document provides a conservative criterion in
which, in addition, continuous variations within the Mexican territory are taken into account to avoid
ambiguity near the border between zones. These regional spectra by terrain type cover most
conditions encountered in practice. They are built from the maximum acceleration on rock and with
factors and parameters to take into account the ground conditions. The spectra obtained correspond
to the5%structural damping.

Likewise, to consider amplifications due to soil conditions in site-specific design spectra, criteria are
provided in the following philosophy:

- The level of safety implicit in the design spectra will depend on the importance of
the structure, and will be specified by a combination of deterministic (for different
seismic sources) and probabilistic (for different return periods) spectra.

- For the Mexican territory, seismic hazard intensities will be provided; however, it
will need to be confirmed for structuresA+YA1 (defined later), that all tremor
generation systems in the locality are considered in the seismic intensities that
characterize the design spectra. This should be done with seismotectonic studies,
which include: a) the identification of faults based on documentary information and
site studies, and b) the characterization of faults by type of mechanism (typically
continental crust), frequency of tremor generation (seismicity) and maximum
magnitude. When only probabilistic spectra are required, it should be verified that
all sources are included in the PRODISIS program (PROgrass ofGAVEbreastSIS
mico), contained in section 3.1 of Comments. Otherwise, a deterministic spectrum
will have to be considered for each source not included.

- The type of exploration of the subsurface and the way of constructing the design spectra will
depend on the classification of the structure.

- Basic and detailed explorations of the subsoil will be carried out.

- Design spectra with site-specific effects will be used when the characteristics and
properties of the soil are explicit.

19
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

- Design spectra with site effects will be constructed from rock-uniform hazard
spectra and soil dynamic properties modeled as a layered medium. Site effects will
be taken into account explicitly with criteria that allow the dynamic amplifications of
the terrain to be rigorously considered.

- Design spectra with site effects should be response spectra envelopes, elastic and
inelastic, for all structural periods.

- The design spectra must be transparent, that is, elastic and not be modified by
factors such as overstrength, ductility or redundancy.

- The spectral ordinates should correspond to the damping -andindicated for the
structural system. The type of material, the presence of structural devices for
energy dissipation or seismic isolation and the effects of soil-structure interaction
must be considered.

- At long structural period, the displacement design spectra that are derived from
the acceleration spectra should tend to the maximum ground displacements.

- Design spectra will be provided for serviceability and collapse limit states for
Building-type structures.

3.1.2 CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS

The level of safety, the exploration of the subsoil and the construction of the design spectra will
depend on the classification of the structure under the following criteria:

1. Due to its importance and effects that could occur in the event of failure.

2. Due to its size and participation in the energy or industrial sector.

3.1.2.1 Classification of constructions according to their importance and effects that could
occur in case of failure
The destination of the constructions must be taken as a reference to determine their importance, based on the
relevance and magnitude of the damage that can be generated in case of failure, and with this, define the
protection or security that is provided against the action of earthquakes. (this criterion is recorded in table 1.1).

Thenon fundamental structures(secondary) of the energy or industrial sector, which do not

jeopardize the operation of the facilities, will be classified within the GroupB.unless, due to the
contractual design and/or construction conditions, they have been classified as GroupAeitherA+.

The structural importance may be defined or increased according to the contractual requirements that the
owner or dependency establishes, either for the amount of the investment, for the possible structural
damages and/or economic losses or human lives that could be generated in the event of failure, or by the
severity of the damage that could be caused to more important structures. if within

twenty
 RECOMMENDATIONS

a group of structures classified asA+eitherA1,There are secondary structures (perimeter walls,

guardhouses, etc.), their importance may be reduced as long as their damage does not put the main
structures at risk. For example, a group structureB.can be classified as a groupA+eitherA,or one of
the groupAcan be classified asA+eitherb.This reclassification must be recorded in the respective
documents and contracts so that it is considered in the seismic design. In no case is the classification
of a main structure with lower security levels than those defined in table 1.1 allowed.

Table 1.1 Classification of structures according to their destination.

CLUSTER DESCRIPTION

The structures of great importance, or of the GroupA+,are those in which an extreme degree
of security is required, since their failure would cause hundreds or thousands of victims, and/
A+ or serious economic, cultural, ecological or social losses and damage.

Examples of extremely important structures are large dams and nuclear power
plants.

Structures in which a high degree of security is required. Constructions whose

structural failure would cause the loss of a high number of lives or economic losses,
ecological or cultural, scientific or technological damage of intense or exceptionally
high magnitude, or that constitute a significant danger because they contain toxic
or flammable substances, as well as constructions whose operation essential after
an earthquake.
A
Example of them are thefundamental structures(main) of: Power generation,
transmission and distribution plants, industrial hydrocarbon processing, storage
and distribution facilities, transportation and telecommunications systems, storage,
conduction, distribution and water treatment systems, schools, research centers,
stadiums, hotels, emergency systems such as fire stations or hospitals, etc.

Structures in which a conventional degree of security is required. Constructions

whose structural failure would cause the loss of a small number of lives, moderate
economic losses or would endanger other constructions of this group and/or
damage to those of the GroupA+YAmoderate.
B.
Examples of these are industrial warehouses, commercial premises, common
structures for housing or offices, theaters, warehouses and urban or industrial
structures not included in the Groups.A+YA,as well as retaining walls, ordinary
warehouses and fences.

3.1.2.2 Classification of constructions by their size and relationship with the energy or industrial
sector
Group structuresB.they do not require detailed subsurface explorations. For its analysis, simplified
methods based on regional or constant acceleration spectra are sufficient. In this way, the structures
of the GroupB.are divided according to their size, that is, the height of the construction,H,and the
total built area,Ac,as indicated:

twenty-one
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

- ClusterB.Class1 (B1):Group StructuresB.with height greater thanH-13mor total built area

greater thanAc - 400mtwo.
- ClusterB.Class2 (B2):Group StructuresB.with height less than or equal toH-13mand total built
area less than or equal toAc - 400mtwo.Adjoining non-insulated structures, built as part of a
residential, industrial or commercial complex, must comply with these restrictions as a whole,
that is, between all of them they must not exceed400mtwototal built area.

Table 1.2 Structural Groups and Classes.

Cluster Classification of constructions

All structures of great importance in the energy or industrial

A+
sector

A1:belong to or relate to A2:Does not belong or relate

A with the energy or with the energy or
industrial sector industrial sector

B1:height greater than13meither B2:height less than or equal to13mY

B. total built area greater total built area less than or
than400mtwo equal to400mtwo

On the other hand, the structures of the GroupAare divided as follows:

- ClusterA,Class1 TO 1):Structures that belong to or are related to the energy or industrial

sector.

- ClusterA,Class2 (A2):Group StructuresAthat do not belong to or are related to the energy or

industrial sector.

This classification is summarized in table 1.2.

3.1.3 TYPES OF SEISMIC DESIGN SPECTRA

Seismic design spectra will be obtained following probabilistic and deterministic approaches,
depending on the importance of the structure. For this, the following response spectra are defined:

3.1.3.1 Probabilistic response spectrum

The probabilistic response spectrum is built with the influence of all the relevant seismic sources,
considering their seismicity (or frequency with which they produce tremors) and their intensity
(mainly given by attenuation laws as a function of magnitude and distance). Two types of probabilistic
response spectra are considered:

22
 RECOMMENDATIONS

- Reference response spectrum (RE). It is the spectrum for all the structures of the GroupB.
with which the minimum security level recommended in this document is set, and
provided by the PRODISIS program (see the concept of optimal spectrum in the
Comments section).

- Response Spectrum for Specified Period of Return (EPR). It is the spectrum for a return
period specified by an international or national standard or by the bidding conditions,
provided that it has a security level similar to or higher than the ER.

3.1.3.2 Deterministic response spectra

The deterministic response spectrum is associated with the action of a seismic source and should
only be built for structuresA+YA1.For its characterization, at least the size of the source and the
distance to the site of interest are required. For the calculation of deterministic response spectra,
attenuation laws will be used for crustal, subduction and intermediate depth earthquakes. Such
mitigation laws are provided in the Comments section.

Finite source models may be used; for this, the source parameters must be taken from previous
studies or determined in the field, and statistical analyzes must be carried out to take into account
the uncertainties through Monte Carlo simulations. Consider that some parameters depend on the
terrain, while others depend on the source and that some of these vary from tremor to tremor, so
values for future earthquakes will have to be assumed.

Despite the uncertainties in the source parameters, these deterministic spectra play an important role in
the philosophy outlined in this paper. It is about not leaving out both sources not considered in the
probabilistic approach, such as earthquakes that become important with very long return periods. For that
reason, the deterministic response spectrum should be constructed considering the following:

- Response spectrum for the Maximum Credible earthquake (EMC). It is the envelope of the
spectra for each of the most unfavorable seismic sources. If attenuation laws are chosen,
for each source, the spectrum is obtained with the maximum credible magnitude and the
minimum distance to the site. The attenuation law should be evaluated between the
percentilesfiftyY84,depending on project specifications. If the finite source model is used,
the average spectrum will be taken plus a percentile betweenfiftyY
84.The EMC may not be greater than the EPR probabilistic response spectrum for
2,475years, which corresponds totwo%probability of acceleration exceedance in an
observation period offiftyyears.

3.1.3.3 Review of active local faults

for all structuresA1 and A+,A seismotectonic study should be carried out to identify active
seismogenetic sources. It is about identifying all the active faults, and detecting those that are not
considered in the calculation of the seismic hazard that supports the values contained in the
PRODISIS program. In case of finding active faults not considered, their effects must be taken into
account by means of deterministic spectra. The ways to find these active faults are: a) use temporary
seismic monitoring to determine some seismological parameter, b)

23
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

documentary information and c) expert opinion. In the Comments section, a collection of maps is
provided in which the seismogenetic areas that intervene in the calculation of the seismic hazard are
indicated, as well as their seismicity parameters. Deterministic response spectra will be calculated for
each of the worst seismogenic faults or sources. The most unfavorable sources are those whose
response spectra are maximal, or enveloped, at least over some interval of structural periods.

3.1.3.4 Seismic danger contained in the PRODISIS application

This chapter includes the computer application called PRODISIS, which provides, for a site with
defined geographic coordinates, the information related to the probabilistic approach given by the
seismic hazard for the rock condition:

a) Maximum acceleration on rockar 0,corresponding to the reference level ER

b) Maximum acceleration on rockar 0,EPR,corresponding to a specified return period
c) Rock Reference Response Spectrum (ER)
d) Spectrum of response for specified return period in rock (EPR)
e) Spectrum of transparent design in rock
f) Regional transparent design spectrum
g) Modified design spectrum

Figure 1.1 Maximum acceleration in rock, corresponding to the reference level ER (ar 0).

In this application, the accelerations are incm/stwo. Figure 1.1 illustrates the distribution of maximum
reference accelerations in rock.

24
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.1.3.5 Seismic regionalization

The intensities of the seismic hazard vary in the Mexican territory continuously, both the reference values
and those associated with return periods. However, for the purposes of this Chapter, it is necessary to
have a seismic regionalization (figure 1.2). Here a regionalization is proposed in which four zones are
considered: two with low and two with high seismicity. To determine the seismic zone
a simple criterion is given based on the value of the maximum acceleration in rock,ar 0,for the level
given in the RE, obtained with the PRODISIS program. This criterion is summarized in Table 1.3.

Figure 1.2 Seismic regionalization of the Mexican Republic.

Table 1.3 Seismic regionalization.

maximum acceleration on rock,ar 0(cm/stwo),

Zone seismic intensity
corresponding to the reference level ER

ar0≥ 200 D Very high

100 ≤ tor0< 200 C high

50 ≤ tor0< 100 B. moderate

ar0< 50 A Short

25
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.1.4 SHOCKS OF DESIGN AND STRUCTURAL IMPORTANCE

The design spectrum will be built based on the structural classification, that is, the importance, size
and relationship with the energy or industrial sector. Table 1.4 shows the response spectra for rock
considering each structural group, as well as the structural importance factors by which they must be
multiplied after considering site effects (as explained later).

These scaled response spectra serve as the basis for the construction of the design spectrum. Note
that for structuresA1YA+the design spectrum depends on all the ordinates of the response spectrum,
while for structuresB1, B2YA2the design spectrum depends
only from maximum acceleration on rockar 0(corresponding to the ER). In all cases, the spectrum of
reference probabilistic response ER is the lower bound.

Table 1.4 Response spectra for each structural group.

Factor of
structures response spectrum importance
structuralFIE

B2 Constant acceleration spectrum (only requiredar 0) 1.0

B1 ER reference probabilistic spectrum (onlyar 0) 1.0

A2 ER reference probabilistic spectrum (onlyar 0) 1.5

Any of the following spectra, as indicated in the project
specifications:
a) Probabilistic spectrum for specified return period ar
1.0
0,EPR

b) EMC maximum credible deterministic spectrum, less than or

A1
equal to the EPR probabilistic spectrum for a return period of 1.0
2,475years

c) Reference probabilistic spectrum ER 1.5

d) Envelope of items a, b and c 1.0

Any of the following spectra, as indicated in the project
specifications:
a) Probabilistic spectrum at specified return period ar
1.0
0,EPR

b) EMC maximum credible deterministic spectrum, less than or

A+
equal to the EPR probabilistic spectrum for a return period of 1.0
10,000years

c) Reference probabilistic spectrum ER 1.75

d)Envelope of items a, b and c 1.0

26
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.1.5 CHARACTERIZATION OF THE FOUNDATION GROUND

The movement at the surface of a soil deposit is very different from that which would occur in the
bedrock in the absence of the deposit, due to the dynamic amplification suffered by seismic waves
propagating through deformable media. Topographical and geological irregularities also produce
amplifications and attenuations in the movement of the ground. However, for practical purposes,
usually only the amplifications produced in soil deposits with horizontal stratification of infinite lateral
extension in the face of vertical incidence of shear waves or S are taken into account.

On the other hand, the characterization of the land requires soil exploration that sometimes must be
carried out over several tens of meters deep, while in others, it may be more economical to design a
more robust structure based on a design spectrum. conservative than to carry out an expensive
exploration of the subsurface. This depends mainly on the size and importance of the construction.
Table 1.5 summarizes the requirements for the exploration and characterization of the foundation
terrain based on structural importance.

Table 1.5 Exploration and characterization of the terrain based on the structure.

Characterization
structures Dynamic Terrain Scan Level
of the land

Stratified medium and

Detailed exploration: Dynamic properties of the
A+ topography
stratigraphic profile and topographical considerations
(item 3.1.5.1)

Detailed exploration: Dynamic properties of the stratified medium

A1
stratigraphic profile (item 3.1.5.1)

Basic exploration: Determination of period, shear terrain types

A2YB1 wave velocity and thickness of the deposit idealized I, II and III
as a homogeneous mantle (item 3.1.5.2)

overall floor
B2 not required
(item 3.1.5.3)

3.1.5.1 structuresA+YA1
for structuresA+YA1,Detailed explorations will be carried out for the dynamic characterization of the
foundation soil. The deposit will be idealized as a horizontally stratified medium of infinite lateral
extent.

The product of this exploration will be a quantitative description of the dynamic properties of the
foundation soil as a function of exploration depth. The properties of interest are the thickness, the
propagation speed of shear waves, the mass density or volumetric weight and the damping of the
material of each stratum. In order to have a detailed description, it is recommended that the interval
of measurements of the dynamic properties be as short as possible, preferably less than2m

The depth of exploration will be until a rocky stratum or solid ground is found, with shear wave
propagation speeds greater than720m/sand thickness greater than5m.must be guaranteed

27
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

that the exploration covers the necessary depth to correctly measure the dominant period of the site.
For this, the first30mwill be covered by direct shear wave velocity tests. With combined direct and
indirect techniques, the deep stratigraphy will be inferred in order to reproduce the dominant period
of the terrain determined experimentally with environmental vibration tests. Depending on the
importance of the structure and the depth of the rock, direct exploration will extend beyond the30mIf
the rock is not reached with the direct exploration, two spectra will be obtained, one considering the
rock at the depth reached by the direct exploration, and the other considering the rock at the depth
indicated by the indirect tests. The design spectrum must cover both response spectra. The velocity
of the rock, when set at the depth reached by direct exploration, should be720m/s,and when set to
the depth that indirect evidence reaches it should be1,000 m/s.

The recommended methods for determining shear wave propagation velocities are based on direct
field tests such as “Cross-Hole”, “Down-Hole”, suspended probe, seismic cone and seismic
dilatometer, described in the Geotechnics Chapter. B.2.3 of the MDOC, while dynamic laboratory tests
are recommended for the determination of volumetric weights and dampings (Geotechnics Chapter
B.2.2 of the MDOC).

Indirect tests, such as wave scattering tests (MASW, SPAC) can be used to make estimates of dynamic
parameters beyond the30mand define the scope of the exploration. With dynamic property profiles,
rigorous calculations will be performed to obtain quantitative descriptions of motion amplifications
as functions of frequency called transfer functions.

The number of boreholes will depend on the size of the construction in plan and the lateral variations of
the soil properties detected in the geotechnical exploration, in addition to what is indicated in Chapter
B.8.1 of the MDOC.

For these structures, definitive values will not be taken that come only from the recommended tests
for the structures.A2YB1.These values may be taken as preliminary values to define the scope of
the exploration (number and depth of drilling).

For Group structuresA+The effects due to topographical and geological irregularities in two and three
dimensions should be considered using finite element methods, finite differences, IBEM (Integral
Boundary Element Method), among others.

3.1.5.2 structuresA2YB1
for structuresA2YB1The dynamic parameters of the idealized soil deposit as an equivalent homogeneous
mantle will be determined, that is, the dominant period, the speed of propagation of shear waves and the
thickness. The relationship between these parameters is as follows:

4Hs
T-s (1.1)
vs
where
Hs is the total thickness of the equivalent ground layer
vs is the propagation speed of shear waves in the equivalent ground layer

28
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Ts is the dominant period of the equivalent ground stratum

Figure 1.3 Seismic microzonation chart.

The terrain classification is done by locating the point formed by the parametersHsYvsin the seismic
microzonation chart presented in figure 1.3. According to this letter, the foundation ground is
classified as:

TYPEYo Firm or rocky terrain in which there are no dynamic amplifications: Soil deposit withvs-
720m/seitherHs- 2m

TYPEII Terrain formed by soils in which intermediate dynamic amplifications occur: Soil deposit
withvc-vs- 720m/sYHs- 2m,eitherHs-HcYvs- 720m/s

TYPEIII Terrain formed by soils in which large dynamic amplifications occur: Soil deposit withvs-vc
m/sY2-Hs-Hcm

The values ofHcYvc, which are characteristic thicknesses and speeds, are shown in table 1.6.

Table 1.6 Values ofHcYvc

Hc(m) vc(m/s)

30 360

Although two of the parameters of the soil deposit are sufficient for the classification of the soil,
preferably all three should be obtained from independent tests. These tests, indicated in table 1.7,
must be performed in accordance with the provisions of Chapter B.2.3 of the MDOC.

Table 1.7 Recommended tests to obtain soil deposit parameters.

29
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Parameter Proof

- Depth level at which there is a rocky basement or firm ground detected in the
geotechnical studies for the design of the foundation.
Hyes - Standard Penetration Test
- Vertical Electrical Sounding
- Transient Electromagnetic Sounding Wave
- Dispersion Test (MASW, SPAC)

Tyes - Environmental vibration test

- Seismic site records
- Wave scattering test (MASW, SPAC) Seismic
- refraction survey
- cross hole
vyes - down-hole
- suspended probe
- seismic cone
- seismic dilatometer

Obtaining these three parameters independently, and Eq 1.1, there are three possible combinations
that must be checked, as indicated in Table 1.8.

Table 1.8 Pairs of values for the classification of the terrain.

Combination of Determination Determination of

Case
data of the thickness speed

1 Hyesand Vyes Hyes vyes

two Tyesand Vyes Hyes-vyesTyes/ 4 vyes

3 Hyesand Tyes Hyes vyes- 4Hyes/Tyes

As indicated, each combination of values ofHsYvsin Table 1.8 is represented as a point on the
microzonation chart. The classification of the land will be done considering the most unfavorable
condition, that is:

- The soil will be classified as TypeIIIif at least one of the points falls in the terrain zoneIII
- The soil will be classified as TypeIIif at least one of the points falls in the terrain zoneII,but none
falls in the ground areaIII
- The soil will be classified as TypeYoif all points fall in the terrain zoneYo

Finally, the tests recommended to obtain the equivalent velocity of the soil deposit actually provide
stratigraphic profiles of velocity and thickness, except for the Down Hole test that can be run to
obtain the shear wave propagation velocity directly (Chapter B .2.3 of the MDOC). For the rest of the
tests, when determining the equivalent velocity of the soil deposit, the total thickness of the deposit
must be considered to be:

N
Hs--hYo (1.2)
i-1

30
 RECOMMENDATIONS

and use the most unfavorable criterion of the following:

a) Average speed
N
-vYohYo
vs -i-1 (1.3)
Hs

b) Average slowness
Hs
vs - Nh
(1.4)
- Yo
i-1vYo

c) Approximation of the fundamental mode. Eqs. 1.5 – 1.7, for the calculation of the dominant
period of the terrain:

-Mh Yo--M --
Ts-
4
--- -----YohYowYotwo -
-wYowi-1-wi 1- two
-- (1.5)
g -i-1GYo-- i-1
where
-Yo is the volumetric weight ofYo-th stratum
GYo is the modulus of stiffness in shear ofYo-th stratum, equal to -Yo-vtwo Yo/g

g is the acceleration due to gravity

vYo is the shear wave propagation velocity of them–th layer is the
hYo thickness of them–th stratum is the number of strata
M
with
w0- 0 in bedrock
(1.6)
wM-1 in the superficial layer
Y
m hYo
- two
-i-1-Yov Yo
wm in the intermediate layers (1.7)
M hYo
- two
i-1-YovYo

With the values ofTsand Hs,the value ofvsis determined with Eq. 1.1.

From the criteria set forth in subsections a, b and c, the speed of shear waves will be takenvsleading to the
most unfavorable condition, ranging from terrain TypeIIIto ground TypeYO.

3.1.5.3 structuresB2
for structuresB2it is not required to specify the type of terrain. The spectrum obtained for these
structures is the most conservative recommended for the rootstock site.

31
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.1.6 TRANSPARENT SEISMIC DESIGN SPECTRUM

The ordinates of the transparent design spectrum (figure 1.4), as a function of the structural period
and the damping factor, take the parametric form of Eq. 1.8:

Figure 1.4 Seismic design spectrum.

- T
-a 0 - [c -Tand, -and- a0 ]and yes you -T
and a

Ta
-
-
- c-Tand, -and yes youa-Tand-Tb
-
-
-
Sa Tand,- - - (1.8)
- c - T , - and-T- --
r
if T b- T - and
T c
- and -T--
b
and-
-
-
- -Tb-
r
-Tc-
two
-c -Tand, -and -T--
-- pc Tand---T-- yes you - Tc
and

-- c- and-

where
a0 is the maximum ground acceleration (cm/stwo) is
c the maximum spectral acceleration (cm/stwo)
Ta is the lower limit of the plateau of the design spectrum (yes) is
Tb the upper limit of the plateau of the design spectrum (yes)
Tc is the starting period of the descending branch in which the spectral shifts tend correctly
to the ground shift (yes) is the structural period in the analysis direction (yes)
Tand
-Tand,-and is the damping factor. For structural damping -and- 5%,the value of
-Tand,0.05 -1.This factor is defined in section 3.2.3
r is the parameter that controls the decay of the spectral ordinates forTb≤Tand<Tc

32
 RECOMMENDATIONS

k is the parameter that controls the decay of the spectral ordinates forTand≥Tc
pcTand is a factor used to define the variation of the spectrum in the descending branch
calculated as follows

two
-T-
pcTand -k - (1- k)-- -T--c (1.9)
and-

3.1.6.1 Spectral parameters for structuresA+YA1 (Site Specific Spectra)

The design spectrum parameters of Eq. 1.8, for structuresA+YA1,will be obtained with the criteria of
theSite Specific Spectra. A procedure for performing the calculations to obtain these parameters is
described below:

1. The starting point is the spectrum specified in section 3.1.4 for rocky terrain, expressed incm/s
two. If it is an envelope spectrum, it will be necessary to consider the individual spectra that, at

least, in some interval of periods, coincide with the rock envelope spectrum. The ground
envelope, or site-specific, spectrum will be taken after considering site effects. In particular, if
the ER spectrum was specified, it will be multiplied by the structural importance factor after
considering site effects.
2. The movement of the ground in rock, for each one of the spectra of the previous section, will be
characterized by means of a family of, at least, five synthetic accelerograms that comply with
the energy content of the response spectrum.
3. For each design tremor, the movement on the ground surface will be obtained, taking as
excitation the movement of the rocky ground. To do this, we will consider a soil deposit with
horizontal stratification of infinite lateral extension, supported by a rocky basement, excited
by the vertical incidence of shear waves. The exploration of the land, to characterize the
stratified environment, will be done in accordance with section 3.1.5.1.
4. The solution will be made in time or frequency, and must be obtained with rigorous methods,
either with finite or semi-infinite element techniques, rheological models of concentrated
masses connected to each other by springs and dampers, or with matrix-based methods. in
the theory of wave propagation. The period of the ground must be determined explicitly and
rigorously. In the numerical solution, the uncertainties in the dynamic parameters of the soil
model must be considered. The effects of non-linearity of materials in soils with a tendency to
show non-linear behavior during intense tremors may be considered. This can be done with
step-by-step integrations over time,

5. To comply with point 3, the synthetic accelerogram will be calculated on the ground surface for
each one of the synthetic accelerograms of each family corresponding to each design tremor.
As a result, a family of synthetic accelerograms will be obtained on the surface of the soil
deposit for each design tremor.
6. For each synthetic accelerogram at the ground surface, elastic and inelastic response spectra
will be calculated, using damping and ductility for systems

33
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

structures contained in this Chapter. This will be done with each of the synthetic
accelerograms, in order to obtain a family of elastic response spectra and a family of inelastic
response spectra for each of the design tremors.
7. The average of the response spectra of each family of accelerograms will be taken to obtain an
elastic response spectrum and an inelastic response spectrum for each design tremor.

8. The elastic envelope spectrum and the inelastic envelope spectrum will be taken from the averages
of the elastic and inelastic spectra of subsection 7. If in particular, in subsection 1 the ER spectrum
in rock was specified, then the average spectrum of the corresponding subsection 7 will be
multiplied by the structural importance factor (1.5for structuresA1either1.75for Group structures
A+)before taking the envelope spectrum.

9. The parameters of the design spectrum will be obtained in such a way that an envelope design
spectrum is obtained for all structural periods considering the elastic and inelastic conditions.
The functional form of the design spectrum is specified by Eq. 1.8 of section 3.1.6.
It is recommended to calculate inelastic response spectra for various levels of ductility, in
order to adjust the parameters of the design spectrum for the range of ductility that contains
the projected structure(s).

10. In case of interest in several damping levels, or values different from the5%,apply subsections
6 to 9 for each of them. Approximate formulas should not be used for this purpose, such as
that provided by the damping factor -Tand,-anddefined in section 3.2.3. Therefore, for the
calculation of the seismic forces, no damping factor should be considered, or else, consider
that -Tand,-and-1.

One or more steps may be substituted provided that a fully justified procedure is followed.

3.1.6.2 Spectral parameters for structuresA2YB1 (Regional Spectra)

The design spectrum parameters of Eq. 1.8, for structuresA2YB1,will be obtained with
criteria of theRegional Spectra. For Terrain TypeYothe maximum ground acceleration (a0- ar 0)Y

the maximum spectral acceleration (c),for5%of structural damping, are obtained with the PRODISIS
program. For land TypeIIYIIIthese parameters are determined as:

r
a0-Fsita0 (1.10)

c-FBeefa0 (1.11)
where:
Fsit is the site factor is the
FBeef response factor

The factsFsitYFBeef, which depend on the seismic zone, on the maximum acceleration in rockar 0
(expressed incm/stwo) and soil type, are calculated with the equations shown in tables 1.9 and 1.10.

3. 4
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Table 1.9 Site FactorFsitfor different areas and types of terrain.

Terrain TypeYo Terrain TypeII Terrain TypeIII

ZoneA Fsit-1.0 Fsit- 2.6 Fsit- 3.0

-ar0- fifty - -ar -5 -0 -

ZoneB. Fsit-1.0 Fyes
Item- 2.6 - 0.2- - Fsit- 3.0 - 0.3 -0
- fifty - - fifty -
- - - -

-ar-100 - -ar-100 -
ZoneC Fsit-1.0 Fsit- 2.4 - 0.3 - 0 - Fsit - 2.7-0.4 --
0 -
- 100 -- 100 --
- -

-ar-0 200 - -ar-0 200 -

ZoneD Fsit-1.0 Fsit- 2.1- 0.5 - - Fsit -2.3- 0.6 - - -
- 290 -- 290 --
- -

Table 1.10 Response factorFBeeffor different areas and types of terrain.

Terrain TypeYo Terrain TypeII Terrain TypeIII

ZoneA PRODISIS* FBeef- 3.8 FBeef- 4.2

--a
r 0-fifty - -ar0-fifty -
ZoneB. PRODISIS* FBeef- 3.8- 0.2 - - FBeef- 4.2 - 0.3 - -
- - fifty -
-fifty - - -

-ar0- 100 - -ar0-100 -

ZoneC PRODISIS* FBeef -3.6 - 0.2 - -
- FBeef- 3.9 - 0.3 - -
100 - - 100 -
- - - -

-ar- 0200 - -ar- 200 -

ZoneD PRODISIS* FBeef -3.4 -0.5 -
- FBeef- 3.6 - 0.6 - 0 -
- 290 - - 290 --
- - -

* The value ofFbeefdepends on the geographical coordinates of the site and is obtained with the program
PRODISIS

The values ofar 0,ER, a0Ycthey must comply with the restrictions specified in table 1.11.

Table 1.11 Restriction of the values ofar 0, a0Yc (incm/stwo).

LandYo LandII LandIII

ar0 32 - tor0- 490 80 - to0- 690 94 - to0- 752

c 80-c-1,225 320 - c - 2,000 390 - c - 2,256

The rest of the parameters, dependent on the type of terrain, necessary to define the design
spectrum are shown in table 1.12.

35
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 1.12 Values of the characteristic periods and exponents that control the
descending branches of the design spectra.

Zone terrain type Ta(s) Tb(s) Tc(s) k r

Yo 0.1 0.6 2.0 1.5 1/2

A II 0.2 1.4 2.0 1.0 23

III 0.3 2.0 2.0 0.5 1

Yo 0.1 0.6 2.0 1.5 1/2

B. II 0.2 1.4 2.0 1.0 23

III 0.3 2.0 2.0 0.5 1

Yo 0.1 0.6 2.0 1.5 1/2

C II 0.2 1.4 2.0 1.0 23

III 0.2 2.0 2.0 0.5 1

Yo 0.1 0.6 2.0 1.5 1/2

D II 0.1 1.4 2.0 1.0 23

III 0.1 2.0 2.0 0.5 1

The regional spectra are conservative enough to protect most ground conditions for each seismic
zone. However, it will be valid to use site-specific spectra to obtain rational reductions of the design
spectrum, as long as they are constructed as indicated in section 3.1.6.1. For this, a stratigraphic
profile must be used that is consistent with all the information obtained in the exploration of the
terrain, and that is sufficiently conservative when considering the depth and velocity of the basal
rock. It is recommended to fix the depth of the rock and the velocity of the deep strata in such a way
that the dominant period obtained from the stratigraphic profile coincides with the period obtained
with environmental vibration tests. The speed of the rock must be at least1,000m/s,unless a velocity
not less than720m/s

3.1.6.3 Spectral parameters for structuresB2 (Constant Acceleration Spectrum)

for structuresB2,can be used aConstant Acceleration Spectrumfor every structural period, of the form

Sa Tand,- - c - Tand,-and (1.12)

where,
r
c-FsitFBeefa0 (1.13)

The factsFsitYFBeefthey are recorded in table 1.13. The spectral accelerations given by Eq. 1.12
correspond to5%of damping and are given incm/stwo.

36
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Table 1.13 Factors for obtaining the Spectrum of Constant Acceleration.

Seismic zone Fsit FBeef

A 3.0 4.2
B. 3.0 4.2
C 2.7 3.9
D 23 3.6

The constant acceleration spectra are the most conservative spectra in this document. If it is deemed
convenient to have more rational spectra available, regional spectra or site-specific spectra may be
used, provided that they are constructed as indicated in subsections 3.1.6.1 and 3.1.6.2, respectively.
For this, the exploration of the terrain must be done at least as indicated for structuresA2YB1,and if
necessary, build a stratigraphic model that is consistent with all the information obtained in the field
exploration, following the recommendations made for the structuresA2YB1.

3.1.6.4 Overview of the type of design spectra that is recommended for each structural
classification
Design Spectra”Site Specific” (3.6.1.1), “Regional” (3.6.1.2) and “Constant acceleration” (3.6.1.3) are
given in Welsh (cm/stwo). However, it is convenient to represent them as a fraction of gravity for the
calculation of seismic forces, that is,

Sa T and
,-
to Tand,- - (1.14)
g
where
to Tand,- is the normalized spectral ordinate is the
g acceleration due to gravity (981cm/stwo)

Table 1.14 Specifications for the determination of design spectra.

Revision of Exploration
spectrum of Characterization Spectra of
structures faults dynamic
answer in rock of the land design
active of the land

EPR
EMC Medium specifics of
A+ Yes detailed
ER stratified place
Envelope a,b and c

EPR
EMC Medium specifics of
A1 Yes detailed
ER stratified place

Envelope a, b and c
A2, B1 ER Nope basic GuyI, IIYIII Regional

B2 ER Nope not required overall floor constant withTand

37
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 1.14 provides a review of the particularities that must be applied to determine the design
spectra based on the structural classification. It will be valid to use Regional Spectra for structuresB2,
and Site Specific Spectra for structuresB2, B1YA2,with the intention of using more rational design
spectral values, provided that they are built as indicated in subsections 3.1.6.1 and 3.1.6.2,
respectively.

3.1.7 ELASTIC DISPLACEMENT SPECTRUMSD Tand

In some applications it will be necessary to know the pseudo-displacement as a function of the

structural period or elastic displacement spectrumSd.This will be determined by the following
equation:

Ttwo
and
SD Tand - Sa Tand, - (1.15)
4- two

WhenTandtends to infinity, the spectral displacement tends to the maximum terrain displacement,
given by:

- -Tb -
1/2
cTctwo
D max-k - -T,- and (1.16)
two- - and
4- -Tc-

Yesk ≥ 1.0,the maximum spectral displacement is the maximum terrain displacement. If not, this
occurs whenTand=Tc, and will be given by:

cTctwo-Tb-
1/ 2

SD - max
- --T-- -T,-and and (1.17)
4-two- c-

The spectral shifts are given incm.

3.1.8 LIMIT STATES

All the spectra mentioned in this section correspond to the collapse prevention limit state. To obtain
the spectra for the serviceability limit state, the elastic spectral ordinates will be affected by reduction
factors or spectra will be obtained for a return period specified by an international or national
standard or by competent authorities. for the structures
Type Group BuildingsB.The service factor to be used will beFBe- 5.5,for every structural period.

38
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.2

CHARACTERIZATION OF THE
STRUCTURAL RESPONSE

39
 RECOMMENDATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 3.2 CHARACTERIZATION OF THE STRUCTURAL RESPONSE

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... ...42

FLOWCHART............................................... ................................................Four. Five

3.2.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................. ........................................................... .....47

3.2.2 CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS ACCORDING TO THEIR STRUCTURING ...........47

3.2.3 DAMPING FACTOR, -Tand,-and........................................................... .........48

3.2.4 DUCTILITY REDUCTION FACTOR,Q'Tand,Q ................................................ .49

3.2.5 REDUCTION FACTOR FOR OVERSTRENGTH,RTand,Reither..........................fifty

3.2.6 MODIFICATION OF THE STRUCTURAL RESPONSE DUE TO EFFECTS OF SOIL-STRUCTURE

INTERACTION .................................. ..............................fifty
3.2.6.1 Characterization of the soil-structure system ................................................ .................51
3.2.6.2 Approximate determination of the effective period and damping of
soil-structure systems................................................... ............................................54
3.2.6.3 Determination of the effective seismic behavior factor ...................................................57

41
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

NOMENCLATURE
Ch Translational damper of the soil Tr Period of the assumed infinitely rigid
Cm Equivalent damper of the soil structure whose base can only rotate
Cn Interstory damping of the structure Te0 Fundamental period of the assumed
in then–th level Soil rotation damper structure with a rigid base
~
Cr Foundation burying depth Te0 Effective period of the coupled soil-
D structure system
v0 vspeed of propagation of half-space
hm thickness ofm–th soil layer Structure waves≥720m/s
H height vm Shear wave propagation speed in them–th
He0 Fundamental effective height of the assumed soil stratum Propagation speed of shear
structure with rigid base vs waves in the equivalent stratum
Hs Total thickness of the equivalent
ground layer xc Horizontal displacement of the foundation
Jc Polar moment of inertia of the foundation xn Horizontal displacement in the mezzanine of
Jand Polar moment of inertia of the structure the structure in then-th level Effective weight
k Parameter that controls the fall of the We0 of the structure Density in them–th soil
spectral ordinate forTand≥Tc -m stratum normalized frequency
Kh Lateral stiffness of foundation -m
Km Equivalent spring of soil -c Angular displacement of foundation
Kn Floor stiffness of the structure in then– th -0 Poisson's ratio of rock
level -s Poisson's ratio of the equivalent ground
Kr Rotational stiffness of the foundation layer
K0m Static stiffness -0 Volumetric weight of the rock
Mc Foundation mass -s Volumetric weight of the equivalent ground
Mn Mezzanine mass of the structure in then– layer
th level - Excitation frequency Fundamental
Me0 Effective mass of the structure Total mass -e0 frequency of the structure Fundamental
MT of the structure Seismic behavior factor ~ frequency of the effective structure
-e0
Q Effective seismic behavior factor Radius of
~
Q the base of the structure -0 Rock damping Structural damping
r -and Damping associated with the
Reither Index overstrength -e0 fundamental mode of the structure Soil
Ta Lower limit of the plateau of the spectrum damping in the translational mode of the
Tb Upper limit of the plateau of the spectrum -h foundation
Tc Beginning period of the descending branch in
which the spectral displacements tend correctly -m damping in them–th soil layer
to the displacement of the terrain Structural
Tand period -s Damping of the equivalent ground layer
Te0 Fundamental structural period of the coupled
soil-structure system with rigid base Natural -r Soil damping in foundation rotation
Th period of the structure assumed to be mode
~
infinitely rigid and whose base can only be -e0 Effective damping of the fundamental
moved mode of the structure Effective
~
Ts Dominant period of the equivalent terrain -s damping of the equivalent soil layer

42
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Functions
c m-m Normalized frequency dependent pbTand Factor used to define the variation of the
damping coefficient Normalized spectrum in the descending branch
km-m frequency dependent stiffness coefficient Q-Tand,Q Ductility reduction factor
RTand,Reither Reduction factor due to overstrength
~
Km- Dynamic stiffness of a soil foundation -Tand,-and Damping factor
system for the vibration modem
- -

43
 RECOMMENDATIONS

DIAG
CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS ACCORDING TO THEIR STRUCTURING

TYPE 1 Buildings

TYPE 2 industrial structures

TYPE 3 Inverted pendulums and appendages

TYPE 4 retaining walls

TYPE 5 Chimneys, silos and the like

TYPE 6 Tanks, reservoirs and the like

TYPE 7 bridges

TYPE 8 Pipelines

TYPE 9 dams

TYPE 10 Seismic isolation systems and energy dissipation

TYPE 11 telecommunication towers

TYPE 12 Tunnels and skylights

TYPE 13 wind turbines

FACTORS THAT MODIFY THE TRANSPARENT SPECTRUM

FACTOR OF REDUCTION FACTOR BY REDUCTION FACTOR BY

DAMPING DUCTILITY OVERSTRENGTH

1
Four. Five
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION

interaction effects will be

When: taken into account.
soil-structure

Effects of inertial interaction

period lengthening Damping Modification Reduced ductility

Effective Period: Effective Damping: Effective Ductility:

Characterization of the Soil-Structure system

Multi-degree-of-freedom structures and reservoirs

of stratified soil

Complete floor-structure system:

Soil-structure system structure withNdegrees of
equivalent: freedom in horizontal translation
supported on a foundation
superficial:

If the structure responds

essentially as a
oscillator of one degree of
freedom in its condition of
rigid base and the deposit of
stratified soil
behaves fundamentally as a
homogeneous mantle:

46
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.2.1 INTRODUCTION
The nature of the seismic phenomenon implies that future earthquakes can be described only in
probabilistic terms. Indeed, it is impossible to limit, within practical limits, the maximum seismic
intensity that can occur at a site. In choosing the design tremor, the probability that its intensity will
be exceeded at least once during the assumed useful life of the structure must be explicitly
considered. Consequently, if its strength is assumed to be deterministic and equal to the design
strength, the structure has a probability of failure that is equal to the probability that the design
strength is exceeded.

Even the most conservative recommendation would not provide absolute protection against the most
intense shaking that could occur. There also does not appear to be an upper limit within a practical
range. Therefore, seismic design standards are proposed to reduce the probability of failure to levels
acceptable to society. This means that some structures have to be protected against collapse to a
greater degree than others, according to their importance.

Given this scenario, the requirements adopted for the seismic design of a structure must be a
function of both the probable characteristics of the earthquakes that may occur on the site, and the
degree of safety recommended for the structure, which is a growing function of the loss that its
failure would imply, but a decreasing function of the speed of variation of its cost with respect to its
resistance.

On the other hand, the design stresses also depend on the structural system, the elements and materials
of the structure, and the design and construction details, which determine the form of failure. It is
convenient to consider these structural aspects through three concepts:

a) The damping provided by the type of structure.

b) The capacity to dissipate energy by inelastic behavior through the development of deformations
in the non-linear intervals of the load-deformation curves.
c) The structural characteristics to withstand seismic loads.

This way of taking into account the structural aspects leads to characterize the structures in terms of
structural damping, ductility and, of course, structuring. These concepts must be taken into account
explicitly in the spectra for the rational seismic design of buildings.

3.2.2 CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS ACCORDING TO THEIR STRUCTURING

Considering the structural characteristics that influence the seismic response, the constructions are
classified, according to their structure, as indicated in table 2.1.

47
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 2.1 Classification of constructions according to their structure.

Buildings. Common structures in which lateral forces are resisted at each level by continuous braced or non-
TYPE 1
braced frames, by diaphragms or walls, or by a combination of these.

industrial structures. They are all those structural systems that are part of industrial plants and that require that
TYPE 2 the seismic design criteria consider particular effects and somewhat different from those specified for common
building structures, such as the consideration of flexible diagram.

Inverted pendulums and appendages. structures in which thefifty %or more of its mass is at the upper end and
have a single resistant element in the direction of analysis or a single row of columns perpendicular to it.
TYPE 3
Appendices or elements whose structure differs radically from that of the rest of the structure, such as tanks,
parapets, parapets, advertisements, ornaments, windows, walls and cladding, among others.

Retaining walls. Structures that support great pressures due to fillings that increase with the presence of water.
TYPE 4

Chimneys, silos and the like. Structures in which their mass and stiffness are continuously distributed
TYPE 5
throughout their height and where bending deformations dominate.

Tanks, reservoirs and the like. Structures intended for the storage of liquids that cause significant hydrodynamic
TYPE 6
forces on the container.

bridges. Structures designed to cover gaps of up to100m,constructed of normal weight concrete, structural or
TYPE 7
mixed steel, whose substructure is formed by piers and abutments or trestles.

Pipelines. Structures intended for the transport of liquid or gaseous materials, which cover long distances. Mass
TYPE 8
and stiffness are evenly distributed throughout these structures.

Dams. They are structures formed by large masses of material, whose stability is fundamentally provided by its
TYPE 9 own weight. They are intended to contain a large amount of water, which generates high hydrodynamic
pressures.

Seismic isolation systems and energy dissipation. They are structural elements that are part of the system that
supports the gravitational load of any type of structure. Its function is to control the structural seismic response,
TYPE 10
either by lengthening the period of the structure (base insulators), by increasing the damping of the structural
assembly (energy dissipators) or by both effects.

Telecommunication towers. Slender support structures for telecommunications equipment. These systems are
TYPE 11 generally made up of lattice structures and can be self-supporting or have bracing systems.

Tunnels and luminaries. They are underground structures built to establish communication through a hill,
TYPE 12
under a river or other similar obstacle.

Wind turbines. Structures used to support equipment placed at the free end, whose dynamic effect due to the
different states of operation produces important actions. These are structures of considerable height, slender
TYPE 13
and with very low damping, so it is possible that the contribution of the higher modes of vibration in translation
and/or rotation to the response of the structure is important.

3.2.3 DAMPING FACTOR,-Tand,-and

The damping factor, -Tand,-and,allows to modify the spectral ordinates, given by Eq. 1.8 (item 3.1.6), to
take into account other damping levels provided by the type of structure, by the materials, the use of
energy dissipating devices, or by the effects of soil-structure interaction. This factor is given by the
following equation:

48
 RECOMMENDATIONS

- - 0.05-0.45
- -- - --
- - and- YesTand-Tc
-
-Tand,-and -- (2.1)
- -T -
0.45- c-
- -
--0.05- -Tea-
--- -- YesTand-Tc
-- -and -
where
Tc is the period of the beginning of the descending branch in which the spectral displacements
tend correctly to the displacement of the ground (item 3.1.6)
Tand is the structural period in the analysis direction
-and is the structural damping. When insulation and energy dissipation systems are used, this
value is the sum of the structure's inherent damping plus that provided by the systems.

In the case of soil-structure interaction, it should be taken into account that the structural period
specified in eq. 2.1, corresponds to the structural period modified by interaction, that is, the
~
effective structural periodTand-Te0.For structural damping -and- 5% ,you have to
-Tand,0.05 -1,for any structural periodTand.

3.2.4 DUCTILITY REDUCTION FACTOR,Q'Tand,Q

For design purposes, in the collapse prevention limit state, the inelastic behavior of the structure will
be taken into account, albeit approximately. To do this, the spectral ordinates will be divided by the
ductility reduction factorQ'Tand,Qin order to obtain the reduced seismic forces. For any type of
structure, the reduction factor will be calculated as:

-
- -T- and,and
Tand
-1- ( Q -1) Yes Tand-Tb
k Tb
-
Q'Tand, Q - - (2.2)
-
- -T,- and and pb Tand
-1- (Q-1) YesTand-Tb
- k
where
Q is the seismic behavior factor specified for each type of structure is the upper
Tb limit of the plateau of the design spectrum (item 3.1.6)
k is a parameter that controls the decay of the spectrum (section 3.1.6)
pbTand is a factor used to define the variation of the spectrum in the descending branch,
calculated as follows:

two
-T b -
pbTand -k-(1-k) -- -- (23)
-T and-

49
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

In the event that special devices capable of dissipating energy by damping or inelastic behavior are
adopted, seismic design criteria that differ from those specified in this Chapter may be used,
provided that they are consistent with them and both the effectiveness of the devices and the
effectiveness of the devices are convincingly demonstrated. structural solutions such as the validity of
the damping values and the reduction factor that are proposed.

For the types of structuring considered in table 2.1, the corresponding sections provide seismic
behavior factors that will be adopted for the construction of the design spectra.

3.2.5 REDUCTION FACTOR FOR OVERSTRENGTH,RTand,Reither

In general, there are several factors that cause structures to have an overstrength. The most practical
option to take this aspect into account is to apply a reduction factor on the side of the seismic actions,
as shown in the description of the analysis methods.

The reduction due to overstrength is given by the factorRTand,Reither , What:

-R
- either -1.0 -Tand/Ta -Ta
either - -
yes youand
RT, Rand (2.4)
--R either yes youand-Ta

where
Ta is the lower limit of the plateau of the design spectrum
Reither is the index overstrength, depending on the structural system

The factorRTand,Reither it may differ in the two orthogonal directions in which the structure is analyzed,
depending on its properties in those directions.

For the types of structuring considered in table 2.1, the index overstrength values that will be
adopted for the construction of the design spectra are provided in the corresponding sections.

3.2.6 MODIFICATION OF THE STRUCTURAL RESPONSE BY EFFECTS OF SOIL-

STRUCTURE INTERACTION

In the seismic design of structures located in medium and low stiffness terrain, the effects of the
interaction between the soil and the structure (soil-structure interaction) must be taken into account,
applying the recommendations indicated in this section. These recommendations will be used when
the effects of foundation flexibility are not considered in a model used for seismic analysis of the
response of a structure. In general, the use of these recommendations reduces the values of the
lateral forces, the base shear and the overturning moments, calculated for an assumed structure with
a non-deformable base, and increases the lateral displacements. It will only be justified to take into
account the effects of soil-structure interaction when it is necessary to:

fifty
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Te0 Hs -2.5
(2.5)
Ts He0
where
He0 is the fundamental effective height of the assumed structure with a rigid base
Hs is the total thickness of the equivalent soil layer

Te0 is the fundamental period of the assumed rigid-based structure is the

Ts dominant period of the equivalent ground

3.2.6.1 Characterization of the soil-structure system

For multi-degree-of-freedom structures and stratified soil deposits, the soil-structure system can be
suitably idealized, by means of a structure withNdegrees of freedom in horizontal translation
supported on a superficial, circular and infinitely rigid foundation with two degrees of freedom, one
in horizontal translation and the other in rotation or pitch (figure 2.1).

Figure 2.1 Complete soil-structural system.

where
D is the burying depth of the foundation is the polar
Jc moment of inertia of the foundation
Cn is the interstory damping of the structure atn–th level

51
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Kn is the interstory stiffness of the structure atn–th level is the

Mc mass of the foundation
Mn is the mezzanine mass of the structure in then–th level
vm is the speed of propagation of shear waves in them–th soil layer is the horizontal
xc displacement of the foundation
xn is the horizontal displacement in the mezzanine of the structure in then-th level is the
r radius of the base of the structure
-m is the density in them–th soil layer is the angular
-c displacement of the foundation is the damping in the
-m m–th soil layer
--
The foundation is planted in a soil deposit with a non-deformable base and horizontally stratified with
Mstrata. The degrees of freedom corresponding to the vertical translation and torsion of the
foundation are neglected, despite the fact that they can be very important when there are flexible
floor systems or in irregular structures. The degrees of freedom of the foundation are referred to the
subgrade, so the moment of inertia of the foundation mass is taken with respect to the axis of
rotation of the foundation base.

Figure 2.2 Equivalent soil-structure system.

where
H is the height of the structure
Jand is the polar moment of inertia of the structure
MT is the total mass of the structure including the live and dead load mass

52
 RECOMMENDATIONS

v0 is the half-space wave propagation velocity≥720m/s

vs is the shear wave propagation velocity in the equivalent stratum is the
-0 Poisson's ratio of the rock
-s is the Poisson's ratio of the equivalent ground layer is the
-0 volumetric weight of the rock
-s is the volumetric weight of the equivalent ground layer is
-0 the damping of the rock
-e0 is the damping associated with the fundamental mode of the
-s structure is the damping of the equivalent ground layer

If the multi-degree-of-freedom structure responds essentially as a one-degree-of-freedom oscillator

in its rigid-base condition and the stratified soil deposit behaves essentially like a homogeneous
mantle, the soil-structure system can be replaced by the equivalent system indicated in figure 2.2,
where the structure and the stratum represent equivalent elements, which allow obtaining a similar
response to the same excitation. For this, the real structure will be characterized by the fundamental
period, the mass and the effective height, while the original deposit will be characterized by the
dominant period of the terrain and the effective velocity.

The interaction effects in the higher modes are negligible when the fundamental mode of the
assumed rigid-based structure resembles a straight line through its base, which is the case in most
practical cases. Therefore, it is valid to neglect interaction effects in higher modes whose contribution
can be determined by standard procedures.

When the static method is used, a fundamental effective height of the assumed structure with a rigid base
shall be calculated.He0which will be taken equal to0.67of the overall heightHof the structure, except for
those of a single level, in which it will be taken equal to the total height. effective massMe0or effective
weightWe0of the structure will be taken as0.67of the total mass or the total weight respectively, except for
structures of a single level, in which it will be taken equal to the total mass or total weight.

For a massless, harmonically excited rigid foundation, the steady-state relationship between the
applied force (moment) and the resulting displacement (rotation) in the direction of the force is
known as the dynamic stiffness or impedance function. Physically the impedance functions represent
the equivalent ground springs and dampers.

The dynamic stiffness of a soil-foundation system, for the vibration modemof the foundation,
~
It is usually expressed by the complex functionKm- ,which is frequency dependent.
excitement -.

~ ~
K m - - K0m[km -m -Yo-mcm -m ] (1- i2-s) (2.6)
where:
K0m is the static stiffness
km-m is the normalized frequency dependent stiffness coefficient -m
cm-m is the normalized frequency dependent damping ratio -m

53
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

~
-s is the effective damping of the equivalent soil layer
-
The resortKmand the damperCm, soil equivalents, are related to the coefficients of
stiffness and damping by means of the equations

~
K m -K0 m(km- two-s-mcm) (2.7)

~
-e0 C m- K0m(-mcm- two-skm) (2.8)

3.2.6.2 Approximate determination of the effective period and damping of soil-

structure systems
~
The effective periodTe0 of a soil–structure coupled system can be determined,
approximately, with Eq. 2.9, obtained after neglecting the mass and moment of inertia of the
foundation in the equivalent system, as shown in the Comments section.

~ two (2.9)
Te0 - Te0 -Th-Ttwo
r
two

where
Th is the natural period of the structure assumed to be infinitely rigid and whose base can only
be moved
Tr is the natural period of the assumed infinitely rigid structure whose base can only rotate

1/ 2
-M
- -- e0---
Th- two (2.10)
-K h -

two-
1/ 2
- Me0(He0-D)
Tr- two
-- - (2.11)
- Kr -
where
Kh is the lateral stiffness of the foundation, defined as the horizontal force necessary to
produce a unit displacement in the direction of said force
Kr is the rotational stiffness of the foundation, defined as the moment necessary to produce
a unit rotation in the direction of said moment

These stiffnesses are obtained as indicated in table 2.2. As a first approximation to the value of
~
effective periodTe0can be calculated using the static stiffnesses. If instead of these, use
the dynamic stiffnesses, evaluated for the fundamental frequency -e0- 2-/Te0of the structure with a
rigid base, this approximation is improved. An even better approximation is possible if Eq. 2.9
is solved by iterations, starting with the fundamental frequency -e0and ending with
~
effective frequency -~ e0- 2-/Te0.
~ ~
Once the effective periodTe0of the eq. 2.9, the effective damping -e0the way
fundamental of the structure interacting with the ground can be determined, with Eq. 2.12, obtained

54
 RECOMMENDATIONS

after neglecting the mass and moment of inertia of the foundation in the equivalent system, as
shown in section 3.2 of Comments.

3 two two
~ - Te0 - - - Th - - - T -
- e0 - - -
e0 - ~
-- - h - -- - r
- ~r -- (2.12)
T
-e0- - h-- ~
1- twotwo
Te0- 1- twotwo-
-r- Te0-

in this equation
-~C
e0 h
-h- (2.13)
2Kh

-~C
e0 r
-r - (2.14)
2Kr
where
- -h is the damping of the soil in the translation mode of the foundation is the
- -r damping of the soil in the rotation mode of the foundation

Damping coefficients -hY -r,which include both dissipation damping and radiation damping, are
calculated from the foundation damping ChYCrin translation and rotation, respectively. These
dampings are obtained from table 2.2.

The springs and dampers that are used to replace the soil depend on the properties of the subsoil, as
well as the characteristics of the foundation and the frequency of excitation. As an approximation, it
will be valid to calculate these parameters for the fundamental frequency of the rigid base structure, -
e0- 2-/Te0,following the criteria detailed in table 2.2 and 2.3. can be used

Alternative methods based on established principles and known results of foundation dynamics.

55
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 2.2 Stiffness and damping of shallow foundations

SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS Frequency parameters:

-e0Rm
-m- where R v - Rh
Km-K0 m(km- two-s-mcm) vs

K0m(-mcm- two-skm) -Rh

C-m - s-
-e0 2Hs

2(1- - )s -R
m - h, v, r - -p r
(1- 2-s) 2Hs

Coefficient
of stiffness
Vibration

coefficient of
Static Stiffness
mode

damping

- 0.65-s-hs -h
- 1- (1- 2-s)-hs two Yes -hs - -1
-s
Horizontal

8G sRh- Rh -- 2D -- 5D- --
Kh0- -- 1- -- 1 -- 1 - ch- -
-- s - 2Hs---- - 3 R h-----
kh-1
two 4H-s- - -h
- 0.576 Yes -hs- -1
-- -s

- 0 Yes -v- -p
- D - -
4GsRv- 1.28Rv-- D -- - 0.28D - Hs
- -
K 0v- - --
--1- --
-1--0.85- - -
Vertical

- D
eleven-
s- Hs -- 2Rv -- -- R v -- D - kv-1 cv- - 1-1.85(1--s)
- 1- - Rv
- Hs - -0.85 Yes v- - -p
- D
- 1- 0.5
- Rv

kr-1-0.2-r; b - r - 2.5

kr-0.5; if - r - 2.5, - - 1/ 3 - 0.5-s-mop -

s
- -
Yes - mop r- 1
kr-1-0.2-r; if - r - 2.5, -
s
-0.45
-1- (1- 2- )-two
s mop
-p
8GsRr 3 - R r -- 2D--
Pitching

-1- --1 -- 1-
0.71D -
- -
Kr0- cr- -
3(1--s) - 6Hs-- A -- H-s -
-- - r-- -
linearly interpolate 0.3-twor -
- -
Yes - mop r- 1
for -- 1- -twor -p
1/ 3 - - s0.45
-

-two D -
Coupled

K0hr- K0hRh-- - -0.03--

-5 R h -

where
Gs is the shear modulus of the equivalent ground layer
R h,Rv is the radius of the circular foundation equivalent to the sway surfaces for the horizontal
and vertical translation mode, respectively
Rr is the radius of the circular foundation equivalent to the sway surfaces for the rotation
mode

56
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Table 2.3 Stiffness and damping of foundations with piles.

FOUNDATIONS WITH
Frequency parameters:
PILES

two
K0c -d
0
K m - km km Y cm-
hmm - -e0
p

- vs
e0
m - h, v -d p 3.4-
-s- -p - s
2Hs -(1-- )
- =frequency of interest s

Coefficient
of stiffness
Vibration

Static Stiffness Damping coefficient

mode

- 0.8- if η - η
- s s
Horizontal

-AND
p-0.21 --
K0h-d p E-s-
- k-1
h ch - - 0.17
- -
-AND p--
s-
-AND if η - η
- 0.8- s -0.175-- --AND -- s
-- - s-

- -s Yes - - -p
kv-1; yes Lp/dp- fifteen -
-
-
0.33-- -
-two
kv-1- -; yes Lp/dp-fifty cv - - -Ep -- Lp-
- L p-0.67 0.413-L -- -- -- -
--
Vertical

-I--
- - - p
-1- and -s --dp- 0.8
Yes - - 1.5- p
K0v- 1.9dpE- - p- - --
s-d - -1- - s-d - -
- p- linearly interpolate -
- -- --
for
15-Lp/dp- fifty Linearly interpolate forη -η-1.5η
p p

where
Lp is the length of the pile
ANDp is the modulus of elasticity of the pile
ANDs is the modulus of elasticity of the soil deposit is the
dp diameter of the pile

3.2.6.3 Determination of the effective seismic behavior factor

It is clear that the seismic design is based on the non-linear behavior of the structure in the face of
strong earthquakes. To characterize a nonlinear replacement oscillator, it is required to define an
equivalent ductility factor called effective ductility. This parameter is obtained by equating the yield
strength and plastic deformation of the elastically supported structure with the corresponding values
of an equivalent elastoplastic oscillator, whose natural period and damping fraction are equal to the
period and effective damping of the system for the condition elastic. So that

57
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

~ -Ttwo - T two--
Q -1- (Q-1)- ~e0 ---1-- ~e0T- two-- (2.15)
-T
-two
e0 - e0---

In this expression, - is the slope of the second branch of the bilinear behavior ( - -0for
~
elastoplastic behavior). The effective seismic behavior factorQwill be equal to the factor of
~
seismic behaviorQfor an infinitely rigid ground (that is,Te0-Te0forvs- - )and equal to
~
the unit for an infinitely flexible ground (i.e.,Te0- -forvs= 0),beingvsthe speed of
shear waves.

The effective seismic performance factor can be viewed as the seismic performance factor
modified by interaction, such that the resistance of the replacement oscillator for the factor of
~
effective seismic behaviorQis equal to that required by the elastically supported structure
~
for the seismic behavior factorQthe quotientQ / Qmeasures the relationship between the demands of
ductility developed in the real structure and the replacement oscillator for the same seismic
excitation. In this way, the strength required by the flexible base structure, to limit the ductility
demand to the available ductility, is obtained directly from a modified rigid base structure.

58
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.3

TYPE 1 STRUCTURES
BUILDINGS

59
 RECOMMENDATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 3.3 STRUCTURES TYPE 1: BUILDINGS

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... ...63

FLOWCHART............................................... ................................................65

3.3.1 SPECTRUM FOR THE DESIGN OF BUILDING TYPE STRUCTURES ..............................69

3.3.1.1 Seismic behavior factor............................................................ ................................69
3.3.1.2 Reducing factor for ductility................................................... .........................................70
3.3.1.3 Reduction factor due to overstrength.............................................. ............................71
3.3.1.4 Redundancy factor .................................................. ................................................71
3.3.1.5 Modification of the design spectrum by damping ................................................73
3.3.1.6 Amplification factor due to degrading behavior ................................................ 73
3.3.1.7 Modified Design Spectrum for the Collapse Prevention Limit State...................73
3.3.1.8 Design spectrum for the serviceability limit state ................................................ ..........73

3.3.2 CONDITIONS OF REGULARITY .................................................. ...........................74

3.3.2.1 Regular structures ................................................ ........................................................... 74
3.3.2.2 Irregular structures ................................................ ................................................74
3.3.2.3 Strongly irregular structures ........................................................... .............................74
3.3.2.4 Correction for irregularity .................................................. .........................................75

3.3.3 CHOICE OF THE TYPE OF ANALYSIS................................................... .............................75

3.3.4 SIMPLIFIED METHOD ................................................ .........................................76

3.3.5 STATIC METHOD................................................... ........................................................... 78

3.3.5.1 Valuation of seismic forces without estimatingTe0........................................................... ...........79
3.3.5.2 Valuation of seismic forces estimatingTe0........................................................... ............81
3.3.5.3 Twisting moments ........................................................... .........................................................81
3.3.5.4 Overturning moments............................................... ........................................................... ...83
3.3.5.5 Second order effects ........................................................... ............................................83
3.3.5.6 Vertical component ................................................ ........................................................... .83
3.3.5.7 Combined effects of ground movements ........................................................... ........85
3.3.5.8 Asymmetrical behavior................................................... .........................................85
3.3.5.9 Static analysis with soil-structure interaction ................................................ ............86

3.3.6 DYNAMIC METHOD................................................... ........................................................... 87

3.3.6.1 Spectral Modal Analysis............................................... .........................................................87
3.3.6.2 Step-by-step method................................................... ........................................................... ....88
3.3.6.3 Basal shear review .................................................. ...........................................88
3.3.6.4 Special effects ................................................ ........................................................... ....89
3.3.6.5 Modal dynamic method with soil-structure interaction ................................................ .89

3.3.7 REVIEW OF LIMIT STATES.............................................. ...........................................91

3.3.7.1 Horizontal displacements due to limitation of damages to elements not
structural (service limit) ........................................... ...........................................91
3.3.7.2 Horizontal displacements for safety against collapse ...................................................92
3.3.7.3 Glass breakage .................................................. ........................................................... ........93
3.3.7.4 Separation with adjacent structures................................................... ........................93
3.3.8 REVIEW OF EXISTING STRUCTURES................................................... .............93

61
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.3.9 SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION CRITERIA IN

FOUNDATIONS ................................................ ........................................................... ...94
3.3.9.1 Shallow foundations ........................................................... .........................................94
3.3.9.2 Friction piles .................................................. ........................................................... .......95
3.3.9.3 Pile group effect ........................................................... .........................................96
3.3.9.3.1 Horizontal translation mode................................................... .........................................97
3.3.9.3.2 Rotation mode ...................................................... ........................................................... .......97
3.3.9.3.3 Seismic actions on foundations ......................................................... ............................98

62
 RECOMMENDATIONS

NOMENCLATURE
a- Modified design spectrum for serviceability k1,2,3 Parameters for structures with
or collapse prevention limit state asymmetric behavior Effective
Ke0 stiffness of the structure
a0r maximum acceleration on rock K Stiffness matrix of the structure
A Foundation area Kr Rotational stiffness of the foundation
AYou,tj Gross cross-sectional area of the wall K0h,r Static horizontal and rotational stiffness of
yoj the foundation
bn Maximum dimension in mezzanine plann
K0hn,vnHorizontal and vertical static stiffness of a
measured perpendicular to the direction of
ground motion pile or footing
~
b-n Maximum dimension in mezzanine plann Kh,v,rDynamic stiffness of a pile for the
measured in the direction of the earthquake pan, tilt, and rotate modes
byou Base of the deck or frame Minor dimension of
B.n the mezzaninen Effective damping of the ~
Kgh Dynamic stiffness in horizontal translation of the
Ce0 structure Damping coefficient of the footing n
group of piles
Chn,vn in horizontal and vertical translation Difference ~
between the values of the lateral resistance of Kgr Dynamic stiffness in rotation of the group of
d structures with asymmetric behavior, ing piles
L wall length
Lc Active length of the pile Largest
dp pile diameter Ln dimension of the mezzaninen
D Foundation slop depth Additional Lp pile length
andan eccentricity Lyn Dimension dependent parameter bnYb-n
anddn Torsional eccentricity with dynamic
effects Me0 Effective mass of the structure Mass
andn Torsional eccentricity in the mezzaninen
M matrix of the structure Overturning
andnp,nz Eccentricity between the centroid of the pile or
footing and the centroidal axis of rotation of the Mov0 moment at the base of the structure
foundation floor foundation corresponding to the
fundamental mode of the structure
n - Design eccentricity in the mezzaninen
and
andx,n,y,nTorsional eccentricities in the mezzanine Moyoun Torsional moment in the mezzaninen
no,caused by the walls in the Monv Overturning moment on the mezzaninen
directionsx,y Pn Lateral force acting at the center of the
ANDp Modulus of elasticity of the pile
ANDs Modulus of elasticity of the soil deposit level massn
FAEi, AEjWall effective area factor Fd Pnv Vertical Equivalent Static Force
~
distance factor P1 Seismic forces reduced by interaction
Fkn
two Relationship between torsional stiffnesses and Q Seismic behavior factor
side of plant ~
Q Effective seismic behavior factor
FBe Service factor
Rh Equivalent circular foundation radius for
g Gravity acceleration
translation mode
hn Mezzanine heightn
Reither Index overstrength factor Equivalent
h-n level heightnabout rudeness
Rr circular foundation radius for rotation mode
hyou Height of the board or frame
H Height of the structure yes Total response of displacements or
He0 Fundamental effective height of the assumed mechanical elements
structure with rigid base yesx,y,z,n Modal responses
H Offset height vector Moment of inertia of Ta Lower limit of the plateau of the spectrum
Yo the foundation area with respect to its Tand Structural period
centroidal axis of rotation Te0 Fundamental period of the structure
Ts Dominant period of the equivalent
J Vector with components equal to1 ground layer

63
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Tv Estimated fundamental period of the -- Distance between pile axes

structure in the vertical direction -1 Participation coefficient of the
~
Te0 Effective period of the structure fundamental mode
vs Shear wave propagation speed in the -h,r Normalized frequency for horizontal
equivalent ground layer Wave speedp translation mode and rotation mode
vp Lysmer analog velocity Basal shear force -s Poisson's ratio of the ground
vL -ij Angle between the line joining two piles and the
v0 direction of the applied force
~ -- Redundancy factor
v1 Effective base shear force
vn Shear force in the mezzaninen -hij Element of the inverse of the matrix-hof a
We0 Structure effective weight Mode set of piles
Win effective weightn -e0 Fundamental frequency of the structure
Wn level weightno,including dead and live loads ~ Fundamental frequency of the structure with
-e0
flexible base
WT Construction weight, including dead and -n, m----Undamped natural frequencies
live loads associated withn–th andm–th modes
W-n Structure weight including loads -and Structural damping
dead and alive that work above the Critical damping fractions associated
-n, m
mezzaninen withn–th andm–th modes
xi,j Distance, positive or negative, between the axis of the ~
-e0 Effective damping of the soil structure
pileYoeitherj,and the axis of rotation of the pile
arrangement system
Xn Displacement in the direction of the force in Functions
the mezzaninen to Tand,- Normalized spectral ordinate
Xn0 side shift of then–th level corresponding to
the fundamental mode of the structure to Ta,- Normalized maximum spectral ordinate
with non-deformable base
~ av a-,Tv Vertical spectral acceleration, as
Xn1 side shift of then–th level
function of the modified design
corresponding to the fundamental mode of the
spectrum and the vertical structural
structure with non-deformable base
period,Tv
X-n Relative displacement of the mezzaninen
~ AAC Te0 Amplification factor by
X1 Lateral shifts modified by asymmetric behavior
interaction ACD Tand Amplification factor by
Z1 Natural modulus of vibration
degrading hysteretic behavior
Zn n–th natural mode of vibration of the
structure with rigid base Q-Tand,Q Reducing factor for ductility
-- Corrective factor for irregularity Dynamic RTand,Reither Reduction factor due to overstrength
-p, s interaction factors between the pilesYoYj, ~
SD Te0 Spectral shift for the
separated by a distance - Amplification
-n factor due to second order effects structural period modified by
~
interactionTe0
-p collapse of the structure divided byhn
-Tand,-and Damping factor

64
 RECOMMENDATIONS

FLOWCHART

STRUCTURES TYPE 1: BUILDINGS

limit states:
A. Service level

B. Collapse prevention level either

Interaction
I usually - - -
structure

,
= 2% Q = 4.0
= 3% Q = 3.0 Reither= 3.0 - =1.25 - =0.9
= 4% Q = 2.0 Reither= 2.5 - =1.0 - =0.8
Q = 1.5 Reither= 2.0 - =0.8 - =0.7
= 5% 1 Q = 1.25
= 6%
= 7%

65
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

TYPE OF ANALYSIS

SIMPLIFIED METHOD STATIC METHOD DYNAMIC METHOD

1.75%of the vertical loads will be 1. Calculate forces sides modal analysis step by step analysis
supported by walls linked together applied in the centers of mass of spectral step
by monolithic slabs. The the floors that produce effects
distribution should be substantially equivalent to seismic action.
symmetric about two orthogonal 2. Distribute the lateral forces from
axes, (andx,y<0.1B). step 1 and the torsional moments
associated with these forces
1.If coupling is neglected, all modes
among the lateral load resisting
withTand> 0.4 sec.Or at least 3
systems that make up the
translation modes.
structure, such as frames, walls or
combinations of these.
2.Review service and collapse
3.When the coupling is recognized,
3. Analyze each resistant system
it must be
against the lateral loads that
consider the modes whose
correspond to it.
2. The relationshipL/B < 2.0. response represents at least 90%
4. Check service and collapse.
3. The relationshipH/B<1.5YH<13m. of the effective modal weight of
the structure.

1. The use of acceleration records that

reflect the seismic hazard of the site
is recommended.
2.It is suggested that at least four
representative movements be
used. The particularities of the
non-linear behavior of the
Service
structure and the uncertainties in
its parameters, both in linear and
non-linear behavior, must be
taken into account.

Collapse without estimatingTe0 estimatingTe0,

using Basal shear revision
methods
The design base shear force
approximate
cannot be less than the70%static
analysis.

In no case shall the shear be

less than
Y
(Table 3.3) either

3
two

66
 RECOMMENDATIONS

two

twisting moments
vertical component

Overturning moments

combined effects of the

ground movements

second order effects By limit states

-Horizontal displacements due to damage
limitation to non-structural elements
(service limit)
-Horizontal displacements for security
against collapse

67
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

SOIL STRUCTURE INTERACTION

Static Method Modal Dynamic Method

Interaction with the ground

modal method step by step method

spectral step
Basal Shear:

The equilibrium
equation must be solved
system dynamic
Lateral Displacements: equivalent, taking into account
count the stipulated
for structures without
interaction.

They are used in calculating the Fundamental Mode

effectsP–Δand in the revision of
the limit state due to collisions
with adjacent structures.
commuting
Basal Shear
Sides

multiplying any
structural response
In terms of mass and acceleration:
calculated without interaction by

the quotient , is obtained

the response with interaction.

Base shear reduced by not including the

interaction: rotation of the

base
including the
v0=Basal Shear of the
rotation of the
Structure
base

Section 3.3.6.1 Neglecting its translation:

Rigid base frame

Response with reduced interaction by

ductility and overstrength:
Reduced by interaction:

They are used in calculating

the effectsP–-and in the
revision of the limit state
Seismic forces reduced by interaction: due to collisions with
adjacent structures.

68
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.3.1 SPECTRUM FOR DESIGN OF BUILDING TYPE STRUCTURES

This subsection presents the criteria to evaluate the seismic stresses that act on structures such as
Buildings. For the design, two limit states will be considered: a) the service level, in which the
deformations will be reviewed to limit the damage and, b) the collapse prevention level, in which the
resistances will be determined and the deformations will be reviewed to prevent the structural
failure. Impacts against adjacent structures and glass breakage will be taken into account in the
collapse prevention level.

For Building-type structures, reductions due to ductility, overstrength and redundancy are
considered, as well as possible changes due to the use of damping other than5%,as well as
modifications due to soil-structure interaction, insulation systems and energy dissipation.
Amplifications will be considered for structures with degrading hysteretic behavior located in soft
soils. For this, the following concepts will be taken into account.

3.3.1.1 Seismic behavior factor

The seismic behavior factorQIt is used to take into account the influence of the nonlinear behavior of
the system in the estimation of its seismic demand, and with it, in its expected performance and
reliability level. For Building-type structures, the adoption of the following seismic behavior factors is
recommended:

Q = 4when the following requirements are met:

1. The resistance in all the mezzanines is provided exclusively by non-braced frames of steel,
reinforced concrete or composites of the two materials. Also when it is supplied by braced
frames or with walls of reinforced concrete or steel plate or composed of both materials. In
this case, the frames of each mezzanine are capable of resisting, not counting walls or
braces, at least25%of the acting seismic force.

2. If there are dividing masonry walls, facade or adjoining walls linked to the structure, they
must be considered in the analysis but their contribution to resistance to lateral forces will
only be taken into account if they are made of solid pieces, and, in addition, if the frames,
whether or not braced, and the reinforced concrete, steel plate or composite walls of both
materials, are capable of resisting at least80%of the total lateral forces without the
contribution of the masonry walls.
3. The minimum ratio of the resistant capacity of a mezzanine between the design action does
not differ by more than35%of the average of this quotient for all the mezzanines. To verify
compliance with this requirement, the resistant capacity of each mezzanine will be
calculated taking into account all the elements that may contribute to the resistance,
particularly the dividing masonry walls, facade or adjoining. The last mezzanine is excluded
from this requirement.
4. Reinforced concrete frames and walls meet the requirements set for ductile frames and walls
in current structural design recommendations and standards (RNDEV). The foregoing also
implies that the detailing requirements for the connections of this type of structural
elements must be met.
5. Rigid steel or steel-concrete composite frames meet the requirements for frames with high
ductility that are established in the RNDEV for metallic structures or are

69
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

provided with eccentric bracing or with ductile concentric bracing in accordance with these
standards.

Q = 3when the following requirements are met:

Conditions 2 and 4 or 5 are satisfied and in any mezzanine conditions 1 or 3 specified for the
case are no longer satisfiedQ = 4,but the resistance in all the mezzanines is provided by steel or
reinforced concrete columns with flat slabs, by rigid steel frames, by reinforced concrete
frames, by concrete or steel plate walls or composites of the two materials, for combinations of
these and frames or by wooden diaphragms. The structures with flat slabs and those made of
wood must also satisfy the requirements that the RNDEV establishes in this regard. Rigid steel
or steel-concrete composite frames meet the requirements for high ductility or are provided
with ductile concentric bracing, in accordance with the RNDEV.

Q = 2when the following requirements are met:

Resistance to lateral forces is provided by flat slabs with steel or reinforced concrete columns,
by steel frames with reduced ductility or provided with bracing with normal ductility, or by
reinforced concrete that do not meet the requirements to be considered ductile, or walls of
reinforced concrete, steel plate or steel and concrete compounds, which do not meet what is
specified for the cases in some mezzanineQ = 4YQ = 3 or by masonry walls of solid pieces
confined by castles, dalas, columns or beams of reinforced concrete or steel that meet the
requirements of the RNDEV. will also be used Q = 2when the resistance is provided by
prefabricated or prestressed concrete elements, with the exceptions that the RNDEV establishes
in this regard, or in the case of wooden structures with the characteristics indicated in the
RNDEV for wooden structures, or some structures of steel indicated in the current standards.

Q = 1.5when they meet the following requirements:

Resistance to lateral forces is provided in all floors by masonry walls made of hollow pieces,
confined or with internal reinforcement, which meet the requirements of the RNDEV for
masonry structures, or by combinations of said walls with elements such as those described for
casesQ = 3YQ = 2,or by wooden frames and reinforcements, or by some steel structures that
are indicated in the RNDEV.

Q = 1.25when the following requirements are met:

In structures whose resistance to lateral forces is provided, at least partially, by elements or
materials other than those specified above, unless a study is made that demonstrates that a
value higher than that recommended in this Chapter can be used. Also in some steel structures
as indicated in the RNDEV.

3.3.1.2 Ductility reduction factor

The reduction factor for ductilityQ-Tand,Qmay differ in the two orthogonal directions in which
analyzes the structure, according to its properties. In all cases, the minimum value ofQ which corresponds
to the various mezzanines and earthquake-resistant systems of the structure in the direction

70
 RECOMMENDATIONS

of analysis. The criterion to define the reduction factor for ductility,Q-Tand, Q ,It is found in section
3.2.4.

3.3.1.3 Reduction factor due to overstrength

The reduction factor for overstrengthRTand,Reither may differ in the two orthogonal directions in
that the structure is analyzed, depending on its properties in each direction. For Building-type
structures, the adoption of the following index overstrength values is recommendedReither:

Reither= 2for the following structural systems:

Frames of reinforced concrete, structural steel or composites of the two materials designed
withQ = 3eitherQ = 2;steel or reinforced concrete columns with flat slabs, for frames or
structures made with precast or prestressed concrete elements; by braced frames or with
reinforced concrete or steel plate walls or composites of the two materials designed withQ = 2,
3 and 4;by masonry walls of hollow pieces, confined or with interior reinforcement or by
wooden frames and reinforcements.

Reither= 2.5for the following structural systems:

Ductile frames of reinforced concrete or composites of the two materials designed withQ = 4,
by concrete or steel-concrete composite wall systems designed withQ = 3,or by frames with
reinforced concrete or steel-concrete composite walls designed withQ = 3,or masonry walls of
solid pieces confined by castles, dalas, columns or reinforced concrete beams that meet the
requirements of the corresponding standards, or in the case of wooden structures with the
characteristics indicated in accordance with the RNDEV.

Reither= 3for the following structural systems:

Ductile structural steel frames designed withQ = 3 or 4,by concrete steel plate wall systems
designed withQ = 3,ductile composite structures designed withQ = 4, as braced frames or with
steel plate walls.

The criterion for defining the reduction factor due to overstrength,RTand,Reither,it is found in section 3.2.5.
For structural systems not contemplated in this section, an overstrength index oftwo.A value greater
than this may be used as long as it is justified with a lateral capacity analysis, but in no case shall it be
greater than3.

3.3.1.4 Redundancy factor

For each orthogonal direction of analysis, the redundancy of the structuring used will be taken into
account by means of the redundancy factor, -, as follows:

- =0.8when the following requirements are met:

In structures with at least two frames or parallel defense lines in the direction of analysis, when
frames with a single bay or equivalent structures are available (a single wall per parallel defense
line, etc.).

- =1.0when the following requirements are met:

71
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

In structures with at least two frames or lines of defense parallel in the direction of analysis and
that each frame or line of defense has at least two bays or equivalent structures.

- =1.25when the following requirements are met:

In structures with at least three frames or lines of defense parallel in the direction of analysis
and that each frame or line of defense has at least three bays or equivalent structures.

For structures that do not meet regularity condition 10 or 11 of subsection 3.3.2.1, or are classified as
strongly irregular according to subsection 3.3.2.3, it will not be valid to reduce the ordinates of the
design spectrum due to redundancy (that is, - -1.0 ),so in this case the factor
--It must be the lesser of the one obtained according to the lines above or the unit.

Table 3.1 Structural damping values, -and.

STRUCTURAL SYSTEM -and(%)

reinforced concrete structures 5

prestressed concrete structures 4
Low-rise lightweight steel structures1and with elements mainly joined by welding
two

Low-rise lightweight steel structures1and with elements mainly joined with

3
screws
Rigid steel frames with rigid welded connections 3
Rigid steel frames with rigid bolted connections 5
Steel frames braced by concentric, eccentric, or buckling-restrained braces, or
4
stiffened by steel plates
Rigid frames with composite columns, or composite frames braced by braces,
5
plates, or walls
Steel or composite frames with supplemental damping *
Concrete or plywood walls, or stave wood 5
steel plate walls 4
Confined masonry load-bearing walls of solid concrete blocks 7
Confined masonry load-bearing walls of hollow concrete blocks 6
Masonry load-bearing walls that do not meet the specifications for confined
6
masonry or internally reinforced masonry
* The damping value must be obtained with a technical procedure accepted by engineering

1 The definition of a low-rise structure should use the criteria recommended for Type I
industrial structures (3.4.5)

72
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.3.1.5 Modification of the design spectrum by damping

According to the definition of elastic design spectra, a structural damping value is implied, -and, of5%.
However, the value of structural damping depends on the material and the structure, so in most
cases it is less than5%.Therefore, it is required to modify the ordinates of the design spectrum by
multiplying them by the damping factor,
-Tand, -and.The values of -andrecommended are indicated in table 3.1.

3.3.1.6 Amplification factor for degrading behavior

For structures located on land TypeIIeitherIII (subsection 3.1.5.2) and that are susceptible to
developing hysteretic behaviors with stiffness and/or resistance degradations, the ordinates of the
design spectrum will be multiplied by the amplification factor for degrading behaviorACDTand given
by:

1
ACDTand -0.8- 5
T (3.1)
2 - 5 2and-1
Ts
where
Tand is the structural period
Ts is the dominant period of the equivalent ground layer

3.3.1.7 Modified design spectrum for the collapse prevention limit state

The philosophy followed in this Chapter consists of modifying the transparent design spectrum with
factors related to, for example, ductility, overstrength and redundancy, among others. This spectrum
is known as the “Modified Design Spectrum”. If, in addition, the degrading hysteretic behavior is
considered, its representation is as follows:

a T and
,- A T
a- -
CD and
(3.2)
Q-Tand,Q RTand, Reither -

3.3.1.8 Design Spectrum for Serviceability Limit State

In accordance with the philosophy of this Chapter, the transparent design spectrum should be
divided by the service factorFbe= 5.5.If degrading hysteretic behavior is considered, its representation
is as follows:

to Tand,- ACDTand
a- - (3.3)
5.5

The lateral displacements that are calculated with the ordinates of the spectrum for the serviceability limit
state will be total displacements.

73
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.3.2 CONDITIONS OF REGULARITY

3.3.2.1 Regular structures
For a structure to be considered regular, it must satisfy the following conditions:
1. The floor plan distribution of masses, walls and other resistant elements is substantially
symmetrical with respect to two orthogonal axes. These elements are substantially
parallel to the main orthogonal axes of the building.
2. The ratio of the height to the smallest dimension of the base is not greater than2.5.
3. The ratio between length and width of the base does not exceed2.5.

4. In plan there are no inlets or outgoing whose dimension exceedstwenty%of the

dimension of the plant measured parallel to the direction in which the entrance or exit
is considered.
5. At each level there is a rigid and resistant ceiling or floor system, which must be justified
with the results of the analysis of simplified models of the floor system to be used.

6. There are no openings in the ceiling or floor systems whose dimension exceedstwenty%of the
dimension of the plant measured parallel to the direction in which the opening is considered. The
hollow areas do not cause significant asymmetries or differ in position from one floor to another
and the total area of openings does not exceed, at any level,twenty%of the plant area.

7. The weight of each level, including the live load to be considered for seismic design, is not
greater than110%not less than70%of the one corresponding to the immediately lower floor.
The last level of construction is exempt from minimum weight conditions.
8. No floor has an area, delimited by the outer sections of its vertical resistant elements,
greater than110%not less than70%from the floor immediately below. The top floor of
the building is exempt from minimum area conditions. In addition, the area of no
mezzanine exceeds by more thanfifty%to the smallest of the lower floors.
9. On all stories, all columns are restrained in two orthogonal directions by horizontal
diaphragms and beams or flat slabs.
10. The stiffness and shear strength of each floor does not exceed more thanfifty%to that of the
immediately lower mezzanine. The last mezzanine is excluded from this condition.
11. At each story, the statically calculated torsional eccentricity does not exceed by more
than10%its plan dimension, measured parallel to the torsional eccentricity.

3.3.2.2 irregular structures

A structure is irregular if it does not meet one or up to three of the regularity conditions described in
section 3.3.2.1.

3.3.2.3 strongly irregular structures

A structure will be considered strongly irregular if any of the following conditions are met:

74
 RECOMMENDATIONS

1. The statically calculated torsional eccentricity at any mezzanine exceeds by more than
twenty%its dimension in plan, measured parallel to the eccentricity
2. The stiffness or shear strength of any mezzanine exceeds by more than100%to the
floor immediately below.
3. Does not simultaneously meet conditions 10 and 11 of regularity described in section
3.3.2.1.
4. Does not meet four or more of the regularity conditions described in subsection
3.3.2.1.

3.3.2.4 Correction for irregularity

In the seismic design of structures that do not satisfy the specified regularity conditions, the ductility
reduction factorQ-Tand, Q ,described in section 3.2.4, it will be multiplied by the factor --indicated
in table 3.2 in order to obtain the seismic forces reduced by ductility. However, in no caseQ-Tand,Qwill
be taken less than unity.

Table 3.2 Corrective factor for irregularity, -.

FACTOR
- TYPE OF IRREGULARITY
CORRECTIVE-

When a regularity condition listed from 1 to 9 of section 3.3.2.1 is not

0.9
met

When two or more conditions of regularity are not met, or condition 10

0.8
or 11 of regularity in section 3.3.2.1 is not met

0.7 strongly irregular structures

The lateral displacements calculated, taking into account the reduction due to irregularity, will be
multiplied by the productQR Tand,Reither- .

3.3.3 CHOICE OF THE TYPE OF ANALYSIS

For the seismic analysis of buildings type structures, three types of methods can be used:

1. Simplified method

2. Static method

3. Dynamic method

The simplified method is described in section 3.3.4. It is the simplest to use; however, it is only
applicable to regular structures with a height no greater than13mand built area less than400mtwo,
which simultaneously meet all the requirements indicated.

75
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

The static method, described in section 3.3.5, is applicable to regular buildings whose height is less
than or equal to30mand irregular structures with a height not greater than20mOn firm ground,
these limits are increased to40Y30m,respectively. For a structure to be considered regular, it must
meet the conditions described in section 3.3.2, otherwise it will be considered irregular. Structures
that do not meet the above requirements must be analyzed using a dynamic method as established
in section 3.3.6. Dynamic analysis is applicable in all cases.

3.3.4 SIMPLIFIED METHOD

The simplified method will only be applicable to the analysis of structuresB2,that simultaneously
meet the following five requirements:

1. On each floor, at least the75%of the vertical loads will be supported by walls linked together by
means of monolithic slabs or other floor systems that are sufficiently resistant and rigid to
shear. These walls will have a substantially symmetric distribution with respect to two
orthogonal axes and must meet the conditions established by the corresponding RNDEV for
the design and construction of masonry, concrete, steel or wood structures.

Figure 3.1 Shear center of the mezzaninen.

where
B.n is the smallest dimension of the mezzaninen is
Ln the largest dimension of the mezzaninen
AYou, Atj is the gross cross-sectional area of the wallYoeitherjas appropriate is the
FAEi, FAEj effective area factorYoeitherjas appropriate

76
 RECOMMENDATIONS

andx,n,andy,n are the torsional eccentricities in the mezzanineno,caused by the walls in the
directionsx,ycalculated with Eqs. 3.4.

For the distribution of resistant elements to be considered substantially symmetrical, the

torsional eccentricity in two orthogonal directions (figure 3.1), calculated statically, must not
exceed the10%of the plan dimension of the building (eq. 3.4), measured parallel to the
eccentricity.

k k
-xYoFSAA Yo TYo
-YjFSAAT j
j
j-1
and
x,n -i-1 k
-0.10Bn and
y,n - k
-0.10L n (3.4)
-FSAATYo Yo -FSAAT jj
i-1 j-1

The effective area of the walls is the product of the gross cross-sectional area and the
effective area factorFSA, than for the serviceability limit state or elastic behavior (Q = 1) It will
be given by the following equations:

- h -h -two h
- 1.5 - n -1.5- n- n-1.0
- L -L- L
-
FSA- - Yes (3.5)
- two h
h -
-2.2 - 1.5 n - 0.3- hn-- 1.0 -n- 2.5
-- L -L- L

and for the collapse prevention limit state (Q > 1), FSAwill be given by the following equation:

3
hn - h -two -h -
FSA - 0.6- 0.6 - 0. 3- n - -0.05 - n- Yes hn- 2.5
(3.6)
L -L- -L- L
where
hn is the height of the mezzaninen
L is the length of the wall

The walls referred to in this paragraph may be masonry, reinforced concrete, steel plate,
composed of these last two materials, or wood. In the latter case they will be braced with
diagonals. However, it should be noted that in the structure of interest, all the walls in all the
mezzanines must be of the same material.

2. It must be ensured that the distribution of the vertical loads supported by the walls are
collinear with the foundation axes, at all levels. Use of this method will not be permitted for
systems with offset foundations.

3. The relation between length and width of the plant of the structure will not exceed2.0,unless, for
purposes of seismic analysis, said plant can be assumed to be divided into independent sections
whose ratio between length and width satisfies this restriction and that indicated in subsection 1
and each section resists the corresponding shear force calculated as indicated in end of this
section.

77
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

4. The ratio between the height and the minimum dimension of the base of the structure shall not exceed --- and
the height of the structure shall not exceed13m

5. The floor system constitutes a rigid and resistant diaphragm. Therefore, you will not be able to
use the simplified method in structures whose floor system is composed of: a) plywood
(plywood) on wooden beams or trusses, b) steel sheet on steel beams or trusses, c) flat slab
lightened with coffers or blocks of polystyrene foam of large dimensions (greater than60cm
per side) or, d) prestressed concrete joist with large polystyrene foam vaults.

To apply this method, we will ignore the horizontal displacements, twisting moments, overturning
moments and flexibility of the diaphragm. It will only be necessary to verify that on each floor the
sum of the shear strengths of the load-bearing walls, projected in the direction in which the
acceleration is considered, is at least equal to the total shear force acting on the floor, calculated
as specified in subsection 3.3.5.1, using the spectral ordinate
maximum normalizedto Ta,- ,reduced by the overstrength and ductility factors given in table 3.3,
and considering that-- -1 .The maximum normalized spectral ordinate
is obtained according to Eq. 1.14, evaluated atTa.Verification will be performed in two orthogonal
directions.

Table 3.3 Reducing factors for the simplified method

wall type Q-Tand,Q RTand,Reither

Walls combined with ductile frames of reinforced concrete, or steel plate, or

composites with the two materials or plywood walls 3

Confined masonry load-bearing walls of solid pieces with horizontal

reinforcement or mesh
Confined masonry load-bearing walls made of solid pieces; Horizontally
Reinforced Confined Hollow-Piece Masonry or Mesh-Reinforced Confined two
Hollow-Piece Masonry
diaphragm walls two

Load-bearing walls of combined and confined masonry

Masonry load-bearing walls of hollow pieces with interior reinforcement, or
wooden walls of stave 1.5
Walls combined with reinforced concrete frames with limited ductility
Confined masonry load-bearing walls of hollow concrete blocks
Masonry load-bearing walls that do not meet the specifications for 1.25
confined masonry or internally reinforced masonry
3.3.5 STATIC METHOD
The static method is applicable to regular buildings whose height is less than or equal to30mand
irregular structures with a height not greater than20mOn firm ground, these limits are increased to
40Y30m,respectively.

The static analysis method consists essentially of the following steps:

78
 RECOMMENDATIONS

1) Calculate lateral forces applied to the centers of mass of the floors that produce effects
equivalent to seismic action.
2) Distribute the lateral forces from step 1 and the torsional moments associated with these forces
among the lateral load resistant systems that make up the structure, such as frames, walls or
combinations of these.
3) Analyze each resistant system against the lateral loads that correspond to it.

3.3.5.1 Valuation of seismic forces without estimatingTe0

To calculate the shear forces at different levels of a structure, a set of lateral inertial forces will be
assumed acting on each of the levels, in which the masses are supposed to be concentrated, as
illustrated in figure 3.2.

Figure 3.2 Seismic forces in a building.

The inertial forces will be determined considering that the accelerations of the masses of the
structure vary linearly with height and that the base shear force of the structure is equal to the
maximum normalized spectral ordinate,to Ta,- ,reduced by ductility, redundancy and
overstrength and multiplied by the total weight of the construction, regardless of the fundamental
period of the structure. For structures located on soft soils (TypeIIYIII)and that are susceptible to
developing hysteretic behaviors with stiffness and/or resistance degradations, will be amplified by
this concept as established in eq. 3.3.

In accordance with the above, each of the inertial forces will be taken equal to the weight of the
corresponding mass multiplied by a coefficient proportional to its height above the stance or level
from which the lateral deformations of the structure can be appreciable, namely:

79
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Pn- -FWnh-n (3.7)

where
Wn is the weight of the levelno,including dead and live loads is
h-n the height of the levelnabout rudeness

The coefficient will be taken according to the relation, 3.8, where the damping factor is evaluated in
the periodTa,namely, -Ta,-and.

v0 to T,-
a
- (3.8)
WT Q-Ta,QRTa, Reither -
where
v0 is the base shear force
WT is the weight of the construction, including dead and live loads is
Ta the lower limit of the plateau of the design spectrum

In this way you have to

ne
-Wn to T,-
n-1 a
- F - (3.9)
ne Q-T,QRT,R -
-Wnh-n a a either

n-1

where
Nand is the number of concentrated masses, equal to the number of levels of the building

Substituting the eq. 3.9 in eq. 3.7 it is obtained that the lateral force acting on the center of mass of the
levelnis equal to:

ne
-Wn
n-1 to T,-
a
Pn -Wnh-n (3.10)
ne Q- Ta,QRT ,R -
-Wnhn - a either

n-1

For structures located on land TypeIIYIII (soft soils) and that are susceptible to developing hysteretic
behaviors with degradations of stiffness and/or resistance, Eq. 3.10 becomes:

ne
-Wn a T a,- A Ta
n-1 CD
Pn - Wnh-n (3.11)
ne Q-Ta,Q RTa, R -
-Wnhn - either

n-1

80
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.3.5.2 Valuation of seismic forces estimatingTe0

Shear forces lower than those calculated according to section 3.3.5.1 may be adopted, provided that the
approximate value of the fundamental period of the structure is taken into account,Te0.This one may
approximated from the Schwartz quotient by the equation:

1/ 2
-ne -
WXntwon -
two- -
-n-1-
Te0 - - (3.12)
g- -nePnX -
n
-- n-1 --
where
Pn is the lateral force acting on the mass of the leveln (ecs. 3.10 or 3.11) is
Xn the level offsetnin the direction of the force is the acceleration due to
g gravity

For the calculation of forces, proceed as in subsection 3.3.5.1 with the relationv0/WTequal to to Te0,- /
[Q-Te0,QRTe0,Reither-] (where the damping factor, -Te0,-and is evaluated in

Te0).This implies that the seismic forces are:

ne
-Wn to T,-
n-1 e0
Pn-W- nhn N and (3.13)
Q-Te0 , QRT , R-
-W h-nn e0 either

n-1

or for structures located land TypeIIYIII (soft soils) and that are susceptible to developing hysteretic
behaviors with degradations of stiffness and/or resistance

ne

- Wn
to Te0 , -A CD Te0
Pn -W h-
nn
n-1
(3.14)
ne
Q-Te0 ,QRTe0 ,R -
-W h-nn either

n-1

3.3.5.3 twisting moments

twisting moment,Moyou n,on the mezzanineno,will be taken equal to the shear forcevnon the mezzanine

multiplied by the design eccentricity,and- n ,which is most unfavorable for each system
n-
eitherand

structure strength. However, no structural element shall have a strength less than that necessary to
resist the direct shear force.

--Go
n -; n and
n-dn- e- 0.05bn
Moyoun - - (3.15)
--Go
n -; n and
n- 0.5e
- n- 0.05bn

where
andn is the calculated torsional eccentricity at the mezzanineno,equal to the distance between the center
of torsion and the line of action of the shear force corresponding to said mezzanine

81
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

bn is the maximum dimension in plan of the mezzaninenmeasured perpendicular to the

direction of ground motion
anddn is the torsional eccentricity increased to account for dynamic effects

In the case of review of strength limit states or review of maximum deformations using the collapse
level (section 3.3.7),anddnwill be equal to:

anddn-1.5en (3.16)

For the review of horizontal displacements due to damage limitation to non-structural elements,
considering the level of service,anddnwill take the following value:

anddn- en- ean-1.5en (3.17)

where
andan will be equal to the lesser of the following two values:

20en
an- 0.05(b n- b-n)
and - 0.05(bn- b-n) (3.18)
bn

1 -two two two two 2 2- 4e two -

and
an - -Lyn- en-Fkn- (Lyn - en-Ftwo
kn) n Fkn
two- (3.19)
2 en- -

(btwon- n )
b-two
(3.20)
Ltwo
yn-
12
Y
b-n is the plan dimension of the structure in the direction of the earthquake is the

Fkn
two relationship between the torsional and lateral stiffnesses of the plan

The additional eccentricityandancan be neglected whenFtwo- kn 5Lyntwo

- en. two

The positive or negative sign of the eccentricity that appears in Eq. 3.15 does not refer to the line of
action of the shear force being on the positive or negative side of the center of torsion; indicates that
the eccentricity will increase0.05bnor will it be reduced0.05bn.Also, the design eccentricity
in each mezzanine, less than half of the maximum torsional eccentricity calculated for the mezzanines
below the reference mezzanine may not be taken, and the torsional moment of that mezzanine may
not be less than half of the maximum torsional moment calculated for the mezzanines. that are
above said mezzanine.

In structures in which the seismic behavior factor,Q,be greater than or equal to3.0,the torsional
eccentricity in no mezzanine shall exceed0.2bn.For these structures, it will be taken into account that
the effect of torsion can increase when any of its resistant elements that contribute significantly to
the total stiffness of the floor enters the non-linear range or fails. In order to reduce this effect, the
resistance of the elements that take the interstory shear force must be substantially proportional to
their stiffness. These items must be of the

82
 RECOMMENDATIONS

same nature. For example, if on one side the stiffness and strength are predominantly provided by
columns, on the opposite side they must also be predominantly provided by columns, or if on one
side by concrete walls, on the opposite side also by concrete walls.

3.3.5.4 Overturning moments

The turning moment in the leveln, Mov n,obtained as the integral of the shear diagram of
mezzaninevn, for each resistant system of the structure can be calculated according to the eq.:

- h- -ne
Monv- -0.8 - 0.2 n--vk-H H-k-1 k - (3.21)
- H-kn-1
where
H is the height of the structure

The reduced overturning moment shall not be less than the product of the shear force at the leveln
multiplied by its distance from the center of gravity of the part of the structure that is above the level
n.

3.3.5.5 second order effects

The analysis should explicitly take into account the effectsP–-,that is, the additional moments and
shears caused by the vertical loads acting on the deformed structure, as well as by the influence of
the axial load on the stiffness and resistance of the structure. These effects cannot be neglected
when, on any mezzanineno,the relative displacement of the mezzanine,X-n, multiplied byQR Te0, Reither
-,and divided by the height of the mezzanine,hn, exceed0.08Vn/Wn- ,being vnthe shear force of the
mezzanineno,YWn-the weight of the structure including dead and live loads acting above the
mezzaninen.An approximate way of estimating second-order effects is to amplify the deformation
and moments at the ends of the columns calculated at each floor, neglecting these effects, by means
of the amplification factor:

X-n
hn
- n -1 - (3.22)
vn X-n
-1.2
Wn- hn

The moments at the ends of the girders will have to be corrected proportionally with their angular
stiffnesses so that the balance of moments at the nodes is satisfied.

3.3.5.6 vertical component

The effect of the vertical component must be taken into account in the cases mentioned below:

- for all structuresA+ and A1.

- for all structuresA2, B1YB2in seismic zones C and D.

83
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

- In horizontal structural elements, with spans equal to or greater than15 m.

- In horizontal overhangs such as canopies and balconies with a length equal to or greater than3m.
- In horizontal prestressed elements.
- In structures with insulation at the base.
- As well as any other structure or element in which the variation of the vertical seismic
action significantly affects its dimensioning.

The vertical spectral acceleration should be taken as indicated in Eq. 3.23. Its effect should be
considered acting in both directions.

- 1.4Fda- Tv- 0.05

-
-
ava-,Tv -- 23 (3.23)
-0.05-
-1.4Fda--- -- T-0.05
- -Tv -
v
-
where
Fd is the distance factor equal toar 0/ 200,but not greater than 1
ava-,Tv is the vertical spectral ordinate based on the modified spectral ordinate plus
unfavorable, as indicated in section 3.3.1.7 or 3.3.1.8
Tv is the vertical period of the structural system and/or the element under review. If
the vertical period is not known, the value ofTv= 0.05s

For the static method, an equivalent vertical force must be considered acting in both directions on
each of the levels, in which the masses are supposed to be concentrated, as illustrated in figure 3.3.
This force will depend on the vertical ordinate,ava-,Tv,and will be obtained with the following
equation:

ne

-
n-1
Wn
Pnv -W h-
nn ne
av a-,Tv (3.24)
-n-1W h-
n n

where
Pnv is the vertical equivalent static force acting on the mass of the leveln

84
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Figure 3.3 Distribution of vertical seismic forces

3.3.5.7 Combined effects of ground movements

The structures will be analyzed before the action of three orthogonal components of the ground
movement, two horizontal and one vertical. The effects on the response, such as displacements and
mechanical elements, will be combined using the square root of the sum of the squares of the effects
in the three orthogonal directions:

two two
H.Htwo x -SY-Sz (3.25)

3.3.5.8 asymmetric behavior

In the design of structures whose force-strain relationships differ in opposite directions, the
corresponding resistance factors will be divided by the factorAACTe0,being for land
GuyYO:

- k 1Te0 --
ktwo
A AC Te0 -
- 1- d 1- (3.26)
- k3 - Tke0two--
-

and for soft ground (TypeIIYIII):

- -T -k -
- k 1--e0- - -
two

- -Ts - -
AACTe0 -1- d -1- - (3.27)
- k3 - T e0
-1 -
- Ts -
- -
where

85
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

d is the difference between the value of the ratioto Te0,- /[Q-Te0,QRTe0,Reither-]either

to Te0,- ACDTe0/[Q-Te0,QRTe0,Reither-]as the case may be, that would cause the plastic failure
or creep of the construction in one direction or the other, expressed as a fraction of
gravity, where the damping factor, -Te0,-and,is evaluated inTe0
k1, ktwo, k3are parameters that depend on the type of terrain and the assumed hysteretic behavior
for the structural system and whose values are provided in table 3.4

Table 3.4 Parameter Values

Terrain Type Behaviour k1 ktwo k3

Soft (TypeIIYIII) elastoplastic 1.7 – 2.9d 0.6 0.2

Degrading 4.2 – 8.6d 1.5 0.6
Firm or rock (TypeYO) elastoplastic 0.25 – 0.1d 0.6 0.2
Degrading 1.0 1.5 0.6

3.3.5.9 Static analysis with soil-structure interaction

The base shear force of the structure in the direction of the analysis, corrected for the interaction with the
soil, it will be calculated with Eq. 3.28, where - is the damping factor evaluated with -Te0,-and
~ ~~~
, and - is the effective damping factor evaluated with, -Te0, -e0 .

- ~ ~ -
~ e0 -
to T, to Te0 ,- to T,-
e0 We0
v0 - W -- - - (3.28)
~~
Q-Te0 ,QRTe0 , R-T-Q-T e0 , Q Q-Te0 , Q - RT e0,Reither -
- -
either

where
We0 is the effective weight of the structure, taking into account what is indicated in section 3.2.6.1
~
Te0 is the effective period of the coupled soil-structure system (item 3.2.6.2) is
~
Q the effective seismic behavior factor (item 3.2.6.3)
~
v0 is the effective base shear force
~
-e0 is the effective damping of the soil-structure system

The period and the effective damping will be calculated in accordance with what is indicated in section 3.2.6.2.
~
In general, it will suffice to multiply by the quotientv0/V0,any computed response without interaction
to get the answer with interaction. This quotient shall in no case be taken less than0.75nor greater
than1.25.

The lateral displacements modified by interaction, including the rotation of the base but neglecting
its translation, can be determined as:
~
~ v- Mo0v--
Xn- 0 -Xn- (h- - D)
n V0- (3.29)
Kr-

86
 RECOMMENDATIONS

where
Mov0 is the overturning moment at the foundation base
Xn is the lateral displacement ofn–th level of the structure with non-deformable base is
Kr the rotational rigidity of the foundation determined as indicated in table 2.2 is the
D depth of the foundation foundation

These displacements must be used in the calculation of the effectsP–-and in the revision of the limit state
due to collisions with adjacent structures.

3.3.6 DYNAMIC METHOD

The dynamic analysis method consists of the same basic steps as the static one, except that the
lateral forces applied at the centers of mass of the stories are determined from the dynamic response
of the structure. Spectral modal analysis and step-by-step analysis or calculation of responses to
specific acceleration records can be used as dynamic methods. The stepwise analysis can also be
modal, as long as the total response is found by superimposing the modal responses for each of the
vibrational modes over time.

3.3.6.1 Spectral Modal Analysis

If the coupling between the degrees of freedom of horizontal translation and rotation with respect to
a vertical axis is neglected in the analysis, the effect of all natural modes of vibration with a period
greater than or equal to0.4sobtained with a rigid base, but in any case at least the first three modes
of translation must be considered in each direction of analysis. When this coupling is explicitly
recognized, the effect of the natural modes must be included which, ordered according to decreasing
values of their vibration periods, are necessary so that the sum of their effective weights is greater
than or equal to the90%of the total weight of the structure. The effective weight of a mode,no,is
determined as follows:

(ZTnμJ)two
Win - g (3.30)
ZTnMZn
where
M is the mass matrix of the structure
Zn is hen–th natural mode of vibration of the rigid base structure is a
J vector with components equal to1.0

The dynamic torsional effect of static eccentricities can be neglected. In such a case, the influence of the
static and accidental eccentricities shall be calculated as specified for the static analysis. Otherwise, when
the static eccentricities are taken into account, it will only be necessary to include the accidental torsion,
with the transverse translation of the centers of mass or the seismic forces of each level.±0.05bnin each
direction of the analysis.

Since the modal responses do not occur simultaneously, the direct superposition of them is an upper
bound on the total response of the structure. Therefore, the modal responsesyesn, whereyesn
can be shear force, lateral displacement, overturning moment, etc., they will be combined to

87
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

calculate total responsesyesaccording to the probabilistic criterion of the square root of the sum of
the squares or SRSS method (eq. 3.31), provided that the periods of the natural modes differ by at
least10%each.

1/2
- Nand -
S- -- -yes n --
two (3.31)
-n-1 -

For responses in natural modes that do not meet this condition, for example structures with torsion or
appendages, the coupling between them will be taken into account. In these cases, it is appropriate to use
the probabilistic criterion of the complete quadratic combination or CQC method:

1/2
-Nand Nand
-
Y - --- --nmyesnyesm-- (3.32)
-n-1 m-1 -
where

8- n - (-
m-- - n) -3 2 nm m nm
-nm- (3.33)
(1--two nm ) two- 4- n - m - nm (1--two nm ) - 4(-twon - -two
m)-two nm

Y
-n, -m are the critical damping fractions associated with then–th andm–th mode, respectively

-nm= -n/ -mbeing -nY -mthe undamped natural frequencies of those modes

It is suggested to assumen= -m= 0.05,unless another value is justified. The modal calculation of the
answersyesncan supply positive or negative values. This ambiguity in the signs is avoided by
considering that the spectral ordinate is always positive.

3.3.6.2 step by step method

For step-by-step analysis, or calculation of responses to specific earthquakes, the use of acceleration
records that reflect the seismic hazard of the site is recommended. The PRODISIS program provides
accelerograms built from the uniform hazard spectra for optimal return period or from the elastic
design spectrum. It is suggested that at least four representative movements be used and the
maximum values of the response used for the design. The particularities of the non-linear behavior
of the structure and the uncertainties in its parameters, both in linear and non-linear behavior, must
be taken into account.

3.3.6.3 Basal shear revision

If with the dynamic method applied it is found that, in the considered direction, the relationv0/WT
is less than0.7aTe0,- /[Q-Te0,QRTe0,Reither-]either0.7aTe0,- ACDTe0/[Q-Te0,QRTe0,Reither-]for
structures with degrading hysteretic behavior located on land TypeIIYIII (soft soils), as the case may
be, all the design forces and the corresponding lateral displacements will be increased in a
proportion such thatv0/WTequal to this value.

88
 RECOMMENDATIONS

This condition implies that the static analysis must always be carried out regardless of the restrictions
indicated for the use of this method. The design base shear force cannot be less than70%that would
provide said analysis taking into account the fundamental period of the structure. However, in no
case shall the shear be less thana 0,- /[Q- 0,QR 0,Reither-]either at 0,- ACD0 /[Q- 0,QR 0,Reither-]WT,whereT
and- 0 .Being,WTthe total weight of the construction, including dead and live loads.

3.3.6.4 Special effects

Whichever method of dynamic analysis is used, overturning moments, second-order effects,
combined effects of ground motions, and asymmetric behavior will be treated as specified for static
analysis, except that The reduction of the overturning moment will only be allowed for purposes of
calculating the overturning moments that act on the foundation.

3.3.6.5 Modal dynamic method with soil-structure interaction

When modal dynamic analysis is used, the soil–structure interaction model can be applied as a
unimodal approximation, replacing mass, stiffness, damping, and oscillator height with equivalent
modal parameters of the structure. Consequently,Me0,Ke0
YCe0should be interpreted, respectively, as the effective mass, stiffness and damping of the assumed
non-deformable base structure vibrating in its fundamental mode andHe0as the effective height of
the centroid of the corresponding inertial forces.

The equations that define the modal parameters of the elementary oscillator are obtained from the period
and damping of the fundamental mode of the structure and equating the base shear and the overturning
moment of the fundamental mode of the structure with those corresponding to the oscillator, which leads
a

(ZT1MJ)two
M e0 - (3.34)
ZT1MZ1

twoMe0
K e0 -4- (3.35)
Ttwo
e0

Me0
Ce0- 4--and (3.36)
Te0

ZT1 MH
He0- (3.37)
ZT1 MJ
where
H is the vector of slop heights of each level, that isH-{h T
- ,h-two,..., h-N}
1

Z1 is the natural mode of vibration obtained by solving the characteristic value

problem defined by the homogeneous matrix equation

89
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

The effective mass and height calculated with the dynamic method, in no case should be taken less
than0.7times the mass and height of the building, respectively. The period and
damping of the fundamental mode of the equivalent system with three degrees of freedom represent
~ ~
effective period and dampingTe0 Y -e0 of the fundamental mode of the structure
interacting with the ground, which can be calculated, approximately, as specified in subsection 3.2.6.2
or, rigorously, as stipulated in the Comments section.

In the spectral modal analysis, the lateral displacements of the structure with a flexible base
corresponding to the fundamental mode, not including the rotation of the base, will be determined as
those of a structure with a rigid base, according to subsection 3.3.6.1, but reduced by interaction What:

~ ~
X1- -1SD T1Z1 (3.38)
where
~ ~ ~ ~
SD Te0 -a Te0 , - / -~e0two
is the spectral shift for the periodTe0,corresponding to
~
effective period of the flexible base structure and ~ -e0- 2-/Te0
- -1 is the participation coefficient of the fundamental mode, calculated as

ZT1ΜJ
-1- ( 3.39)
ZT1MZ1

This leads to the response with reduced interaction due to ductility and overstrength taking the
~~~
form of eq. 3.40, where the damping factor, - --Te0, -e0 .

~ ~
~ -1 to Te0,-
X1- ~two ~ ~~ Z1 (3.40)
-e0Q-Te0,QRTe0,Reither -

The interaction-reduced base shear can be expressed in terms of mass and acceleration as

~~two ~
v1- -e0JMX1T (3.41)

Substituting in this expression Eq. 3.40 and using Eqs. 3.34 and 3.30 (from part 3.3), the base shear
reduced by interaction becomes:

~~
~ to Te0,-
v 1- ~ ~~ We0 (3.42)
Q'Te0,QRTe0,Reither -

The base shear obtained with the dynamic method (eq. 3.42), is similar to that calculated with the
static method (eq. 3.28), as long as the weight of the structure is replaced by its effective weight,
which participates in the fundamental mode. Known displacements of the structure with flexible base
~
X1and the stiffness matrix of the structure with rigid baseK,seismic forces reduced by
interaction are calculated by
~ ~
P1-KX1 (3.43)

90
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Interaction effects will only be taken into account in the fundamental mode. The contribution of the
higher modes will be determined as in the case of structures with a non-deformable base.

In general, it will suffice to multiply by the quotient ~ v1/V0any response computed without interaction for
get the answer with interaction. This quotient in no situation will be taken less than0.75nor greater
than1.25.Likewise, the value calculated for the effective damping in no case will be taken less than the
5%.

The interaction-modified lateral displacements corresponding to the fundamental mode, including

the rotation of the base but neglecting its translation, can be determined as

~
~ v- Mo0v--
Xn1 - 1-Xn0- (h- - D)
n V0- (3.44)
Kr -
where
Mo0v is the overturning moment at the foundation base corresponding to the mode
foundation of the structure
Xn0 is the lateral displacement ofn–th level corresponding to the fundamental mode of the
structure with non-deformable base

These displacements will be used in the calculation of the effectsP–-and in the revision of the limit
state due to collisions with adjacent structures. Modal responses with interaction will be combined
with the same criteria specified for structures without interaction in order to obtain the total
response. In case of opting for the step-by-step analysis in the time domain, the dynamic equilibrium
equation of the equivalent system must be adequately resolved, taking into account what is
stipulated for structures without interaction.

3.3.7 REVIEW OF LIMIT STATES

It will be checked that the lateral stiffness of the structure is sufficient to meet the following two
conditions:

3.3.7.1 Horizontal displacements due to damage limitation to non-structural elements

(service limit)
The differences between the lateral displacements of consecutive stories due to horizontal shear
forces, calculated with one of the seismic analysis methods for the spectral ordinates of the
serviceability limit state described in subsection 3.3.1.7, will not exceed0.002 times the corresponding
elevation differences, unless there are no elements incapable of supporting appreciable
deformations, such as masonry walls, or these are separated from the main structure in such a way
that they are not damaged by their deformations. In this case, the limit will be0.004.

The calculation of lateral deformations may be omitted when the simplified method of seismic analysis is
applied. In reviewing this limit state, the importance of the structure will not be considered.

91
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.3.7.2 Horizontal displacements for security against collapse

The differences between the lateral displacements of consecutive stories produced by the interstory
seismic shear forces, calculated for the modified spectral ordinates
– to Te0,- /[Q-Te0,QRTe0,Reither-]eitherto Te0,- ACDTe0/[Q-Te0,QRTe0,Reither-]-,as appropriate,
multiplied by the factorQR Tand,Reither-and divided by the corresponding elevation difference, not
will exceed the floor distortions indicated in table 3.5, according to the corresponding structural
systems. The value ofRTe0,Reitherwill be calculated for the fundamental period of the structure. The
calculation of lateral deformations may be omitted when the simplified method of seismic analysis is
applied. In reviewing this limit state, the importance of the structure will be taken into account.

Table 3.5 Permissible floor distortions

STRUCTURAL SYSTEM Q DISTORTION

4 0.030
Ductile reinforced concrete frames
3 0.025
4 0.030
ductile steel frames
3 0.025
4 0.030
Ductile steel and reinforced concrete composite section frames
3 0.020

Steel, reinforced concrete or composite frames with intermediate ductility

1.25 0.008

Frames made of steel, reinforced concrete, or composites of both materials with

two 0.015
limited ductility
Frames with flat slabs without walls or braces two 0.015

Steel frames with eccentric wind braces 4 0.020

Steel, reinforced concrete or composite frames with concentric wind braces

3 0.015

Walls combined with ductile frames of reinforced concrete, or steel plate, or

3 0.015
composites with the two materials or plywood walls
Confined masonry load-bearing walls of solid pieces with horizontal reinforcement or
two 0.008
mesh
Confined masonry load-bearing walls made of solid pieces; Horizontally Reinforced
Confined Hollow-Piece Masonry or Mesh-Reinforced Confined Hollow-Piece Masonry two 0.006

diaphragm walls two 0.006

Load-bearing walls of combined and confined masonry two 0.004

Masonry load-bearing walls of hollow pieces with interior reinforcement, or wooden

1.5 0.004
walls of stave
Walls combined with reinforced concrete frames with limited ductility 1.5 0.010

Confined masonry load-bearing walls of hollow concrete blocks 1.25 0.003

Masonry load-bearing walls that do not meet the specifications for confined masonry
1.25 0.002
or internally reinforced masonry

92
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.3.7.3 glass breakage

In facades, both interior and exterior, the placement of the glass in the frames, or the connection of these
with the structure, will be such that the deformations of the latter do not affect the glass. To do this, it will
be verified that around each glass pane or each frame there is a gap no less than the relative displacement
between the ends of the pane or frame, calculated from the shear deformation of the mezzanine and
divided by1 houryou/byou,wherebyouis the base of the board or frame andhyouits
height. For this calculation, the displacements mentioned in section 3.3.7.2 will be considered.

3.3.7.4 Separation with adjacent structures

All construction must be separated from its boundaries with neighboring properties a distance of no less
than5cmnor less than the horizontal displacement of the level in question. The horizontal displacement
will be obtained as calculated in section 3.3.7.2, increased by0.001either0.003times the height of the level
above the slope for land TypeIIYIII,respectively. If the simplified method of seismic analysis is used, the
mentioned separation will not be, at any level, less than5cmnor less than the height of the level above the
foundation multiplied by0.002, 0.004either0.006,for land TypesI, IIYIII, respectively.

The separation between bodies of the same structure or between adjacent structures will be at least
equal to the sum of those that, in accordance with the preceding specifications, correspond to each
one. A separation equal to half of this sum may be left, if the two bodies have the same height and
type of structure and the slabs coincide at the same height, at all levels. When reviewing the limit
state of failure of the foundation, the horizontal inertial force that acts on the volume of soil that is
under the foundation will be taken into account and that, subject to the maximum acceleration
of the normalized terrain,to 0,- (whereTand- 0 ,ec.1.14), it would potentially be displaced by a shear
failure.

3.3.8 REVIEW OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

In the safety review of existing buildings, the value of the seismic behavior factor will be adopted,Q,
that corresponds to the case whose requirements are essentially satisfied by the structure, unless the
adoption of a value greater than this is justified to the satisfaction of the owner or the dependency.

If the collapse of the structure exceeds0.01times its height, the asymmetry will be taken into account
by multiplying the design seismic forces by1.0+10-pwhen the simplified method of seismic analysis is
used, where -pthe slump of the structure divided by its height, or as established in subsection 3.3.7.2
when using static or dynamic spectral modal analysis. If the dynamic method of stepwise analysis is
used, explicit consideration of the slope will be made.

When reinforcing a Group constructionB.with additional structural elements, it will be valid to adopt
the values ofQthat correspond to the new structure, provided that it is capable of resisting, on each
mezzanine, at leastfifty%of the design shear force, with the existing structure resisting the rest. At
each level, the resistances of the added elements must be compatible with the corresponding design
forces. It should be verified that the floor systems have the rigidity and

93
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

sufficient resistance to transmit the forces generated in them by the reinforcing elements that have
been placed and, if not, the floor systems must be reinforced and/or stiffened to achieve this.

3.3.9 SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION CRITERIA IN FOUNDATIONS Shallow

3.3.9.1 foundations
For structures supported on strip footings with a larger dimension in the direction of analysis or on
foundation caissons, which have stiffness and resistance such that it is possible to assume that their
base moves as a rigid body, the dynamic stiffnesses will be obtained from foundations circular
equivalents using the analytical approximations presented in this section. The radii of the circular
foundations equivalent to the sway surfaces for the translation and rotation modes are given,
respectively, by the following equations:

- -A1/ 2
Rh - - - (3.45)
---

- 4 I1/
-4
Rr- - - (3.46)
---
where
A is the area of the foundation
Yo is the moment of inertia of the foundation area with respect to its centroidal axis of
rotation

Figure 3.4 Foundation model with footings.

In terms of these equivalent radii, the normalized frequency is defined as

-e0Rh -e0Rr
-h- Y - r- (3.47)
vs vs

94
 RECOMMENDATIONS

where
Rh is the radius of the equivalent circular foundation for the translation model is
Rr the radius of the equivalent circular foundation for the rotation model
vs is the propagation speed of shear waves in the equivalent ground layer is the
-e0 fundamental frequency of the structure

Is used -hfor horizontal translation mode and -rfor the rotation mode (tables 2.2 and 2.3).

On the other hand, in the case of sufficiently rigid and resistant structures, founded on strip footings
with a short dimension in the direction of the analysis or on isolated footings (figure 3.4), the stiffness
and damping of the assembly can be determined using Eqs. 3.48 – 3.51:

-
K0h - K0
n
hn (3.48)

-
K0r- andnz twoKvn
0
(3.49)
n

Ch--Chn (3.50)
n

Cr--andtwo nzCvn (3.51)

n

the subscriptndenotes values corresponding to then–th shoe; the parametersK0 YK0 vnAre the
hn

horizontal and vertical static stiffnesses of a footing, respectively.ChnYCvncorrespond to the damping

of the footing in horizontal and vertical translation, respectively;andnzis the distance in the analysis
direction between the centroid of the footing and the centroidal axis of the foundation floor. The
stiffnesses and dampings of the individual footings are obtained using the value ofRh
corresponding to the footing in question.

3.3.9.2 friction piles

For structures founded with piles or piers, few reliable solutions are available that allow for a simple
and rational evaluation of increases in foundation stiffness and damping. In the case of friction piles
(figure 3.5), the static stiffness of the assembly is determined using the equations obtained after
neglecting the rotational stiffness of the piles. the subscriptndenotes values corresponding to then–
th pile;andpnis the distance between
centroid of the pile and the centroidal axis of rotation of the foundation area and,K0 hnYK0 vnare the rigidities
horizontal and vertical statics of a pile, respectively.

-
K0h - K0 hn (3.52)
n

-
K0r- andpn twoKhn0 (3.53)
n

95
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Figure 3.5 Foundation model with piles.

The static stiffnesses, as well as the stiffness and damping coefficients for the horizontal and vertical
translation modes of a flexible pile planted on an elastic layer with a rigid base can be obtained from
table 2.2. These impedance functions are applicable only when the condition is met.

Lp-Lc (3.54)
where
Lp is the length of the pile
Lc is the active length of the pile, i.e. the length of the pile that transmits the load to the
ground, calculated as follows

-0.25
- AND
L c- 2dp-- P -- (3.55)
s-
-AND
where
ANDp is the modulus of elasticity of the pile
ANDs is the modulus of elasticity of the soil deposit is the
dp diameter of the pile

3.3.9.3 Pile group effect

In an arrangement ofNpiles attached to a rigid slab it is advisable to take into account the group effect,
due to the interaction between piles through the ground. Known the dynamic stiffness of a pile
~
individual for horizontal and vertical translation modes,Khand ~ Kv,the dynamic rigidities of the group
of piles will be calculated using the equations presented in subsections 3.3.9.3.1 and 3.3.9.3.2.

96
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.3.9.3.1 Horizontal translation mode

~
YesKhis the dynamic stiffness of a pile in horizontal translation, the dynamic stiffness in translation
horizontal of the group of piles will be given by

N N
~ ~
Kgh-K---h ij (3.56)
i-1 j-1

where
-hij is an element of the inverse of the matrix-h(interaction factors) of the set of piles

Matrix-hhas for elements a

--p costwo-ij - -sen

s two-ij Yesi - j
-hij- - (3.57)
- 1 Yesi - j
where
-ij is the angle between the line joining the pilesYoYj,and the horizontal direction of analysis are
-p, -s factors of dynamic interaction between the pilesYoYj,spaced a distance - between axes, and
are given by

-1/ 2
-
-two- and-(-s-i )--/ v
- p- - L
(3.58)
- dp--
-

-1/ 2
--two- and-(-Yes vs
- s- - (3.59)
- p--
-d
where
Yo is the imaginary unit equal to -1
vL is the analogous Lysmer velocity, equal tovL- 3.4vs/[-(1--s)]
-s is the Poisson's ratio of the soil
dp pile diameter

3.3.9.3.2 Rotation mode

~
YesKvis the dynamic stiffness of a pile in vertical translation, the dynamic stiffness in rotation of the group
of piles will be given by

N N
~ ~
Kgr -Kv - x Yo--v ijxj (3.60)
i-1 j-1

where
xi,j is the distance, positive or negative, between the axis of the pileYoeitherj,and the axis of rotation of the
pile arrangement
-vij is an element of the inverse of the matrix -vof the set of piles

Matrix-vhas for elements a

97
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

-- s Yesi - j
- -ijv - (3.61)
-1 Yesi - j
where
-s is the dynamic interaction factor given by Eq. 3.59

To the dynamic stiffness of the group of piles, in horizontal translation and rotation, must be added the
corresponding contribution of the foundation slab or caisson, that is,K0 h YK0 rgiven by the table
2.2.

3.3.9.3.3 Seismic actions on foundations

For foundation design purposes, the extent of the actions will be the joint responsibility of the
superstructure and foundation designers. Special care must be taken in changing the magnitude of
the loads and the position of the resulting forces, caused by the earthquake, since this may result in
unfavorable changes in the foundation reaction diagram and/or variation in the eccentricity value. In
addition, the shear at the base of the structure, the overturning moments due both to the eccentricity
of the vertical loads with respect to the centroid of the foundation area, and to horizontal stresses
must be calculated and taken into account in the design.

98
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.4

TYPE 2 STRUCTURES
INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES

99
 RECOMMENDATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 3.4 STRUCTURES TYPE 2: INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... .102

FLOWCHART............................................... ..............................................103

3.4.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS ................................................ ...........................................105

3.4.2 CLASSIFICATION OF INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES...................................................105

3.4.2.1 Industrial Type I............................................... ........................................................... .........105
3.4.2.2 Industrial type II............................................... ........................................................... ........105
3.4.2.3 Industrial type III............................................... ........................................................... .......106

3.4.3 MODIFICATION OF THE DESIGN SPECTRUM DUE TO DAMPING ......................106

3.4.4 SEISMIC BEHAVIOR FACTOR ................................................ ............107

3.4.5 REDUCTION FACTOR FOR OVERSTRENGTH ................................................ 107

3.4.6 REDUNDANCY FACTOR.............................................................. .................................108

3.4.7 CONDITIONS OF REGULARITY .................................................. .........................108

3.4.8 ANALYSIS CRITERIA.............................................................. .........................................108

3.4.8.1 Combined effects of ground movements ........................................................... ......108
3.4.8.2 Minimum analysis requirements ........................................... ...................................108

3.4.9 CHOICE OF THE TYPE OF ANALYSIS................................................... ...........................110

3.4.10 STATIC METHOD................................................... ................................................110

3.4.10.1 Valuation of seismic forces without estimatingTe0........................................................... .........110
3.4.10.2 Valuation of seismic forces estimatingTe0........................................................... ..........111
3.4.10.3 Appendices and sudden changes in structure ................................................ ...........112
3.4.10.4 Twisting moments ........................................................... ............................................112
3.4.10.5 Overturning moments............................................... ........................................................... .112

3.4.11 DYNAMIC METHOD................................................... ................................................112

3.4.11.1 Spectral Modal Method .................................................. ............................................113
3.4.11.2 Step-by-step method................................................... ........................................................... ..113
3.4.11.3 Basal shear review .................................................. .........................................113

3.4.12 REVIEW OF LIMIT STATES.............................................. ..........................113

3.4.12.1 Horizontal displacements due to limitation of damages to elements not
structural (service limit) ........................................... ...........................................114
3.4.12.2 Horizontal displacements for safety against collapse ................................................114
3.4.12.3 Glass breakage .................................................. ........................................................... ......115
3.4.12.4 Separation with adjacent structures................................................... ......................115

3.4.13 SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION ................................................ ....................115

101
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

NOMENCLATURE
b Base of the structure Base v0 Base shear force
byou of the board or frame WT Construction weight including dead and
h Height of the structure live loads
h'n Height of level n above the foundation Wn level weightno,including dead and live loads
hyou Height of the board or frame
he frame length - Reducing factor that depends on the
Pn Lateral force acting at the center of mass flexibility of the structure
of the leveln -- Redundancy factor
Q Seismic behavior factor Fundamental -and structural damping
Te0 period of the structure Lower limit of the Functions
Ta plateau of the spectrum Upper limit of the to Ta,- Normalized maximum spectral ordinate
Tb plateau of the spectrum Structural period Q-Tand,Q Reduction factor for ductility
Tand in the direction of the analysis
RTand,Reither Reduction factor for overstrength

Reither Index overstrength factor -Tand,-and Damping factor

102
 RECOMMENDATIONS

FLOWCHART

STRUCTURES TYPE 2: INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES

structures structures structures

Guy Guy Guy
Industry I Industry II Industry III

two 3

Low height Great height

- -

- =1.25 -and= 2% - =1 . 25 -and= 2%

Q = 2.0
- =1.0 -and= 3% Q = 1.25 - =1.0 -and= 3%
Q = 1.5 Reither= 1.80 Reither= 2
- =0.8 -and= 4% - =0.8 -and= 4%
( I don't know
(I don't know -and= 5% -and= 5%
It allows
It allows
correct by
correct by
irregularity)
irregularity)

two 3

- -

Q = 2.0 - =1.25 -and= 2%

Q = 1.8 - =1.25 -and= 2%
Q = 1.5 - =1.0 Q = 1.5 - =1.0
Reither= 2 -and= 3% Reither= 2 -and= 3%
- =0.8 -and= 4% - =0.8 -and= 4%
(I don't know (I don't know
-and= 5% -and= 5%
It allows It allows
correct by correct by
irregularity) irregularity)

103
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

TYPE OF ANALYSIS

STATIC METHOD DYNAMIC METHOD

modal method step by step method

estimatingTe0,calculated spectral step
without estimatingTe0 by a procedure
well-founded
theoretical or empirical
How I know
stipulates in
structures
type Buildings
(Item 3.3)

As stipulated in Building-
type structures (Section
3.3) in conjunction with
the following
considerations:

1. It will be assumed that each

natural period of vibration of
the structure can be less or
They will be used greater than the one
criteria established in calculated up to25%,
buildings type structures adopting the most
(Item 3.3) unfavorable value.

2. The spectral accelerations for

each natural period of
vibration of the structure
moments moments Component effects must be multiplied by the
twisting turning vertical combined damping factor,
of the
movements
of the land

Shear Check
basal (not less than the
70%of the static)

104
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.4.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

There is a great variety and disparity in the characteristics of the structures found in an industrial
complex. There are structures with characteristics similar to buildings, however, most of them have
totally different configurations and geometries. The latter are characterized by the lack of structural
connections between their members, producing a lower damping level compared to what is
supposed to occur in buildings.

In the seismic design of industrial-type structures, it is necessary to have a clear vision of the basic
principles that govern their seismic response and of the design criteria on which the procedures
established in these recommendations are based. In specific cases, it may be favorable to adopt more
conservative criteria that may have long-term global economic benefits. Due to the complexity of the
structures and their components, it is difficult to cover all the possible variations in their seismic
response.

3.4.2 CLASSIFICATION OF INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES

In this section, industrial structures are classified into three types, depending on their size and use.

3.4.2.1 Industrial Type I

They are all structures that, due to their size, cover large clearings. The length of the structure is usually
the characteristic dimension of the construction, such as warehouses and/or warehouses, workshops and
machine houses.

Figure 4.1 Structure type Industrial I

3.4.2.2 Industrial Type II

Structures that support pipes or conduction lines. They are those structures that, both in length and
height, will be defined by the direction and trajectory of a pipe or the dimensioning of a piece of
equipment, as is the case of pipe racks.

105
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Figure 4.2 Structure type Industrial II

3.4.2.3 Industry Type III

These structures give support to industrial equipment, whose dimensions will be defined by their
dimensions, accesses or places for maneuvers. These can be boilers, heat recuperators, transformers
or turbines, cooling towers and horizontal tanks.

Figure 4.3 Industrial III type structure

3.4.3 MODIFICATION OF THE DESIGN SPECTRUM BY DAMPING

According to the definition of elastic design spectra, a structural damping value is implied, -andof5%.
However, in industrial structures, the value of structural damping depends on the material and the
structure, so in most cases it is lower. Therefore, it is required to modify the ordinates of the design
spectrum by multiplying them by the factor of
damping, -Tand,-and,in the same way as for Building-type structures (eq. 2.1, item 3.2.3).
The values of -andrecommended are listed in the table below.

106
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Table 4.1 Damping values

STRUCTURAL SYSTEM -and(%)

Light steel structures welded or with joints based on high-resistance screws

two
working with friction

Bolted lightweight steel structures 3

Rigid steel structures with rigid welded connections 4

Rigid steel structures with rigid bolted connections 5

prestressed concrete structures 4

reinforced concrete structures 5

wooden structures 4

3.4.4 SEISMIC BEHAVIOR FACTOR

In the case of industrial structures, the factors of seismic behavior,Q,depend on its geometric
configuration. The values indicated in table 4.2 should be taken. The criterion to define the reduction
factor for ductility,Q-Tand, Q ,It will be carried out as indicated in section 3.2.4.

3.4.5 REDUCTION FACTOR FOR OVERSTRENGTH

In the seismic design of industrial structures, the factors indicated in table 4.2 will be used.

Table 4.2 Factors of seismic behavior and overresistance.

Structure type Q Reither

h Steel two 1.8

Low height -0.5
b Concrete 1.5 1.8
Industrial Type I
h Steel 1.25 two
Great height -0.5
b Concrete 1.25 two
Steel two two
Industrial Type II
Concrete 1.5 two
Steel 1.8 two
Industrial Type III
Concrete 1.5 two
Wherebis the basis andhis the height of the structure, according to section 3.4.2.
Alternatively, other values ofQ and Reitheras long as its value is technically justified.

The criterion for defining the reduction factor due to overstrength,RTand, Reither,It will be carried out as indicated in
section 3.2.5.

107
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.4.6 REDUNDANCY FACTOR

The criteria to define this factor in the three types of industrial structures (I, II and III) will be the same as
that specified in section 3.3.1.4 for Building-type structures.

3.4.7 CONDITIONS OF REGULARITY

In the three types of industrial structures (I, II and III) the irregularity is implicit in the seismic
behavior values,Q,recommended. Therefore, the reducing factor for ductility,Q- ,should not be
multiplied by the corrective factor - .

3.4.8 ANALYSIS CRITERIA

As mentioned above, the industrial structures referred to in these recommendations are all those
structural systems that are part of industrial plants and that require that the seismic design criteria
consider particular effects and somewhat different from those specified for Building-type structures.

3.4.8.1 Combined effects of ground movements

Structural systems of this type will be analyzed under the action of three orthogonal ground motion
components: two horizontal and one vertical, as indicated in subsections 3.3.5.6 and 3.3.5.7. These
seismic components will be combined with other effects that may occur under operating conditions,
including gravitational loads, and that may be critical to their structural behavior. The definition of
the basic load conditions and combinations will be established based on the particular characteristics
of the special structure of interest.

3.4.8.2 Minimum analysis requirements

The analysis of the effects due to each component of the ground movement must satisfy the
following requirements:

1. The influence of lateral forces will be analyzed taking into account the horizontal and
vertical displacements and the turns of all the elements that make up the structure,
as well as their continuity and rigidity. It is possible that, due to the type of
structuring, all the deformations and twists in the structural elements contribute
significantly to the final displacements, such as axial deformations in columns or
due to shear in beams, which are generally neglected. Large rigid connections can
also be important where the shear deformations in the connection can increase, or
effects that, due to the geometry and structure of the building, induce non-linear
effects that can cause the stiffness of its components to vary.

108
 RECOMMENDATIONS

2. Local deformations due to gravitational forces acting on the deformed structure and
generating significant second-order effects (P--).

3. The local deformations of the land that can induce differential settlements will be
considered.

4. In metal structures covered with reinforced concrete, it will be feasible to consider

compatibility in the calculation of forces and stiffnesses, ensuring the combined
work of the composite sections.

5. If the calculation indicates the appearance of stresses between the foundation and the
ground, it will be admitted that in one area of the foundation there are no contact
forces, and the balance of the calculated total forces and moments must be satisfied
with the rest of the area, provided the ground strength is not exceeded. The security
against the limit states of the foundation will be reviewed. If there are elements capable
of taking tensions, such as piles or piers, attention will be paid to them in the analysis.

6. The shear force in any horizontal plane must be distributed among the resistant
elements in proportion to their stiffness, considering the stiffness of the floor,
diaphragm or horizontal bracing system. Such distribution may be adequately
achieved by appropriate three-dimensional analysis.

It will be verified that the deformations of the structural systems, including those of
the floor slabs, are compatible with each other. It will be checked that all the
structural elements, including the slabs and the bracing of the floor or roof
systems, are capable of resisting the efforts induced by the seismic forces.

Figure 4.4 Definition of a flexible diaphragm.

Diaphragms are horizontal or sloped systems that transmit lateral seismic forces to
vertical resisting elements, including horizontal bracing systems. A diaphragm is
flexible when the maximum horizontal displacement calculated in the plane of the
diaphragm, under lateral loads, is greater than twice the average relative
displacement of the story in question (figure 4.4). In the opposite case it will be a
rigid diaphragm and all the

109
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Recommendations for Building type structures are applicable in the latter case.
When there are flexible diaphragms, the additional forces in their plane that are
generated by their very flexibility must be considered, also considering those of
their connections to the resistant vertical elements. This type of behavior is
common especially in prefabricated and prestressed structures, so the necessary
considerations must be taken.

As a simplification in the seismic design of constructions up to two stories high or

no higher than6m,with floor or roof systems braced by systems whose in-plane
stiffness is small compared to the stiffness of the elements that provide the lateral
resistance, it may be considered that each of these resistant elements is subjected
to the corresponding part of the seismic force to your tax area at each level.

7. In the design of frames containing masonry panels, it will be assumed that the shear
forces acting on them are balanced by axial and shear forces in the members that
constitute the frame.

Likewise, it will be checked that the corners of the frame are capable of resisting the
efforts caused by the thrusts exerted on them by the boards.

3.4.9 CHOICE OF THE TYPE OF ANALYSIS

The seismic analysis of industrial structures can be carried out using two methods: a) static and b)
dynamic. Dynamic analysis will be required for all structures where the effects of higher modes of
vibration or excessive dynamic amplification can significantly affect the response of major building
components or expensive equipment, and where flexible floor diaphragms are present.

3.4.10 STATIC METHOD

The dynamic effects on the structure produced by the earthquake will be simulated by equivalent
static forces acting in the direction of ground motion.

3.4.10.1 Valuation of seismic forces without estimatingTe0

To calculate the design shear forces at different levels of a structure, the following two load states
acting simultaneously will be assumed:

The first state refers to a set of horizontal forces that act on each of the points where the masses of
the structure are supposed to be concentrated. Each of these forces will be taken equal to the
product of the weight of the corresponding mass by a coefficient that varies linearly with height, from
zero at the structure's offset to a maximum at its upper end, regardless of the fundamental period of
the structure, according to the following relationship:

110
 RECOMMENDATIONS

v0 to Ta,-
-0.95 (4.1)
WT Q-Ta,QRTa, Reither-
where
v0 is the base shear force
WT is the total weight of the construction, including dead and live loads
to Ta,- is the normalized maximum spectral ordinate
Ta is the lower limit of the plateau of the design spectrum
- is the redundancy factor
-Tand,-and is the damping factor

According to the above, the horizontal force applied at the levelnwill be equal to

Nand
-Wn to T,-
n-1 a
Pn- 0.95Wnh-n Nand (4.2)
Q-T,aQ RT, aReither-
-Wnhn -
n-1

where
Pn is the lateral force acting at the center of mass of the leveln is the
Wn weight of the levelno,including dead and live loads is the height of
h-n the levelnabout rudeness
Nand is the number of concentrated masses

The second state considers a horizontal force that acts on the upper end of the structure without including
tanks, appendages or other elements whose structure differs radically from the rest of the construction;
this force will be equal to:

to T-
a,
Pn - 0.05WT (4.3)
Q-Ta,QRTa, Reither-

In this way, the basal shear force resulting from the two load states acting simultaneously is modified
by the ductility, overstrength, redundancy, flexibility and damping of the structure.

In very irregular structures, such as those in which the floors are not complete, it is convenient to use
a dynamic analysis where all the vibration modes that contribute significantly to the structural
response participate.

3.4.10.2 Valuation of seismic forces estimatingTe0

Shear forces lower than those calculated according to section 3.4.10.1 may be adopted, provided that the
approximate value of the fundamental period of vibration of the structure is taken into account. This
period must be calculated by a well-founded theoretical or empirical procedure.

For the calculation of forces I know will proceed with the relationship v0/WT Same a
0.95aTe0,- - /[Q- Te0,QRTe0, Reither-] .This implies that the seismic forces are:

111
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Nand
-Wn to T,-
e0
Pn - 0.95Wnh-nNandn-1 - (4.4)
Q-Te0,QRTe0, Reither -
-Wnhn -
n-1

where
to Te0,-is the normalized spectral ordinate, corresponding toTe0and considering the changes
due to damping different from5%.
-is a reducing factor that depends on the flexibility of the structure, - -Tb/Te0,what should not be taken
smaller than0.4nor greater than1.0when the characteristic periodTbbe greater thanTe0

For the case of the horizontal force acting on the upper end of the structure, it will be equal to.

to T,-
e0
Pn -0.05WTQ-Te0,QRTe0, Reither- - (4.5)

3.4.10.3 Appendices and sudden changes in structure

The stability of tanks that are on the structures, as well as that of any other element whose
structuring differs radically from that of the rest of the construction, will be verified assuming that
they can be subjected to a horizontal acceleration not less than double that resulting apply the
specifications relating to seismic forces, nor less than0.5of gravity; the review will also be done under
a vertical acceleration of0.5of gravity. Included in this requirement are those elements subject to
stresses that depend mainly on their own acceleration and not on the shear force or the overturning
moment, as is the case with slabs that transmit inertial forces from the masses they support.

3.4.10.4 Torsional moments

The effects of torsion will be treated considering the presence of accidental eccentricities in addition
to the calculated eccentricities, as specified in relation to Building-type structures.

Such specifications are applicable as long as the transmission of the seismic shear force between
adjacent frames is guaranteed by means of rigid floor systems, horizontal bracing or other resistant
systems that are also rigid, as indicated in point 6 of section 3.4.8.2.

3.4.10.5 Overturning moments

For design purposes, reduction of overturning moments as specified in relation to Building-type
structures shall be permitted.

3.4.11 DYNAMIC METHOD

Spectral modal analysis and step-by-step analysis or calculation of responses to specific earthquakes are
admissible as dynamic analysis methods.

112
 RECOMMENDATIONS

For modal spectral analysis, you can choose to apply a modal superposition rule, such as the square
root of the sum of the squares of the modal responses, or the complete quadratic combination, in the
way that Building structures are recommended.

3.4.11.1 Spectral Modal Method

When modal spectral analysis is used, those natural vibration modes whose combined effect does not
modify the seismic design efforts by more than10%. The torsional dynamic effect of static
eccentricities not greater than 10%of the story dimension measured in the same direction as the
eccentricity. In such a case, the effect of said eccentricities and of the accidental eccentricity will be
calculated as stipulated for the static analysis.

This method shall be applied as specified in relation to Building-type structures, along with the
following considerations:

1. It will be assumed that each natural period of vibration of the structure can be less or greater than
the one calculated up to25%,adopting the most unfavorable value.

2. The spectral accelerations for each natural period of vibration of the structure must be
multiplied by the damping reduction factor, -Tand,-and.

3.4.11.2 Step by step method

The step-by-step analysis or calculation of responses to specific earthquakes will be applied as specified in
relation to Building-type structures.

3.4.11.3 Check for base shear

If with the dynamic analysis method that has been applied it is found that, in the direction under
consideration, the relationshipv0/WTis less than0.7aTe0,- /[Q-Te0,QRTe0,Reither-]will all increase
the design forces and the corresponding lateral displacements in a proportion such that
v0/WTequal to this value.

This condition implies that the design base shear force cannot be less than70%which would provide a
static analysis taking into account the fundamental period of the structure. However, in no case shall
the shear be less thana 0,- /[Q- 0,QR 0,Reither-]WT
eitherat 0,- ACD0 /[Q- 0,QR 0,Reither-]WT,whereTand- 0 .Being,WTthe total weight of the construction,
including dead and live loads.

3.4.12 REVIEW OF LIMIT STATES

It will be checked that the lateral stiffness of the structures is sufficient to meet the following two
conditions:

113
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.4.12.1 Horizontal displacements due to damage limitation to non-structural elements

(service limit)
The horizontal displacements of the structure, parts and equipment that merit it, due to the forces
induced by earthquakes, should be reviewed. The differences between the lateral displacements of
consecutive stories due to horizontal shear forces, calculated with one of the seismic analysis
methods for the spectral ordinates of the serviceability limit state described in subsection 3.3.1.8, will
not exceed0.002times the corresponding elevation differences, in cases where the equipment design
requires less distortion, this value should be adopted for this review. In situations where there is no
equipment or elements incapable of supporting appreciable deformations, or these are separated
from the main structure in such a way that they are not damaged by their deformations, the limit will
be0.004.

3.4.12.2 Horizontal displacements for safety against collapse

The differences between the lateral displacements of consecutive stories produced by the interstory
seismic shear forces, calculated for the modified spectral ordinates
to Tand,- /[Q-Tand,QRTand,Reither-]eitherto Tand,- ACDTand/[Q-Tand,QRTand,Reither-]multiplied by the factor
QR Tand, Reither-and divided by the corresponding elevation difference, will not exceed the floor
distortions indicated in table 4.3, according to the defined structural systems.

Table 4.3 Permissible Interstory Distortions

STRUCTURAL SYSTEM Q DISTORTION

Steel, reinforced concrete or composite frames with limited ductility, with

two 0.015
concentric or eccentric wind braces

Frames with flat slabs without walls or braces two 0.015

Walls combined with reinforced concrete frames with limited ductility 1.5 0.010

Confined masonry load-bearing walls of solid pieces with horizontal

two 0.008
reinforcement or mesh
Confined masonry load-bearing walls made of solid pieces; Horizontally
Reinforced Confined Hollow-Piece Masonry or Mesh-Reinforced Confined two 0.006
Hollow-Piece Masonry
diaphragm walls two 0.006

Masonry load-bearing walls of hollow pieces with interior reinforcement, or

1.5 0.004
wooden walls of stave

Load-bearing walls of combined and confined masonry two 0.004

Confined masonry load-bearing walls of hollow concrete blocks 1.25 0.003

For structural systems not considered, values recommended in section 3.3.7 may be adopted.

114
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.4.12.3 Glass breakage

In facades, both interior and exterior, the placement of the glass in the frames, or the connection of these
with the structure, will be such that the deformations of the latter do not affect the glass. To do this, it will
be verified that around each glass pane or each frame there is a gap no less than the relative displacement
between the ends of the pane or frame, calculated from the shear deformation of the mezzanine and
divided by1 houryou/byou,wherebyouis the base of the board or frame andhyouHis height. For this calculation,
the displacements mentioned in section 3.4.12.2 will be considered.

3.4.12.4 Separation with adjacent structures

Every structure must be separated from any neighboring structure a minimum distance of5cm,but
not less than the sum of the absolute values of the maximum displacements calculated for both
constructions, nor less than0.008of the height of the lowest building. These spacings can be reduced
if special precautions are taken to prevent damage from crashes to adjacent structures.

3.4.13 SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION

As an approximation to the effects of the soil-structure interaction, it will be valid to increase the
fundamental period of vibration and the displacements calculated in the main structure under the
hypothesis that it rests rigidly on its base, in accordance with the criteria established in the sections
3.2.6, 3.3.5.9 and 3.3.6.5.

115
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.5

TYPE 3 STRUCTURES
INVERTED PENDULUM AND
APPENDICES

117
 RECOMMENDATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 3.5 TYPE 3 STRUCTURES: INVERTED PENDULUMS AND APPENDAGES

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... .120

FLOWCHART............................................... .........................................121

3.5.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS................................................ .........................123

3.5.2 INVERTED PENDULUMS................................................... .........................................123

3.5.3 APPENDICES ................................................ ........................................................... ..........124

119
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

NOMENCLATURE
cn Acceleration coefficient at the level of Wp inverted pendulum weight
appendix lunge Wn dough weightnin which the
M Moment of inertia applied at the upper end of the appendix
resistant element of the inverted pendulum Wn- appendix weight
x Lateral displacement of the upper end of the
P Inertial force acting on the mass of the resisting element of the inverted pendulum
inverted pendulum -- Rotation of the upper end of the resisting
Pn Lateral force acting on the massnin which element of the inverted pendulum
the appendix is deplanted, calculated by
Functions
the static method
to Ta,- Normalized maximum spectral ordinate
Pn Lateral force acting on the appendage Radius of
to 0,- Maximum ground acceleration
rm gyration of the mass of the inverted pendulum
with respect to an axis that passes through the normalized, whereTand- 0
point of union of said mass with the resistant Q-Tand,Q Reduction factor for ductility
element RTand, Reither Reduction factor for overstrength

120
 RECOMMENDATIONS

FLOWCHART

TYPE 3 STRUCTURES: INVERTED PENDULUMS AND APPENDAGES

I know
will be obtained
you'll get ok
according to the with the criteria
criteria established in established in the
subsection 3.2.4
item 3.2.5

Reither= 1.25
Q=1

PENDULUMS APPENDICES

TYPE OF ANALYSIS TYPE OF ANALYSIS

static method dynamic method static method dynamic method

How I know How I know

- Seismic shear reductions are not
allowed depending on the period stipulates in stipulates in
of the structure. type structures structures
Buildings type Buildings
- No reductions are allowed at (Item 3.3) (Item 3.3)
design flip time.

Determination of seismic force,Q:

To value the lateral forces, they will be about appendages

determined according to the equation

The equivalent moment is

calculate with the equation:

121
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.5.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

For the seismic analysis of inverted pendulums and structures with appendages, all the applicable
provisions stipulated for Building-type structures will be applicable, with the exception that in the
static analysis of inverted pendulums, the reduction of the shear force based on the fundamental
period or the reduction of the turning moment. As regards the determination of the seismic forces
that act on inverted pendulums and appendages, the additional criteria specified in this section will
also be considered.

3.5.2 INVERTED PENDULUMS

In the static analysis of inverted pendulums, in addition to the lateral force calculated as stipulated for Building-type
structures, the vertical accelerations of the upper mass associated with the rotation of said mass with respect to a
horizontal axis normal to the direction of movement will be taken into account. analysis and that passes through the
point of union between the mass and the resistant element, which is designated in figure 5.1 by the letterEITHER.

Figure 5.1 Lifting an inverted pendulum.

The effect of these accelerations will be taken as equivalent to a moment of inertiaMapplied to the upper
end of the resisting element, whose value is equal to

-
M -1.5 P rtwomx (5.1)

where
rm is the radius of gyration of the mass with respect to the axis in question
x, - are the lateral displacement and the rotation, respectively, of the upper end of the
resistant element under the action of the inertial forcePacting on the mass, defined as:

to Ta,-
P- Wp (5.2)
Q-Tand,QRTand, Reither

where

123
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

to Ta,- is the maximum normalized spectral ordinate

Q-Tand,Q is the ductility reduction factor
RTand,Reither is the reduction factor due to overstrength is the
Wp weight of the inverted pendulum

For inverted pendulum-type structures, the ductility reduction factor will be used,Q-Tand,Q-1.0 ,and the
reduction factor for overstrength,RTand, Reither-1.25,unless the use of other values can be technically
justified.

Inverted pendulums will be analyzed under the action of two orthogonal horizontal components of
ground motion of the same intensity. The internal forces resulting from these seismic stresses will be
obtained by applying the rule of the square root of the sum of the squares (see section 3.3.5.7). The
internal forces thus obtained must be combined with the gravitational ones.

3.5.3 APPENDICES
The seismic actions acting on appendages are a function of both the movement of the ground and the
dynamic interaction between the appendage and the structure on which it rests; For its determination, a
dynamic analysis of the set can be carried out, which implies that the analysis of the response of such
elements is somewhat complex. However, for design purposes, the static method can be used but fixing
the normalized maximum spectral ordinate,to Ta,- ,in such a way that they are considered
albeit roughly, appendage-structure interaction effects, which tend to strongly amplify the
appendage response.

To assess the static seismic forces that act on appendages, equipment and other elements whose
structure differs radically from that of the rest of the main structure, the seismic force that would
correspond to it if it rested directly on it will be assumed to act on the element in question.
terrain, multiplied by the amplification factor1 Cn/{a 0,- /[Q- 0,QR 0,Reither-]}] ,whereTand- 0 ,
Ycn-Pn/Wnis the acceleration coefficient by which the weight of the unsteadiness level of the
appendage when the lateral force at that level is assessed ignoring the presence of appendages; this
coefficient is obtained as indicated in relation to the static analysis for Building-type structures.

Based on the above, the lateral forcesPn-on appendages will be determined according to the
following equation, consideringTand- 0

to T,- - cn -
P-n -
a
W-n--1- - (5.3)
Q-T,QRT,R
and and either - a 0,- /[Q- 0,QR 0, R either
-] --
where
Wn- is the weight of the deplanted appendage on then–th level of the main structure

to 0,- is the maximum normalized ground acceleration, whereTand- 0

The values ofQ-Tand,Q YRTand, Reither will be taken in the manner indicated for inverted pendulums.

124
 RECOMMENDATIONS

The appendages will be analyzed under the action of two orthogonal horizontal components of the seismic
solicitation, of the same intensity. The internal forces resulting from these seismic stresses will be obtained
by applying the rule of the square root of the sum of the squares. The internal forces thus obtained must
be combined with the gravitational ones.

125
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.6

STRUCTURES TYPE 4
RETAINING WALLS

127
 RECOMMENDATIONS

INDEX SECTION 3.6 TYPE STRUCTURES 4: RETAINING WALLS

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... .130

FLOWCHART............................................... ..............................................131

3.6.1 GENERALITIES................................................... ........................................................... .133

3.6.2 WALLS WITH ACTIVE DISPLACEMENT ................................................ ..............133

3.6.2.1 Seismic coefficient ................................................ ........................................................... .133
3.6.2.2 Simplified pseudo-static method.............................................................. .............................134
3.6.2.3 Complete pseudo-static method............................................................ .................................135
3.6.2.3.1 Active state of earth pressure .................................................. ...............................135
3.6.2.3.2 Passive state of earth pressure .................................................. ..............................136
3.6.2.3.3 Location of the seismic thrust .................................................. .................................137

3.6.3 WALLS WITH RESTRICTED DISPLACEMENT ................................................ ...138

3.6.3.1 Elastic analysis method ................................................ .........................................138
3.6.3.2 Base shear and overturning moment ........................................... .............................138
3.6.3.3 Displacement at the crown of the wall .................................................. .........................163

3.6.4 HYDRODYNAMIC PRESSURES ................................................ .............................163

3.6.5 STABILITY CHECK.............................................................. ................................163

129
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

NOMENCLATURE
yearQ,M,PSpectral coefficient (Q=cutting, Tre Fill Dominant Period (4Hre/vsre) Dominant
M=moment andP=pressure) forTre= 0 Ts period of the equivalent land stratum
B. Width of the base of the wall
CQ,M,PSpectral coefficient (Q=cutting, vs Velocity of propagation of shear waves in
M=moment andP=pressure) Relative the equivalent ground layer Velocity of
d-- rotational stiffness of the fill Dynamic thrust v0 propagation of half-space waves≥720m/s
ANDd due to earthquake
ANDand static thrust vs.re Velocity of shear waves in the fill Resulting
ANDACE Active thrust with earthquake W forces of the wedge of the fill Vertical
ANDPS Passive thrust with Y dimension measured from the base of the
fa earthquake Amplification wall
Fc factor Backfill cohesion - Angle that the fill slope makes with the
FR Frictional resistance force Cohesive force horizontal
FQ developed at failure plane - Angle that the fault plane makes with the
horizontal
Fww Represents the gravitational forces of the fill - Friction angle at the wall-soil interface
wedge and its overburden -- Displacement of the wall crown Internal
F- Bond strength developed at the wall- - friction angle of the fill along the failure
floor interface plane
g acceleration of gravity -re Volumetric weight of the fill Volumetric
Gs Rigidity modulus of the subgrade terrain -s weight of the soil or average volumetric
Gre Rigidity modulus of the fill weight of the strata Volumetric weight of
hd Applicable height. of the active and/or passive -0 the half-space Relative mass of the wall
hand thrust Application height of the static thrust -~
HWall Height of the wall -Wall Mass per unit of flat area of the wall
Hre Fill thickness -re Mass density of the fill
Hs Total thickness of the ground layer -s Poisson's ratio of the terrain Poisson's ratio
kh Horizontal seismic coefficient Vertical -re of the fill Angle between the back of the
kv seismic coefficient - wall and the vertical
Kr Rotational stiffness of a strip footing of width
similar to the width of the base of the wall - angle it formsWwith vertical
Kv Vertical stiffness of a strip footing of width
Functions
similar to the width of the base of the wall
to 0,- Maximum normalized ground
hed Distance between the vertical component of the
acceleration, whereTand- 0
seismic thrust and the foot of the wall
Mo Tre Overturning moment acting on the wall
ps Impedance contrast
QoTre Shear force acting on the base of the
what Surcharge per unit length of the wall
wall
r Parameter that controls the fall of the
RTand,R Reduction factor due to overstrength
spectral ordinates ~
either

saMT Spectral moment acting on the wall

R-- Rotational stiffness of the wall Lower limit of ~
re

Ta the spectral plateau Upper limit of the spectral

saQTre Spectral shear force acting on the wall
Tb plateau Beginning period of the descending ~
Tc branch in which the desp. spectral tend sa-Tre, YSpectral pressure acting on the wall
σTre, Y Distribution of pressures exerted by
correctly after of the land the filling on the wall

130
 RECOMMENDATIONS

DIAGRAM
TYPE STRUCTURES 4: RETAINING WALLS

Offset Walls Offset Walls

Active Restricted

two

properties and Properties

Calculation of shares stability check
geometry of the filling
seismic From the wall
From the wall γre, -,FC

fa=1.33Yes • flip failure

fa • slip failure
fa=2.0 yes Coefficients • load capacity failure
seismic • widespread failure

PRODISIS→
Table6.1

a) Method b) Complete pseudo-static method

pseudostatic
simplified • active state of earth
pressure,
• passive state of earth
pressure,
• Active Thrust Location

Thrust and overturning moment

131
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

two

properties and Properties stability check

Calculation of shares
geometry of the filling seismic From the wall
From the wall

vs.re,Hre, ρre, -re

• flip failure
• slip failure
• load capacity failure
Parameters
seismic • widespread failure

Table6.1

PRODISIS→

b) Elastic analysis method

Dynamic forces: Base shear, overturning moment

and pressures

, Y
They are obtained from graphs 6.1 to 6.72

join forces in
static conditions
(Chapter B.2.6).

Total Forces:

Shear, moment of
turning and pressure

132
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.6.1 GENERALITIES
Retaining structures and their components should be designed to perform their function during and
after an earthquake, without significant structural damage. Dynamic response analyzes on retaining
walls can be classified into two groups: (a) active displacement walls, in which the walls are
considered to be capable of displacement and/or rotation enough at the base to generate the shear
resistance in a failure plane in the fill and (b) walls with restricted displacement, where the wall is
considered fixed at the base and the fill has an elastic or viscoelastic response.

Regardless of the method used, it will be assumed that it is a flat problem, so the seismic analysis will
be carried out per unit length of the wall.

3.6.2 WALLS WITH ACTIVE DISPLACEMENT

For retaining structures that are under this condition, the dynamic effects produced by the
earthquake will be simulated by means of earth pressures due to the fill and inertial forces due to the
masses of the wall, foundation and fill with overloads.

The inertial forces will be determined taking into account the masses of earth and overloads
supported directly on the back of the wall and its foundation, in addition to the masses of the
retaining structure. The inertial forces on the wall will be obtained as a fraction of the fill mass, for
which a seismic coefficient will be used, which is detailed in section 3.6.2.1.

The seismic thrust generated by the fill depends on the level of displacement experienced by the wall.
An active state of earth pressure will be considered when the resulting displacement allows the
development of the shear strength of the fill. The passive state of earth pressure can only be
generated when the wall has a tendency to move towards the fill and the displacement is significant.

The earth pressures due to the active and passive conditions will be determined considering the
equilibrium limit state of a part of the fill limited by the free surface, the wall and a failure surface on
which it slides as a rigid body.

The recommended methods for this type of analysis are: a) Simplified pseudostatic analysis based on
the Seed and Whitman method and b) Complete pseudostatic analysis based on the Mononobe-
Okabe method, which are described in sections 3.6.2.2 and 3.6.2.3, respectively. .

3.6.2.1 seismic coefficient

The methodology to obtain the response in walls with active displacement consists of obtaining and
applying a horizontal and vertical seismic coefficient, representative of an earthquake, which, multiplied by
the weight of the wedge, results in additional horizontal and vertical actions to the static ones. The
horizontal seismic coefficient is obtained by the following equation.

133
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

- to 0,- -
k h- - -f .a (6.1)
--RT, R -
and either -
where
to 0,- is the maximum normalized ground acceleration at the base of the fill, whereTand- 0 (ec.
1.14)
fa is an amplification factor that will be taken equal to1.33YesTsvs/ HWall-10or equal totwoYes Tsvs/
HWall- 3 .For intermediate cases, the dominant period of the equivalent terrain stratum will be
Ts interpolated between these values.
vs is the propagation speed of shear waves in the equivalent ground layer is the height
HWall of the wall
RTand,Reither is the reduction factor due to overstrength (table 6.1)

Table 6.1 Overstrength values

wall type FactorRTand,Reither

cantilever walls 1.6

Cantilever buttress walls 1.8

gravity walls 1.1

Displacement Constrained Walls 1.6

For vertical seismic action,kv,is considered1/ 3of the horizontal coefficient and the analysis is carried out
considering that the component acts upwards and downwards in order to produce the most unfavorable
effect.

1
kv-k (6.2)
3h

3.6.2.2 Simplified pseudo-static method

In the case of granular fillings (frictional soils), unsaturated, the simplified method may be used. In
this method, the increase in thrust acting on a retaining wall due to seismic effects is obtained by
means of the following equation:

3 two
AND
d-khH Wall - re (6.3)
8
where
kh is the horizontal seismic coefficient, according to section 3.6.2.1
HWall is the height of the wall and

-re is the volumetric weight of the filling

The location of the pseudostatic force will be assumed to be at a distance of0.6HWallabove the base of
the wall. The forceANDdis the dynamic increase in lateral thrust to the retaining wall, so for

134
 RECOMMENDATIONS

To evaluate the stability conditions of the wall, the earth pressure in static conditions must be considered
in the equilibrium analysis.ANDand,as well as the inertia due to the mass of the wall.

3.6.2.3 Complete pseudo-static method

In this method, vertical and horizontal pseudostatic accelerations are applied to the Coulomb wedge,
generating an active or passive state of earth pressure. This method can be used for cohesive-
frictional soils.

3.6.2.3.1 Active state of earth pressure

This condition of lateral earth pressure supposes that the retaining wall moves in a horizontal
direction out of the fill, in such a way that a failure surface is generated due to the sliding of a rigid
wedge,W,known as the active Coulomb wedge.

Figure 6.1 shows the diagram of forces that intervene for the application of active thrust in seismic
conditions.

Figure 6.1 Diagram of forces involved in the calculation of active thrust

where:
ANDACE is the active thrust with earthquake
W represents the resultant of the inertial forces of the fill wedge represents
Fww the gravitational force of the fill wedge and its surcharge is the horizontal
kh seismic coefficient (item 3.6.2.1)
kv is the vertical seismic coefficient (item 3.6.2.1) is
- the angle that formsWwith vertical

135
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

- is the angle that the fault plane forms with the horizontal, which will be the one that maximizes the
active thrust
- is the internal friction angle of the soil along the failure plane is the
- friction angle at the wall–soil interface
- is the angle that the back of the wall makes with the vertical
FQ is the cohesive force developed at the failure plane is the
Fc fill cohesion
- is the angle between the fill slope and the horizontal is the
what surcharge per unit length of the wall
F- is the bond strength developed at the wall–floor interface, which should not be taken
Older than him40%of soil cohesion is the
FR frictional resistance force
hd is the height of application of the active pressure
B. is the width of the base of the wall

With reference to Fig. 6.1, the active earth pressure considering earthquake,ANDACE, produced by the
wedge of soil acting on the wall will be determined by the equation:

W-sin - - tan(- - -) cos---FQ-cos- - tan(- - -) sin ---F-tan(- -- -) cos- - sin --

AND
ACE- (6.4)
cos(- - -) - sin(- - -) tan(- - -)

where
-1 cos-cos- sin(90- -)-
W-khcsc-Fww -khcsc-- - reHtwo -qH Wall (6.5)
-two Wallsin(- --) sin(- -- ) --

kh -
- - so -1--- -- (6.6)
- 1-kv-

3.6.2.3.2 Passive state of earth pressure

If forces are applied to the wall in such a way that it pushes the fill, failure occurs through a much
wider wedge. This value is called passive thrust and is the highest value the thrust can reach. Figure
6.2 shows the diagram of forces involved for its application.

The passive earth pressure considering earthquake,ANDPS, produced by the wedge of soil acting on the
wall will be determined by the equation:

W-tan(- - -)cos- - sin---FQ-cos- - tan(- - -)sin---F-tan(-

- - -)cos-- sin--
E-PS (6.7)
cos(- --) - sin(- --) tan(- - -)

136
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Figure 6.2 Diagram of forces involved in the calculation of passive thrust

3.6.2.3.3 Location of seismic thrust

In gravity-type walls, that is, those whose stability basically depends on their weight, the inclination of
the seismic thrust will depend on the state of earth pressure. Thus, the angle of inclination with
respect to the horizontal will be - - - for the active case and - - - for the passive case. In cantilever-type
walls, that is, reinforced concrete walls that have the capacity to work as a cantilever beam, it will
always be considered that the angle of inclination with respect to the horizontal is equal to -.

handANDand- 0.6HWallANDand-EACE
hd- (6.8)
ANDACE

where
ANDand is the earth pressure in static conditions, it can be obtained by applying the Coulomb
method (Chapter B.2.6)
hand is the height of earth pressure application in static conditions, it will be taken equal to
0.33HWall
ANDACE is the active thrust with earthquake. For the passive casehdshould be calculated withAND.

For gravity type walls, the distance between the vertical component of the seismic thrust and the foot of the wall will
be calculated with the equation:

hed- B- hdso- (6.9)

where
B. is the width of the base of the wall. For cantilever-type walls, it will be consideredhed- b

137
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.6.3 WALLS WITH RESTRAINT DISPLACEMENT Elastic

3.6.3.1 Analysis Method
This method is based on the elastic response of a rigid wall-soil system. For this, a wall with restricted
displacement is considered, which is located on a uniform semi-infinite stratum, with viscoelastic fill
material. A constant material damping is considered.

The actions obtained by applying this method only represent the dynamic part, so in order to
evaluate the stability conditions of the wall, the earth pressure at rest in static conditions must also
be considered (Chapter B.2.6).

3.6.3.2 Base shear and overturning moment

In order to know the seismic actions exerted by a fill of unplanted soil on a rocky site or a soil deposit,
on a retaining wall, the following hypotheses must be taken: a) the wall is infinitely rigid, b) the
unplanted terrain allows rotations in the wall, and c) the interaction of the sloping ground with the fill
is neglected. In the model of Figure 6.3, the rude terrain is idealized as a half-space, characterized by
the modulus of stiffness,Gsand Poisson's ratio, -s.

Figure 6.3 Dynamic characteristics of the wall and fill model planted on a
homogeneous stratum that admits wall rotation.

If the sloping terrain is idealized as a homogeneous stratum, the dominant period of the terrain must
also be specified.Ts, the total thickness of the equivalent ground layerHsand the impedance contrastp
s, between the stratum and the half-space that underlies it, this last parameter is

determined by the relationshipps- -svs/ -0v0,where -sand Vsare the volumetric weight and the speed of
shear waves of the equivalent stratum, respectively, and -0Yv0are the volumetric weight and the half-
space shear wave velocity. The padding is characterized by its thicknessHre, the speed of shear waves
vs.re, Poisson's ratio -reand the mass density -re. For its part, the wall is characterized by its relative
mass - ~ ,Defined as:

-~- -Wall
(6.10)
-reHre

138
 RECOMMENDATIONS

where
-Wall is the mass per unit flat area of the wall

The rotational stiffness of a wall,R-, can be replaced by the combination of the rotational stiffness,Kr, and the
vertical stiffness,Kv, of a strip footing with a width similar to the width,B.from the base of the wall. So

1
R--Kr-KvB. (6.11)
two

In this equation, the stiffnessesKrYKvcan be obtained by the equations:

1.23G s - B-
Kv- --1- 3.5 (6.12)
1--s - 2H s--
-

-UKtwo
s - B-
Kr- -1- -- (6.13 )
8(1--s) - - 10 a.m.s-

On the other hand, the relative rotational stiffness is determined with

Gand
r Htwore
d-- (6.14)
R-
where
Gre is the modulus of stiffness of the fill, given byGre= -revs. re
two

The actions of interest in retaining walls are the basal shear, the overturning moment and the
pressure distribution exerted by the fill on it. These actions are determined with the following
equations:

- to 0,- - ~
QoTre -ρreH two-
re -
- gSaQTre (6.15)
-
- RTand,Reither -

3 -
- to 0,- - ~
Mo Tre -ρreH re -
- gSa M Tre (6.16)
-
- RTand,Reither -

- to 0,- - ~
σ T re, y − ρ -
re Hre -
-gSa σ T ,re
and (6.17)
-RT ,Rand either -
where
Tre is the dominant period of the filling equal to4Hre/vsre
to 0,- is the maximum normalized ground acceleration at the base of the fill, whereTand- 0
(eq.1.14). If the wall is planted on land TypeYO,The terrain of desplantation should be
considered as a half-space and the maximum acceleration at the base of the fill will be taken
equal toa0r
g is the acceleration due to gravity

139
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

RTand, Reither is the reduction factor due to overstrength (table 6.1)

~ ~ ~
saQTre YsaMTre denoted in this subsection assaQ,MTre,are the shear and moment
normalized spectral data for the fill period,Tre
~
sa-Tre, Y are the normalized spectral pressures for the fill periodTre, determined
at a height of interest,Y,from the base of the wall.

The design spectral ordinates are obtained with the following equation.

-
- year - Tre
- Yes Tre-Ta
- Q,M,P (CQ,M,P yearQ,M,P) Ta
~ -
saQ,M,-Tre -- CQ,M,P YesTa-Tre-Tb (6.18)
- r
- -T b-
CQ,M,P-- -- Yes Tre- Tb
- - Tre-
-
where
TaYTb are the lower and upper limits respectively of the plateau of the design spectrum is the
r parameter that controls the fall of the spectral ordinates, defined in section 3.1.6

Tc is the starting period of the descending branch in which the spectral displacements
correctly tend to the ground displacement, defined in subsection 3.1.6
yearQ,M,PYCQ,M,Pare the coefficients of the spectrum. subscriptsQ,MYPdenote base shear,
moment and pressure respectively

Graphs 6.1 and 6.2 present the coefficients of the spectrum,yearQ,Mand graphs 6.3 and 6.4 present
the coefficientsCQ,M, calculated for the Poisson's ratios of the filling -re= 0.3Y0.45,the relative mass
values of the wall - -=0-Y0.15and the relative rotational stiffness values of the wall-floor systemd-=1,
2, 3, 4Y5.coefficientsyearQ,M, corresponding to the spectral ordinatesTre= 0,are those shown in graphs
6.1 and 6.2. These coefficients are valid for all rude terrain, whether idealized as a half-space or as a
homogeneous stratum. coefficientsCQ,M
corresponding to a semi-space as ground of displacement are consigned in graphs 6.3 and 6.4.

When the terrain under the fill is considered to be a homogeneous stratum resting on a half-space,
then the spectral coefficientsCQ,Mhave variations that depend on the dominant period of the terrain,Ts
, and the impedance contrast,ps,between itself and the half-space that underlies it. Graphs 6.5 to 6.16
present coefficientsCQ,Mfor period valuesTs= 0.2s, 0.5s, 1.0s, Y2.0s,from the relative rotational stiffness
value ranging fromd-=0untild--= 5.Each graph presents the coefficients corresponding to one of the
combinations of Poisson's ratio values of the filling (-re= 0.3Y0.45),relative mass of the wall (- =0Y0.15)
and the impedance contrast (ps= 0.1, 0.3Y0.5).

coefficientCPwill be obtained according to graphs 6.17 to 6.72. In them, combinations are presented
for different values of the parameters that participate in the graphs to obtain CQYCMshown above.

140
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Graph 6.1 Coefficients ofyearQfor idealized terrain of desplantation as semi-space or

homogeneous layer.

1.20

1.10

1.00 µ =0, vrand

=0
. 03

0.90 µ =0, vrand

=0
. 54
µ =0.15 ,sees
r =0 . 30
0.80
µ =0.15 ,sees
r =0 . 45
Ao coefficientsQ

0.70

0.60

0.50

0.40

0.30

0.20
0 1 two 3 4 5

Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

Graph 6.2 Coefficients ofyearMfor idealized terrain of desplantation as semi-space or

homogeneous layer.

0.80

0.70

µ =0, vrand
= 0.3 0
0.60
µ =0, vre=0 .4 5
0.50
µ =0.15, vrand
= 0.30
Ao coefficientsM

0.40 µ =0.15, v re=0. 45

0.30

0.20

0.10

0.00
0 1 two 3 4 5

Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

141
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Graph 6.3 Coefficients ofCQfor idealized terrain of desplantation as semi-space.

1.70

1.60

1.50
µ =0, vrand
=0.30
1.40
µ =0, vrand
=0. Four. Five

1.30
µ =0. , vre=0. 30
fifteen
1.20
µ =0. , vre=0. 45
C coefficientsQ

1.10
fifteen

1.00

0.90

0.80

0.70

0.60

0.50
0 1 two 3 4 5
Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

Graph 6.4 Coefficients ofCMfor idealized terrain of desplantation as semi-space.

1.00

0.90

0.80 µ =0,sees
r =0 . 30

µ =0,sees
r =0 . 45
0.70
µ =0. 15, vre=0.30
Coefficients of cM

0.60
µ =0. 15, vre=0.45

0.50

0.40

0.30

0.20
0 1 two 3 4 5
Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

142
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Graph 6.5 CoefficientsCQ,Mfor slope terrain idealized as a homogeneous stratum, for Poisson's
ratio of the fillvre= 0.30,relative mass of the wall impedancesps= 0.10. μ̅ =0and contrast of

1.90
1.80 Get CQ with Ts = 0.2 s Get CM with Ts = 0.2 s

1.70 btieneCQ conTs = 0.5s

EITHER btieneCM conT s = 0. 5s
EITHER

1.60 btieneCQ conT s = 1.0 sec

EITHER btieneCM conT s = 1. 0s
EITHER

1.50 btieneCQ conT s = two.

EITHER 0 sec btieneCM conT s = two
EITHER . 0s
1.40
1.30
1.20
C coefficientsQ,M

1.10
1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0 1 two 3 4 5
Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

Graph 6.6 CoefficientsCQ,Mfor slope terrain idealized as a homogeneous stratum, for

Poisson's ratio of the fillvre= 0.30,relative mass of the wall μ̅ =0 impedance contrastps= 0.30. Y

1.60
BTienand
EITHER CQ conTs = 0.2s be
you
EITHERneCM con T s = 0 s . two
1.50
BTienand
CQ conT s = 0.5s be
you
neCM con T s = 0. 5s
1.40
EITHER EITHER

BTienand
CQ conT s = 1.0 sec be
you
neCM con T s = 1. 0s
1.30
EITHER EITHER

BTienand
CQ conT s = two. be
you
neCM con T s = two
. 0s
1.20
EITHER 0 sec EITHER

1.10
C coefficientsQ,M

1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0 1 two 3 4 5
Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

143
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Graph 6.7 CoefficientsCQ,Mfor slope terrain idealized as a homogeneous stratum, for

Poisson's ratio of the fillvre= 0.30,relative mass of the wall μ̅ =0 impedance contrastps= 0.50. Y

1.70
1.60 byou
in and CQ con Ts = 0 s
EITHER . two btieneCM con Ts = 0 s
EITHER . two

1.50 Get CQ with Ts = 0.5 s Get CM with Ts = 0.5 s

1.40
byou
in and CQ con Ts = 1. 0s
EITHER btieneCM con Ts = 1. 0s
EITHER

1.30
byou
in and CQ con Ts = two
EITHER . 0s btieneCM con Ts = two
EITHER . 0s
1.20
1.10
C coefficientsQ,M

1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0 1 two 3 4 5
Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

Graph 6.8 CoefficientsCQ,Mfor slope terrain idealized as a homogeneous stratum, for

Poisson's ratio of the fillvre= 0.30,relative mass of the wall μ̅ =0.15 and impedance contrastps
= 0.10.
2.20
2.10 EITHER you
beenC Q con T s = 0 s . two btieneCM conT s = 0 s
EITHER . two

2.00 EITHER you

beenC Q con T s = 0. 5s btieneCM conT s = 0. 5s
EITHER

1.90 EITHER you

beenC Q con T s = 1. 0s btieneCM conT s = 1. 0s
EITHER

1.80 EITHERbhas CQ with Ts = 2.0 s Get CM conT s = 2.0s

1.70
1.60
1.50
1.40
C coefficientsQ,M

1.30
1.20
1.10
1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0 1 two 3 4 5
Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

144
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Graph 6.9 CoefficientsCQ,Mfor slope terrain idealized as a homogeneous stratum, for

Poisson's ratio of the fillvre= 0.30,relative mass of the wall μ̅ =0.15 and impedance contrastps
= 0.30.
1.90
1.80 BTienand
EITHER C Q cn T s = 0.two
either s btian
EITHER nd
and
C M cn T s = 0.2 s
either

1.70 BTienand
EITHER C Q cn T s = 0.5 s
either btian
EITHER nd
and
C M cn T s = 0.5 s
either

1.60
BTienand
EITHER C Q cn T s = 1.0 s
either btian
EITHER nd
and
C M cn T s = 1.0 s
either

1.50
BTienand
C Q cn T s = two.
0s btian
nd
and
C M cn T s = twenty
. s
1.40
EITHER either EITHER either

1.30
1.20
C coefficientsQ,M

1.10
1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0 1 two 3 4 5
Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

Graph 6.10. CoefficientsCQ,Mfor idealized terrain as a stratum

homogeneous, for Poisson's ratio of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the wall and μ̅ =0.15
impedance contrastps= 0.50.
1.70
BTienand
C.Q.conTs = 0.two
s obtieneCM con T s = 0 s
1.60
EITHER . two

BTienand
C.Q.conTs = 0.5 s obtieneCM con T s = 0. 5s
1.50
EITHER

1.40 Get CQ with Ts = 1.0 s Get CM with Ts = 1.0 s

1.30 Get CQ with Ts = 2.0 s Get CM with Ts = 2.0 s

1.20
1.10
C coefficientsQ,M

1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0 1 two 3 4 5
Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

145
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Graph 6.11 CoefficientsCQ,Mfor idealized terrain as a stratum

homogeneous, for Poisson's ratio of the fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall μ̅ =0Y
impedance contrastps= 0.10.

2.20
2.10 EITHERBTienand
C.Q.conTs = 0.two
s be
you
EITHERneCM con T s = 0 s . two

2.00
EITHERBTienand
C.Q.conTs = 0.5 s be
you
EITHERneCM con T s = 0. 5s
1.90
1.80 EITHERBTienand
C.Q.conTs = 1.0 s be
you
EITHERneCM con T s = 1. 0s
1.70
EITHERBTienand
C.Q.conTs = two.
0s be
you
EITHERneCM con T s = two
. 0s
1.60
1.50
1.40
C coefficientsQ,M

1.30
1.20
1.10
1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0 1 two 3 4 5
Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

Graph 6.12 CoefficientsCQ,Mfor slope terrain idealized as a homogeneous stratum, for Poisson's
ratio of the fillvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall μ̅ =0 impedancesps= 0.30. and contrast of

1.90
1.80 be
you
EITHERneCQ cn Ts = 0.2s
either btiinand
EITHER CM c n Ts = 0 s
either . two

1.70 Get CQ with Ts = 0.5 s Get CM with Ts = 0.5 s

1.60
be
you
EITHERneCQ cn Ts = 1.0 sec
either btiinand
EITHER CM c n Ts = 1. 0s
either

1.50
be
you
neCQ cn Ts = two. btiinand
CM c n Ts = two
. 0s
1.40
EITHER 0 sec
either EITHER either

1.30
1.20
C coefficientsQ,M

1.10
1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0 1 two 3 4 5
Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

146
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Graph 6.13 CoefficientsCQ,Mfor slope terrain idealized as a homogeneous stratum, for Poisson's
ratio of the fillvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall impedancesps= 0.50. μ̅ =0 Y contrast of

1.70
1.60 bee
you
EITHERn CQ conT s = 0 s . two EITHERBTienand
CM conTs = 0.two
s
1.50 bee
you
EITHERn CQ conT s = 0. 5s EITHERBTienand
CM conTs = 0.5 s
1.40 bee
you
EITHERn CQ conT s = 1. 0s EITHERBTienand
CM conTs = 1.0 s
1.30 Get CQ with Ts = 2.0 s Get CM with Ts = 2.0 s
1.20
1.10
C coefficientsQ,M

1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0 1 two 3 4 5
Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

Graph 6.14 CoefficientsCQ,Mfor slope terrain idealized as a homogeneous stratum, for

Poisson's ratio of the fillvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall and impedance contrastps=μ̅0.10.
=0.15

2.30
btieneCQ cn Ts = 0 s bee
you
n CM con T s = 0 s
2.20
EITHER either . two EITHER . two

2.10 btieneC Q cn Ts = 0. 5s
EITHER either bee
you
EITHERn CM con T s = 0. 5s
2.00 btieneC Q cn Ts = 1. 0s
EITHER either bee
you
EITHERn CM con T s = 1. 0s
1.90 btieneC Q cn Ts = two
EITHER either . 0s bee
you
EITHERn CM con T s = two
. 0s
1.80
1.70
1.60
1.50
C coefficientsQ,M

1.40
1.30
1.20
1.10
1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0 1 two 3 4 5

Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

147
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Graph 6.15 CoefficientsCQ,Mfor slope terrain idealized as a homogeneous stratum, for

Poisson's ratio of the fillvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall μ̅ =0.15 and impedance contrastps
= 0.30.
2.00
1.90 BTYo
EITHERinand
CQ c n Ts = 0.two
s
either be
you
EITHERneCM con T s = 0 s . two

1.80 BTinand
Yo CQ c n Ts = 0.5 s
EITHER either be
you
EITHERneCM con T s = 0. 5s
1.70 BTinand
Yo CQ c n Ts = 1.0 s
EITHER either be
you
EITHERneCM con T s = 1. 0s
1.60 Get CQ with Ts = 2.0 s Get CM with Ts = 2.0 s
1.50
1.40
1.30
C coefficientsQ,M

1.20
1.10
1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0 1 two 3 4 5
Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

Graph 6.16 CoefficientsCQ,Mfor slope terrain idealized as a homogeneous stratum, for

Poisson's ratio of the fillvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall and impedance contrastps=μ̅0.50.
=0.15

1.80
1.70 Get CQ with Ts = 0.2 s Get CM with Ts = 0.2 s

1.60 btieneCQ conTs = 0.5 s

EITHER EITHER BTienand
CM conTs = 0.5 s

1.50 btieneCQ conTs = 1.0 s

EITHER EITHER BTienand
CM conTs = 1.0 s
1.40 btieneCQ conTs = two.
EITHER 0s EITHER BTienand
CM conTs = two.
0s
1.30
1.20
C coefficientsQ,M

1.10
1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0 1 two 3 4 5

Relative rotational stiffness (dθ)

148
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Graph 6.17 Coefficients ofyearPfor terrain of Graph 6.18 Coefficients ofyearPfor terrain of
slope idealized as semi-space or slope idealized as semi-space or
homogeneous stratum. Poisson's ratio homogeneous stratum. Poisson's ratio
fillingvre= 0.30and relative mass of the wall fillingvre= 0.30and relative mass of the wall
--=0.00 - =0.15
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7
0.7
0.6
0.6

and /H
0.5
and /H

0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 Coefficients ofyearp
Coefficients ofyearp
---0 ---- ---two

---0 ---- ---two ---3 ---3 ----

Graph 6.19 Coefficients ofyearPfor terrain of Graph 6.20 Coefficients ofyearPfor terrain of
slope idealized as semi-space or slope idealized as semi-space or
homogeneous stratum. Poisson's ratio homogeneous stratum. Poisson's ratio
fillingvre= 0.45and relative mass of the wall fillingvre= 0.45and relative mass of the wall
µ = 0.00 µ = 0.15

1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Coefficients ofyearp Coefficients ofyearp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

149
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Graph 6.21 Coefficients ofCpfor idealized Graph 6.22 Coefficients ofCpfor idealized
terrain of desplantation as semi-space. terrain of desplantation as semi-space.
Infill Poisson's Ratiovre= 0.30Y Infill Poisson's Ratiovre= 0.30Y
relative mass of the wall μ =0.00 relative mass of the wall μ =0.15

1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.23 Coefficients ofCpfor idealized Graph 6.24 Coefficients ofCpfor land of
terrain of desplantation as semi-space. stance idealized as semi-space. Infill
Infill Poisson's Ratiovre= 0.45Y Poisson's Ratiovre= 0.45Y
relative mass of the wall μ =0.00 relative mass of the wall μ =0.15

1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

0
fifteen
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Graph 6.25 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.26 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=0.2s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=0.2s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.30relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.30relative mass of the
wall μ =0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.10 wall μ =0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.30
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Coefficients ofCp C coefficientsp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.27 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.28 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=0.2s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=0.5s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.30relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.30relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.50 wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.10
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

151
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Graph 6.29 CoefficientsCPfor slope terrain Graph 6.30 CoefficientsCPfor slope terrain
idealized as a homogeneous layer, idealized as a homogeneous layer,
forTs=0.5s,fill Poisson's ratio vre= 0.30relative forTs=0.5s,fill Poisson's ratio vre= 0.30relative
mass of the wall μ =0.00Y mass of the wall μ =0.00Y
impedance contrastps= 0.30 impedance contrastps= 0.50
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.31 CoefficientsCPfor slope terrain Graph 6.32 CoefficientsCPfor slope terrain
idealized as a homogeneous layer, idealized as a homogeneous layer,
forTs=1.0s,fill Poisson's ratio vre= 0.30relative forTs=1.0s,fill Poisson's ratio vre= 0.30relative
mass of the wall μ =0.00Y mass of the wall μ =0.00Y
impedance contrastps= 0.10 impedance contrastps= 0.30
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

152
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Graph 6.33 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.34 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=1.0s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=2.0s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.30relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.30relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.50 wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.10
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.35 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.36 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=2.0s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=2.0s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.30relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.30relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.30 wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.50
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

153
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Graph 6.37 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.38 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=0.2s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=0.2s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.45relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.45relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.10 wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.30
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.39 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.40 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=0.2s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=0.5s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.45relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.45relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.50 wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.10
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

4
fifteen
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Graph 6.41 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.42 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=0.5s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=0.5s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.45relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.45relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.30 wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.50
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.43 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.44 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=1.0s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=1.0s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.45relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.45relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.10 wall µ = 0.00and impedance contrastps= 0.30
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

155
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Graph 6.45 CoefficientsCPfor slope terrain Graph 6.46 CoefficientsCPfor slope terrain
idealized as a homogeneous layer, idealized as a homogeneous layer,
forTs=1.0s,fill Poisson's ratio vre= 0.45relative forTs=2.0s,fill Poisson's ratio vre= 0.45relative
mass of the wall μ =0.00Y mass of the wall μ =0.00Y
impedance contrastps= 0..50 impedance contrastps= 0.10
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.47 CoefficientsCPfor slope terrain Graph 6.48 CoefficientsCPfor slope terrain
idealized as a homogeneous layer, idealized as a homogeneous layer,
forTs=2.0s,fill Poisson's ratio vre= 0.45relative forTs=2.0s,fill Poisson's ratio vre= 0.45relative
mass of the wall μ =0.00Y mass of the wall μ =0.00Y
impedance contrastps= 0.30 impedance contrastps= 0.50
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

156
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Graph 6.49 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.50 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=0.2s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=0.2s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.10 wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.30
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.51 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.52 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=0.2s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=0.5s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.50 wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.10
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

157
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Graph 6.53 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.54 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=0.5s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=0.5s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.30 wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.50
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.55 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.56 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=1.0s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=1.0s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.10 wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.30
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

8
fifteen
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Graph 6.57 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.58 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=1.0s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=2.0s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.50 wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.10
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.59 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.60 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=2.0s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=2.0s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.30,relative mass of the
wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.30 wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.50

1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

159
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Graph 6.61 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.62 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=0.2s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=0.2s,Poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall µ =
wall µ = 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.10 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.30
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.63 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.64 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=0.2s,Poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=0.5s,Poisson's ratio
fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall µ = fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall µ =
0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.50 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.10

1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

160
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Graph 6.65 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.66 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=0.5s,Poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=0.5s,Poisson's ratio
fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall µ = fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall µ =
0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.30 0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.50
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.67 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.68 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=1.0s,Poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=1.0s,Poisson's ratio
fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall μ fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the wall μ
=0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.10 =0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.30

1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

161
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Graph 6.69 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.70 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=1.0s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=2.0s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the
wall μ =0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.50 wall μ =0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.10
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

Graph 6.71 CoefficientsCPfor land of Graph 6.72 CoefficientsCPfor land of

idealized rudeness as a homogeneous idealized rudeness as a homogeneous
stratum, toTs=2.0s,poisson's ratio stratum, toTs=2.0s,poisson's ratio
of the fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the of the fillingvre= 0.45,relative mass of the
wall μ =0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.30 wall μ =0.15and impedance contrastps= 0.50
1.0 1.0

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.6 0.6
and /H

and /H

0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Coefficients ofCp Coefficients ofCp

---0 ---- ---two ---0 ---- ---two

---3 ---- ---3 ----

162
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.6.3.3 Displacement at the crown of the wall

To calculate the displacement in the crown of the wall, -, the spectral moment of the fill will be used to
determine the rotation of the base and the rotational stiffness of the foundation according to the equation

~
saM Tre
- - HWall (6.19)
R-

3.6.4 HYDRODYNAMIC PRESSURES

Whenever possible, the generation of hydrostatic and hydrodynamic pressures in the retaining walls
should be avoided. This can be achieved by proper selection of fill material, in conjunction with the
placement of efficient drainage at the wall-soil interface and within the fill.

When there is a mass of free water, as in the case of marginal quay walls, the effects due to
hydrodynamic pressures can only be added if they are unfavorable for the stability of the wall. In this
condition, the pressures, shear forces and overturning moments induced by the movement of the
water can be determined by applying the criteria specified for dams (item 3.11).

3.6.5 STABILITY CHECK

When checking the stability of a retaining wall due to dynamic conditions, it will be verified that the
following safety factors are met:

1. Failure due to overturning: The safety factor against overturning calculated as the quotient between the
resisting and overturning moments must be greater than1.5.

2. Sliding failure: The factor of safety against sliding calculated as the ratio between the resisting
and sliding lateral forces must be greater than1.2.
3. Bearing capacity failure: The bearing capacity safety factor calculated as the ratio between the
ultimate resistance of the soil and the maximum contact pressure must be greater than2.0.

4. General failure: If there is a compressible layer under the foundation, the safety factor for
general failure must be greater1.5.

163
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.7

STRUCTURES TYPE 5
CHIMNEYS, SILOS AND SIMILAR

165
 RECOMMENDATIONS

INDEX SECTION 3.7 STRUCTURES TYPE 5: CHIMNEYS, SILOS AND SIMILAR

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... .168

FLOWCHART............................................... ..............................................169

3.7.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS................................................ .........................171

3.7.2 ROTATION ACCELERATION SPECTRUM................................................... ........171

3.7.3 MODIFICATION OF THE DESIGN SPECTRUM BY DAMPING ................................171

3.7.4 SEISMIC BEHAVIOR FACTOR ................................................ ............172

3.7.5 OVERSTRENGTH FACTOR.............................................................. .......................172

3.7.6 CHOICE OF THE TYPE OF ANALYSIS................................................... ...........................172

3.7.7 STATIC METHOD................................................... ................................................172

3.7.7.1 Evaluation of seismic forces ................................................ ...........................................172
3.7.7.2 Overturning moments............................................... ........................................................... .175
3.7.7.3 Second order effects ........................................................... .........................................175
3.7.7.4 Combined effects of ground movements ........................................................... ......175

3.7.8 DYNAMIC METHOD................................................... ................................................176

3.7.8.1 Basal shear review .................................................. .........................................177
3.7.8.2 Special effects ................................................ ........................................................... ..177

3.7.9 EFFECT OF STORED GRAIN ................................................ ......................177

3.7.10 SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION ................................................ ....................178

167
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

NOMENCLATURE
b Average width of the structure Damping Tand structural period
C matrix of the structure Silo diameter Te0 Fundamental period of the structure
~
D Te0 Effective period of the coupled soil-
DH Outside diameter at the tip of the structure system
Chimney vs Shear wave propagation speed in the
D0 Outside diameter at the base of the Chimney equivalent ground layer Calculated base
AND Modulus of elasticity of the material of the vd shear force
structure dynamically
ANDc Modulus of elasticity of concrete vand Statically calculated base shear
g Acceleration of gravity force
h-n height of the center of gravityn–th v-- Equivalent base shear force caused by
segment, measured from the base Total rotational acceleration
H height of the structure measured from the vm Shear force between the sections
base corresponding to the centers of gravity
He0 Effective height of the structure Equivalent of the segmentsmYm–1 Effective weight
Hm height of the material Vector whose We0 of the structure Weight of then–th
H components are the sway heights of each Wn segment Total weight of the structure,
level Moment of inertia of the cross section WT including
Yoand of the structure dead and live loads
ź dimensionless vertical ordinate
J Column vector with dimensionless z Vertical ordinate, originating at hopper
components equal to1 Stiffness of level
K the structure Stiffness matrix of the X--0 ground acceleration
K structure -- Lateral displacement at the top of the
M Total mass of Chimney without liner Total Chimney, produced by a laterally
M mass of Chimney with liner Overturning distributed load
Mb moment at base -Mb Overturning moment at the base caused by
Mn Overturning moment in the section effectsP–-
corresponding to the center of gravity of the -m, m-- -m-mode participation factors for
segmentn translational and rotational accelerations
M Mass matrix of the structure Lateral force at the base
Pn acting on the mass of the leveln -and Structural damping Effective
~
-e0- damping of the soil-structure coupled
Ps Additional horizontal seismic force that system
allows to consider the effects of higher
Functions
modes of vibrating
to Tand,- Normalized spectral ordinate
Q Seismic behavior factor Index
Reither overstrength that depends on the Q-Tand,Q Ductility reduction factor
structural system RTand, Reither Overstrength reduction factor
yesm Modal responses -Te0,-and Damping factor
yesD design response -a, Tand-- Spectral ordinate of rotational
Tb Upper limit of design spectrum plateau acceleration
---0t- rotational acceleration of the ground

168
 RECOMMENDATIONS

DIAGR
STRUCTURES TYPE 5: CHIMNEYS, SILOS AND SIMILAR

It begins by building the elastic spectrum

The rotational acceleration spectrum
following the recommendations stipulated
can be defined as:
in subsection 3.1.

-and= 3% (Concrete) Q = 2.0

Reither= 1.25
-and= 2% (Steel) (Concrete and Steel)

TYPES OF ANALYSIS

static analysis dynamic analysis

Spectral modal analysis will be used together with the provisions of

Buildings, with the following recommendations and caveats:

1. The dynamic parameters will be determined assuming that the

structure has classical modes of vibration.
2. The analytical model must consider a minimum of10 segments
with a maximum height of four meters.
3. The effect of all modes should be considered.
4. When determining the modal responses, the spectral ordinates
will be increased as specified in section 3.7.3.
5. The design responses will be obtained by combining the
maximum modal responses, as the average of the square root of
the sum of the squares and the sum of the absolute values of the
modal responses.yesn
(displacements, shear forces or overturning moments.

169
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.7.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Chimneys and silos are structures that are especially vulnerable to earthquakes, since they have only
one line of defense, which means that the failure of a section can lead to the collapse of the structure.
In addition to this, since they are tall and slender structures, the contribution of the higher modes of
vibration in the total response can be decisive. In addition, they are structures that are characterized
in that during vibrations they generally dissipate less energy than Building-type structures due to
their low damping. Therefore, in the seismic design of chimneys and silos, it must be borne in mind
that, although they are cantilevered structures that are easy to analyze, They are more vulnerable
than Building-type structures, so the effects of higher modes of vibration and low damping must be
correctly considered in their design. As these are structures where bending deformations dominate,
the shaft of the Chimney or the resistant element of the silo can be modeled as a simple bending
beam, that is, it will be possible to neglect the influence of rotational inertia and shear deformations.
The recommendations stipulated in this section are intended to determine the seismic forces that act
on Chimneys and silos subjected to earthquakes that are specified by means of reduced design
spectra.

3.7.2 ROTATION ACCELERATION SPECTRUM

The rotational acceleration spectrum is defined analogously to the translational acceleration
spectrum, considering a family of oscillators with a rotational degree of freedom, excited by a
rotational movement.

The rotational acceleration spectrum can be defined as:

-a Tand,-
-a, Tand - (7.1)
vsTand

where
-a, Tand are the ordinates of the rotational acceleration spectrum around an axis
perpendicular to the direction in which the earthquake acts
to Tand,- are the ordinates of the corresponding translation spectrum
Tand is the structural period, whose value will not be less thanTb
vs is the speed of propagation of shear waves in the equivalent ground layer, as
explained in section 3.1.5.2
Tb is the upper limit of the design spectrum plateau

3.7.3 MODIFICATION OF THE DESIGN SPECTRUM BY DAMPING

According to the definition of elastic design spectra, a structural damping value is implied, -andof5%.
However, for chimney-type structures and slender silos, the value of structural damping is lower,
because it depends on the material and the structure. For the above,

171
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

it is required to modify the ordinates of the design spectrum by multiplying them by the damping
factor, -Tand,-and,in the same way as for Building-type structures (eq. 2.1, item 3.2.3).
For structures such as chimneys and concrete silos, a structural damping value of -and- 3 % ,while for
chimneys and steel silos, a value of
-and- two %.

3.7.4 SEISMIC BEHAVIOR FACTOR

Chimneys and silos must be designed using a seismic behavior factorQ-2when
Constructed of reinforced concrete and steel. The criterion to define the reduction factor for ductility,
Q'Tand, Q ,It is found in section 3.2.4.

3.7.5 OVERSTRENGTH FACTOR

In the seismic design of chimneys and silos, an overstrength index ofReither= 1.25,unless the use of a
higher value can be technically justified. The criterion for defining the reduction factor due to
overstrength,RTand,Reither,it is found in section 3.2.5.

3.7.6 CHOICE OF THE TYPE OF ANALYSIS

Seismic analysis of Chimneys and silos can be performed by one of the following methods:

a) Static method

b) Dynamic method

The static method specified in subsection 3.7.7 is applicable to the analysis of structures whose
height does not exceed the30mThis limit may be increased to40mon firm ground. The dynamic
method described in section 3.7.8 can be applied to structures with any height.

3.7.7 STATIC METHOD

For the static analysis method for Chimneys and silos, the dynamic effects induced by the earthquake will
be simulated by means of an equivalent lateral force, distributed along the height of the structure and
acting in the direction of ground movement.

3.7.7.1 Seismic force assessment

The magnitude of the resultant of the vertically distributed lateral force will be equal to the base shear
force determined in accordance with the provisions for Building-type structures, modified by the factor

172
 RECOMMENDATIONS

of damping by which the spectral ordinates are increased in order to take into account that the
damping in Chimneys and silos is usually less than in said structures.

Figure 7.1 Seismic Forces on a Chimney

The vertical distribution of the amplified basal shear force will be carried out by dividing the structure
intoNyessegments of equal height, as shown in Figure 7.1. At the center of mass ofn–th segment will
apply a horizontal force that is defined as:

Ns
-Wn to Te0 , -
n-1
Pn -0.85W h-
nn Ns (7.2)
Q'Te0,QRTe0, R
-Wnh-n either

n-1

where
Wn is the weight ofn–th segment
h-n is the height of the center of gravityn–th segment, measured from the lunge
to Te0,- is the spectral ordinate corresponding to the fundamental periodTe0of the structure

corrected by damping factor -Te0, -and

Q-Te0,Qis the ductility reduction factor evaluated inTe0

To take into account the effects of higher modes of vibration, a horizontal force will be additionally
applied to the upper segment, which is defined as

to Te0,-
Ps- 0.15WTQ'Te0,QRTe0,Reither (7.3)

where
WT is the total weight of the structure

173
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

In addition to the effect of horizontal acceleration, the contribution of rotational acceleration at the
base of the structure must be considered. For this purpose, the additional basal shear force due to
said rotational acceleration can be evaluated by the following equation:

-THe0
e0 We0
v-- (7.4)
Q'Te0,QRTe0,Reither
where
-Te0 is the spectral rotational acceleration for the fundamental period of the structure, which
is obtained as indicated in section 3.7.2
He0 is the effective height of the structure, which can be considered equal to0.67H
We0 is the effective weight of the structure equal to0.67WT
H is the total height of the structure measured from the base

The base shear forcev-must be distributed in the centers of mass of each segment in the same
proportion as the forcesPn. Since the effects of the translational and rotational accelerations on the
base are not in phase, they must be combined using the square root of the sum of squares rule.

To achieve an adequate approximation in the valuation of seismic forces, the structure of interest will be
divided into at least10segments.

To apply the static method, the fundamental period may be estimated using empirical formulas or
analytical equations that are appropriate to the type of structure in question. For example, the
fundamental period of concrete chimneys with a rigid base can be determined by the following
equation:

0.0155Htwo -M- -1 / 2
Te0- -- (7.5)
-3D-D
0 H - AND-M-
c

where
ANDc is the modulus of elasticity of concrete, inGPa
D0,DH are the outside diameters at the base and top of the Chimney
M- , M are the total masses of the lined and unlined concrete chimney

In rigid base steel chimneys, the fundamental period can be determined from the mass and stiffness
of the structure according to the equation

-M-1/ 2
Te0- two- - - (7.6)
-K-
where
K is the stiffness of the structure, which can be estimated by the equation

mg
K-1.25 (7.7)
-
where
- is the lateral displacement at the top of the Chimney, produced by a laterally distributed
load equal to the weight of the structure per unit length

174
 RECOMMENDATIONS

g is the acceleration due to gravity

If the Steel Chimney is lined with concrete, the additional mass and stiffness provided by the lining
must be taken into account. For this, its mass must be included in the mass of the structure and its
thickness must be considered as an equivalent thickness of steel.

In general, for any structure of constant section embedded at the base and free at the end, the
fundamental period is equal to:

3 1/ 2
2- - MH -
Te0- - - (7.8)
3,515-IE-
- and-

where
AND is the modulus of elasticity of the material
Yoand is the moment of inertia of the cross section

3.7.7.2 Overturning moments

The overturning moment in the section corresponding to the center of gravity of the segmentno,
calculated as the integral of the shear force diagram, it can be reduced according to:

- h-n- N
M n- -0 75-
. 0 25. --vm-h-m - h-m-1- (7.9)
- H -mn-1
where
vm is the shear force between the sections corresponding to the centers of gravity of the
segmentsmYm–1

3.7.7.3 second order effects

In the design of chimneys and silos it is not necessary to consider the second order effects (effects
P–-)when it is fulfilled

-Mb/Mb- 0.10 (7.10)

where
- -Mb is the overturning moment at the base caused by the vertical loads acting on the
deformed structure
Mb is the overturning moment at the base without considering second order effects

To calculate -Mb, the structure subjected to lateral loads calculated statically and considering its linear
behavior will be analyzed. The displacements thus obtained must
be increased by the factorQR Tand, Reither.

3.7.7.4 Combined effects of ground movements

Chimneys and silos will be analyzed under the action of two orthogonal horizontal components of
ground motion of the same intensity. In structures with slenderness ratioH/b,greater than or equal5,
the action of the vertical component must be considered (item 3.3.5.6),HYbare the height

175
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

total and the average width of the structure respectively. The responses to these seismic stresses will
be obtained by applying the square root of the sum of squares rule. The answers thus obtained
should be combined with the gravitational ones.

The choice of the orthogonal directions for which the analysis will be carried out will be made according to
the location of the holes or openings in the shaft of the Chimney or the resistant element of the silo. The
most unfavorable directions will be defined by the lowest resistance of the structure, both to flexural
compression and shear force.

3.7.8 DYNAMIC METHOD

For the dynamic analysis method of Chimneys and silos, the spectral modal analysis will be used together
with the corresponding provisions stipulated for Building-type structures, taking into account the
following recommendations and caveats:

1. The dynamic parameters of a Chimney or silo will be determined assuming that the structure
has classical modes of vibration, so that the frequencies and natural modes of vibration will be
obtained considering null damping.

2. The analytical model must consider a minimum of10segments with a maximum height of four
meters.

3. The effect of all modes should be considered.

4. When determining the modal responses, the spectral ordinates will be increased as specified in
section 3.7.3, in order to take into account that the damping in Chimneys and silos may be less
than in Building-type structures.

5. The design responses will be obtained by combining the maximum modal responses, according
to the equation that represents the average of the square root of the sum of the squares and
the sum of the absolute values of the modal responses.yesn, which can be displacements,
shear forces or overturning moments.

1/ 2-
1 -Nm -Nm -
yes
D - - - yes m --yestwom--
- - - (7.11)
-
two -m-1 -m-1 - -
-

As in the static method, in addition to the effect of horizontal acceleration, the contribution of
rotational acceleration at the base of the structure must be considered. given a
ground accelerationX -- 0youin the horizontal direction and a rotational acceleration ---0youabout
an axis perpendicular to said direction, the equation of motion of a multi-degree-of-freedom system,
described only by the translational displacements, is given by

-- -CX
MXand - and-KXand- -X -- 0youMJ- --- 0youMH (7.12)
where
M,CYKare the mass, damping and stiffness matrices of the structure

176
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Xand is the vector of displacements relative to the support of the structure

H is a vector whose components are the heights of the sway of each mass, measured with
respect to the base of the structure
J is the column vector with dimensionless components equal to1

To consider the termX0 -- youMJin modal analysis, the mode share factormit is

ZTnμJ
-m- (7.13)
ZTnMZn

While for the term --- 0youMH ,the participation factor of the modemit is

ZTnμH
-m-- (7.14 )
ZTnMZn

3.7.8.1 Basal shear revision

In no case shall the dynamically calculated base shear force be allowed to be less than70% from the
one calculated statically with the option that takes into account the approximate value of the
fundamental period of the structure. Whenvd/Vand< 70%,design responses will increase by 0.70Vand/Vd,
beingvandYvdthe statically and dynamically calculated base shear forces, respectively.

3.7.8.2 Special effects

Overturning moments, second-order effects, and combined effects of ground motions will be treated
as specified in relation to static analysis, except that no reduction in overturning moment is
permitted.

3.7.9 EFFECT OF STORED GRAIN

For silos, when calculating seismic actions by any of the analysis methods described here, the
presence of stored grain should be considered, which can be assumed to be rigidly adhered to the
silo walls (figure 7.2).

Under dynamic conditions, the pressure exerted by the material on the walls, the hopper and the
bottom of the silo increases in relation to the value of said pressure at rest. This dynamic
overpressure must be considered together with the effects of inertial forces due to seismic excitation,
and can be estimated by multiplying the static pressure by an appropriate overpressure factor. Table
7.1 recommends minimum values for the dynamic overpressure factor.

177
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Figure 7.2 General characteristics of a Silo.

Table 7.1 Coefficients to consider the effects of stored grain.

H/D-2 H/ D - 4

0.75 - z'-1.0 1.20 1.35

0.50 - z'- 0.75 1.45 1.60
0.25 - z'- 0.50 1.65 1.85
0.0 - z'- 0.25 1.65 1.85

Hopper depth 1.65 1.85

Bottom (concrete) 1.50 1.50

Bottom (steel) 1.75 1.75

where:
ź is the dimensionless vertical ordinatez- - z /(H - H1)
z is the vertical ordinate, originating at the level of the hopper
H1 is equal to1.5(H - Hm)
Hm is the equivalent height of the material is
D the diameter of the silo

3.7.10 SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION

The soil-structure interaction fundamentally depends on the relative stiffness of the structure with
respect to the soil. Therefore, it will only be justified to consider the effects of the interaction when
the rigidity ratio is such that the inequality established in Eq. 2.5 of section 3.2.6.

178
 RECOMMENDATIONS

When it is appropriate to take into account the interaction between the soil and the structure, the effective
period and damping of the structure with a flexible base will be obtained in accordance with what is established
in the soil-structure interaction section.

If static analysis is used, the seismic forces will be obtained considering the period and
~ ~
effective damping of the structure with flexible base,Te0Y -e0,instead of period
fundamental and damping of the structure with rigid base,Te0Y -and.

When dynamic analysis is used, the design answers will be obtained taking into account the effects of
the interaction between the soil and the structure exclusively in the fundamental mode; the
contribution of the higher modes will be determined assuming that the base of the structure is non-
deformable.

The effective damping in no situation will be taken less than0.03for concrete structures or less than
0.02for steel structures.

179
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.8

STRUCTURES TYPE 6
TANKS, RESERVOIRS AND
SIMILAR

181
 RECOMMENDATIONS

INDEX SECTION 3.8 STRUCTURES TYPE 6: TANKS, RESERVOIRS AND SIMILAR

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... .184

FLOWCHART............................................... ..............................................187

3.8.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS................................................ .........................191

3.8.2 SEISMIC BEHAVIOR FACTOR ................................................ ............192

3.8.3 REDUCTION FACTOR FOR OVERSTRENGTH ................................................ 192

3.8.4 SURFACE DEPOSITS ................................................ ................................192

3.8.4.1 Equivalent model ................................................ ........................................................... .193
3.8.4.1.1 Circular tanks ........................................................... ........................................................... 193
3.8.4.1.2 Rectangular tanks................................................... ............................................194
3.8.4.2 Hydrodynamic pressures ........................................... .........................................195
3.8.4.2.1 Circular tanks ........................................................... ........................................................... 195
3.8.4.2.2 Rectangular tanks................................................... ............................................199
3.8.4.3 Forces of inertia............................................................ ........................................................... ....199

3.8.5 ELEVATED TANKS.............................................. .............................................200

3.8.5.1 Hydrodynamic pressures ........................................... .........................................201
3.8.5.2 Forces of inertia............................................................ ........................................................... ....201

3.8.6 WAVE HEIGHT................................................... ........................................................... ..202

3.8.7 COMBINED EFFECTS OF GROUND MOVEMENTS ..................................203

3.8.8 LIQUID-CONTAINER INTERACTION................................................... ...........................203

3.8.9 SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION ................................................ ....................204

183
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

NOMENCLATURE
B. Plan dimension perpendicular to the pC convective pressure on the container wall
direction of the earthquake of a rectangular
container Pn Vector of lateral forces associated with the
Ce0 Damping of the fundamental mode of the moden
structure Q Seismic behavior factor Radius of the base
Ch Damping of the foundation in horizontal RB. of a circular container Factor for
translation Reither overstrength index Shear force or
Cr Damping of the foundation in rotation yesC overturning moment at the base of the
container, associated with the convective
D Depth of foundation foundation effect
g Acceleration of gravity yesD Design response to shear forces or
He0 Height of the structure associated with the overturning moments
fundamental mode yesYo Shear force or overturning moment at the
HYo Height at which the impulsive virtual mass is base of the container, associated with the
located, measured from the bottom of the impulsive effect
container TC Fundamental period of vibration of the liquid
HL Total depth of the stored liquid Height of the Te0 Period of the fundamental mode of the
Hp tank platform Height at which the convective structure with a rigid base
HC virtual mass is located, measured from the TYo Natural period of the liquid-container
bottom of the container system
~
TYo Effective period of the impulse mode of the
Ke0 Stiffness of the fundamental mode of the
structure with a flexible base
structure ~
Kh Stiffness of the soil-foundation system Te1 Effective period of the upper mode of the
KYo Stiffness of the vessel flexible base frame
Kp Lateral stiffness of the tank platform vC Convective shear force at the bottom of the
Kr Stiffness of the soil-foundation system in container
rotation vYo Impulsive shear force at the base of the
Kyes Tank Stiffness Matrix container
KC Stiffness of the linear spring that virtually X1,Xtwo Modal displacements in elevated tanks
connects the convective mass with the walls
of the container XC Lateral displacement calculated for the
2L Dimension of the base of a rectangular convective mass
container in the direction of the earthquake X1 Displacement side of the dough
MC Convective virtual mass convective with respect to the container
Me0 Mass of the fundamental mode of the structure walls
MYo Impulsive virtual mass XYo Lateral displacement for the sum of the
ML mass of liquid stored impulsive mass
Mp Mass of vessel and tank platform Xn vector of commuting manners
highs corresponding to the mode
Myes Tank Mass Matrix tank core
MoYo Impulsive overturning moment at the bottom of the z Height above the wall, measured from the bottom of
container the tank
MoC Convective overturning moment at the base of the Zn n–th natural mode of tank vibration
bowl
pYo Impulsive pressure on the vessel -1- Vertical displacement of the surface of the
wall fluid measured relative to resting level

184
 RECOMMENDATIONS

-
-p Lateral displacement at the upper end of the ~
-e1 Effective damping of the tank support
tank support structure, produced by a
structure
concentrated load applied in the direction of
ground movement Functions
~
to TYo,- Spectral ordinate modified by the
~~
-Yo Maximum radial or lateral displacement at damping factor, -TYo,-Yo
the height of the impulsive mass, produced CYoz dimensionless function that defines the
by a uniformly distributed load Participation variation of impulsive pressure over the
-n coefficient that defines the scale at which height of the vessel wall
the mode intervenesnin response dimensionless function that defines the
CCz
variation of convective pressure over the
-L Volumetric weight of the stored liquid Angle
height of the vessel wall Ductility
-c measured in plan from an axis parallel to
Q-Tand,Q reduction factor
the direction of the earthquake, in circular
tanks RTand,Reither Reduction factor due to overstrength
-n Undamped natural frequency associated -Tand,-and Damping factor
withn–th mode
~
-Yo damping cash of system
liquid–reservoir container

185
 RECOMMENDATIONS

DIAGR STRUCTURES TYPE 6: TANKS, RESERVOIRS AND SIMILAR

Equivalent model for a deposit

superficial.

steel tanks Reither= 1.25

Q = 3.0
Q = 2.0
Q = 1.25
concrete deposits
Q = 1.25
Q = 1.0

Deposits
Circulars

No hydrodynamic moment With hydrodynamic moment

at the bottom of the deposit at the bottom of the deposit

WhenHL/RB.≤1.50: WhenHL/RB.≤ 2.67:

WhenHL/RB.> 1.50:

WhenHL/RB.> 2.67:
for any relationshipHL/RB.:

for any relationshipHL/RB.:

Deposits
rectangular

no time with moment

hydrodynamic at the bottom hydrodynamic at the bottom
of the deposit of the deposit

WhenHL/ L ≤ 1.50: WhenHL/ L ≤ 2.67:

WhenHL/ L > 1.50:

WhenHL/ L > 2.67:
for any relationshipHL/L:
for any relationshipHL/L:

187
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

HYDRODYNAMIC PRESSURES ELEVATED RESERVOIRS AND TANKS

Circular Deposits rectangular tanks

INERTIAL FORCES (SHEAR AND MOMENT)

Impulsive convective

ELEVATED TANKS

Equivalent model for

elevated tanks

Maximum modal displacements

Maximum modal displacements
associated with the degrees of
associated with the degrees of
freedom of the mass
freedom of the impulsive mass
convective

188
 RECOMMENDATIONS

WAVE HEIGHT

circular containers rectangular containers

Deposits

tanks

189
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.8.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

For the seismic design of tanks and reservoirs, it is necessary to take into account the hydrodynamic
effects of the stored liquid, in addition to the inertial effects of the mass of the whole. The walls and
bottom of a vessel need to be designed for hydrodynamic pressures generated by impulsive and
convective motions of the fluid. Impulsive pressures are due to the impact of the liquid with the
moving container, while convective pressures are due to oscillations of the fluid.

The effects of inertia can be treated in a similar way to the case of structures such as Buildings. For
this, the dynamic equilibrium equations of an equivalent system are established and the design
responses are obtained by applying the spectral modal method. To address hydrodynamic effects,
the stored fluid can be replaced by two virtual masses bound to the container: a rigidly bound,
impulsive mass representing hydrodynamic effects due to rigid-body motion of the liquid; and a
loosely bound convective mass representing the hydrodynamic effects due to the fundamental mode
of vibration of the liquid.

The purpose of the recommendations stipulated in this subsection is to determine the seismic forces
that act on tanks and reservoirs subjected to earthquakes that are specified by means of design
spectra. These forces are a function of the mass of the container, the impulsive and convective
masses that simulate the fluid, and the mass of the supporting structure, as well as the spectral
accelerations derived from the design spectrum.

A tank will be understood as a container supported directly on the ground and a tank as a container
supported on a support structure or platform. Only containers with a rectangular and circular base
will be treated. For other geometries it will be necessary to resort to appropriate methods of seismic
analysis in order to determine the design loads.

Table 8.1 Seismic behavior factors.

Guy Q

steel tanks
Unanchored, designed with base uplift in mind (may develop
elephant foot wall buckling under seismic overload) two1

Unanchored, designed considering uplift of the base and elastic

1.25
buckling mode of the wall (diamond configuration)
Anchored, with non-ductile anchor bolts 1.25
Anchored, with ductile anchor bolts 3two
Supported on ductile pedestals 3two
concrete deposits
Reinforced concrete 1.25
prestressed concrete 1
The one that corresponds to
elevated tanks
the support structure23

191
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Grades:

1.Unanchored steel shells, designed accepting that an elephant's foot buckling mechanism may develop
under seismic overload, should also be reviewed considering seismic loading with elastic response to
ensure that the elastic buckling (diamond shape) of the wall does not come first

two.Capacity design criteria must be used to protect these reservoirs and tanks against failure as creep
develops in the support system.
3.Inthe case of elevated tanks, the values ofQ (seismic behavior factor) stipulated for Type III industrial
structures.

3.8.2 SEISMIC BEHAVIOR FACTOR

Tanks and reservoirs should be designed using seismic behavior factorsQ listed in table 8.1. The
criterion to define the reduction factor for ductility,Q'Tand, Q ,I know
found in section 3.2.4.

3.8.3 REDUCTION FACTOR FOR OVERSTRENGTH

In the seismic design of tanks, the value of the reduction factor for overstrength,RTand,Reither,
It will depend on the characteristics of the support structure, considering the criteria defined for the
case of type III Industrial structures. In the case of deposits, an index overstrength will be usedReither=
1.25,unless the use of a higher value for this factor can be justified. The critery
to define the reduction factor for overstrength,RTand,Reither,it is found in section 3.2.5.

3.8.4 SURFACE DEPOSITS

When a deposit is subjected to excitation, two types of stresses are generated: hydrodynamic
pressures on the walls and bottom, and inertial forces in the mass of the deposit. In turn, the
movement of the liquid originates two types of hydrodynamic pressures: the convective pressures
associated with vibration modes and the impulsive ones associated with the rigid body mode. The
changes in the spectral ordinates by different damping than5%They will be taken into account both in
the determination of impulsive and convective pressures. The soil-structure interaction effects will
only be taken into account in the determination of impulsive pressures.

In a tank with supposedly rigid walls and bottom, the seismic stresses can be determined based on
the equivalent model shown in figure 8.1. In this analogy of attached virtual masses, the fluid is
replaced by the massesMYoYMCplaced at the heightsHYoYHC, respectively, from the bottom of the
reservoir.MYois assumed to be rigidly attached and with it the effects of impulsive pressures are
simulated, whileMCis assumed to be attached by a stiffening springKCto simulate the effects of
convective pressures due exclusively to the fundamental mode of vibration of the liquid.

192
 RECOMMENDATIONS

(a) (b)
Figure 8.1 Analogy of attached virtual masses for a surface deposit. a) Original
model, b) Equivalent model.

3.8.4.1 equivalent model

For circular and rectangular tanks, the equivalent model parameters can be approximately
determined according to the following equations:

3.8.4.1.1 Circular deposits

tanh-1.73RB./H-L
M Yo- ML (8.1)
1.73RB./HL

tanh-1.84M L/RB.-
MC - ML (8.2)
2:17 a.m. L/RB.

4.75g MtwoCH L
K C- (8.3)
M LRB.two
where
2L is the dimension of the base of a rectangular container in the direction of the earthquake is
RB. the radius of the base of a circular container
HL is the total depth of the stored liquid is
ML the mass of the stored liquid is the
g acceleration due to gravity

heights should be takenHYoYHCmost unfavorable according to the following conditions:

a) Without considering the hydrodynamic moment on the bottom of the reservoir:

WhenHL/RB.≤1.50:

193
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

HYo- 0.375HL (8.4)

WhenHL/RB.> 1.50:

HYo- [0.50- 0.1875RB./ HL]HL (8.5)

for any relationshipHL/RB.:

- cosh-1.84ML/RB.--1 -
HC- -1- --HL (8.6)
--1.84ML/RB. -senh-1.84ML/RB. -

b) Considering the hydrodynamic moment on the bottom of the reservoir:

WhenHL/RB.≤ 2.67:

- 1.73RB./ HL 1-
HYo- - -- -H (8.7)
-2 tanh -1.73RB./ HL
L
8-

WhenHL/RB.> 2.67:

HYo- 0.45HL (8.8)

for any relationshipHL/RB.:

- cosh-1.84HL/RB.--2.01 -
HC- -1- --HL (8.9)
--1.84HL/RB. -senh-1.84HL/RB. -

3.8.4.1.2 Rectangular tanks

tanh-1.73L/H L -
MYo- ML (8.10)
1.73L/HL

tanh-1.58HL/L-
MC- ML (8.11)
1.89M L/L

3g MtwoCHL
KC - (8.12)
MLLtwo

heights should be takenHYoYHCmost unfavorable according to the following conditions:

a) Without considering the hydrodynamic moment on the bottom of the reservoir:

WhenHL/ L ≤ 1.50:

HYo- 0.375HL (8.13)

194
 RECOMMENDATIONS

WhenHL/ L > 1.50:

HYo--0.50-0.1875-L/HL--HL (8.14)

for any relationshipHL/L:

- cosh-1.58H L /L--1 -
H-C -1- -H (8.15)
- -
-1.58 HL/L -sinh 1.58H L/L--
L

b) Considering the hydrodynamic moment on the bottom of the reservoir:

WhenHL/ L ≤ 2.67:

- -1.73L/HL- 1-
HYo- - -- -H (8.16)
-2 tanh-1.73 L/HL
L
8-

WhenHL/ L > 2.67:

HYo- 0.45HL (8.17)

for any relationshipHL/L:

- cosh-1.58 HL/L--2.01 -
HC- -1- --HL (8.18)
- -1.58H L/ L -sinh 1.58H
- L/L-

3.8.4.2 hydrodynamic pressures

To carry out a detailed stress analysis of the walls and bottom of a reservoir, it is necessary to know
both the distribution and the magnitude of the local hydrodynamic pressures. These will be obtained
by combining the impulsive and convective pressure components, which are evaluated in the manner
indicated below.

3.8.4.2.1 Circular deposits

The impulsive pressures on the walls are determined by

~~
to TYo,-
pYo-CYoz ~~ ~ -LRB.cos-c (8.19)
Q'TYo,QRTYo, Reither

where
CYo-z- is a dimensionless function that defines the variation of the impulsive pressure over the
height of the wall (figure 8.3)
z is the height above the wall, measured from the bottom of the tank, at which the functions
evaluateCYo-z-YCC-z-

195
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

~~~
-TYo, -Yo is the damping factor that is a function of effective period and damping,
~ ~
TYo Y -Yo,of the structure with a flexible base. These parameters are evaluated as indicated in
subsection 3.8.9. The damping factor will be evaluated as indicated in Eq. 2.1 of section
3.2.3. If a soil-structure interaction analysis is not warranted, the damping factor will be
evaluated by taking the fundamental period with a rigid base and the
nominal damping, whose value is discussed in section 3.8.5 of Comments
~~ ~~~
to TYo,- is the spectral ordinate modified by the damping factor, -TYo, -Yo,
~
corresponding to the periodTYo
~~ ~
Q'TYo,Qis the effective reducing factor for ductility evaluated inTYo
~ ~
RTYo,Reither is the reduction factor for overstrength evaluated inTYo
-L is the volumetric weight of the stored liquid
-c is the angle that is measured in plan from an axis parallel to the direction of the earthquake
and that locates the point where the pressure is calculated, as shown in figure 8.2

Figure 8.2 Definition of -c.

In turn, the convective pressures will be valued using the following equation

to TC,-
pC-CCz -LRB.cos-c (8.20)
' C,QRTC, Reither
QT
where
CC-z- is a dimensionless function that defines the variation of the convective pressure over the
height of the wall (figure 8.4)
to TC,-is the spectral ordinate modified by the damping factor, -TC, -and-

corresponding to the fundamental period of vibration of the liquid, which is equal to

-1/ 2
- MC
TC -two
- -- -- (8.21)
- K C-

196
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Figure 8.3. Distribution of impulsive pressures in circular tanks.

Figure 8.4. Distribution of convective pressures in circular deposits.

197
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Figure 8.5. Impulsive pressure distribution in rectangular tanks.

Figure 8.6. Distribution of convective pressures in rectangular tanks.

198
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.8.4.2.2 Rectangular tanks

The impulsive pressures on the walls perpendicular to the direction of the earthquake are
determined by

~~
to TYo,-
pYo-CYo z ~ ~ ~ - LL (8.22)
Q- TYo,QRTYo,Reither

while the convective pressures are defined by

to T,-
C
pC-Cz C -LL (8.23)
Q'TC,QRT , C Reither

Values of dimensionless functionsCYo-z-YCC-z-can be obtained from figures 8.5 and 8.6, respectively.

As regards the hydrodynamic pressures on the bottom of the reservoir, it can be assumed that their
distribution is linear without introducing excessive error.

The impulsive and convective pressures evaluated should be combined using the square root of the
sum of squares rule.

3.8.4.3 inertial forces

To evaluate the maximum shear stress in the tank walls, it is necessary to know the design shear
force at the base. The maximum axial stress in the tank walls can be evaluated by knowing the design
overturning moment at the base.

For the foundation, the design overturning moment is the sum of the moments that come from the
hydrodynamic pressures acting on both the walls and the bottom of the reservoir. Therefore, it is also
necessary to know the design overturning moment at the bottom.

The impulsive shear force and overturning moment at the base,vYoYMoYo, will be calculated taking into
account the liquid-receptacle interaction and the soil-structure interaction, through the equations

~~
to TYo,-
vYo-MYog ~ ~ ~ (8.24)
Q'TYo,QRTYo,Reither

MoYo-VYoHYo (8.25)

The inertial forces acting on the centers of gravity of the masses of the tank walls and shell can be
considered as an additional driving effect. To do this, the shear force and the overturning moment at
the base associated with these forces will be obtained with equations similar to those of the impulsive
mode, substitutingMYoYHYoby the appropriate parameters. Except for decks of considerable mass, the
effects of deck inertia may be ignored in the design.

199
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

NOMENCLATURE
A Plan area of the rubber support Area of Mpi1,pi2Plastic moments at the lower ends
A the overlapping area of the lower and and top of the stack
upper faces of the support PH Horizontal force transmitted by the rubber
Ax,y Dimensions of the pile with supports
rectangular section in the direction Ps Equivalent Static Horizontal Force Applied
xYY, respectively. at Center of Gravity Design Seismic Shear
bx,y Dimensions of the rubber support in plan Pyou Force for Seismic Stops
B. Dimension in plan of the support in the
direction of analysis rij Correlation factor
CMyou Dead load corresponding to the tributary Ryes structural response
area of the superstructure restricted by yes Form factor of the load on the support
the seismic stop yesM Probable maximum value of the modal
dbl Longitudinal rod diameter Pile responses
D diameter Ta Lateral vibration period of the rubber
Da Diameter of the rubber support pad
ANDc Effective modulus of elasticity in Te0 Fundamental period of the bridge Maximum
rubber compression xmax displacement, corresponding to the limit state
FY Yield stress of steel with which it is designed Shear associated with
g Acceleration of gravity Shear v-M overstrength due to bending of the column
GH modulus of rubber Thickness of
hYo rubber layers Total thickness of -- Ratio of elastic and inelastic stiffnesses,
hyou rubber support Pile height being approximately equal to 0.05
H
Yo Moment of inertia of the section in plan of the -a Additional elastic displacement of the pile
rubber support due to embedment conditions Horizontal
k Coefficient to determine bonded mass -b displacement of the rubber support
kch Translational stiffness of the foundation
kand Elastic stiffness of the pile -c Displacement due to head flexibility
kef support stiffness
kp Secant stiffness of the pile associated with
-F Displacement due to translation and
the maximum displacement
rotation of the foundation
k-h Foundation rotational stiffness Bridge pier
-max Maximum displacement experienced by the
L length or equivalent cantilever length
system
-p Elastic displacement of the pier Elastic
Lap Plastic hinge length Minimum seat
-Y displacement of the system Inelastic
LA length
-pi displacement of the pier Inelastic
LJ Minimum width of expansion joint
-p1, p2 displacements of the equivalent
L1, LtwoEquivalent Cantilever Lengths
cantilevers of the pier Longitudinal
for columns that bend in double curvature
-sj relative displacement due to
ma Adhered mass in submerged piles Moment earthquake for each bridge module
MH transmitted by an unconfined rubber support -you Foundation translation
-T Total system displacement due to seismic
Mp Plastic moment of the pile Plastic action
Mp cabbage moment of the column section -Y' System elastic displacement (headstack) =
-p+ -c

210
 RECOMMENDATIONS

-
-Y'' Elastic displacement of the system -- YowowaTj/TYo,but less than1.0 Density of
(support pile–foundation) = -p+ -b+-F -a the water surrounding the submerged
-Y''' Elastic displacement of the system pile--
(continuous pile foundation) = -p+ -a -and Damping of the structure Damping of
-or Maximum displacement when plastic -sis the structure-support-foundation system
hinges occur in the elements
-a Damping of the support Damping of the pile
-- Diameter of circular pile -p Damping associated with the translation of
-pi Inelastic curvature of pile -ch the foundation
-pu Ultimate curvature
-py Curvature at the beginning of yielding Maximum --h Damping associated with foundation
-xz shear deformation of the rubber support rotation

Functions
-- Displacement ductility
to Te0,- Normalized spectral ordinate
--- Ductility demand
-F Rotation of the foundation Inelastic RTand,Reither Overstrength factor
-pi rotation of the pile Maximum design SD Tand Displacement Design Spectrum
-m rotation of the rubber support Ordinates
-Tand,-and Damping reduction factor

211
 RECOMMENDATIONS

FLOWCHART

STRUCTURES TYPE 7: BRIDGES

limit states:
a) The level of service

b) The level of collapse prevention

Factors to modify the Design Spectrum

ClusterA ClusterB.

Bridges of special importance common bridges

Construction Stage: 1/2 Construction Stage: --

Service level: 1/5.5 Service level: 1/5.5
Collapse Prevention Level: 1.5 Collapse Prevention Level: 1.0

SEISMIC ACTION

Displacement Design Damping Corrections

Spectra (Sd) and overstrength

-and=5%.
They are determined as indicated in the
subsection 3.1.7.

213
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

ANALYSIS METHODS

STATIC METHOD DYNAMIC METHOD

LINEAR NON-LINEAR LINEAR

STEP BY STEP
(HIM) (AENL) (ADL)

a) The foundation soil is • Also known as “pushover”, It is used to estimate a. must be used
classified as Type II. it is used demands of temporary site logs.
b) Straight longitudinal axis or with to determine the displacement and force at
horizontal curvature ability of any bridge B. Behavior is taken into
reduced. displacement of a standard, with spectral account
c) Transverse symmetry with respect to the bridge when reaching the that are indicated in section inelastic of the different
center of the clearing. formation of the collapse 3.9.2.2. components of
d) Without sudden changes in mechanism.
bridge.
stiffness and mass, • Must be realized It is carried out by means of a
spectral modal analysis. C. The method It allows
except the stirrups. employing the
determine the inelastic
e) Angle of deviation < 15°. properties of the
response of the model
materials
to compare the
f) Width of the superstructure ≥a corresponding a the
ductilities local
quarter of the clear between strain levels For the calculation of the required Y the
supports. that are originating in probable maximum value (SM) available.
g) Spans between supports < 50 each load stage. of the combined effect of the
m. modal responses is
h) Continuous bridges that uses: Also of East
have less than 5 spans.
process thestructure
must be parsed with the ADL
method

214
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.9.1 SCOPE
These recommendations indicate the minimum requirements that should be considered in the seismic design of
a standard bridge. For the purposes of these recommendations, a bridge that meets the following
characteristics is classified as a standard bridge:

- Spans between supports up to100m

- Constructed of normal weight concrete, structural steel, or mixed
- Elements of the superstructure continuous or articulated with the substructure, or simply
supported
- conventional supports
- Substructure formed by piers and abutments or trestles
- Foundations based on footings, piles or piers Soil not
- susceptible to liquefaction
- Distance to any active fault >15kmin which near field effects occur

3.9.2 DESIGN PRINCIPLES

3.9.2.1 Bridge Classification
From a point of view of economic and social impact derived from the suspension of vehicular traffic
on a bridge and/or its possible collapse, standard bridges are classified into two types:

1. Bridges of special importance (GroupA)are those essential structures for maintaining

communications after a disaster. They are those bridges whose failure is associated with a
large number of probable deaths, or especially expensive bridges for which an above-average
useful life is desired.

2. Common jumpers (Groupb)are the rest of the bridges whose design corresponds to an average
useful life.

3.9.2.2 design philosophy

Two levels of limit states are proposed for the seismic design of bridges: the service level, in which it
is intended that the bridges be functional and that their structural components remain within the
elastic regime after a moderate or small event has occurred, and the collapse prevention level, which
corresponds to the event of an extraordinary earthquake, in which a certain level of damage to the
bridge is accepted, but without the stability of the structure being put at risk; In addition, potential
damage must be presented in easily accessible areas for inspection and rehabilitation. In the case of
bridges with seismic isolation, the recognized criteria for the design with this type of devices
indicated in the corresponding section of this Chapter will be used.

To evaluate the seismic demand for each of the limit states described, the factors of table 9.1 will be
adopted, which will be applied to the ordinates of the design spectrum. In bridges of special importance,
the resistance will be reviewed during the construction stage in accordance with the factor recommended
in the same table.

215
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 9.1 Factors to modify the design spectrum, according to the limit state and
importance of the bridge.

Stage Level of Prevention level

Bridge Classification
constructive service of the collapse

Bridges of special importance (GroupA) 1/2 1/5.5 1.5

Common Bridges (Groupb) – 1/5.5 1.0

3.9.2.3 Combined effects of ground movements

The bridges will be analyzed under the action of two orthogonal components of the ground
movement in the transverse and longitudinal directions of the bridge. Effects on the response in the
two orthogonal directions, such as displacements and mechanical elements, will be combined using
the square root of the sum of the squares.

R-R
yestwo-Rtwosx Yes (9.1)

In cases where the vertical component of the terrain can cause overloads in some elements such as
piers, supports or foundations, its effect must be included, according to the recommendations in
section 3.3.5.7.

If temporal records are used, four sets of acceleration histories in the transverse, longitudinal and
vertical (when necessary) directions of the bridge will be considered. The record sets will be
independent and representative of the design earthquakes in the region. The maximum value
resulting from the analyzes performed with each set of records applied simultaneously is the one that
should be considered in the design. The PRODISIS program incorporates a procedure for the
generation of synthetic accelerograms that can be used for these analyses.

3.9.3 SEISMIC ACTION

3.9.3.1 Displacement Design Spectra
Displacement design spectra,SD Tand,for the seismic analysis of bridges, they are determined as
indicated in section 3.1.7.

3.9.3.2 Corrections for damping and overstrength

The elastic design spectra proposed in this Chapter were obtained for a critical damping percentage -
and=5%.However, some typical bridge setups can lead to lower damping values, so it will be necessary

to modify the spectral ordinates in these cases. When base insulators are used, there is an increase in
the energy dissipation capacity that must also be taken into account when using the design
spectrum. To modify the spectral ordinates, the damping factor will be used - which will be evaluated
according to Eq. 2.1 of section 3.2.3 with the damping of the system -sis(-and). This reflects the global
effect of the different sources of damping in bridges.

216
 RECOMMENDATIONS

- p k ef- -kch ef --hkefL two

-a - -
kp kch k-h
- sis - two (9.2)
kef kefL
1- kef- -
kp kch k-h
where
-a is the damping of the support
-p the damping of the pile
-ch is the damping associated with foundation translation is the
--h damping associated with foundation rotation is the bridge pier
L length or equivalent cantilever length is the support stiffness
kef
kch is the translational stiffness of the foundation is
k-h the rotational stiffness of the foundation
kp is the secant stiffness of the pile associated with the maximum displacementxmax,corresponding to the
limit state with which it is designed, equal to:

eleven)
kp-kand (9.3)
-
where
kand is the elastic stiffness of the pile
- is the ratio of elastic and inelastic stiffnesses (approximately equal to0.05) is
- the displacement ductility (eq. 9.10)

In those cases in which the soil-structure interaction effect can be neglected, the terms
corresponding to the translation and rotation of the foundation that appear in Eq. 9.2. When the data
is insufficient, it is suggested to take the values shown in table 9.2, for the damping percentages of
the main structural components. If there is a system damping greater than -sis> 30%,a non-linear
dynamic analysis over time should be performed.

Table 9.2 Damping percentages.

structural element elastic response non-linear response

Structure 5% 10%
rubber support 5% 5%
foundations 10% to 20% 20% to 30%

An overstrength reduction factor will be applied to reduce the spectral ordinates. It is recommended
to use a value ofRTand, Reither-1.50.

217
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.9.4 ANALYSIS METHODS

3.9.4.1 Objective and field of application
The objective of the seismic analysis is to evaluate the displacement and force demands to check the
capacity of the structural system and its individual components. It should be borne in mind that each
bridge can be made up of a set of subsystems or modules, such as frames separated by expansion
joints, and that require analysis of each subsystem or module separately and/or of the entire set. In
the proposed analysis methods, the effects of: the soil-structure interaction, the geometric non-
linearity of the materials, the non-linearity of the contact in the joints and the boundary conditions in
the abutments should be considered when they are important. . It is accepted that the seismic
analysis of bridges is carried out by one of the following four methods: linear static, nonlinear static,

3.9.4.2 Linear static method (AEL)

The AEL is accepted as a method to estimate displacement and force demands in structures where a
dynamic analysis does not provide significant additional information about the behavior. The AEL is
suitable for bridges whose response is fundamentally in the first mode of vibration. In general, the
linear static method is applied in the analysis of common bridges that meet the following
requirements:

- The foundation soil is classified as TypeII (section 3.1), regardless of the type of spectrum
used.

- The bridge has a straight longitudinal axis or with reduced horizontal curvature. A bridge is considered
to have reduced curvature if the angle between the line joining the center of the bridge with the end
support and the line joining the two end supports is less than30degrees.

- There is transverse symmetry with respect to the center of the clearing. A bridge is considered to be
symmetric when the eccentricity between the centroid of mass and the centroid of stiffness does not exceed
5%of the total length of the bridge or of the modules in which it is subdivided.

- There are no sudden changes in stiffness and mass, except for the stirrups. If the change in
stiffness, mass, or stiffness-to-mass ratio between two consecutive stacks is less than25%it is
considered that there are no sudden changes in these properties. Also, the mass of the cells
must be less than1/5of the board mass.

- The skew angle is less thanfifteendegrees.

- The width of the superstructure is equal to or greater than a quarter of the span between supports.

- The spans between supports are less than50m

- On continuous bridges that have less than five spans.

The analysis is performed in two orthogonal horizontal directions, estimating the displacement and
force demands. The displacement demands are obtained from the displacement design spectrum, as
a function of the fundamental period of the structure. For the resistance check, the effect of an
equivalent static horizontal force is considered in each direction of analysis.Ps, applied at the center of
gravity of the superstructure. The force,Psis calculated with the equation:

218
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Ps-kpxmax (9.4)
where
xmax is the maximum displacement, corresponding to the limit state with which it is designed

3.9.4.3 Linear dynamic method (LDA)

The TDA is used to estimate displacement and force demands on any standard bridge, and should be
used in cases where any of the requirements of 3.9.4.2 are not satisfied. The ADL is carried out by
means of a spectral modal analysis. To estimate displacement and force demands, the corresponding
spectra indicated in subsection 3.9.2.2 will be used. In the discretization of the linear elastic model of
the structure, at least three elements must be used for each pier and four elements for each span of
the superstructure. A number of modes of vibration must be considered such that it guarantees that
the sum of the effective modal mass, in the direction of the analysis, is at least the90%of the total
mass of the structure.

The probable maximum valueyesMof the combined effect of the modal responses, is calculated with the method of the
complete quadratic combination:

yesM---rijyesYoyesj (9.5)
Yo j

where
ri,j is the correlation factor whereYoYj,are thei, j–th modes of vibration, respectively, andj > i,
defined by

8-two
sis(1--)-3 / 2
rij - two (9.6)
(1--two)two- 4-two sis-(1--)
where
- It does not matteraTj/TYo,but less than1.0

3.9.4.4 Non-linear static method (ENL)

The AENL, also known as "pushover" or thrust method, is used to determine the displacement
capacity of a bridge upon reaching the formation of the collapse mechanism and consists of
analyzing the structure under constant gravitational load and increasing monotonous lateral loads
that represent horizontal seismic effects.

The AENL must be carried out using the properties of the materials corresponding to the levels of
deformation that are originating in each load stage. For this, the properties obtained from the
hysteretic cycles of the materials will be used. The maximum intensity of load that will be applied to
the structure will be the one corresponding to the displacement capacity of the piers that is described
in section 3.9.5.1.3, for each limit state.

3.9.4.5 step by step method

To perform a step-by-step analysis, at least three real or synthetic accelerograms should be
considered. The latter can be obtained for rock with the PRODISIS program. will be taken into account

219
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

the inelastic behavior of the different components of the bridge. Together with these temporary
loads, the permanent actions must be considered, plus all those actions that could act simultaneously
with the permanent ones.

This method should be used to study the behavior of bridges of special importance and, alternatively,
it can be used for common bridges. The method allows to determine the inelastic response of the
model to compare the required and available local ductilities. In addition to this procedure, the
structure must be analyzed with the ADL method, and the results of the step-by-step analysis will not
be used to reduce the resulting ADL requirements.

3.9.4.6 special considerations

3.9.4.6.1 Effective stiffness of the elements
The flexural stiffness of the cross sections of the different elements should reflect the cracking and
yielding that occurs for the displacement level being reviewed. The effective bending stiffness of each
element used in the linear analyzes must be considered as the secant stiffness associated with said
displacement.

3.9.4.6.2 Effect of filler material on stirrups

The backfill has a certain stiffness when the abutment acts against it, while the stiffness is null when the
movement occurs in the opposite direction, therefore, when this effect is important, the non-linearity of
the contact of the backfill soil-abutment system must be considered.

3.9.4.6.3 Adhered mass in submerged piles

When the piers are submerged, it is recommended that a study of the effect of hydrodynamic interaction
be carried out. This effect is roughly estimated by including an adhering mass of water per unit length of
submerged pile. The attached massmamust be added to the actual mass of the cell (without considering
the buoyancy) and to the mass of the water contained within hollow cells, if it is the case.

Table 9.3 Coefficientkto determine the adhered mass in piles of rectangular section.

AY/Ax k

0.1 2.23
0.2 1.98
0.5 1.70
1.0 1.51
2.0 1.36
5.0 1.21
10.0 1.14
∞ 1.00

where
Ax, AYare the dimensions of the pile with rectangular section in the directionxYY,respectively.

For piles of circular cross section with diameter - the attached massmais estimated as:

220
 RECOMMENDATIONS

- --
a two
ma- (9.7)
4
where
-a is the density of water

For rectangular section piles with dimensions2AxY2AY(figure 9.1), and for seismic action in the
directionx,mais estimated as

two
ma-k-a-AY (9.8)
where
k is taken from table 9.3, in which a linear interpolation is valid

2AY x

2Ax

Figure 9.1 Dimensions of the cross section of the pile.

3.9.4.6.4 Spatial variability of the seismic movement

It is recommended to use some model of spatial variability of the seismic movement when there are
certain geological discontinuities or marked topographical characteristics capable of introducing
important variations in the characteristics of the seismic movement of the ground or if the total length of
the bridge is greater than600m

3.9.5 STACK DESIGN

3.9.5.1 Displacement demand and capacity
At each bridge, the total displacement of the system due to seismic action, -T, and the maximum
displacement, -or,when the plastic hinges occur in the elements explicitly designed to have the
necessary rotation capacity, they must comply with the following equation

-T- -or (9.9)

In the complete bridge, as well as in each one of the modules in which it is divided and in each one of
the elements that constitute it, the maximum ductility demands that are specified must be met. In
addition, the ductile elements must satisfy the reinforcement and detailing requirements that are
required to achieve the specified ductility levels.

In general, it is intended that the deck and the rest of the elements that make up the bridge's
superstructure remain within the elastic limit, and that the columns are responsible for dissipating
the hysteretic energy through the rotation of the plastic joints. After verifying that the elements do
not exceed the maximum displacements, it will be necessary to verify the resistance of the elements
as established in 3.9.5.2.

221
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Alternatively, it is allowed to apply the strength design criterion.

3.9.5.1.1 Travel demand

To determine the displacement demands on the global system or on any of the individual modules or
elements that form it, the flexibility and energy dissipation of the structure, of the supports and of
the soil-structure interaction must be considered, to the extent that that its contribution to the global
response of the system is significant.

The ductility demand (--)for each limit state, it is determined from the maximum displacement (-max)
which is obtained from the structural analysis divided by the element yield displacement (-Y), namely,

- -- -max (9.10)
-Y

The creep displacement and the maximum displacement of the structure depend not only on the deformation
of the columns, but also on the flexibility of all the components of the system, such as the head, the supports,
and the rotation and translation of the foundation, such as it is illustrated in figures 9.2 to 9.4.

where
-a is the additional elastic displacement of the pier due to the embedment conditions

-b is the displacement of the rubber support

-c is the displacement due to head flexibility
-F is the displacement due to translation and rotation of the foundation is
-p the elastic displacement of the pile
-pi is the inelastic displacement of the pile is
-you the translation of the foundation
-Y is the elastic displacement of the system (stack) = -p
-Y' is the elastic displacement of the system (stack–head) = -p+ -c
-Y'' is the elastic displacement of the system (pile–support–foundation) = -p+ -b+ -F
-Y''' is the elastic displacement of the system (pile–foundation–continuous) -p+ -a
D is the diameter of the stack
-F is the rotation of the foundation

-p-c -pi a) for rigid head

F
-p -c -Y- -pi-1- -
F ---
pi

-pi -Y -p
Head
flexible
b) for flexible head
Head -Y '- -pi - pi
rigid --- -1-
-Y -'Y -Y ' -p- -c
-
Figure 9.2 Influence of head flexibility on ductility.

222
 RECOMMENDATIONS

-Y''
F -b
-F -p
c) for foundations and flexible
Deformation
of support
supports
supports of
H
neoprene
-Y ''- -pi -pi
-F --- -1-
-Y '' -F--p--b
-you
hF

x
Rigidity
axial k

Figure 9.3 Influence of support and foundation flexibility on ductility.

-Y'''
F -a -p

d) for continuous pile up to the

D foundation

-Y '''- -pi -pi

Depth of - -- -1-
4D-5D D-2D moment -Y ''' -a--p
maximum

embedment for
commuting
elastics

Figure 9.4 Influence of foundation flexibility on ductility.

3.9.5.1.2 Pile displacement capacity

The displacement capacity of the pile is obtained from its rotation capacity, obtained from the moment-
curvature relationship. Thus, the inelastic rotation of the stack (-pi)is determined with:

-pi-Lap(-pi) - (-pu--py) (9.11)

where
-pi is the inelastic curvature of the stack is
-pu the ultimate curvature
-py is the curvature at the start of yielding
Lap is the length of the plastic joint obtained with:

Lap- 0.08L - 0.022fYdbl- 0.044fYdbl (9.12)

where
FY is the yield stress of the steel (inMPa) is the
dbl diameter of the longitudinal bars (inmm)
L is the length of the cantilevered pier or, for other cases (figure 9.5), the distance from the
plastic hinge to the point of inflection (inmm)

If it is assumed that the inelastic curvature is constant alongLap, then the inelastic displacement of the
stack -piis obtained with:

223
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

- L-ap
Δpi- -pi-L- - (9.13)
- two -

and the total stack offset -pis obtained as the sum of -piand the creep displacement
-Y,

-Ltwo - L-
- -p - - - -Ypy pi - -Yop--L-ap two -- (9.14)
3 - -

The above equations are applicable to piers that can be idealized as cantilevers. For piers that have
an intermediate inflection point, as illustrated in Figure 9.5, the displacements and lengths of each
equivalent cantilever should be considered in the above equations.

3.9.5.1.3 Maximum displacement ductility

The ductility demand for concrete piles must not exceed the values indicated in table 9.4, for each of
the limit states.

Table 9.4 Maximum ductility demands for the limit states.

Maximum ductility demand(--)max

Element
Service level Collapse prevention level

cantilever piles 1.0 4.0

Stacks that are part of a frame 1.5 5.0

Wall type piles in your weak direction 1.5 5.0

Wall type piles in your strong direction < 1.0 1.5

Piers that form part of frames and piers that cantilever deform must have a minimum equivalent
displacement capacity of ---= 3.0for the collapse prevention limit state, regardless of the displacement
demand obtained from the analysis. The ductility capacity for piers that do not behave as cantilevers
can be estimated from an equivalent element as illustrated in figure 9.5, where

L is the cantilever pier length or, for other cases, the equivalent cantilever length are the
L1, Ltwo equivalent cantilever lengths for columns that bend in double curvature

-p1, -p2 are the inelastic displacements of the equivalent cantilevers of the pier is the
Mp plastic moment of the most unfavorable section of the pier
Mp cabbage is the plastic moment of the column section

3.9.5.2 Demand and resilience

In addition to meeting the displacement requirements, the structure must be checked so that it can
resist the forces that are generated when it is designed for the collapse prevention limit state,
224
 RECOMMENDATIONS

that is, before the number of plastic hinges necessary for a collapse mechanism to occur is formed.
Appropriate seismic behavior factors will be used for the review
to the type of battery and applying the overstrength factorRTand, Reither indicated in 3.9.3.2.

Figure 9.5 Lengths and displacements to evaluate the ductility of piles.

3.9.5.2.1 Design bending moment

The resistance to the bending moment of the piers, corresponding to the maximum displacement level allowed,
will be obtained based on the moment-curvature relationship of the section.

3.9.5.2.2 Design conditions for brittle type failures

To determine the shear forces and torsional moments in the piers in which plastic hinges will be
formed, an overstrength factor will be used.RTand,Reither= 1.5which will apply to
design plastic moment of the section as indicated in figure 9.6.

225
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

v-M -Mpi2

L RTand,ReitherMpi1-RTand,R M pi2
v-M-
either

L
v-M

-Mpi1

Figure 9.6 Shears associated with overstrength due to bending of the column.

3.9.5.2.3 Design conditions for elements that remain elastic

The distribution of mechanical elements for the design of the structural components of the bridge in
which damage is not expected, will be obtained by applying the loads that cause a bending moment
equal toRTand,ReitherMpiin the piles in which the formation of plastic joints is expected.

3.9.6 DESIGN OF OTHER COMPONENTS

3.9.6.1 Superstructure
The superstructure will be designed to remain within the elastic range for the forces associated with
the overstrength of critical elements (piers). In bridges with appreciable horizontal curvature, it is
recommended to use box sections, due to their greater torsional rigidity, and to avoid double
sections.Tor the like. In the case of very wide bridges, it is suggested to use sections made up of
multicellular caissons.

Transverse diaphragms will be placed between beams, at the ends of the spans. If the cross section
of the superstructure is formed by beams or ribs, or in general, by cross sections that do not have a
high resistance to torsion, it is recommended to place intermediate diaphragms at maximum
distances of12.5mIn the event that the beams are metallic, it is essential to place intermediate
diaphragms, which must be connected in the lower part of the webs, preferably in the flanges of the
beams. Since the box sections have a high torsional rigidity, it is unnecessary to place intermediate
diaphragms.

Box sections are particularly suitable for seismic design when a monolithic connection between piers
and superstructure is considered. In general, they are also used favorably in continuous structures
on supports. When the superstructure is monolithic with the piers, it must be designed to resist the
moments that are transmitted in the connection.

When out-of-phase movement is expected to occur between modules of the bridge between joints, it
is recommended to place shear keys that restrict the transverse relative movement. In long and
regular bridges, where a phased movement is expected to occur between the modules or
subsystems that are formed due to the existence of joints, a relative displacement in the joint is
allowed to occur. In the latter case, it must be borne in mind that the spatial variability of the
movement can give rise to out-of-phase movements, even in the case of equal modules.

226
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.9.6.2 props
The supports must be designed to adequately support the vertical and horizontal loads that may
occur during the useful life of the bridge, in addition, they must allow the translation and rotation
movements that these actions produce.

It must be taken into account that flexible supports increase the period of the structure with respect
to a rigid or monolithic support. It should also be considered that flexible supports increase
displacements, which can be used to improve the distribution of lateral forces between the piers and
abutments of the bridge. On the other hand, the flexibility of the support increases the ductility
demand of the pile for a specific ductility of the structure (figure 9.3).

Rubber bearings have a practically linear response and show an important recovery after
experiencing large deformations, a situation that is not achieved with sliding bearings and other
types of bearings. Therefore, a recovery mechanism must be provided in these cases.

3.9.6.2.1 Horizontal force and moment transmitted by supports

The horizontal force that the supports are capable of transmitting must be taken into account for the design of
the superstructure and substructure. The horizontal force depends on the design of the support and the
restriction due to the existence of seismic stops. In the case of rubber bearings, the horizontal force PHwhich is
generated by horizontal scrolling -bof the support (transverse and/or longitudinal) is:

GHA
PH- -b (9.15)
hyou
where
A is the support area in plan is the
hyou total thickness of the rubber
GH is the shear modulus of the rubber. If information from the manufacturer is not available, the
following values can be used:0.8MPa,for rubbers with shore hardnessfifty,Y1.0MPafor supports
with shore hardness60.

The momentMHthat an unconfined rubber bearing can transmit is:

0.5EcYo
MH- -m (9.16)
hyou
where
Yo is the moment of inertia of the plan section of the support is
-m the maximum design rotation in radians
ANDc is the effective compressive modulus of elasticity of the rubber, which can be approximated by:

E-6G
c H
two
yes (9.17)
where
yes is the shape factor of the load on the support, which is defined as the ratio between the effective
compressed area and the lateral area with freedom of deformation and is calculated with:

227
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

bxbY
S- for rectangular supports
2(bx-bY)hYo
(9.18)
Da for circular supports
S-
4hYo
where
bx, bY are the dimensions of the rubber support in plan is
hYo the thickness of the rubber layers
Da is the diameter of the support

3.9.6.2.2 Design considerations

The number, shape and plan dimensions of the rubber supports are determined based on the vertical
loads, while the thickness is defined based on the maximum lateral displacement and the period of
vibration. The lateral stiffness is determined from Eq. 9.15 and the period of lateral vibration of the
supportTawith:

-Sh-youxz A- -1/ 2
T-2--
a - (9.19)
- Ag -
where
-xz is the maximum shear strain is the
g acceleration due to gravity
A is the area of the overlap zone of the upper and lower faces of the support during the maximum
displacement allowed (figure 9.7)

overlap areaA'

D Δ
-b

Figure 9.7 Support overlap area for a displacement -b.

The damping of the laminated rubber bearings can be assumed equal to the5%of the critic. The
maximum allowable rubber pad displacement -bit is:

- A- -
-b-B-1- - (9.20)
- A-
where
B. is the plan dimension of the support in the analysis direction

The girders must be connected to the supports by means of systems that resist all the horizontal
force that the support is capable of transmitting. The connection of the support with the substructure
must guarantee that the transmission of the horizontal force is adequate. The supports must have a
capacity greater than the capacity of the piles, considering their overstrength. It is also
recommended to use a second line of defense as indicated in sections 3.9.6.4 and 3.9.6.5. If the
supports are movable, an appropriate trim distance (subsection 3.9.6.3) should be provided to
prevent loss of superstructure support.
228
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.9.6.3 Expansion joints

3.9.6.3.1 Minimum dimension of joints
The joints of the superstructure must have a width that allows them to avoid shaking due to earthquakes. In the
calculation of the minimum dimension of the expansion joint -s(figure 9.8) should be considered, among others,
the longitudinal displacement due to earthquake of both modules of the bridge joined by the joint, by means of
the following equation

-s- -two
s1- -s2
two (9.21 )
where
-sj is the longitudinal relative displacement due to earthquake in the module jof the bridge

It will be taken into account that the joint can be at the end of a deck or at some intermediate
support. If the joint is located on a stirrup (figure 9.8a), then -s2= 0Y -s= -s1.In figure 9.8:

LJ LA LA1 LJ LA2

Δs Δs1 Δs2
100mm 100mm 100mm LJ LA LJ

Δs
100mm

≥700mm

≥700mm ≥700mm ≥700mm

a) Stirrup joint b) Pile joint c) Intermediate joint

Figure 9.8 Joint width and seat length

where
LA is the minimum seat length
LJ is the minimum width of the expansion joint

3.9.6.3.2 Minimum seat length

If the different components or modules of the bridge vibrate out of phase, it is possible that large
relative displacements will occur. For this reason, a sufficient length of seat must be provided to
prevent the collapse of the superstructure.

The minimum length of the seat measured perpendicularly to the support axis, will be calculated with the
following equation

LA- -s-100- 700mm (9.22)

For the stack joint case (figure 9.8b),LAwill be calculated separately for each module of the bridge and
the total seat length will be the sum ofLArequired for each module plus the width of the joint.

229
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.9.6.4 seismic buffers

Seismic stops will be designed using recognized criteria as corbel-type elements. The seismic stop
should be sized to simultaneously resist a shear forcePsand the bending moment associated with it,
which acts at the interface between the bracket and the head.

design seismic force,Pyou, will be calculated with:

Pyou- to Te0,- RTe0, ReitherCMyou (9.23)

where
to Te0,- is the normalized spectral ordinate, corresponding to the fundamental period of the bridge
Te0
CMyou is the dead load corresponding to the tributary area of the superstructure restricted by the
top
RTand,Reither is the overstrength factor indicated in 3.9.3.2

No reduction for ductility or seismic behavior shall be made in the design strength of the stop.

A vertical rubber support must be placed between the seismic stop and the superstructure panel. The joint
or free distance between the vertical rubber support and the section of the girder or box wall that form
the superstructure must be such that it allows the design displacement of the support located on the
head.

3.9.6.5 Restriction of longitudinal movement at joints

The structural integrity of the bridge must be ensured in the event of extraordinary seismic
displacements. For this reason, bridges of special importance and those common bridges that merit
it, must have devices that prevent the superstructure from falling. Primary protection should be
provided by adequate seat length and these devices should be considered as a secondary protection
system to prevent loss of support.

The devices are designed to withstand a force equal to that indicated in Eq. 9.4 and will be placed
oriented in the main direction of the expected movement and in a number such as to ensure
redundancy and avoid eccentric behavior of the joint. It is recommended that the longitudinal
restraint elements have a good capacity to dissipate energy during their deformation so that they
also contribute to the dissipation of seismic energy. Sufficient space should be left at expansion joints
to allow for typical joint movements.

230
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.10

STRUCTURES TYPE 8
PIPELINES

231
 RECOMMENDATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 3.10 STRUCTURES TYPE 8: PIPES

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... .2. 3. 4

FLOWCHART............................................... ..............................................237

3.10.1 GENERAL CRITERIA.............................................. .........................................241

3.10.2 CLASSIFICATION OF PIPES ................................................ ..........................241

3.10.3 CHOICE OF THE TYPE OF ANALYSIS................................................... ...........................241

3.10.4 PIPES ABOVE THE SURFACE ................................................ .........................242

3.10.4.1 Simplified method ........................................... ........................................................... 242
3.10.4.2 Static method.............................................. ........................................................... .......242
3.10.4.3 Dynamic method.............................................. ........................................................... .....242

3.10.5 BURIED PIPES ................................................................ ................................................243

3.10.5.1 Soil-pipe interaction................................................... ............................................243
3.10.5.2 Simplified method ........................................... ........................................................... 247
3.10.5.3 Static method.............................................. ........................................................... .......249
3.10.5.3.1 Response due to wave propagation effect .................................................. .........249
3.10.5.3.2 Response due to the effect of permanent deformation.............................................. ....252
3.10.5.3.3 Effects due to liquefaction ......................................... ........................................................... .....253
3.10.5.3.4 Crossing of active geological faults ................................................ ...........................................254
3.10.5.3.5 Admissible deformation criteria .............................................. ...........................................256
3.10.5.4 Dynamic method.............................................. ........................................................... .....257

233
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

NOMENCLATURE
Ap Cross-sectional area of the pipe Width of PYo Internal pressure in the pipeline
B.PGD the deformation zone por Horizontal soil resisting force Vertical
ground permanent Pv soil pressure
ck Factor that depends on the characteristics of whator Vertical resistant force of the soil Horizontal
the exterior surface and hardness of the duct. Rcl,cv and vertical radii of curvature of the curved
Ca Apparent velocity of propagation of seismic sections of the duct adjacent to the fault
waves.
cε, Φ Coef. of deformation and curvature of the Rp Pipe Radius Total
Cp ground Factor that takes into account the yes Response
increase in curvature caused by internal yesn Modal responses
dc pressure Total thickness of cohesive strata yesui Stratum undrained shear strengthYo Shear
dci Thickness of the cohesive layerYo yesor strength of undrained soil
D External diameter of the pipe normalized
DYo Internal diameter of the duct youp Pipe thickness
Dmin Minimum internal diameter of the pipe youu , u Ultimate axial resistance per unit
including internal roughness Modulus of length of the soil on the pipe Seismic
AND elasticity of the material Initial modulus of T wave period
ANDp elasticity of the pipe Maximum axial force Te0 Natural period of vibration of the section under
Fa in the duct study
Fb Force per unit length acting on the pipe by Ts Dominant period of the equivalent stratum of
buoyancy the land
g Acceleration of gravity Height of water OR Maximum relative displacement of the joint
hw above pipe Depth from ground surface to OR0 Vector of displacements caused by the
H center axis of pipe earthquake in the pipe supports or
supports
Hs Thickness of the soil deposit Moment of ORh Ground displacement at burial depth
Yo inertia of the cross section Pressure
k0 coefficient of the soil at rest conditions OR0n Pseudo-static displacement vector
of the pipe,OR0n- SdTe0n
kg1,g2 Longitudinal and transverse stiffness of the
soil, respectively ORr Probable maximum response vector
L Length of the section in question vs Propagation speed of shear waves in the
Lb Length of the pipe in the floating zone equivalent ground layer Maximum
Land Effective length of the pipe where the friction vmax ground speed
force acts Ws Total weight of soil displaced by the
L1.2 Unanchored length on each side of the fault pipe per unit length
Lc1,hp Length of sections with horizontal and vertical Wp Weight of the pipe per unit length Weight
curvature Wc of the contents of the pipe per unit length
LPGD Length of the permanent
deformation zone of the ground Z Section modulus of the cross section of the
m Mass per unit length of pipe pipe
Nqh,qv,whatHorizontal load capacity factor, - Empirical coefficient that varies as a function of
vertical up and vertical down respectively yesor

-r, rr Ramberg–Osgood coefficients

for frictional floors Nch,cv,cHorizontal load
capacity factor, -1, 2 Transfer coefficients for axial and
vertical up and vertical down respectively bending strain, respectively
for cohesive soils

2. 3. 4
 RECOMMENDATIONS

-L,x,b Axial, bending and combined forces -1, 2 Relationships of soil stiffness and
respectively tube stiffness
δdhe longitudinal displacement - Seismic Shear Wavelength Apparent

-lr Total elongation required in the duct

-* wavelength of predominant seismic
wave associated with maximum ground
-La Elongation of the pipe
velocity
-X AND Z Displacement components at failure Unit
- Maximum joint rotation Maximum stress
-a,b strains due to axial tension, and bending
-a in the pipe Stress induced by buoyancy
-bf effects in the pipe
-gY -g Axial deformation and the maximum curvature of
the terrain.
-Y Yield stress of pipe material
-max maximum deformation
-seismic Unit strain of the pipe Axial strains of the
---two Reduction factors depending on pipe
-ta pipe Bending strains of the pipe Shear
stiffness, soil stiffness and pipe length
-tb strength angle of the soil Volumetric
- weight of the soil surrounding the buried
- pipe Functions
to 0,- Maximum normalized ground
- Soil effective unit weight acceleration, whereTand- 0
-

235
 RECOMMENDATIONS

DAY
PROPOSED METHODOLOGY FOR THE SEISMIC ANALYSIS OF PIPELINES

1. Select the group and class of pipe by its function

ClusterA ClusterB1 ClusterB2

2. Location of the pipeline within the seismic zone

PRODISIS

3. Obtain the site spectrum (according to the class and what is indicated in the
subsection3.1.2.1)

SITE SPECTRA REGIONAL SPECTRA CONSTANT ACCELERATION

4b.Select the design seismic zone of the pipeline based on the

value of acceleration in rock (table 1.3, section 3.1).

ar0(cm/stwo) Zone seismic intensity

a0r> 200 D Very high

4a. See the 100 < tor 0< 200 C high 4c. See the
subsection subsection
50 < tor0< 100 B. moderate
3.1.6.1 3.1.6.3
a0r< 50 A Short

237
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Depending on the group, class and seismic zone, identify the type of analysis to be used.

D =Method E =Method S =Method

Dynamic Static Simplified

apply formulas and

recommendations Superficial buried
section 3.10.4.3 Kind of
(shallow) pipeline?
either

section 3.10.5.4
(buried) apply formulas to
the method get the
selected answer by
section 3.10.4 .1 spread of
(simplified) waves?
either

section 3.10.4.2
(static)
YES NO

3 4
two

238
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3
two 4

Apply formulas for the selected method

Section 3.10.5.2 (simplified)
either

Item 3.10.5.3 (static)

get warps
permanent
land?

NO YES

apply formulas
subsection 3.10.5.3.2

get the
answer by
liquefaction?

YES NO

apply formulas
Section 3.10.5.3.3

get the
answer by
geological faults?

NO
YES

apply formulas
subsection 3.10.5.3.4

finish the design

seismic

239
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.10.1 GENERAL CRITERIA

The piping and its components should be checked for all possible seismic forces to which they may
be subjected. The structural safety of the pipes will be checked simultaneously for seismic loads and
operating loads (pressure, temperature, initial bending, etc.). For buried pipes, a unit seismic
behavior and overresistance factor will be considered, and in the case of pipes supported above
ground, these factors will depend on the type of support, for which subsection 3.4 (industrial
structures) must be used.

The design criteria for these structures are based on permissible deformations, so it is recommended
to have graphs of mechanical behavior of the pipe material, for the particular case of steel pipes it is
required to have the Rambeerg-Oswood parameters. In section 3.10.2 of Comments, a table is
presented with these values of commonly used pipes.

To define the type of analysis to be used, the pipe should be grouped according to its function, post-
seismic performance and the seismic zone in which it is located.

3.10.2 PIPE CLASSIFICATION

The pipes have been classified into three groups according to the provisions of section 3.1.2.2 and
their functional requirements as follows.

ClusterA.Class1:Pipes where a high degree of safety is required, because their functioning

and operation is essential during and after the earthquake. The failure and interruption of
its operation would cause great loss of life and a great impact on the environment and / or
economic. For example, pipes that supply gas to generation plants, drinking water lines and
fire networks.

ClusterB.Class1 (B1):Pipes of medium importance that, in case of structural failure, would

cause loss of life or economic loss, but the interruption of their operation after the
earthquake does not cause a great social and/or economic impact. For example: drinking
water distribution networks, pipelines with oil and gas pipelines whose installations are
important in the energy sector, but the service may be interrupted for a period until minor
repairs are made.

ClusterB.Class2 (B2):Pipes of low importance whose operation can be interrupted without

socio-economic losses or can be replaced in a short time.

3.10.3 CHOICE OF THE TYPE OF ANALYSIS

To carry out the seismic analysis of pipes, three methods can be used: a) simplified method, b) static
method and c) dynamic method. The choice of the type of analysis will be carried out using the
flowchart indicated at the beginning of this section.

241
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.10.4 PIPES ABOVE THE SURFACE

3.10.4.1 Simplified method
The simplified method of analysis will be applicable to pipe sections on the surface with supports that are
straight and can be considered formed by a set of simply supported beams. The application of this method
requires the calculation of the natural period of vibration of the section under study, according to:

4 1/ 2
2 -mL -
Te0- - - (10.1)
- -HE-
where
m is the mass per unit length of the pipe is the
L length of the section in question
Yo is the moment of inertia of the cross section is the
AND modulus of elasticity of the material

Knowing the natural period of vibration, the seismic acceleration of the corresponding design
spectrum is obtained. The product of this acceleration and the mass per unit length of the pipe
provides the seismic force per unit length acting on the section in question.

3.10.4.2 Static method

The pseudostatic method will be applicable to the analysis of pipes above the surface and can be
applied to the analysis of any geometric configuration of the pipe. When using this method, proceed
as follows:

1. Calculate the displacement vectorOR0(substituting the eq. 10.1, in Eq. 1.15, that is, OR0n- SdTe0n)
caused by the earthquake innpipe supports or supports.
2. For each element of the vectorOR0 displacement vectors are obtained
pseudostaticORnin the pipe.
3. The vector of maximum probable responses,ORr,is calculated by the equation

1/ 2
-N two-
r - --OR 0n-
OR (10.2)
-n-1 -
where
N represents the number of supports or supports of the pipe in question

3.10.4.3 Dynamic method

For pipes on the surface and with any geometric configuration, the spectral modal dynamic analysis
method and the step-by-step analysis will be used. If modal spectral analysis is used, the total
response of the pipe will be obtained by the contribution of each natural mode of vibration. To do
this, the modal responsesyesnwill be combined to calculate the total answeryesin accordance with
The equation:

242
 RECOMMENDATIONS

1/ 2
-N
- -- yesn---
yes two (10.3)
-n-1
where
N is the number of natural modes of vibration to consider in the total response

If the step-by-step analysis is used, the same recommendations established in relation to the dynamic
analysis of buried pipes apply.

3.10.5 BURIED PIPES

The following criteria will be applied according to the type of pipe, which can be classified as
continuous and segmented pipes. In the case of continuous pipes, failures due to earthquakes are
due to deformations due to tension in welded joints, local compression and separation in joints with
less resistance than the pipe material. The interaction between the soil and the pipe must be
established as established in point 3.10.5.1. In segmented pipes, attention should be paid to failures
due to decoupling or corrugation in the joints, therefore the displacements in said joints will be
evaluated.

3.10.5.1 Soil-pipe interaction

The deformation in buried continuous pipes subjected to ground displacements depends on the
friction at the soil-pipe interface. To evaluate the friction forces, an elastoplastic model is split, with
the following characteristics.

Figure 10.1 Model used to account for soil-pipe interaction.

soil resisting forcesyouor,porYwhatorcorresponding to the longitudinal, horizontal, and vertical

directions will be obtained using table 10.1 and the graphs in figures 10.2 to 10.5. In the case of
having stratified soils on the surface, an average resistance can be obtained.

243
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

dc
S-or kd
(10.4)
-ci
i-1yesui

where
yesor is the normalized undrained soil shear strength
k is the number of cohesive strata is the
dc total thickness of cohesive strata
dci is the thickness of the cohesive layerYo

yesui
is the undrained shear strength of the stratumYo

Table 10.1 Ground resistance parameters to consider the soil-pipe interaction effect.

Component Relationship for buried pipes Nomenclature

Where
--D-Su cohesive yesor Soil shear strength no
- drained
Axial youor= --D
(curvestx) - -H(1- K0 ) tan c k- - Empirical coefficient that varies as a
friction agents
-two
function ofyesor
- Effective unit weight of the soil
D External diameter of the duct Depth
Horizontal
-Su
- Nch D
cohesive H from the surface of the soil to the
por= - central axis of the duct Coefficient of
cross --hn hD
what
- friction agents k0 pressure of the soil in rest conditions
(curvespy)

- Soil shear strength angle

ck Factor that depends on the

direction up characteristics of the exterior surface
and hardness of the duct. If the outer
C ohesive
-Your Ncv D surface is smooth and the soil is sandy,
whator= -
--HNqvD ckvaries between 0.5 and 0.7. If the
- friction agents duct surface is rough, the value ofckwill
be between 0.7 and 1.0.
down direction
Vertical Nqh,NqvYNwhatcapacity factors
cross -S NA horizontal, vertical up and vertical
c cohesive down load
(curvespz) -or
whator= -
1 respectively for frictional
--hn D--D2N
soils
- what two - friction agents
Nch,NcvYNcLoad capacity factor
horizontal, vertical up and vertical
down respectively for cohesive soils

N- Downward Vertical Load Capacity

Factor
The value of - is determined from the graph in Figure 10.2, while the valuesNqhYNchare obtained from the graph in Figure
10.3,NqvYNcvare obtained from Figure 10.4, andNwhatYNcare obtained from figure 10.5

244
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Figure 10.2 Adhesion factor vs undrained shear strength.

245
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Figure 10.3 Load Capacity FactorsNqhYNch.

Figure 10.4 Load Capacity FactorsNqvYNcv.

246
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Figure 10.5 Load Capacity FactorsNc,NwhatY.N--

3.10.5.2 Simplified method

The simplified analysis method is applicable to continuous straight pipes or those formed by straight
segments joined by flexible joints.

The application of this method requires the calculation of the maximum axial deformation and curvature of the
terrain. For this, the following equations are used:

v0
-g - (10.5)
c-Ca

to 0,-
-g- two (10.6)
(c-Ca)
where
v0 is the maximum ground velocity expected at the site (for structuresA1YA+,Recognized soil
dynamic response analysis programs should be used. For
r
structuresA2, B1YB2,the expression can be usedv0-Fsitvmax,wherev r is obtained
max

of the PRODISIS program

to 0,- is the maximum normalized ground acceleration, whereTand- 0 (ec. 1.14)
Ca is the apparent speed of propagation of seismic waves, (can be obtained from geophysical
studies or seismological evaluation)
c- is the strain coefficient (table 10.2)

c- is the terrain curvature coefficient, respectively, whose magnitude depends on the angle
of incidence and the type of seismic waves as indicated in table 10.2 for critical incidences
(table 10.2)
L Length of the section in question

247
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 10.2 Coefficients of ground deformation and curvature

Coefficient P waves S waves Rayleigh waves

c- 1.0 2.0 1.0

c- 1.6 1.0 1.0

For pipes formed by a set of rigid tubes of lengthLwith “lock-joint” type joints, in addition to the
maximum axial deformation and curvature of the ground, the relative displacement must be
calculatedORand the rotation - joint maxims with the following expressions:

OR - -gL (10.7)

- - -gL (10.8)

The information obtained from the application of this procedure allows verifying the expansion and
contraction capacity of the joint, its turning capacity and the stress level generated in the tube during
the earthquake.

It may be considered that the deformations of the pipe are the same as those of the ground, obtained
with Eqs. 10.5 and 10.6, this is valid when the following criteria associated with the soil strength range are
met:

ApANDp≤106
(10.9)
youor

where
youor is the ultimate axial (longitudinal) resistance per unit length of the soil on the pipe
which is calculated as indicated in table 10.1 is
ANDp the initial modulus of elasticity of the pipe
Ap is the cross-sectional area of the pipe

When the ground deformation cannot be completely transferred to the pipe (eg when there is
slippage between the soil and the pipe), two cases arise. In the first, it is assumed that the seismic
wave is sinusoidal in shape, incident horizontally and that the ground deformation is
transfers in a quarter of the wavelength, -*(figure 10.6A). Therefore, the maximum deformation that
can occur for this condition is:

you
or- *
-max- (10.10)
4EpAp
dwhere

-* is the apparent wavelength of the seismic wave associated with the ground velocity
maximum, calculated as -*-CaT.It can be roughly calculated by -*- two- is the period of the
T seismic wave

248
 RECOMMENDATIONS

The second case occurs when there are anchor points in sections shorter than a quarter of the
wavelength (figure 10.6 B), so the value of -*,expressed in eq. 10.10 will be taken as the distance
between the anchor points.

Figure 10.6 Length of pipe used to determine the maximum deformation induced by
a seismic wave.

3.10.5.3 Static method

The static analysis method is applicable to continuous straight pipes or those formed by straight
segments joined by flexible joints.

3.10.5.3.1 Response due to wave propagation effect

The recommended static method for evaluating the effects of wave propagation in the pipeline is
based on ground displacements and deformations. The steps to follow are:

1. Obtain the length of the predominant seismic wave, - associated with the maximum ground
velocity using the following expression:

- -vsTs (10.11)
where
vs is the speed of propagation of shear waves in the equivalent ground stratum is the
Ts dominant period of the equivalent ground stratum according to what is stated in section
3.1

249
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

2. The ground displacement at the burial depth is calculated,Hof the pipe, by the equation:

Ts -H
ORh- ,1 g co s
at Tand (10.12)
4- two
2Hs
where
a0 is the acceleration of the ground at the surface incm/stwowhich is obtained according to the
acceleration of the basal rock and the site factor as explained in section 3.1
Hs is the total thickness of the equivalent ground layer

3. When dealing with a continuous buried pipe, the calculation of the axial forces -L,bending
-band combined -x,It is done through the following equations:

-ORh
-L - - ANDp (10.13)
1 -

-b --
two-twoDU h AND (10.14)
two p
-
two

two
-x- 3.12-twoL- -b (10.15)
where
-1 is the axial strain transfer coefficient is the bending strain
-two transfer coefficient

-1Y -twoare calculated as follows:

1
- 1- * (10.16)
1- (2- / -1- )two

1
-two- (10.17)
1- (2- / - -)two
two

where
-1 is the soil stiffness ratio is the
-two tube stiffness ratio

Both relationships are expressed as follows:

kg1
-1- (l/cm) (10.18)
ANDpAp

kg2
- -two 4 (l/cm) (10.19)
ANDpYo

250
 RECOMMENDATIONS

where
kg1 is the longitudinal stiffness of the soil

kg2 is the transverse stiffness of the soil

It's recommended that:

- two
k g1-kg2- 3 vs (10.20)
g
where
- is the volumetric weight of the soil surrounding the buried pipe is
g the acceleration due to gravity

When there are pipes with flexible joints, the calculation of axial and bending forces of the pipe at the
pointxfrom the expansion-contraction joint is done with the following expressions

-L'- -1(x)-L (10.21)

-B.'- -two(x)-b (10.22)

where
-LY -bare obtained according to Eqs. 10.13 and 10.14

The values of -1Y -twoare reduction factors that depend on the stiffness of the pipe, the stiffness of
the soil and the length of the pipe as explained in section 3.10.5.3.1 of Comments.

4. It is convenient that the calculation is defined in terms of soil deformation -gand the axial
deformation of the pipe -ta:

2-Uh
-g - (10.23)
-

-ta- -1-g (10.24)

where
ORhY -1are the terms calculated with Eqs. 10.12 and 10.16

5. In the case of deformation due to ground curvature -gand from the pipe -tbthe calculation is defined
by:

two-twoDUh
- g- (10.25)
-two

-tb- -two-g (10.26)

where

251
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

ORhY -twoare the terms calculated with Eqs. 10.12 and 10.17

6. These deformations are compared with the permissible deformations presented in subsection
3.10.5.3.5

3.10.5.3.2 Response due to the effect of permanent deformation

Permanent ground deformation (PGD) refers to soil displacement due to different causes such as:
slope slippage, fault surfaces, cyclic compaction of sand or liquefaction induced by seismic vibrations.
It should be checked if the permanent deformation is longitudinal to the pipe, or it is transverse, or it
is in both directions. The displaced soil area is bounded by a lengthLPGDand a widthB.PGD.

Longitudinal permanent deformation

To obtain the maximum longitudinal displacement, -1 d the deformation zone must be established
permanent (PGD). For continuous pipes, 2 cases are proposed:

Case 1: The amount of displaced soil -1is large and the strain of the pipe is controlled by the length
(LPGD) of the PGD zone.

Case 2. The length (LPGD) of the PGD zone is large and the pipe deformation is controlled by the
amount of soil displaced

When -1 dis large (case 1) the maximum axial strain in the pipe due to tension and compression is
will calculate by:

- -r-r
youorL
PGD-r -- - a- -
- a- -1- (10.27)
2-DtpANDp- 1-r- r - - -
- -Y- -
dwhere

LPGD is the length of the permanent deformation zone of the ground

-a is the stress acting in the pipe
-Y is the yield stress of the pipe material
-r, rr are the Ramberg-Osgood parameters (paragraph 3.10.2 of Comments)
youor is the maximum frictional force per unit length of the pipe interface ground is
youp the thickness of the pipe

WhenLPGDis large (case 2) -he dgoverns the amount of strain in the pipe and the strain
maximum for tension and compression will be calculated by:

- -r-r
you - r -- youorL and - -
-a- -1-
orLand
(10.28)
2-DtpANDp- -Dtp - Y---
1-rr- -two
- -

252
 RECOMMENDATIONS

dwhere

Land is the effective length of the pipe where the friction force actsFFand can be evaluated by
the following equation:

- - - r-r
two
two-- - r ---- you orL and - -
he
-
youorLand
- d - -1- -- r--- (10.29)
two
-D tpAND p - -two- r--1 - rr ---- 2 -D tpANDp-- -
- -

The strain of the pipe -seismicfor permanent deformation, the smallest value will be taken
of the deformations obtained in Eqs. 10.27 and 10.28 and must be compared with the allowable
deformations presented in section 3.10.5.3.5

Transverse permanent deformation

In the same way as the longitudinal permanent deformation, the amount of displacement will be calculated with
the spatial length and width (LPGDYB.PGD) of transverse PGD.

The maximum deformation due to curvature will be calculated by the following equations:

-D-he d
-b - - two (10.30)
B.PGD

two
porB.PGD
-b - - two (10.31)
3-EtpD
where
B.PGD is the width of the permanent deformation zone of the ground

The maximum deformation obtained will be compared with the permissible deformations presented in section
3.10.5.3.5

3.10.5.3.3 Effects due to liquefaction

The force per unit length acting on the pipe by buoyancyFbwill be calculated by:

Fb-Ws[Wp-Wc- (Pv- - hw)D] (10.32)

dwhere
Ws is the total weight of soil displaced by the pipe per unit length is the
Wp weight of the pipe per unit length
Wc is the weight of the contents of the pipe per unit length is the
Pv vertical pressure of the soil
hw is the height of the water above the pipe

The adhesion of the soil with the pipe will be neglected.

253
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

The stress induced by buoyancy effects in the pipe will be calculated by:

FbLtwob
- -bf (10.33)
10Z
where
Lb is the length of the pipe in the buoyancy zone
Z is the section modulus of the cross section of the pipe

The maximum strains can once again be obtained using the Ramberg-Osgood stress relationship.

3.10.5.3.4 Crossing of active geological faults

For the seismic analysis of pipes that cross an active geological fault, the calculation procedure
indicated below must be followed.

The ultimate resistance of the soil in the longitudinal, transverse horizontal and transverse vertical
upward directions is calculated,youor, porYwhator,respectively, according to the equations of
table 10.1 and with the help of figures 10.2 to 10.6. The given expression for the value ofyouor
Applies to pipeline sections that remain straight between the anchor points. For the curved
sections that develop in the vicinity of the ground fault, it is recommended to use the following
values:

H
Yes -1.5 you
uc- 2.4tor
D
(10.34)
H
Yes -3.5 youuc- 3.3tor
D

In these relationships,His the depth of burial of the pipeline, measured from the surface of the
ground at its ridge. For other combinations ofHYDthey can be obtained from table 10.2
presented in the Comments section.

1) A value of the maximum axial stress is assumed -ain the pipe and calculate the corresponding maximum
axial forceFain the pipeline, at its intersection with the ground fault, by means of:

Fa- -aAp (10.35)

2) It is considered that the radii of horizontal curvatureRcland uprightRcvof the curved sections of the
duct adjacent to the fault remain constant, calculating their values using the following
equations:

FaCp
R cl - (10.36)
por

254
 RECOMMENDATIONS

FaCp
R cv - (10.37)
whator

two
PYo-DYo
C p-1- (10.38)
4Fa
where
PYo is the internal pressure in the duct is

DYo the internal diameter of the duct

coefficientCpis a factor that takes into account the increase in curvature caused by the
internal pressure, for the duct without bending stiffness, which is equivalent to a reduction in the radius of
curvature, since it is inversely proportional to the curvature.

3) The unitary deformations by axial tension are calculated, -aand bending -b,in any cross section of
the duct within its curved section using the following equations:

- rr
- -r -- - a----
-a - - a-1 (10.39)
1-r- r - - -
AND -
- p
-Y- -

D
-b- (10.40)
2Rcl

Where the yield stress, -Y, and the factors -rYrrThey depend on the type of steel in the pipeline. These
Ramberg Osgood parameters for different grades of steel are presented in the Comments section.
The maximum deformation -a,should be limited to approximatelytwo%Y5%of the tension deformation
of the duct and is calculated by:

-max- -a--b (10.41)

4) The total elongation required in the duct is calculated,- lr , depending on the movement at the fault. It
above requires first evaluating the length of the sections with horizontal and vertical curvature, L
c1YLcvrespectively, on each side of the fault, so:

1/two
L cl- (-YR cl) (10.42)

1/ 2
L cv- two
( -ZRcv) (10.43)

two two
- -Z
two
- lr - - -YX - (10.44)
3Lcl 3Lcv
where
-X , - Y
Y- Z
Are the displacement components at fault

255
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

5) The unanchored lengths on each side of the failure are calculated,LheYLtwo,required to transfer to the
surrounding soil by longitudinal friction the maximum axial force,Faat the intersection of the duct with
the fault using the expression:

Fa-tucL
L1 - L two- cl
-Lcl (10.45)
youor

6) The elongation of the pipe is calculated -La,based on the maximum axial stress assumed at the
intersection of the pipeline with the fault. The calculation of said total deformation is carried out by
integrating the axial unitary deformations along the duct. The integration of deformations -aI know
carried out independently for the curved and straight sections of the duct between the anchor
points. The total deformation is then obtained by the expression:

-La- 2-Lc--LS1--LS2 (10.46)

The values of -Lc, -LS1Y -LS2are calculated using the following equations, resulting from
integration:

-
- L S1- -Y-Lsl1-
-B.s-B l1-
--
cR
-B. s
rr-2 r-r 2 -
- B.l1 -- (10.47)
- - two - h(r
s -r 2) -

- -B.s-Bl2-
-LS2 - - -Y Lsl2 - --
cR B.rr-2 B.rr-2 -
s - l2 - - - (10.48)
- - two - h s(rr - two) -

-LC- -Y-L
- -B. m -B. s-
cl - --
cR
two - hc(rr- two)
-B. rr-2
m - B.s -- -
rr-2
(10.49)
- - -

In these equations:
- Y
-Y- L sl2 -L -L cl
two
AND
p

- -a
cR- B.m -
rr-1 -Y
(10.50)
h-c youuc
B.s -B.m -hLc
Ap-Y cl

hs-
youor

B.l1 -B -sh L
Ap-Y s sl1

Lsl1-L1-Lcl B.l2-Bs-hsLsl2

7) The difference of - is obtainedThe- -lr.If the result is not reasonably close to zero, the analysis
procedure is repeated modifying the value of -aas required

3.10.5.3.5 Admissible deformation criteria

256
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Table 10.3 shows the percentages of permissible unitary deformation for the case of buried pipes.

Table 10.3 Percentages of admissible deformation in buried pipes

Allowable deformation
Deformation component Pipe Category
Strain Compression
Ductile cast iron pipes two%
For PGD : (-gr-c) for
steel pipes 3%
Continuous Gas Pipes and propagation of
Oil polyethylene pipes twenty%
waves:

Pipe Elbows and Tees 1% (of0.5a1of -gr-c)

-c-pgd
0.25 andor
Continuous water pipes Iron and steel pipes
or 5%
-c-waves

where
you
p
- gr-c- 0.1 75 (10.51)
Rp

youp
- c-pgd- 0 . 88 (10.52)
Rp

- -
youp- 0.0025- 3000-- PS -two
--
- c-wave s-0.750- 0.5 (10.53)
- D- --2Et p---
- -
where
Rp is the radius of the pipe
Dmin is the minimum internal diameter of the pipe including internal roughness

D
D- -
3-D-Dmin- (10.54)
1-
D

3.10.5.4 Dynamic method

The dynamic analysis method can be applied to any geometric configuration of the pipeline, as long
as the parameters necessary to perform it are known and the importance of the pipeline warrants it.

For buried pipes, the step-by-step analysis will be used as a dynamic analysis method. For this,
accelerograms of real tremors or simulated movements, or combinations of these, may be used,
provided that representative movements are used whose characteristics of intensity, duration and
frequency content are compatible with the seismic hazard of the site in question.

257
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.11

STRUCTURES TYPE 9
DAMS

259
 RECOMMENDATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 3.11 TYPE STRUCTURES 9: DAMS

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... .263

FLOWCHART............................................... ..............................................265

3.11.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS................................................ .........................267

3.11.1.1 Classification of dams according to their structure and type of material...................................267
3.11.1.2 Selection of earthquakes and load combinations................................................... .............267
3.11.1.3 Classification of dams for seismic analysis purposes ................................................ ....269
3.11.1.4 Design principles ............................................... ........................................................... ...270
3.11.1.5 Selection of analysis methods ........................................................... ................................273
3.11.1.6 Calculation of freeboard ................................................ ...........................................................276

3.11.2 MATERIALS ................................................. ........................................................... ........277

3.11.2.1 Concrete and masonry .................................................. ............................................277
3.11.2.2 Land and riprap .................................................. ................................................278

3.11.3 METHODS OF ANALYSIS OF CONCRETE AND MASONRY DAMS..............278

3.11.3.1 Curtain-vessel-foundation interaction................................................... ...........................278
3.11.3.2 Hydrodynamic analysis of the vessel .................................................. ...........................................281
3.11.3.3 Stability analysis................................................... ................................................283
3.11.3.4 Seismic coefficient for stability analysis of slopes, embankments and
cuts ................................................. ........................................................... ...........................284
3.11.3.5 Analysis of stresses and deformations .................................................. ........................285

3.11.4 GRAVITY DAMS.............................................................. .........................................286

3.11.4.1 Analysis considerations................................................... ................................................286
3.11.4.2 Simplified calculation of vessel and foundation effects................................................... 286
3.11.4.3 Design considerations ........................................................... .........................................287

3.11.5 OTHER CONCRETE AND MASONRY DAMS.................................................... .289

3.11.5.1 Arch dams.............................................................. ........................................................... .........289
3.11.5.2 Buttress dams ........................................................... ............................................291

3.11.6 SIMPLIFIED ANALYSIS OF EARTH DAM AND RIP-RILLING...................292

3.11.6.1 Generalities.............................................. ........................................................... ........292
3.11.6.2 Dynamic response.............................................. ........................................................... 292
3.11.6.3 Seismic stability ................................................ ........................................................... .294
3.11.6.4 Seismic permanent deformation .................................................. ..............................298

3.11.7 DETAILED ANALYSIS OF EARTH DAM AND RIP-FILMING...................................299

3.11.7.1 Generalities.............................................. ........................................................... ........299
3.11.7.2 Static analysis ................................................ ........................................................... ......300
3.11.7.3 Dynamic response.............................................. ........................................................... 300
3.11.7.4 Initiation of loss of resistance.................................................... ..............................302
3.11.7.5 Seismic stability ................................................ ........................................................... .304
3.11.7.6 Seismic permanent deformation .................................................. ..............................304
3.11.7.7 Post-seismic stability............................................................ ............................................305
3.11.7.8 Post-seismic permanent deformation and other post-seismic damage...................................305

261
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.11.8 COMPLETE ANALYSIS OF EARTH DAM AND RIP-FILMING ................................307

3.11.8.1 Generalities.............................................. ........................................................... ........307
3.11.8.2 Elastoplastic model.............................................. ................................................308
3.11.8.3 Direct nonlinear model .................................................. ..............................................308
3.11.8.4 Advanced elastoplastic model .................................................. ................................309

262
 RECOMMENDATIONS

NOMENCLATURE
a0,1,2maxMaximum accelerations in the crown for the {Fext} Vector of external forces
fundamental period, first and second modes a {Fint} Vector of internal forces
basis,maxMaximum acceleration at the base of the curtain a {Famortization}vector of damping forces F
crown maxMaximum acceleration at the crown {a} Security factor
acceleration vector Fhe Safety factor against liquefaction Total
A Area on which the buttress rests Fa hydrodynamic force
Ap , L Dimensionless material parameters Width Fs Security factor
B. of the base of the curtain g Gravity acceleration Shear
c Cohesion that varies linearly with depth. GD modulus
c0 Cohesion in the crown GF Final elastic shear modulus
cR Rayleigh Damping Coefficient Constants GYo Initial shear modulus
c1,2,3 GDmax Maximum average curtain shear modulus
C speed of sound in water
C1 Dimensionless factor that depends on the type G* Complex shear modulus
of curtain, its geometric configuration and the H Total height of the curtain, measured from
Poisson's ratio of the curtain material Constant the level of the base to the level of the
C-- crown
d free board Ha Height of water in the glass measured from the
da Settlement of the curtain and foundation by bottom or from the surface of the sediment if the
non-seismic loads sediment is analyzed explicitly
dace Settlement of the curtain and foundation against Hs sediment thickness
seismic loads Yo Area moment of inertiaA Horizontal
dns Freeboard due to non-seismic effects Wave kh seismic coefficient Vertical seismic
deither rise due to wind action Wave rise due to kv coefficient Yield or critical seismic
dyou seismic action Safety reserve for non-seismic kY coefficient Mass of the voussoirYo
dr loads Safety reserve for seismic loads mYo Magnitude on the Richter scale Stability
drs Freeboard due to seismic effects M numbers
ds N1.2
dv Over elevation of the glass by the wind Pa Atmospheric pressure
dYAM Free board corresponding to the NAME r arc radius
dNAMOFree board corresponding to NAMO D R Ductility reduction factor
dimensionless factor Ra Correction factor for the effects of the
AND Modulus of elasticity of curtain material presence of the glass and the reflection of
ANDc Modulus of elasticity of foundation material waves at the bottom of it
Rc Correction factor for the relative stiffness
ANDcrown Crown elevation to be used in the design between the curtain and the foundation
Q Seismic behavior factor Dynamic
ANDcor.NAMEEstimated crown elevation with base Qs thrust of the silt Front thickness
in NAME you
ANDcor.NAMOEstimated crown elevation with base you0 Crown thickness Curtain base
at the NAMO youmax thickness Vessel fundamental
ANDYAMNAME elevation Ta period without curtain
ANDNAMONAMO elevation interference
ESI Seismic severity index Te0 Fundamental period of the curtain without

F' Tensile strength considering the presence of the vessel

263
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

-
Te1,e2 Vibration periods for the first and -he cyclic resistance
second modes -c Cyclic shear stress generated in the
~ Modified fundamental period
Te0 earthquake
s underpressure -d Dynamic shear stress Shear
vSD Shear wave propagation speed in the -F strength
curtain -Yo Initial shear stress at a point in the dam
z Measured from the bottom of the vessel or from
the surface of the sediment -max Maximum shear strength
-- Reflection coefficient of pressure waves at -1 Fundamental frequency of the dam
the bottom of the vessel - Dimensionless parameter
-c Dimensionless ratio of cohesion increase --- Distribution function with respect to
normalized depthz/Hawhich will be
-R---RConstant computed as an infinite series
- -
you Slope inclination angle Pore -s Distribution function with respect to
-or pressure normalized depthz/Hswhich will be
-́ Internal friction angle Shear strain computed as an infinite series Damping
- Cyclic shear strain Initial shear strain -D
-c Average volumetric weight of dam -1 Viscous damping coefficient of the curtain
-Yo Deformation potential
-D -a Additional damping coefficient due to
-p curtain–vessel interaction and absorption
-r Deformation at the beginning of the discharge from the bottom of the vessel
-c Hysteretic damping coefficient of the material -c Additional damping coefficient due to the
relative stiffness between the curtain and the
--- Inclination angle of the wall with respect foundation
~
to the vertical plane - Damping coefficient
--- Central angle in radians Mass density
Functions
--- of curtain material
to 0,- Maximum ground acceleration

-a Mass density of water Mass density of normalized, whereTand- 0

History of acceleration in the bottom of the
-c foundation rock material aYoyou

voussoir

-s Mass density of the sediment in the apyou Average Acceleration History

vessel
msz Derived virtual mass distribution
--- Stress strain
- Normal effective stress on failure planes of the sediment as a function of the vertical
coordinatezmeasured from the bottom of
-0 Mean effective confining stress the glass

- Shear stress Sa Te0,- , Sa Te1,-,Sa Te2,-accelerations

-r Effort at the beginning of the discharge spectral for fundamental mode, first,
second modes
-

264
 RECOMMENDATIONS

FLOWCHART

STRUCTURES TYPE 9: DAMS

1. Select earthquake and load combination (item 3.11.1.2)

maximum acceleration
of the land

PRODISIS

Spectrum for level

of service and
prevention of
collapse

2. Classification of the dam (potential loss of shear strength of the materials, potential damage to
the downstream zone, height and seismicity of the site (tables 11.1 to 11.4).

3. Selection of the type of analysis (table 11.10)

concrete and masonry land and riprap

Kind of
Prey?

4a. Requirements and scope for 4b. Requirements and scope for the
the type of analysis (table 11.6) analysis type (table 11.7)

5a. Design criteria (table 11.8 – 5b. Design criteria (table 11.9 –
Subsections 3.11.3, 3.11.4 and 3.11.5) Subsections 3.11.6, 3.11.7, 3.11.8)

Detailed analysis Complete analisis

Analysis Analysis Analysis
Analysis
simplified detailed complete material without
material with loss
material without material with
simplified waste of waste of waste of
Stability Flip/Slide resistance
endurance endurance endurance

Interaction virtual mass Substructure comprehensive system Response spectrum of Frequency domain with model
dynamic response linear equivalent
Effort- spectrum of domain of the
Step by Step
deformation response frequency Stability Letters of Pseudostatic stability without change of
seismic design properties
Step by Step
Deformation
equations Newmark's method without change of Step by Step with model no
permanent
empirical properties with model direct linear or
seismic
elastoplastic elastoplastic
Stability Static stability with advanced
– –
post seismic change of properties

Deformation Stress analysis–

permanent – – static deformation with
post seismic change of properties

265
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.11.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

3.11.1.1 Classification of dams according to their structure and type of material

The seismic design criteria provided in this section are for the following types of dams:

a) CONCRETE AND MASONRY DAMS

b) EARTH DAM AND ROCK-FILLING

3.11.1.2 Selection of earthquakes and load combinations

The PRODISIS program will be used to determine the maximum normalized ground acceleration to
0,- ,whereTand- 0 (ec. 1.14), in the geographical location of the dam. Subsequently, follow the
recommendations stipulated for the construction of the design spectra according to section 3.1. The
spectrum corresponding to the collapse prevention level will be calculated with a return period of at
least10,000years for dams classified asA+ (with high potential for damage),3,000years for dams with
medium damage potential and,1,000years for low damage potential. The damage potential
classification is set out in Table 11.1. For the level of service, also called operation, the spectrum will
be obtained for a return period of154years (fifty%probability of not being exceeded in100years).
Given that the consequences of an earthquake greater than the service earthquake are
fundamentally economic, greater or lesser return periods may be used with their corresponding
justification.

Table 11.1 Classification of dams according to their potential damage to the downstream zone.

Damage waste of
material damage
potential human lives

High economic losses that correspond to damage to residential,

commercial or industrial areas, main roads and railways and
Tall Considerable
important public facilities, as well as significant damage to natural
resources.

Medium economic losses that correspond to damage to isolated houses,

possible but
Medium secondary roads and railways, interruption of public services, as well as
scarce
moderate damage to natural resources.

Minimal economic losses that correspond to moderate damage to

Bass None agriculture and local roads, as well as minimal damage to natural
resources.

The level of service (earthquake base of operation) is fundamentally related to the operation of the
dam. For this level correspond the seismic actions that can cause important movements in the dam
site, at rocky ground level, without it presenting operational problems. With the collapse prevention
level (maximum design earthquake) the seismic actions with which the dams will be designed are
defined. In this case, the design will allow the dams to suffer significant structural damage or
considerable economic losses, but without catastrophic consequences such as total rupture or
uncontrolled evacuation of the vessel.

267
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

The design stages will start with the level of service and will end with the verification of the safety of
the structure considering the level of collapse prevention. For both earthquakes, the maximum
acceleration and velocity of the ground and the design spectrum will be defined. If the analyzes are
carried out using a stepwise method, it will also be necessary to define the accelerograms that come
from the design spectra. It is recommended to generate at least three accelerograms.

If the dam site is instrumented and there is a record of some earthquakes, these can be used to
generate synthetic accelerograms. Seismological studies must be carried out to determine the
characteristics of the maximum design earthquake in order to define a correct scaling of the seismic
source. This exercise should provide acceleration, velocity, and displacement histories for rocky
terrain, as well as response and design spectra. Additionally, for earthen and rockfill dams, a
magnitude on the Richter scale and duration of the earthquake must be provided even when the
accelerograms are not defined.

When the foundations are rocky, the seismic parameters of the site will be defined at the level of the basal rock. When the foundations are not
rocky, the presence of the soil deposit must be taken into account and a detailed study of the local seismic conditions must be carried out,
defining, in addition to the seismic parameters mentioned, the seismic load capacity, the induced deformations, as well as the the spatial
variation of seismic excitations. Seismic parameters can be defined in two ways. If soft ground is explicitly included in the analysis, these
parameters should be defined at the bedrock level. When the seismic parameters are specified on the surface of the soil deposit, a
deconvolution analysis will be carried out to determine the parameters in the basal rock. If the study is limited to the body of the curtain, the
seismic parameters must be supplied at the base of the curtain, which must be previously affected by the effect of the foundation deposit.
Due to the importance that the foundation has on the distribution of efforts in the curtain, the first consideration is recommended. In some
cases, where a one-dimensional curtain dynamic amplification analysis is performed, seismic parameters with site effect may be used. These
parameters will be specified in the base of the curtain. Due to the importance that the foundation has on the distribution of efforts in the
curtain, the first consideration is recommended. In some cases, where a one-dimensional curtain dynamic amplification analysis is performed,
seismic parameters with site effect may be used. These parameters will be specified in the base of the curtain. Due to the importance that the
foundation has on the distribution of efforts in the curtain, the first consideration is recommended. In some cases, where a one-dimensional
curtain dynamic amplification analysis is performed, seismic parameters with site effect may be used. These parameters will be specified in
the base of the curtain.

Two loading conditions will be defined. The first is called unusual seismic load, which is the result of a
combination of unusual loads and the earthquake corresponding to the service level. The second is
called extreme seismic load, which is the result of a combination of normal loads and the earthquake
corresponding to the collapse prevention level. Normal loading conditions, at which dams most often
operate, do not always correspond to the NAMO. To cite an example, the most critical condition of
the slope upstream of earth and rockfill dams, even without the effect of rapid emptying, will not
always turn out to be the highest level of the basin. Seismic load combinations should take these
scenarios into account.

All possible normal and unusual load combinations should be considered, taking care to eliminate
those in which the probability of loads occurring simultaneously with earthquakes is small. Apart
from the two levels of designs mentioned and the possible load combinations defined, the particular
natural hazards of the site will be analyzed that are related to the aspects of induced seismicity, slip
and vessel failure, active nozzle failure, tsunami or seismic waves.

268
 RECOMMENDATIONS

The hydrodynamic effects of the basin will have to be considered for concrete and masonry dams as
detailed in section 3.11.3. In earthen and rockfill dams, the hydrodynamic effects of the basin will not
be considered, with the exception of concrete face rockfill dams. In these, the virtual mass model will
be applied. The influence of earthquakes or that of the waves generated by them, on the filtration
pressures or underpressure, will not be taken into account. The dynamic effects of silt will not be
considered except in high dams with very thick silt.

With the exception of dams built on narrow mouths where the length of the curtain is less than three
times its height, the dams can be analyzed two-dimensionally by taking a unit length. Three-
dimensional effects will be important in concrete face dams if one wants to know the behavior of the
concrete face, regardless of the shape of the nozzle. Three-dimensional analyzes will also be
necessary for arch or buttress dams.

Critical safety structures for dams, such as spillways and tailrace tunnels, will be designed using the
maximum design earthquake. Attached structures such as the powerhouse, intake works and their
gates, call channel, etc., must be designed using at least the spectrum for structuresA2.

3.11.1.3 Dam classification for seismic analysis purposes

For analysis and design purposes, the dams will be classified according to four concepts: potential
loss of shear strength of the materials, potential damage to the downstream area, height, and site
seismicity (tables 11.1 to 11.4).

Table 11.2 Classification of foundation materials and earth and riprap curtains,
according to their potential for shear strength loss.

Material Description

Materials that are saturated and subjected to cyclic actions suffer negligible reduction in
no loss of
shear strength, with little generation of excess pore pressure or accumulation of residual
endurance
strains.

Materials that are saturated and subjected to cyclic actions undergo small to significant
At a loss
reduction in shear strength, with significant generation of excess pore pressure or
resistance
accumulation of residual strains.

Table 11.3 Classification of dam sites according to seismicity.

seismicity maximum ground acceleration,to 0,-

Short < 0.1

Half 0.1 ≤ a 0,- ≤ 0.4

high > 0.4

269
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 11.4 Classification of prey according to their height.

Height Curtain height (m)

Short < 15

Half 15 ≤ height ≤ 30

high > 30

Materials with no loss of strength are those that, during cyclic loading and in the saturated state,
experience negligible reduction in shear strength, low excess pore pressure generation, or little
accumulation of residual strain. Clays and riprap are typical materials of this group. Due to their very
low permeability, saturated clays do not allow the dissipation of excess pore pressure generated
under dynamic loads, however their static undrained strength remains intact. At the other extreme,
coarse granular materials have high permeability whereby excess pore pressure does not accumulate
during seismic loading and drained strengths are preserved in terms of effective stresses. In this
group of materials, of a dilating nature,

Materials with loss of strength undergo cyclic deformations with accumulation of excess pore
pressure or significant residual deformation, allowing seismic and post-seismic deformations of great
magnitude. Dynamic shear strength is appreciably reduced from that experienced under static
conditions. Most saturated soils are cataloged in this group. However, in uniform saturated loose
sands, the strength is reduced to such a degree that only the undrained residual strength is
preserved at large strains. These materials are commonly referred to as flow loss materials. It is
known that they can be gravel and even materials with a certain content of fines if they are
contractive in nature.

For the potential damage associated with dams, the negative consequences that the rupture of dams
could produce on the downstream zone will be considered. They can be due to loss of human life or
material damage. The potential damage of a dam will be evaluated through failure risk analysis.

3.11.1.4 Design criteria

Materials with loss of shear strength should not be used for dam construction. Channel deposits that
have similar characteristics should be discarded as foundation sites. If the presence of such materials
is detected in existing dams, the possibility of their replacement or improvement should be studied to
reduce their potential loss of shear strength.

The influence of seismic waves on the safety of dams should be taken into account. In the absence of
studies on seismic waves, a free board margin must be assigned between0.5Y1.5m,value to be added
to the freeboard loss calculated in the seismic permanent deformation analysis. If there is the
possibility of large-scale landslides within the basin, the extent of the waves that this could cause on
the curtain should be studied.

270
 RECOMMENDATIONS

For concrete and masonry dams, the following aspects should be examined.

Stability against overturning.The safety factor against overturning will be defined as the quotient
between the resistant moment and the acting moment, calculated with respect to the center of
rotation located at the downstream foot. The base of the curtain is defined on a horizontal plane.
Table 11.5 defines the minimum safety factors. The overturning of the structure will be accompanied
by excessive efforts, by the tension that is exhibited in the upstream part and by the compression in
the downstream part. When the safety factors against overturning are not met, special attention
must be paid to the calculation of the efforts in both parts.

Slip Stability. The safety factor will be defined as the quotient between the resistant lateral forces
and the forces acting on any plane. The planes considered may be horizontal or inclined and may be
inside the body of the curtain, in the curtain-foundation contact or within the rock mass. As indicated
in Table 11.5, the safety factors will be defined for three load combinations and for three failure plane
locations. To use these factors, the coefficient of friction and cohesion must be considered. If a null
cohesion condition is assumed, the factors of safety will be reduced accordingly.

Table 11.5 Safety factors.

load combinations
Concept
Normal Unusual extreme

Stability against overturning 1.5 1.25 1.1

Stability against sliding considering cohesion and friction

massive concrete 3.0 2.0 > 1.0

concrete-rock interface 3.0 2.0 > 1.0

Rock 4.0 2.7 1.3

Stability against sliding without considering cohesion 1.1 1.05 > 1.0

compression stress

massive concrete 3.0 2.0 1.0

rocky foundation 4.0 2.7 1.3
Stress strain

massive concrete 3.0 2.0 1.0

rocky foundation * * *

* The rocky foundation is not capable of resisting the tensile stresses.

Safety margin against excessive stress. Compression stresses will be reviewed by comparing the
minor principal stresses and the compressive strength of the material. The safety factor will be
defined as the ratio between the resistance and the acting effort. Tensile stresses will be reviewed by
comparing major principal stresses and tensile strength. If the stresses in question are defined in a
given plane, such as along the foundation-curtain contact or the bond planes in roller-compacted
concrete dams,

271
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

The stresses normal to these planes will be reviewed. The factor of safety for the tensile stress is
defined as

Fyou- -s
F s- (11.1)
-
where
Ft́ is the tensile strength is the
s underpressure
- is the tensile stress

The minimum values of the safety factor for tensile stresses are presented in table 11.5. Taking into
account the safety factors thus calculated, the cracking zones will be defined. The rocky materials of
the foundation will be considered to have no tensile strength. All stresses should be calculated
assuming that tensile stresses are positive. The exposed criteria have been established mainly for
gravity and buttress-type dams. These same will be applicable for arch dams. As in these dams the
stresses are oriented in the directions of the arch and the cantilever, the major and minor principal
stresses mentioned will be replaced by the tension and compression stresses in both directions.

Terms of Service.The permissible conditions of service such as maximum levels of displacement,

speed and acceleration must be established in accordance with the specifications of the equipment in
each project. Little is currently known about the boundary conditions for permanent displacements of
concrete and masonry curtains. These limit conditions must be specified in accordance with the
particular conditions of each project.

For earth and rockfill dams, the following aspects should be examined: dynamic response, seismic
stability, seismic permanent deformation, post-seismic stability, post-seismic permanent deformation
and other damages. In all studies, the foundation and embedding of the dam should be considered.
It will be advisable to include the natural deposit of the channel in the curtain model. The loss of
shear strength of materials is the main cause of dam failures in seismic events and should be
considered, or discarded with adequate justification, for all analyses.

dynamic response. In the analysis, acceleration, deformation and stress histories and vibration
periods, including the fundamental, as well as damping values of the dam will be determined. The
initial conditions to which the dam is subject before the start of the earthquake must be specified in
each analysis. These conditions may be obtained at the end of construction, in the long term or in the
consolidation process. In order to estimate these conditions, a study of the static behavior of the dam
must be carried out.

seismic stability. The safety against shear failure of the slopes of the curtain body and natural slopes
in the basin, which will be subject to seismic loads, will be evaluated. Foundation shear failure will
also be investigated. The pseudostatic load hypothesis will be used, using seismic coefficients. The
safety factor will be defined as the minimum quotient between the resistant shear strength and the
shear stresses developed by the previously identified failure mechanisms along the most unfavorable
failure surface.

272
 RECOMMENDATIONS

The acceptance condition of the seismic stability will be based on the definition of the seismic
coefficients for the stability analysis, the reduction in the shear strength of the materials, the safety
factor and the tolerable induced displacements. If the seismic coefficients are defined as half the
coefficient of the maximum acceleration of the site and it is accepted that the static shear resistance
parameters can have a maximum reduction of thetwenty%and the tolerable displacements are of the
order1m,The factor of safety must be greater than1.2for service earthquakes and1.0for collapse
prevention earthquakes. Pseudo-static stability analysis will be applicable to dams containing only
materials without loss of strength.

Seismic permanent deformation. It is the accumulation of deformations and plastic displacements

generated by inertial effects of seismic forces and the dynamic compaction of the material. It can be
expressed as the cumulative movement of a massive fault block, distributed deformations in the
curtain body, or settlements. The permanent set should be estimated assuming that the curtain
materials are of low strength loss potential. The estimated deformation will serve to specify the loss
of free board by earthquake. The loss of free edge or settlement, estimated by the concept of
permanent seismic deformation, must be less than the permissible value of loss of free edge due to
earthquake. The fault block slip shall not be greater than1.0m

post seismic stability. When some of the dam materials have potential for loss of strength, the
stability of the dam under static loads should be evaluated and estimated. The main cause of changes
in resistance is the phenomenon of liquefaction or loss of resistance, whose susceptibility and
initiation must be known prior to the post-seismic stability study. If said stability is evaluated by
means of traditional slope stability methods and an estimate is made of reductions in the shear
strength of the materials, the safety factor must be greater than1.2for service earthquakes and1.0for
collapse prevention earthquakes, for service and collapse prevention earthquakes, respectively.

Post seismic permanent deformation. It will be produced by reductions in the shear strengths of
materials with potential for strength loss. It will be evaluated in a static analysis considering the
changes in the properties of the materials. The estimated post-seismic permanent deformation
should be compared with the tolerable freeboard loss.

The possibility of the occurrence of those seismic damages that have not been mentioned, such as
cracks, damage to structural elements and leaks, among other aspects, should be studied. Cracking
potential will be defined in terms of threshold values of tensile stresses or strains. Potential cracking
zones are bodies of cohesive material, contacts between the curtain body and slopes, or between
earth materials and concrete. In dams with a concrete face, cracks can be found in the concrete slabs,
joints between slab blocks, or joints between the slabs and the plinth.

3.11.1.5 Selection of analysis methods

Analysis methods are classified into three types according to their complexity: Simplified, Detailed
and Complete. Tables 11.6 and 11.7 present the data required for the materials and the

273
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

type of earthquake for each method of analysis, as well as their scope, for the classification of dams
considered in this section. Tables 11.8 and 11.9 present the main characteristics of each of the
analyses, which are cataloged according to the different aspects of the study.

Table 11.6 Requirements and scope for the analysis of concrete and masonry dams.

Analysis
Detailed analysis Complete analisis
simplified

Design spectrum, maximum

seismic data Additionally, accelerograms
accelerations

material data Tensile and compressive strength, dynamic modulus of elasticity

Additionally, areas of plastification and

scopes of
Maximum efforts, safety factors cracking, crack propagation, permanent
analysis
deformation

Table 11.7 Requirements and scope for the analysis of earth and rockfill dams.

Simplified analysis Detailed analysis Complete analisis

Data Design spectrum, magnitude of Additionally, accelerograms

seismic earthquake, maximum acceleration

Data of Static shear strength, dynamic Additionally, Additionally,

material stiffness variation and cyclic shear strength, residual resistance,
damping, Poisson's ratio generation in excess of constitutive model
pore pressure linear

scopes of Dynamic response, seismic Additionally, post seismic stability, post seismic
analysis stability, seismic permanent permanent deformation, other post seismic
deformation damage

Table 11.8 Characteristics of the analyzes for concrete and masonry dams.

Analysis Analysis Analysis

simplified detailed complete

Stability Flip/Slide

System
Interaction virtual mass Substructure
integral

Effort- spectrum of domain of the

Step by Step
deformation response frequency

Table 11.9 Characteristics of the analyzes in earth and rockfill dams

274
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Detailed analysis Complete analisis

Analysis material without material without material with
simplified material with loss
waste of waste of waste of
resistance
endurance endurance endurance

Response spectrum of Frequency domain with model

dynamic response linear equivalent

Stability Letters of Pseudostatic stability without change of

seismic design properties

Deformation
equations Newmark's method without change of Step by Step
permanent
empirical properties Step by Step with model no
seismic
with model direct linear or
static stability elastoplastic elastoplastic
Stability
– – with change of advanced
post seismic
properties

Stress analysis–
Deformation
static deformation
permanent – –
with change of
post seismic
properties

The selection of analysis methods for a given project will depend on four factors mentioned at the
beginning: potential loss of strength of the materials, potential damage, seismicity of the site and
height of the dam. Depending on the combination of these factors, the type of analysis will be
selected according to table 11.10.

Table 11.10 Selection of analysis methods

Material

No loss of resistance with loss of resistance

Height

Short Half high Short Half high

Bass yes yes yes D D D

Short Medium yes yes D D D C

Tall yes D D D C C
potential damage

Bass yes yes D D D C

seismicity

Half Medium yes D D D C C

Tall D D C C C C

Bass yes D D D C C

high Medium D D C C C C

Tall D C C C C C

275
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

S = Simplified Analysis, D = Detailed Analysis, C = Full Analysis

3.11.1.6 Freeboard calculation

The elevation of the crown of a dam will be calculated by taking the maximum value of the calculation of two
estimated elevations based on the NAMO and NAME, respectively. That is,

ANDcrown-max(Ecor,NAME-Ecor,NAMO) (11.2)
where
ANDcrown is the crown elevation to be used in the design is the
ANDcor,NAME estimated crown elevation based on the NAME is the
ANDcor,NAMO estimated crown elevation based on the NAMO

elevationsANDcor,NAMEYANDcor,NAMOwill be calculated according to

ANDcor,NAME-EYAM-dYAM
(11.3)
ANDcor,NAMO-ENAMO-dNAMO
where
ANDYAM, ENAMOare the elevations corresponding to theYAMYNAMO d
YAM, dNAMOare the freeboard corresponding to theYAMYNAMO

The free board for each water level condition will be the maximum value of the estimate of the free
board due to non-seismic effects and that corresponding to seismic actions. That is,

d - max(dns, ds) (11.4)

where
d is the free board
dns is the freeboard due to non-seismic effects
ds is the freeboard due to seismic effects

The free board due to non-seismic effects will be formed by the components:

dns- (dv-deither-da-dr) (11.5)

where
da is the settlement of the curtain wall and foundation under non-seismic
deither loads is the rise of waves due to wind action
dr is the safety reserve against non-seismic loads is
dv the over-elevation of the pool by the wind

The free board due to seismic effects will be calculated based on four components:

ds- (da-dyou-dace-drs) (11.6)

where
dace is the settlement of the curtain wall and foundation under seismic
dyou loads is the rise of waves due to seismic actions
drs is the safety reserve against seismic loads
276
 RECOMMENDATIONS

The settlement calculated before non-seismic loads will be accumulated for the calculation of the free board due to
seismic effects.

The calculation of the free board due to seismic effects will be carried out taking into account two levels of
seismic intensity that are the Design Operation Earthquake (SOD) and the Collapse Prevention Earthquake (SPC).
To calculate the free board, expressed in Eq. 11.5, the freeboard corresponding to the first earthquake (SOD) will
be combined with the non-seismic freeboard calculated based on theYAMand the free edge obtained from the
second earthquake (SPC) will be coupled with the free edge estimated with theNAMO. These two combinations
are shown in Table 11.11.

Table 11.11 Load combinations for the calculation of free boards

Calculation of the freeboard for the condition

YAM NAMO

Water level YAM NAMO

earthquake Design Operation Earthquake earthquake collapse prevention

The free banks must be large enough to avoid overflowing in the event of seismic waves. The
following minimum free boards are recommended depending on the height of the curtain.

Table 11.12 Minimum free boards

Curtain height (m) Minimum free edge (m)

< 50m 1.0

50 ≤ height ≤ 100m 2.0
> 100m 2.5

3.11.2 MATERIALS
3.11.2.1 Concrete and masonry
The best way to know the dynamic characteristics of the materials that form concrete and masonry
curtains will be through dynamic tests on a scale model or in laboratory tests. In the absence of
specific experimental data for a given project, the experimental data obtained under static conditions
extrapolated to the dynamic properties will be taken as the basis. An increase in the80%in static
moduli of elasticity for use in dynamic analyses. The dynamic tensile and compressive strength
parameters will also increase with respect to static conditions. This increase may reach up tofifty%,
Although it is generally considered only a30%. The shear stress resistance parameters will not be
modified by dynamic effects. Under static and dynamic conditions, the coefficient of friction will
generally be considered to be equal to1.0and cohesion equal to10%of static compressive strength. In
the use of design spectra for the analysis of concrete and masonry dams, the seismic behavior factor
will not be applied.Q

277
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.11.2.2 Land and riprap

For purposes of seismic analysis and design of earth and rockfill dams, the construction materials
and natural deposits of the foundation will be classified as materials with or without loss of
resistance. The loss of strength can be due to flow or cyclic mobility.

Materials without strength loss are those that are not susceptible to strength loss during cyclic
loading (item 3.11.1.3).

Materials with loss of resistance due to flow undergo cyclic deformations of great magnitude,
acquiring extremely low values of residual undrained resistance. They reach a state of collapse or
flow in which a considerable generation of excess pore pressure is experienced. Typically, this group
of materials are uniform saturated loose sands, but they can also be gravel and even materials with a
certain content of fines, if they are contractive in nature.

Most saturated soils are materials with loss of resistance due to seismic mobility. They are materials
that apparently collapse at small strains due to cyclic shear, a scenario that is similar to the state of
loss of strength by flow, but gradually recovers its undrained strength at large strains. They stand out
for the generation of excess pore pressure that should be considered in the analysis. Its undrained
resistance is reduced with respect to the static condition by a non-negligible percentage.

The identification of the groups of material mentioned will form the first step in carrying out any
analysis procedure. The identification of the susceptibility and initiation of resistance loss will be basic
to catalog the materials. Not all analysis methods are applicable to any type of material. Table 11.10
shows the analysis methods and aspects that should be considered for each type of material.

In the analysis of earth and rockfill dams, the seismic behavior factor will not be applied.Q, nor the
overstrength factorRto the design spectra.

3.11.3 METHODS OF ANALYSIS OF CONCRETE AND MASONRY DAMS

3.11.3.1 Curtain-vessel-foundation interaction
In the analysis of dams, the system made up of three components should be considered: the curtain, the
basin and the foundation. In general, the physical space of the curtain component will include a part of the
foundation and a part of the rock strip near the curtain, with the purpose of facilitating the analysis of the
stress state in the foundation-curtain contact. If alluvium deposits are present, they will be included in the
curtain component. The foundation component includes the rest of the rock mass that is not included in
the curtain. Much of this component is formed by the bottom of the vessel and the embedments. The
dynamic analysis of this three-component system and the interaction between them is extremely complex.
Therefore, before the analysis, it is important to determine some parameters of the system in order to be
able to define the level of complexity that such an analysis will require. First, the dynamic characteristics of
the glass and curtain components will be defined, considering that the foundation is rigid. The
fundamental period of the vessel without the

278
 RECOMMENDATIONS

curtain interferenceTaand the fundamental period of the curtain without considering the presence of the vessel
Te0are given by

4H a
Ta- (11.7)
C

H
Te0-C1I / - (11.8)

where
Ha is the height of the water in the glass measured from the bottom or from the surface of the sediment if
the sediment is analyzed explicitly
C is the speed of sound propagation in water (C-1440 m/s)
H is the height of the curtain, measured from the level of the spur to the level of the crown is the
AND modulus of elasticity of the material of the curtain
- is the mass density of the curtain material
C1 is the dimensionless factor that depends on the type of curtain, its geometric
configuration and the Poisson's ratio of the curtain material. Details of said factor are
given in sections 3.11.3 and 3.11.4 for each type of dam.

The compressibility of water is considered to be relevant in the response of the system if the following condition
is fulfilled:

Te0- two
(11.9)
Ta

When the compressibility of water is relevant, a suitable vessel model including such an effect will be
considered.

In general, the foundation will be considered as a homogeneous semi-infinite space with viscoelastic
characteristics. The effect of the foundation on the vessel will be defined by the reflection coefficient
of the pressure waves at the bottom of the vessel - .

-cvc--aC
- - (11.10)
-cvc- -aC
where
-a is the mass density of water
-c is the mass density of the rocky foundation material
vc is the compression wave propagation velocity of the rocky foundation

When the condition is met ->0.9,the foundation of the pool will be considered rigid. The effect of the
foundation on the curtain will be measured through the modulus of elasticity of the foundation material.
ANDc. If the condition of Eq. 11.11, the foundation will be considered rigid.

ANDc- 4
(11.11)
AND

279
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Yes with eq. 11.11, it is determined that the flexibility of the foundation is not important, the presence of
the foundation can be omitted in the study, or simpler models of the foundation can be adapted.

Considering the relative importance of the compressibility of the water and the flexibility of the
foundation on the response of the system, especially on the dynamic behavior of the curtain,
numerous calculation methods have been developed in order to retain the most relevant effects of
the system. according to the special characteristics of a given project. Depending on the degree of
integration or coupling between the three components of the system, the existing models can be
classified into three groups: a) models of the virtual mass and rigid base, b) of substructures and c) of
the integral system. The three groups of models differ from each other in aspects related to
considerations about the glass, the curtain and the foundation.

a) Virtual mass and rigid base models. These types of models will be suitable when the
compressibility of the water and the flexibility of the foundation are not important. The
physical space of the analysis will include the curtain and a portion of the foundation. The
hydrodynamic pressures will be represented by virtual masses attached to the upstream face.
The foundation will be formed by a material without mass and will be delimited by a rigid
base. The seismic excitation will be applied to the rigid base. The behavior of the curtain and
foundation materials can be linear or non-linear. In principle, these types of models are
applicable to any dynamic analysis method: response spectrum, frequency domain or
stepwise. However, the step-by-step method is recommended to give correct treatment of the
non-linearity of the materials.

b) Substructure models. These types of models will be used when the compressibility of the
water or the flexibility of the foundation are important. The three components of the system
will be analyzed independently. Before carrying out the analysis of the curtain component, the
hydrodynamic pressures and the flexibilities of the foundation will be determined. The
hydrodynamic pressures acting on the upstream face will be determined in a hydrodynamic
analysis of the basin, the details of which will be described in section 3.11.3.2. In the analysis,
the curtain will be assumed rigid or flexible. Sediment effects and vessel bottom flexibility will
be included if conditions warrant. A part of the foundation will be included in the curtain
component and the rest will be represented by the flexibilities of a semi-infinite medium. The
curtain component is similar to that defined in the virtual mass and rigid base models, except
that the mass of the portion of the foundation included in the curtain component is now
considered. The base of the curtain component will no longer be rigid, that is, it will be
considered that it interacts with a viscoelastic medium through a viscous boundary that allows
it to absorb the elastic waves that affect the base. The matrix of hydrodynamic influences and
flexibilities of the foundation will be determined, in the first instance, in the frequency domain.
If the curtain analysis is performed in the same domain, the mentioned matrices can be
directly integrated into the curtain analysis. If the study is carried out in the time domain, they
will have to be transformed to the time domain using Fourier convolution and synthesis
techniques. The seismic excitation will be applied directly at the base of the curtain
component or under a wave propagation scheme. For substructure models, methods in the
frequency domain will be preferred.

c) Integral system model. This type of model will be applicable for any system condition. The
three components of the system will be analyzed in a coupled and simultaneous manner.

280
 RECOMMENDATIONS

The dynamic equations established for each component will be integrated by means of
coupling schemes in the face upstream of the pool and in the curtain-foundation contact. The
dynamic effects of all three components will be determined simultaneously. These models will
be applicable to any dynamic analysis method and it will be possible to incorporate all the
considerations made in the two types of previous models. In addition, in the step-by-step
analysis it will be possible to include non-linear effects that may occur in the vessel, such as
cavitation and waves.

The virtual mass and rigid base models will be the ones that should be used as a minimum in any
seismic analysis of dams. The use of this type of models is recommended because they adapt
adequately to structural analysis programs. These models are particularly attractive when analyzing
three-dimensional, non-linear problems or problems with complex geological structures at the
nozzle. Even when the most refined models are justified, the use of virtual mass and rigid base
models is recommended, whose results can be taken as a starting point or comparison reference to
interpret the conclusions obtained with other types of models. Integral system models require much
more expensive computational processes, which have been implemented in specialized computer
programs.

3.11.3.2 Hydrodynamic analysis of the vessel

In the hydrodynamic analysis of the vessel, the main objective will be the determination of the
hydrodynamic pressures on the curtain in the face of seismic solicitations. The pressures will be
determined from the characteristics of the water contained in the glass, especially its compressibility,
and the conditions established at the borders of the glass. Basically four borders are identified: the
face upstream of the curtain, the walls, the bottom and the far border of the pool. The latter is
present only when the vessel has the shape of a river. This border does not exist if the glass is closed,
like a lake, therefore, it must be treated in a special way. Usually the conditions on this boundary are
established by an analytical solution. At the bottom of the glass are sediments under which is the
rocky foundation, which is shared by the walls. If the analysis is limited to the two-dimensional case,
the boundaries of the walls will not influence the results.

The movements of water are irrotational, inviscid and small. If the compressibility of the water is not
important, the hydrodynamic pressure will be directly proportional to the magnitude of the ground
acceleration, a fact that simplifies the inclusion of the hydrodynamic effect in the analysis of the curtain
because the pressures will become virtual masses attached to the water wall. above the curtain. Taking
into account that the vessel has a semi-infinite length, that the walls do not intervene in this process, that
the bottom of the vessel is flat and rigid, and that the excitation is horizontal in the axis of the river, the
virtual mass will be expressed as ( figure 11.1).

281
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Figure 11.1 Geometric characteristics of a gravity dam.

-z-
mz - -aHa--- -- (11.12)
-Ha-
where
mz is the virtual mass distribution as a function of the vertical coordinatezmeasured from the
bottom of the vessel or from the surface of the sediment if the sediment is analyzed explicitly is the
- distribution as a function of normalized depthz/Hawhich will be calculated as an infinite series:

---1-
n-1
-z- - z-
--- -- -two- two
cos--- n H -- ( 11.13)
- H a- n-1 -n - a-

where
-n--2n-1--/ two

For the inclined wall, the approximate solution is:

-1/ 2
- z- 1 - ztwo - ztwo -
--- -- - C--1- - -
-1- two- - (11.14)
-Ha- two - Hatwo - Ha- - -
- -
with

- --
C--0.743-1- - (11.15)
- 100-
where
- is the angle of inclination of the wall with respect to the vertical plane

In an analysis using the finite element method, the mass expressed in Eq. 11.12 is associated with the direction
of the excitation. If the analysis is two-dimensional and considers vertical excitation, the mass associated with
this direction is23from that expressed in Eq. 11.12. In the three-dimensional analysis, the mass associated with
the direction of the curtain axis is the same as that expressed in Eq. 11.12. Once the distributed masses in the
excitation components have been formulated, it is straightforward to concentrate them in the nodes of the
finite elements through the concept of tributary areas. When the background, the facing

282
 RECOMMENDATIONS

and the walls do not meet the postulated hypotheses, the Laplace equation will be solved directly and
the results obtained can be grouped in a similar way to the function equation. Due to the flexible
nature of the foundation and bottom, these effects will not enter the analysis if the water is
incompressible.

When the compressibility of water is relevant, the equations of motion include the term of inertia.
Therefore, hydrodynamic pressures have to be expressed in terms of complex numbers, with
magnitude and phase. In this case, the concept of virtual mass ceases to be valid, so the
hydrodynamic pressures will be applied to the upstream face. If the analysis of the curtain is carried
out in the frequency domain, the incorporation of said pressures will be direct. If the analysis is step
by step, the Fourier convolution and synthesis technique will be used to express the pressures in the
time domain. For analysis with response spectra and design, it will be convenient to use the integral
system model, in which the compressibility of water is taken into account.

In dams where the silting problem in the basin is severe, the silting thrust will be determined
explicitly. To do this, in the silt part, the hydrodynamic thrust will be replaced by the dynamic thrust
of the silt. The analysis will be similar for both cases. If the sediment is considered to be sufficiently
stiff such that the dynamic amplification or attenuation effects of buoyancy are not important, the
same concept of aggregate mass will apply as applied for the treatment of water as attached mass.
The added mass for a vertical facing will be expressed in a form similar to Eq. 11.12.

-z-
msz - -sHs--- -- (11.16)
-Hs-
where
msz is the distribution of the virtual mass derived from the sediment as a function of the coordinate
verticalzmeasured from the bottom of the glass
-s is the mass density of the sediment in the beaker is the
Hs thickness of the sediment
-s is the distribution as a function of normalized depthz/Hswhich will be calculated as an infinite
series:

---1-
n-1
-z- - z-
-s-- -- -4.62- two ---n H --
without (11.17)
-Hs- n-1 -n - s-

where
-n is defined as in Eq. 11.13

3.11.3.3 Stability analysis

The stability analyzes will be applied to the entire body of the curtain or to a part of the curtain from a
certain elevation. In the tumbling and sliding stability analysis,
horizontal and vertical seismic loads will be considered. Horizontal seismic coefficientkh, normalized
with respect to the acceleration due to gravity, will be given by

283
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

to 0,-
kh- (11.18)
1- 2 to 0,-
where
to 0,- is the maximum normalized ground acceleration, evaluated inTand- 0 (ec. 1.14)

The vertical seismic coefficientkvwill be calculated according to

two
kv-k (11.19)
3h

In the stability review, the following three concentrated seismic forces will be considered: a) horizontal
inertia force that is equal to the total weight of the curtain multiplied by the corresponding seismic
coefficient, b) vertical inertia force that is equal to the sum of the total weight of the curtain and the weight
of the wedge of water on the upstream face affected by the vertical seismic coefficient and c)
hydrodynamic force produced by the horizontal excitation of the earthquake. These forces will take
positive and negative signs simulating inertial actions towards upstream and downstream. The same
subpressure loads will be considered as in the static case. The cracking zones at the base of the curtain will
remain with the same extension as in the static case. The total hydrodynamic force Fa, will be calculated
according to the following formula

two
Fa- 0.48kh-aHa (11.20)

This force acts at a height equal to0.40Haon the bottom of the beaker or on the sediment surface if the
sediment is analyzed explicitly. The dynamic thrust of the azolveQswill be determined by

two
Qs- 2.15kh-sHs (11.21)

which acts at a height equal to0.60Hson the bottom of the glass.

3.11.3.4 Seismic coefficient for stability analysis of slopes, embankments and cuts
For the stability analysis of slopes, embankments and cuts, a pseudo-static type analysis may be
carried out, provided that the loss of resistance due to cyclic load effects in the analyzed materials is
not greater thanfifteen% (MDOC Geotechnical Chapter B.2).

In the pseudostatic analysis, it is estimated that the horizontal load caused by the earthquake is equal
to the multiplication of the weight of the potentially slippery soil and a horizontal seismic coefficientK
h, the latter expressed as a fraction of gravity (eq. 11.18). The resulting pseudostatic force is used in a

conventional limit equilibrium analysis and is considered as a horizontal static load acting in the most
unfavorable direction, applied at the center of gravity of the analyzed segment.

When the soil shows loss of resistance greater thanfifteen%or develops a notable increase in pore
pressure due to the effects of the earthquake, a dynamic analysis should be carried out that takes these
aspects into account, usually with the finite element method.

284
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.11.3.5 Stress and strain analysis

Static methods will not be applicable to determine dynamic stresses. For this case, dynamic methods
will be mandatory. Three types of these are distinguished: response spectrum, frequency domain
analysis, or stepwise analysis. With the first two, only linear problems will be dealt with. The three
methods will be developed within the framework of a numerical procedure that is generally finite
element. With the response spectrum method, the maximum responses of the curtain will be
evaluated by combining the individual responses corresponding to each vibration mode. It will be
possible to consider the different components of the excitation. All the calculated responses will take
a positive sign, so the results obtained will be useful to determine the maximum stress levels,
although they can offer difficulties if it is required to distinguish the states of tension or compression.
This requires careful review and interpretation. The response spectrum method will preferably be
applied in the models of the virtual mass and rigid base or of the integral system. Since these are
linear problems only, it is recommended to use this method for unusual seismic loads in any seismic
zone or for extreme seismic loads in areas of low seismicity (early seismic zones).AYB).

In the analysis of the frequency domain where they are used, Fourier transform techniques will
generally be able to obtain stress histories that define the states of tension and compression without
ambiguity. The analysis will be attractive to deal with substructure models. This is because many of
the particularities of the system can be treated more easily in the frequency domain, for example the
compressibility of water, the radiation of elastic waves, the viscoelasticity of the materials of the
curtain and the foundation, and the presence of sediments at the bottom of the vessel. The only
problem with this analysis will be that the materials must behave in a linear fashion. Consequently,
this analysis cannot be used with extreme seismic loads in areas of high seismicity.

All nonlinear effects can be included in the stepwise analysis. It is the most appropriate method to
examine these effects in areas of high seismicity. To take into account the effects of the vessel and
the foundation, the models of the virtual mass and rigid base or of the integral system will be used in
the analysis. Non-linear effects on the curtain and foundation will be mainly related to cracking. To
analyze the cracks, whether discrete or continuous, fracture mechanics will be used. In this case, the
material will still be linear elastic but the solution will be non-linear because the cracks propagate
according to the level of the loads. When the cracks are diffuse and discontinuous, they will be
treated with continuous models. Damage or diffuse crack models will be suitable for this analysis. The
non-linear analysis of the movements of the contacts between the blocks or between the curtain and
the embedments will be carried out with special models for such cases. It is recommended to use at
least three accelerograms to perform step-by-step analyses. For each of the accelerograms, the signs
of the accelerations will be alternated to achieve different combinations. For two-dimensional and
three-dimensional problems,twotwo= 4Ytwo3= 8 combinations respectively.

Under seismic loads and nonlinear effects, the resulting displacements will be composed of two
parts: transient and residual. Transient displacements will disappear when the earthquakes end. The
residual displacements will remain after the earthquake and will be negligible if the behavior of the
curtain is within the elastic range. Displacement

285
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

permanent will be determined in a step-by-step analysis. It will be relevant to know both

displacements to define the service conditions.

3.11.4 GRAVITY DAMS

3.11.4.1 Analysis considerations
The considerations set forth in subsections 3.11.1 to 3.11.3 are valid for the analysis of gravity dams.
Gravity curtains have bending and shear actions and it will not be appropriate to consider them
separately in the analysis. Mechanics of materials or beam theory analysis will provide results of
limited utility. If a numerical method is used, the finite element method is recommended.

Generally, two-dimensional analyzes will be performed on at least two cross sections: one shedding
section and one non-shedding section. Both corresponding to those that contain maximum cross-
sectional areas in each of the two parts. The analysis of more cross sections will be justified when the
presence of greater efforts or less stability is expected in them. In these analyses, the condition of
plane deformation in curtains with grooved joints or without transverse joints will be considered.
When the joints are of separation, the plane stress condition will prevail. Three-dimensional analyzes
will be justified under the following conditions: a) the longitudinal axis of the curtain is curved, b) the
curtain is founded on alluvium or some compressible material,3,e) the curtain has pronounced
geometric changes in the longitudinal direction and f) other conditions that make the analysis
necessary.

For the presentation of the results of the analysis, the following recommendations are made: a) In
conventional concrete dams, the main forces will be determined and compared with the respective
resistances. The representation of the main stresses with their corresponding main directions is
recommended in order to appreciate the orientation of possible cracking, b) In roller-compacted
concrete dams, the above comparison will be made with the stresses normal to the construction
plans, c) determine the percentage of the area, with respect to the total area, where the tensile
strength is exceeded and d) determine the normal and tangential stresses along the fault planes in
which the stability against sliding will be checked. This information will be useful for a better
interpretation of the results of the calculation of the safety factors. It is recommended to know the
possible areas of cracking due to dynamic effects.

3.11.4.2 Simplified calculation of vessel and foundation effects

The purpose of the calculation procedure presented below will be to determine the fundamental
period and the damping coefficient affected by the characteristics of the curtain and the conditions of
the vessel and the foundation. The two parameters will be used in determining the spectral ordinate
that will correspond to the fundamental period and the damping.

The basic periodT1of a gravity curtain with a rigid foundation and empty vessel, will be determined
according to Eq. 11.8, where the factorC1is evaluated as

286
 RECOMMENDATIONS

H
C1- 6 (11.22)
B.
where
B. is the width of the base of the curtain

The fundamental period will be affected by the foundation and vessel conditions through
~
of the modified fundamental periodTe0What

~
Te0-RaRcTe0 (11.23)
where
Ra is the correction factor for the effects of the presence of the glass and the reflection of waves
at the bottom of it.
Rc is the correction factor for the relative stiffness between the curtain and the foundation

The value ofRadepends on three parameters: the wave reflection coefficient at the bottom of the
vessel -, the modulus of elasticity of the curtain materialANDand depth ratioHa/ h.If you have the
relationshipHa/ H < 0.5,calculation can be omitted.Rasimply usingRa≈ 1.The value of - can be defined
using Eq. 11.10. If the information necessary to use this equation does not exist, values of - between
0.9Y1.0for newly built dams, where the sediment thickness is small. On the other hand, for dams of
old construction, where the thickness of the sediment is considerable, values of - between0.75Y0.9.
The value ofRcdepends on the relationshipANDc/ E. YesANDc/ E > 4,it will be usedRc≈ 1.

The damping coefficient is given by

~ 1 1
-- - 1- - a -- c (11.24)
Ra R3c
where
-1 is the coefficient of viscous damping of the curtain without including effects of the glass or the
foundation. If no experimental data is available, the value will be used.0.05
-a is the additional damping coefficient due to curtain–vessel interaction and absorption
from the bottom of the vessel. The value of -ais obtained using the three parameters: the
wave reflection coefficient -, the modulus of elasticity of the curtain materialANDand
depth ratioHa/ h.ForHa/ H < 0.5,it will be used -a= 0
-c is the additional damping coefficient due to the relative stiffness between the curtain and
the foundation, as well as the damping of the foundation material

The value of -cis obtained using two parameters: the ratioANDc/eand the hysteretic damping
coefficient of the foundation material -c. YesANDc/ E > 4,it will be used -c= 0.The values ofRa, Rc, -aY -c
are recorded in tables 11.4 to 11.6 of section 3.11.4.2 of Comments.

3.11.4.3 Design considerations

Many design details, although not explicitly reflected in the analysis, will provide important
improvements to seismic stability and reduction of dynamic stresses. The dams of

287
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

gravity are the oldest, for this reason experience has been accumulated on earthquake-resistant
designs. Below are some general guidelines on how to improve the seismic performance of gravity
dams.

1. Widening the base of the curtain will increase slide stability by reducing stresses on the heel and
toe. Stability against overturning will also be improved if the base enlargement allows the
center of gravity to shift upstream. The base can be extended giving greater stretch to the
slopes on both sides of the curtain. It will be feasible to evaluate downstream slopes up to1:1
and slopes upstream to1:0.06.Stability against sliding will also be increased by building
concrete dents in the foundation or by changing the straight axis of the curtain for a curved
one.

2. Slope changes at the top of the upstream face will generate higher dynamic stress
concentrations. On the one hand, we will seek to smooth these changes with continuous
curves. If this measure is not possible and it is verified that the tensile stresses are still high,
reinforcements must be designed in these areas. Traditionally slope changes are designed on
the upstream face in order to save a considerable volume of materials. Observations and
studies in recent decades have shown that these slope changes constitute critical elements in
seismic behavior. For this reason, it is recommended to eliminate them, using the design of a
single slope upstream.

3. Special attention will be paid to the drainage conditions of the galleries to guarantee the
operation and efficiency of the drains. The aim is to reduce underpressure and increase
stability against sliding.

4. The conditions of the rock foundation will be carefully reviewed. The existence or not of
geological faults on which the curtain is located will be investigated. If it is not possible to
avoid the construction of dams on geological faults, measures will be studied to ensure the
stability of the curtain even when the faults are activated. It must be ensured that the
treatment of the foundation-curtain contact has the required specifications and quality, in
order to improve stability against landslides.

5. The injected transverse joints, which efficiently prevent leaks, may produce excessive stresses
that damage the surrounding bodies. It will be convenient to review the feasibility of using
joints that allow relative movements, particularly in the joints that link the body and the
embedments.

6. Stress concentrations are generated around the galleries in the event of seismic events. In the
design of the galleries, geometric shapes that minimize said efforts should be sought. If
inadmissible tensile stresses are present, reinforcements must be designed.

7. Installations and equipment located on the crown can experience high accelerations. Its design
must contemplate these amplifications. If the seismic coefficient method is used, the
acceleration coefficient for the design of equipment located on the crown must be doubled
with respect to that used for the design of the curtain body. It must be taken into account that
the added masses in the crown will be harmful to the seismic behavior of the curtain and
must be considered in the analysis. This aspect

288
 RECOMMENDATIONS

It will become more important when slope changes occur on the downstream face because
the masses are located in the vicinity of said changes.

8. In masonry dams, stress zones may occur. If possible, it will be advisable to reinforce these
areas by increasing the cement content in the mortar, changing some areas of masonry to
unreinforced concrete, or adding a cast-in-place concrete wall to the upstream face.

3.11.5 OTHER CONCRETE AND MASONRY DAMS

3.11.5.1 Arch dams
Arch dams are built based on monolithic cantilevers separated by vertical contraction joints. The
stability problems of arch dams are concentrated in the embedments rather than in their base. For
static conditions, the most important failure mechanisms are the sliding of blocks at the embedments
that serve as support for the body of the arch. Critical conditions due to overturning or base slippage
rarely occur. Under dynamic conditions, none of these failure mechanisms offer critical conditions,
therefore, the curtain body structure can fail only due to excessive stresses. Consequently, the
stability check for seismic loading can usually be omitted.

The analysis of stresses and strains in arch dams will be carried out with dynamic methods and, in
general, with the help of finite element programs and laboratory model tests. The finite element
analysis must be carried out in a three-dimensional model taking into account the entire body of the
curtain and a nearby area of the foundation. If the curtain is symmetric with respect to the axis of
the river and the excitation does not include the normal component to said axis, only half of the arc
can be analyzed. The general philosophy of the analysis will be similar to that set forth in subsections
3.11.3 and 3.11.4. In arch dams, the effects of the basin and the foundation are more important. As
stress transfer occurs mainly in the embedment zones, the spatial variation of the excitation is more
relevant.

For a better approach to the analysis, the most important dynamic characteristics of this type of
curtain should be taken into account. Some of them are: a) The vibration modes are, in general,
symmetric or antisymmetric, with respect to the axis of the river. If the arch is not symmetric, its
vibration modes are similar to those obtained for the symmetric geometry even though the
symmetry axis moves from the center of the river, b) For the first vibration modes, the radial
displacements are greater than the tangential ones and vertical, and the highest values are
concentrated in the part near the crown, c) For the same elevation, the radial displacements on both
faces of the arch (upstream and downstream) are directed towards the same direction. Instead,

The maximum dynamic cantilever stresses occur in the central part of the arch at an elevation3/4of
the total height of the curtain, f) Efforts can be concentrated in the vicinity of the auxiliary equipment
installed in the arch, and g) The vertical contraction joints that are arranged in the arches cause the
distribution of stresses to differ from that obtained assuming a bow body

289
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

homogeneous. There is a possibility that the joints will open when the arc stresses exceed a certain
value. Stresses concentrated in parts where open joints occur are transferred to other parts with
intact joints. This stress transfer mechanism increases the resistance capacity of the curtain to tensile
stresses.

In order to determine the importance of the compressibility of the water in the vessel, it is important to know the
fundamental period of vibration of the curtain. Without considering the presence of the glass, the two periods
fundamentals of a symmetric curtain will be calculated according to Eq. 11.8. the constantC1for the
symmetric mode it will be given by

1 H ccc
-0.038- 0.056 -0.9 1 2 3
(11.25)
C1 r r

For the antisymmetric mode, the constantC1will be expressed as

1 H ccc
- -0.0287- 0.1244 -1.56471 2 3 (11.26)
C1 r r

where the coefficientsc1,ctwoYc3They are given by the following equations

0.4
you you 2-t- - --
c-1max-0, c -1- -0 (11.27)
- max--- ,
two c3-1- 0.4--- -
two 3 -you - two -

where
r is the radius of the arch is the
you0 thickness in the crown
youmax is the thickness at the base of the curtain
- is the central angle in radians

In the analysis of arch dams, the three components of seismic excitation must be taken into account
in a three-dimensional model. The main stresses in the embedments will be determined, as well as
the cantilever and arch stresses on the upstream and downstream faces of the curtain body. Thin and
medium thickness curtains can be modeled using a course of shell elements. On the other hand, thick
curtains will be treated with at least three solid elements in the transverse direction. The size of the
foundation included in the model depends on the relative stiffness between the curtain and the
foundation. If the modulus of rigidity of the foundation is greater than that of the curtain, the
dimension of the foundation model may be of the order of a height of the curtain. If the flexibility of
the foundation is increased,

The seismic design considerations mentioned for gravity curtains are applicable for arch curtains. In
addition, the following improvement measures may be considered: a) Vertical contraction joints are
added as well as horizontal joints, b) At the height of the elevation of the crown, the vertical joints
may be injected or reinforced in the direction of the arc, c ) Prestressing will be applied to some parts
of the curtain wall or embedments to reduce the risk of cracking and d) The treatment of the
foundation by consolidation or dental will be increased.

290
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.11.5.2 Buttress dams

Buttress dams are made up of two parts: buttress and upstream front. The behavior of buttresses or
buttresses is very similar to that of gravity curtains. Fronts can be flat, like the Ambursen type, or
curved, like multiple arches. Downstream, the buttresses can be open, with no connection between
them, or closed when they have links.

The analysis of stability against sliding or overturning of the curtain will be focused on the cross
section of the buttresses. The considerations set forth in sections 3.11.1 and 3.11.3 are valid for this
type of dam. The stress and strain analysis can be carried out considering the entire body of the
curtain or studying a representative module of the curtain in the longitudinal direction. In both cases
a three-dimensional model will be established. The three components of the seismic excitation will be
considered. The component in the direction of the river axis will have important influences on the
fronts, while the component in the direction of the curtain axis will have an impact on the lateral
stability of the buttresses. If the fronts are curved, their analysis is similar to that of arch dams.
Whether flat or curved, the fronts will be studied using finite elements of the plate or shell type. The
buttresses will be analyzed using the solid elements. The period associated with the fundamental
mode of vibration, due to lateral bending of the buttresses
will be given by Eq. 11.8. For this, the constantC1will be expressed as

A
C1-1.787H (11.28)
Yo
where
A is the area on which the buttress rests is the
Yo moment of inertia of the areaA

The period of vibration of the curtain as a whole along the axis of the curtain will be given by Eq. 11.8
with

4t
C1- (11.29)
H
where
you is the thickness of the front

The period of vibration of the front can be calculated with Eq. 11.8 taking into account that the area
and the moment are from the front. The determination of the forces in the fronts will be similar to
that used in arch dams. In the buttresses, the forces in the transverse plane will also be calculated as
is done in the gravity curtains, those that are outside the plane and that are associated with lateral
stability. Although the tensile stresses will continue to be the critical conditions, so will the
compression stresses. Compared to gravity curtains, buttress curtains experience low uplifts. In
general, buttress curtains should not be built in areas of high seismicity due to problems associated
with lateral instability.

291
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

d) Beams and walls will be added in the longitudinal direction, e) Contraction joints will be introduced
in the buttresses with the location and orientation that anticipate cracking, f) Deep and gallery
drainages will be provided and g) Diamond heads should be designed with stress problems in mind.
It is worth mentioning that roller compacted concrete has been used to reinforce lateral stability in
existing dams.

3.11.6 SIMPLIFIED ANALYSIS OF EARTH DAM AND RIP RIP

3.11.6.1 General
The simplified analysis procedure consists of a set of analytical tools that allow studying various
aspects of the seismic behavior of dams, from dynamic response, seismic stability to permanent
deformation. The analysis procedures are carried out by means of manual calculations, thus
facilitating the preliminary estimation of the performance of the dams.

The analysis will be applicable to dams with a cohesive homogeneous section, rockfill with a concrete face
or with a thin core. It will not be applicable if one of the following cases occurs:

1) Dams containing soils with loss of resistance.

2) Dams with heights greater than50mDue to their importance, dams of this height should be
reviewed by applying detailed or complete analysis methods.
3) Earthquake with a maximum acceleration greater than0.40gThere is a very important non-linear
behavior in the dams, so a detailed or complete analysis must be carried out.
4) Dams founded on problematic terrain (highly compressible, expansive, among others). Static
site conditions may be critical and will control the design and should be reviewed through
refined dynamic and static analysis.

3.11.6.2 Dynamic response

For homogeneous sections built by unsaturated soils, very compact sands or clay soils, the maximum
acceleration at the crown and the fundamental period of the dam can be evaluated with the following
simplified method. A similar method that will be valid for rockfill dams will be described in section
3.11.6.2 of Comments. The method is based on the shear column theory considering that the
dynamic properties of the curtain, shear modulus and damping vary with the level of shear strain.

The data to perform the analysis are the following:

- dam heighth.

- Average volumetric weight of prey -D,if the dam is submerged, the

submerged volumetric weight. If the dam is partially submerged, the average volumetric
weight of the dam should be taken into account.
- Maximum initial shear modulusGDmaxcurtain average.

292
 RECOMMENDATIONS

- Degradation and damping curves.

- Response spectrum for different damping levels.

The calculation is iterative. First assume a shear strain value -c.from here on
Later, the calculation procedure is repeated as many times as required to achieve convergence of the
solution.

- The relationship is determinedGD/GDmaxand the damping level -Dfrom the degradation and
damping curves and the value of the shear modulus is calculatedGD

-Calculate the speed of the shear wave in the curtainvSDin accordance with

GDg
vSD- (11.30)
-D
where
g is the acceleration of gravity

-The fundamental period is calculated with the equation

H
Te0- 2.62 (11.31)
vSD

- The spectral ordinate is determinedSa Te0,- ,with eq. 1.8, using the estimated fundamental
period and damping

-A new shear strain value is calculated -cWhat

H
-c- 0.20 Sa Tand0-, (11.32)
vtwo
SD

- If the resulting value of Eq. 11.32 differs from the initial shear strain, the calculation is
repeated. Usually about four iterations are required to achieve convergence

Once the speed of propagation of curtain shear waves has been estimatedvSDand the damping
-D-we proceed to calculate the maximum acceleration in the crown as follows:

- The natural periods of vibration are determined for the first and second vibration periods.

H H
Te1-1.14 Y Te2- 0.73 (11.33)
vSD vSD

-The spectral acceleration for the first and second modes of vibration is determined.Sa Te1,- Y
Sa Te2,- ,with eq. 1.8, using the estimated periods of vibration and damping

293
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

- The maximum accelerations in the crown for the first three modes of vibration are
determined as:

a0.max-1.6Sa Te0,- , a1,max-1.06Sa Te1,- ,a2.max- 0.86Sa Te2,- (11.34)

- The maximum value of the acceleration in the corona can be obtained in a very approximate way
by calculating the square root of the sum of the squares of the maximum accelerations of the first
three modes.

acrown,max- atwo two two

0.max- a1,max- atwo , max
(11.35)

As a final result of this calculation process, the shear wave velocity is obtainedvSDand the dampingDof
the curtain, and the maximum acceleration in the crownacrown max. The ratio of this acceleration to the
maximum ground accelerationabasis,max(a0)defines the dynamic response amplification of the prey.

If the dam is founded on a soil deposit, the previous calculation procedure will be equally applicable.
The effect of the site can be taken in two ways. One of them will be to consider the response
spectrum that is specified at the base of the dam but taking into account the effect of the presence of
the soil deposit. On the other hand, the soil stratum can be added to the dam model, considering a
new dam with increased height and with properties that reflect the average behavior of the dam and
the foundation. The second model will cease to be efficient when the properties of the dam and the
foundation are very different.

3.11.6.3 Seismic stability

The pseudostatic analysis procedures described below will focus on four cases: Linear and nonlinear
Mohr–Coulomb law rockfill, graded materials, and cohesive homogeneous section. The materials
involved in the four cases will be without loss of resistance, so the generation of excess pore pressure
will not be considered. The considerations set forth in subsection 3.11.1.4 will be applied for such
analyses.

If the linear Mohr–Coulomb law is used in a rockfill dam, an internal friction angle of the material -́
will be considered. When the slope has an inclination -youand the earthquake is represented by the
seismic coefficientkhthe factor of safetyFwill be:

1-khso-youso-'
F- (11.36)
kh- so-you

The seismic coefficient will be estimated based on the normalized maximum ground accelerationto
0,- , whereTand- 0 (ec. 1.14), according to the criteria described in section 3.11.3. creep The
or critical
coefficient of
accelerationkYwill be given by:

kY- so--'- -you- (11.37)

294
 RECOMMENDATIONS

If a sliding wedge of vertical-faced rockfills is assumed, the critical acceleration will be given by:

kY-sin(-- --you) (11.38)

The ecs. 11.36 to 11.38 are useful for evaluating rockfill curtains with concrete faces or with
impervious cores, as long as they have steep slopes. These equations also serve to evaluate shallow
failures in riprap slopes.

The nonlinear Mohr–Coulomb law (shear strength) in riprap is expressed as

L
- -- -
-F- ApPa-- - ( 11.39
-P-a-
where
-- is the normal effective stress on the fault planes is the
Pa atmospheric pressure
Ap,L are the non-negative, dimensionless material parameters that can be determined using
data obtained from triaxial or direct shear tests

Figure 11.2 Function - dependent on seismic coefficientkh.

safety factorFof a dam with heightHand volumetric weight -Dwill be:

295
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

-L-1
- - DH
F--Ap-- -- (11.40)
- Pa -

The function - is given in Figure 11.2 as a dependence of the seismic coefficientkh, slope inclination -
youand the parameterL.If the material is totally or partially submerged, the respective volumetric

weight must be considered to take this effect into account.

Figure 11.3. stability numberN1.

In a purely cohesive homogeneous section it is assumed that the cohesioncvaries linearly with depth

- z-
c - c0-1--c - (11.41)
- H-

296
 RECOMMENDATIONS

where
z is the depth measured from the crown to the base is the
c0 cohesion in the crown
-c is the dimensionless ratio of the increase in cohesion

Figure 11.4 Stability NumberNtwo.

The factor of safety is given byF

F- c0--cN 1-N -
-DH
two ( 11.42)

Where the two stability numbersN1YNtwothey are found in figures 11.3 and 11.4. The first of them is
expressed as a function of the angle of inclination of the slope -youand the seismic coefficientkhand the
second additionally depends on the thickness of the foundation that is related to the height of the
dam through a dimensionless factordFor the linear Mohr–Coulomb law rockfill dam, the creep or
critical accelerationkYIt is calculated through an analytical formula. In other cases, said accelerations
may be obtained by interpolating the variation of the safety factor against the seismic coefficient. The
critical acceleration will correspond to a unit safety factor.

297
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.11.6.4 Seismic permanent deformation

lateral deformation. The seismic permanent deformation will be estimated according to the method
using figure 11.5. First calculate the critical accelerationkYand the average maximum acceleration of the
sliding mass. The latter will be estimated according to figure 11.6 knowing the maximum acceleration in
the crown and the maximum depth of the sliding mass. Next, the permanent deformation will be defined
using Figure 11.5 and the magnitude of the earthquake.

Figure 11.5 Seismic permanent deformation.

Figure 11.6 Maximum average ground acceleration of the sliding mass.

298
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Settlement. For rockfill dams or graded material, the settlement of the dam can be estimated using
Figure 11.7, where the relative settlement in the crown is related, as a percentage with respect to the
height of the curtain, with a parameter called the seismic severity index. (ESI) which is defined as,

ESI - to 0,- (M- 4.5)3 (11.43)

where
M is the magnitude of the earthquake

to 0,- is the maximum normalized ground acceleration, evaluated inTand- 0 (ec. 1.14)

Figure 11.7 Settlement of rockfill dams or graded material.

For the use of figure 11.7 the value of the friction angle of the backrest is also required.

3.11.7 DETAILED ANALYSIS OF EARTH DAM AND RIP-FILMING

3.11.7.1 General
The detailed analysis will divide the study into several steps. You will start with the static study,
followed by the dynamic response analysis. Taking into account the static and seismic conditions, the
changes that the shear strength of the materials could suffer due to the effects of the generation of
excess pore pressure or the accumulation of residual deformation will be determined. Depending on
the form and magnitude of the changes in the properties of the materials, stability and deformation
studies will be carried out, corresponding to seismic loads or post-seismic conditions.

The detailed analysis will be applicable to all types of material and covers all aspects of analysis
mentioned in item 3.11.1.4. This analysis is suitable when it is required to determine

299
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

the seismic performance of dams more accurately than the simplified analysis, even when the
materials involved have no loss of strength. When materials have potential for strength loss, detailed
analysis provides effective solutions, using far fewer material parameters than full analysis.

In all analyzes described in this section, the dam foundation should be included in the curtain model.
That is why the seismic excitations should be applied at the level of the basal rock of the natural
deposit of the foundation.

3.11.7.2 Static analysis

The dynamic analyzes will have to start from a static analysis, which represents, in a reliable way, the
behavioral state of the dam before the occurrence of the earthquakes. Depending on how the static
load components are defined in the seismic combinations, the behavior of the dam in the different
stages of its useful life should be studied. The static analysis will have to contemplate the scenarios of
construction, first fill, rapid emptying and established flow.

The static analysis, in general, will be carried out by means of the finite element method or other
methods with similar scope. Nonlinear soil properties, staged construction sequences, seepage
forces, and other realistic site conditions should be considered in the analysis. The nonlinear elastic
model of the Duncan–Chang type is widely used and should be considered as a minimum
requirement for this type of analysis. Other more refined models, such as the elastoplastic type, can
also be used, as long as the material parameters can be determined with a certain degree of
reliability. In any of these models, the typical characteristics of the construction materials in the dams
should be considered, such as: Variation of the friction angle in the riprap, dependency of the
modulus of elasticity with the levels of confinement stresses and shear stresses, as well as changes in
the moduli when the state of stress is modified from the initial load to the unloading or reloading. In
rockfill dams, the difference in modules between the construction and filling stages should be
considered.

The analysis may be carried out in terms of effective or total efforts. If the total stresses are
considered, the water flow analysis must be carried out and the pore pressures generated by the
static loads must be estimated, all this in order to estimate the initial dynamic modules consistent
with the effective stress level. As a result of the static analysis, the distribution of stresses, pore
pressures, deformations and displacements must be reported, as well as locating areas of
plastification and cracking, and determining the global and local stability of the dam. The distribution
of initial dynamic modules will also be determined according to the defined seismic load combination.

3.11.7.3 Dynamic response

The dynamic response analysis will be carried out in terms of total stresses although the initial
dynamic modules are defined in terms of effective stresses. For each dynamic response analysis, the
initial condition considered must be specified. It will be assumed that the modules

300
 RECOMMENDATIONS

dynamic vary exclusively with the level of cyclic strain. Other effects that could affect the modules will
not be considered.

The analysis can be carried out in the time domain (step by step) or in the frequency domain. The
response spectrum method may also be used. In general, only seismic excitations in the direction of
the river axis will be considered. For important dams, the excitations in the direction of the axis of the
curtain or in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the river will be taken into account. The
influence of the hydrodynamic effects of the basin may be ruled out in the analysis, with the
exception of rockfill dams with a concrete face.

Generally, the rock foundation will not be included in the model. Its influence is taken when flexibility
and viscosity conditions are added to the rigid base of the model. As the model must be limited to a
finite domain, different treatments must be applied to the far borders of the channel deposit. If the
analysis is performed in the frequency domain, methods are provided to consider the stratigraphy of
the deposit assuming uniform viscoelastic properties in each soil stratum. If the analysis is stepwise,
simple viscous conditions are the ones of greatest use.

Material models can be linear elastic or linear equivalent. If the linear elastic model is selected, the
degradation of the elastic moduli and the damping, corresponding to the level of cyclic deformation,
must be taken into account. This can be achieved using the preliminary estimate of the global
behavior of the dam in terms of degradation and buffering, as discussed in section 3.11.2.4. The
moduli of all materials will be uniformly reduced by a percentage and a single damping will be
applied in the analysis.

The origin of the linear equivalent model comes from the classical linear viscoelastic model, where
the stiffness and viscous behavior of the material is represented by a spring and damping connected
in parallel. Compared to the classical model, the equivalent linear model introduces two additional
concepts: a) the stiffness and, especially, the damping vary punctually in the body of the dam and b)
the stiffness and damping vary according to the level of cyclic deformation due to shear. that is
experienced in the material. For higher deformation, stiffness is reduced and damping is increased.
The moduli of stiffness and damping vary depending on the level of equivalent shear deformation
that will be estimated as0.65times the maximum shear strain at each point of the dam. Sometimes
the value of0.65will be replaced by another ranging between 0.55Y0.75.

A different damping value must be taken into account at each point of the dam. If the analysis is
carried out in the frequency domain, a complex module will be used.G*defined as.

G*-G - D 1- 2-twoD-2i-D -
1- -D two (11.44)
where
GD, -D-are the shear modulus and damping, respectively
i - -1

If the analysis proceeds step by step, the concept of Rayleigh damping can be used using two
constants -RY -Rthat linearly relate the dampingcR, the rigiditykand the dough mWhatcR= -R-m+-R-k.
where the constants are expressed as

301
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

-R- -D/ -1 Y -R- -D/ -1 (11.45)

where
-- is the fundamental frequency of the dam

In the step-by-step procedure, the time intervals for a typical prey vary between0.005Y 0.02 sec.In the
frequency domain, the maximum frequency of the analysis must match the temporal resolution of
the input accelerations. Filtering out high frequencies in the analysis will have little effect on the
results since the important frequencies of typical prey are lower than 20Hzwith the most
predominant varying between5a10Hz

If the conditions of the nozzle warrant it, the three-dimensional effect should be considered, since
ignoring it will result in lower acceleration concentrations in the maximum section of the dam and,
consequently, less conservative estimates of stability and deformation.

3.11.7.4 Resistance Loss Initiation

Soils that are classified as having loss of resistance, according to the susceptibility analysis described in section
3.11.1.4, will be submitted to a study of the initiation of loss of resistance whose objective is to reclassify them
according to their potential for loss of resistance and to determine the changes they might have in their shear
strength.

The strength loss potential will be defined in terms of the factor of safety against liquefaction. Fhe, which is
the ratio between the cyclic resistance -heand the cyclic shear stress generated in the earthquake

-c.

-he
Fhe- (11.46)
-c

Soils previously identified with loss of strength will be reclassified according to the interval of the
value of the factor of safety against liquefaction.Fhe(table 11.13).

Table 11.13 Classification of soils according to their potential for loss of resistance.

Safety factor against liquefactionFhe I usually

Fhe≤ 1.1 With flow resistance loss

1.1 <Fhe≤ 1.4 With loss of resistance due to cyclic mobility

Fhe> 1.4 No loss of strength

The effort -cat a certain point of the dam will be calculated as0.65times the maximum shear stress
recorded in an earthquake. The shear stress histories calculated in the dynamic response analysis
serve for the above estimation. For new or existing dams, the cyclic strength of the curtain and
foundation material should be determined in cyclic triaxial tests simulating the initial field stress
conditions and shear stress histories corresponding to the earthquakes in question. In the absence of
direct experimental data and if the dams are existing or the materials to be studied are from the
deposit of

302
 RECOMMENDATIONS

the foundation, empirical methods based on field tests may be used, the most reliable being the
standard penetration test.

Figure 11.8 Determination of residual undrained strength as a function of the number

of blows obtained in standard penetration tests.

In soils with loss of resistance due to flow, the residual undrained resistance will be determined,
either by means of laboratory or field tests. Figure 11.8 shows the determination of said resistance as
a function of the number of blows obtained in the standard penetration tests (Seed and Harder,
1990). In soils with loss of resistance due to cyclic mobility, the generation of excess pore pressure
will be determined according to the estimated safety factor.

Figure 11.9 Ratio between excess pore pressure -orand the effective static
confinement stress --0.

Figure 11.9 may be adopted to determine the ratio between excess pore pressure -orand the effective
static confinement stress --0.The new value of the undrained resistance of the soil will be calculated
using the static resistance parameters in terms of effective stresses, pressure

303
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

static pore pressure and estimated excess pore pressure. If the new undrained strength is greater
than the static undrained strength, the latter will be used in subsequent stability and deformation
analyses. In soils without loss of resistance, it will be considered that the generation of pore pressure
does not affect their behavior, so their static resistance is preserved.

3.11.7.5 Seismic stability

If the dam materials do not present a loss of resistance, the concept of pseudo-static analysis will be
used to determine the global factor of safety of the dam and the considerations set forth in
subsection 3.11.1.4 will be applied for said analyses.

The analysis methods for the stability of conventional slopes will be applicable for these cases. Failure
circles are the most typical failure surfaces, although wedge failures in impermeable core rockfill
dams or shallow failures in backing bodies should not be ruled out. Static water flow conditions will
remain in effect during the application of pseudo-static loads.

Strength parameters in soils without strength loss for seduostatic studies may be used as follows.

1) Static drained strength parameters will be used with the exception of plastic clays for which
static undrained strengths will be used.

2) The undrained strengths calculated in terms of the drained strength parameters will be
determined, taking into account the effective static stress conditions. These resistances must
be calculated on the previously defined failure surface.

A reduction of no more thantwenty%to these static parameters.

If the factors of safety are within the tolerance limit, the seismic permanent deformations will
generally be small. The calculation of these may be omitted in low-risk dams.

3.11.7.6 Seismic permanent deformation

The seismic permanent deformation will be estimated when the dam materials show no loss of
resistance, applying the Newmark method. Although the principles of pseudostatic analysis will be
applied for this study, unlike the seismic stability analysis, the non-uniform distribution of maximum
accelerations in the dam should be considered. The procedure consists of the following steps.

-A series of failure surfaces with slip potential will be selected.

- Strength parameters will be assigned in accordance with the criteria described in section
3.11.7.4.

- The critical accelerations of the sliding masses corresponding to these failure surfaces will be
calculated to determine the surface with the lowest critical acceleration. this surface

304
 RECOMMENDATIONS

The failure rate is the one that would produce the greatest plastic deformation. Uniform seismic forces on the
sliding masses are assumed in these calculations.

- The average acceleration history will be estimatedap(t)along the failure surface with the
smallest critical acceleration, defined in the previous section, as follows:

N
-mYoaYoyou
ap t-i-1 N (11.47)
-mYo
i-1

where
aYoyou
is the history of acceleration at the bottom of the voussoirYo

mYo is the mass of the voussoirYo

N is the total number of voussoirs considered for the failure surface under study

- Dual acceleration history integration will be appliedapyouusing the minimum critical

acceleration.

In addition to the permanent deformations estimated by the Newmark method, the volumetric
deformations in the foundation must be determined.

3.11.7.7 Post seismic stability

If the existence of materials with loss of resistance is detected in any part of the dam, the static safety
factors will be determined using the shear resistance affected by seismic effects. To achieve this
objective, conventional stability analysis methods will be applied without considering seismic effects.
The considerations described in section 3.11.1.4 will apply. Shear strength parameters affected by
earthquake in materials with strength loss will be determined according to the procedure described
in subsection 3.11.7.4.

The factors of safety must be greater than1.2for service earthquake and1.0for collapse prevention
earthquakes.

3.11.7.8 Post-seismic permanent deformation and other post-seismic damage

If the existence of materials with loss of resistance is detected in any part of the dam, a static analysis
of the stress-strain behavior will be carried out, using the shear strengths affected by seismic effects.
The considerations described in section 3.11.1.4 will apply. Soil models are usually linear or nonlinear
elastic.

The objective of the analysis will be to determine the state of stress-strain of the entire dam after the
earthquake including: 1) The complete deformed configuration of the dam including the loss of free
edge and the lateral deformations of the slopes, 2) the change in the state of stresses with respect to
the static condition in different zones of material and 3) the development of zones of cracking and
plastification due to seismic effects. Before performing the analysis, the results of the static and
dynamic analysis, described in subsections 3.11.7.2 and 3.11.7.3, must be available.

305
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Based on the dynamic stresses, their magnitude and number of vibration cycles, the stress-strain
properties of the materials will be modified. Finally, with the modified stress-strain curves, the dam
will be analyzed, managing to define the stress-strain state of the dam after the earthquake. The
difference between the results of the static or initial analysis and the final analysis yields the change
in the stress-strain state due to the earthquake. Studies will generally be conducted in terms of total
stresses.

Figure 11.10 Final Shear Elastic ModulusGF.

The change in the stress-strain curves can be defined by means of the concept of strain potential.
This potential is the permanent deformation that can develop in a soil laboratory specimen subjected
to the same static and dynamic stresses that would be expected to be experienced in the field. In the
field, soil elements are constrained by their adjacent elements without being free to develop all of the
permanent deformation recorded in the laboratory, this will be considered as potential value for field
conditions. The deformation potential is determined in the laboratory by means of cyclic triaxial tests.
Having these strains specified and counting on the static stress-strain model, it will be possible to
define the modified stress-strain model.GFwill be defined as (figure 11.10):

1 1 -p
- - (11.48)
GF GYo -Yo
where
GYo is the initial shear modulus is the final
GF shear elastic modulus
-Yo is the initial shear stress at a point in the dam
-p is the strain potential at that point. For other soil models using secant moduli, you can
define modified secant moduli in a similar way.

As an alternative to analytically specify the strain potential, the following equation has been proposed

n
-d- - Yo
- Yo- - p - --0-
- -- -- (11.49)
Pa a - b(- Yo- - p)-Pa-

306
 RECOMMENDATIONS

From which the deformation potential can be estimated -pbased on the magnitude of the dynamic
shear stress -d, the initial shear strain -Yoand material parametersa, bYn (figure 11.11).

Figure 11.11 Deformation potential -p.

3.11.8 COMPLETE ANALYSIS OF EARTH DAM AND RIP RIP

3.11.8.1 General
The complete analyzes will gather all the analyzes described in section 3.11.7 in a single study, which
starts from the static conditions until after the culmination of the earthquake. All seismic aspects will
be analyzed using a unified model or a set of consistently related models. Although safety factors
cannot be calculated, the complete pattern of stresses, deformations, accelerations and
displacements will be obtained at any point of the curtain wall and foundation, from earth materials
to structural elements such as joints and slabs. In saturated materials, the estimation of generation
and dissipation of excess pore pressure will be achieved. At present, this type of analysis is gaining
more and more use,

Complete analyzes are classified into three groups: Elastoplastic, Direct Nonlinear, and Advanced
Elastoplastic. All of them are of the non-linear type, so they will be implemented in a step-by-step
time scheme. Although effective for many nonlinear problems, implicit solution methods may have
convergence problems in geological materials because they exhibit phenomena such as physical
instability or instantaneous slip, load path dependence, strain softening, or volumetric collapse. For
these cases, explicit temporal integration will offer advantages over implicit methods. The explicit
solution will express the acceleration at each point of the dam in relation to the concentrated mass
and the forces concentrated at that point:

307
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

-a--1--Fext---Fint---Famortization-- (11.50)
m
where
{a} is the acceleration vector is
{Fext} the external force
{Fint} is the internal force
{Famortization} is the damping force

The external force comes from seismic loads and the internal force is provided by the stiffness of the
material, which is, in turn, prescribed by the stress-strain relationship. The damping force will include
Rayleigh-type viscous effects and hysteretic effects. In explicit analysis, iterations are not required at
each time step, but the time steps should be small enough not to cause numerical instability. Static or
initial conditions will usually be determined using the implicit solution.

3.11.8.2 Elastoplastic model

The elastoplastic model will be implemented within the framework of plasticity theory recognizing
that the main physical aspect of the non-linear behavior of the material is non-recoverable
deformation. The simplest stress-strain relationship is perfect elastic and plastic behavior. The stress-
strain relationship remains linear until a yield state is found, from which the total deformation of the
material separates into two parts: recoverable elastic and non-recoverable plastic. The creep function
that specifies the creep state will be defined by the Mohr–Coulomb law that will represent both the
drained and undrained behavior of the soils.

The perfect elastic-plastic model is simple and is implemented in most commercial dynamic structural
analysis packages. It will be useful to capture the hysteretic behavior of the materials, that is, the
degradation of stiffness and hysteretic damping of the materials resulting from the analysis itself
without being introduced a priori to the model. The permanent deformation will be determined in all
its components of the two and three-dimensional cases. The analysis will generally be carried out in
terms of total stresses although the initial conditions will be determined in terms of effective stresses.

The model has been widely used to analyze dams that do not involve loss-of-strength materials, such
as concrete-faced rockfill dam and graded materials. The required material parameters are maximum
shear modulus, Poisson's ratio, and angle of friction and cohesion. The elastoplastic laws of the joints
and of the contacts between materials will be incorporated to represent the non-linear behavior of
these interface elements.

3.11.8.3 Direct nonlinear model

Direct nonlinear models are based on the assumption of nonlinear elasticity. The general stress state
will decompose into two independent states: Deviator and isotropic. Stress-strain relationships will be
developed for each of them. For the deviating component, the initial load stress-strain curve will be
given by (figure 11.12):

308
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Figure 11.12 Initial load stress-strain curve.

-- Gmax -
(11.51)
1-Gmax/ -max-
where
-, - is the shear stress and strain is the
Gmax maximum shear modulus
-max is the shear strength

In the discharge where the stress takes the reverse direction, Massing's law will be applied and the
stress-strain curve will be defined as:

- - -r Gmax-- - -- r
- (11.52)
two 1-Gmax/ two-max- - -r
where
-r, -r are the stress and strain at the start of unloading

The generation of excess residual pore pressure can be calculated according to the empirical
equations.

Direct nonlinear analysis follows load paths during seismic loading, faithfully reproducing the seismic
behavior of soils observed in the laboratory, such as hysteretic cycles, nonlinear stress-strain
relationships even for small strains, and strain accumulation. residuals. The analyzes will be carried
out in terms of effective or total efforts. Although transient pore pressures will not usually be
included, their residual components will be analyzed in a generation and dissipation process. These
models are versatile because they can be used on materials with no loss in strength up to flow loss.
Few soil parameters will be used, a fact that considerably facilitates its use in engineering projects.

3.11.8.4 Advanced elastoplastic model

These models are an extension of the elastoplastic models described in section 3.11.8.2. Based on the
same theoretical framework of elastoplasticity, the models will incorporate the most advanced
constitutive laws in order to take into account more aspects of the seismic behavior of soils. The
analyzes will be performed in terms of effective stresses using Biot's theory to simulate the process of
generation and dissipation of excess pore pressure in saturated soils.

309
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

These models aim to formulate the behavior of soils in a generalized way for static and cyclic
conditions and different load paths. Despite their theoretical generality, such models strongly depend
on load paths. Additionally, it is required to determine a large number of material parameters, so its
use is limited to research studies.

310
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.12

STRUCTURES TYPE 10
SEISMIC ISOLATION AND
ENERGY DISSIPATION

311
 RECOMMENDATIONS

INDEX SECTION 3.12 TYPE STRUCTURES 10: SEISMIC ISOLATION SYSTEMS AND
ENERGY DISSIPATION

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... .315

FLOWCHART............................................... ..............................................317

3.12.1 SCOPE ................................................. ........................................................... ..............321

3.12.2 SYSTEMS WITH SEISMIC ISOLATION ................................................ ................321

3.12.2.1 General provisions ................................................ ...........................................321
3.12.2.2 Design principles ............................................... ........................................................... ...321
3.12.2.2.1 Generalities................................................... ........................................................... .............321
3.12.2.2.2 Desirable characteristics of the insulation system................................................... ........322
3.12.2.2.3 Structures in which the use of insulators is recommended................................... ...322
3.12.2.2.4 Protection levels of the insulation system .................................................. ...............323
3.12.2.2.5 Design procedure................................................... ...........................................................323
3.12.2.2.6 Types of behavior of isolation devices.................................................................... 323
3.12.2.3 Natural rubber insulators .................................................. ...........................................324
3.12.2.3.1 Laminated rubber supports (ALH) ........................................... .........................................324
3.12.2.3.1.1 Lateral stiffness ................................................ ........................................................... ..............324
3.12.2.3.1.2 Viscous damping ................................................ .........................................................324
3.12.2.3.1.3 Form factor................................................... ........................................................... .............325
3.12.2.3.1.4 Vertical stiffness.............................................. ........................................................... .............325
3.12.2.3.1.5 Limit deformations................................................... ........................................................... ....326
3.12.2.3.1.6 Load capacity against buckling................................................... ................................327
3.12.2.3.2 Rolled Lead Core Bearings (ALNP).................................................... ...................328
3.12.2.3.2.1 Lateral stiffness ................................................ ........................................................... ..............328
3.12.2.3.2.2 Self-centering force .............................................. ........................................................... 329
3.12.2.3.2.3 Load capacity against buckling................................................... ................................329
3.12.2.4 Sliding Insulators (AD) ........................................................... .........................................330
3.12.2.4.1 Insulation with PTFE sliding systems .............................................. ...........................330
3.12.2.5 Analysis methods ............................................... ........................................................... .332
3.12.2.5.1 Equivalent linear model................................................... ................................................333
3.12.2.5.1.1 Limitations of the model................................................... ........................................................... 333
3.12.2.5.1.2 Effective stiffness (k)ef........................................................... ................................................334
3.12.2.5.1.3 Effective damping (-)ef........................................................... .................................335
3.12.2.5.1.4 Influence of axial load .............................................. ................................................336
3.12.2.5.2 Linear Static Analysis (LSA) ................................................ ..............................................336
3.12.2.5.2.1 Limitations ................................................ ........................................................... ................336
3.12.2.5.2.2 Characteristics of the AEL.............................................. ........................................................... .337
3.12.2.5.3 Modal Dynamic Analysis (DMA).............................................. .........................................337
3.12.2.5.3.1 Limitations ................................................ ........................................................... ................337
3.12.2.5.3.2 Characteristics of the ADM.............................................. ........................................................... 337
3.12.2.5.4 Non-linear static analysis (NLEA).................................................... .........................................338
3.12.2.5.4.1 Limitations ................................................ ........................................................... ................338
3.12.2.5.4.2 Characteristics of the AENL .............................................. ................................................339
3.12.2.5.4.3 Control of displacements or forces ................................................ ..........................339
3.12.2.5.5 Step-by-step analysis (APAP).................................... .........................................................339

313
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.12.3 SYSTEMS WITH ENERGY DISSIPATION DEVICES

HYSTERETIC ................................................ ........................................................... .......340
3.12.3.1 General disposition ................................................ ...........................................340
3.12.3.2 Design principles ............................................... ........................................................... ...341
3.12.3.2.1 Design of the structure-dissipator assembly.............................................. ...........................341
3.12.3.2.2 Design values of energy dissipating systems .................................................. ...341
3.12.3.2.3 Bidirectional effects................................................... ........................................................... .341
3.12.3.3 Displacement-dependent devices ........................................................... ...........342
3.12.3.3.1 Damping of the structure-sink system .................................................. ............342
3.12.3.3.2 Fatigue in hysteretic heatsinks .............................................. ...........................................344
3.12.3.4 Speed-dependent devices ........................................................... ...................344
3.12.3.4.1 Viscoelastic solid devices ........................................................... ..............................344
3.12.3.4.2 Viscoelastic fluid devices ........................................................... ...............................3. 4. 5
3.12.3.4.3 Viscous fluid devices ........................................................... .......................................3. 4. 5
3.12.3.5 Analysis methods ............................................... ........................................................... .346
3.12.3.5.1 Linear Static Analysis (LSA) ................................................ ..............................................346
3.12.3.5.2 Modal Dynamic Analysis (DMA).............................................. .........................................348
3.12.3.5.3 Non-linear static analysis (NLEA).............................................. .........................................348
3.12.3.5.4 Step-by-step analysis (APAP).................................... .........................................................348

3.12.4 SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS FOR INSULATORS AND DISSIPATORS

OF ENERGY.............................................. ........................................................... ..........349
3.12.4.1 Installation, inspection and maintenance............................................... ......................349
3.12.4.2 Characteristics and anchors of the devices ........................................... ................349
3.12.4.2.1 Horizontal force transmitted by the devices ................................................ ..............349
3.12.4.2.2 Clearances.............................................. ........................................................... ......................350
3.12.4.3 Experimental verification ................................................ .........................................350
3.12.4.3.1 Tests on seismic isolation systems................................................... ...........................351
3.12.4.3.2 Tests on energy dissipating devices ........................................................... ................352

314
 RECOMMENDATIONS

NOMENCLATURE
Ab Effective area of a rubber bearing Cross- (h)lh Lateral stiffness of a rubber bearing
Apl sectional area of the lead core in a (h)go Stiffness of a viscoelastic device Post-
rubber bearing (h)p yield stiffness of a lead core bearing
Ar Reduced area of a rubber pad Area
(A)D enclosed by one full cycle of the force- (h)wh Vertical stiffness of a rubber bearing
displacement diagram of a device Lb Effective length of a rubber bearing
B.b Effective width of a rubber pad Damping n Exponent characterizing the
C coefficient of a dissipator behavior of a damper Vertical service load
N on an insulator Normal force due to dead
Db Effective diameter of a circular rubber (N)CM load Normal force due to instantaneous
pad (N)wa live load
Dcr Critical buckling displacement of a lead-
cored support (N)yes Normal force due to lateral load Critical
AND Modulus of elasticity of rubber (table 12.2) Pcr elastic buckling load for a rubber bearing
AND-- Modulus of volumetric compressibility of with zero lateral displacement
rubber
ANDm Value of the modal responses Modulus of P'cr Critical elastic buckling load for a rubber
ANDc effective compressibility of the rubber Maximum bearing when it exists
(AND)k energy of deformation in the structure side shift
whatH Hysteresis loop adjustment factor
(F) Force that develops in a device F+YF–Forces rij Correlation factor
in a heat sink, which occur (R)a Radius of curvature of a slip
when displacements occur insulator
highsx + –
maxYx max,respectively (R)p Probable maximum value of the
F0 Force for a null displacement in a combined effect of the modal responses
hysteresis loop sgn Sign function
FYo Inertial force associated with the degree of yes1.2 Factors for maximum acceleration of
freedomYo systems with speed-dependent devices
Fin Strength at the levelYothe way
Fs n Security factor yesYo Form factor of an int layer. of rubber
FY Yield Strength of a Lead Core Support youYo Thickness of a layer of rubber
(ALNP) Td Period of vibrating of a system with sliding
g acceleration of gravity supports
G Shear modulus of rubber (table 12.2) Tr Sum of thicknesses of the rubber layers
Te0 Fundamental period of the structure Period
Hr Effective height of the rubber pad Minimum Tb where the plateau of the design spectrum
Yo moment of inertia of a rubber pad ends
(T)and Period of the supports with lead core
k Material constant (rubber, table 12.2) (T)ef Effective period of the insulation system
K Stiffness stored by a dissipator Stiffness WT Total weight of the structure in service
K-- associated with the energy dissipated by a conditions
device (W)j Energy dissipated by a device in a
(h)and Elastic stiffness of a rubber bearing complete cycle
(h)ef Effective stiffness of a device Lateral (W)n Maximum strain energy
(h)ld stiffness of sliding systems with concave corresponding to the modenfor him
surface modal shift (-)in

315
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

(W)nj Work done in one cycle by the devicej, -- Ductility of a support with a lead core-
corresponding to the modenfor modal offset -D Ductility demand of the structure Rotation of
(-)in -- a rubber support
x Horizontal displacement experienced by a - Mode Period Ratioj–th between the
device period of the modeYo-th-- Lead shear
xm Maximum displacement of a lead core -Y yield stress Circular frequency of the
rubber bearing -e0- fundamental mode of the structure-
xY Yield displacement of a lead core support dissipator system
-D Frequency of the fundamental mode of the
x Speed experienced by a device isolated structure
xmax+ Yxmax – Maximum displacements, positive and -and- Critical damping fraction of the structure
negative, which experiences a heatsink
(xmax)Average of the absolute values of the
---ek Equivalent structural damping Effective
+ –
commutingx maxYx max (-)ef damping of a device Effective damping of
Y Vertical displacement of the structure (-)HD the structure due to the hysteretic behavior
-- Inelastic stiffness ratio (k)pbetween the of the structural elements and of the
elastic stiffness (k)andfor a lead core support energy dissipation system for the ductility
demand -D
---SC Angular shear strain of a rubber bearing
due to compression Angular strain of a (-)his Hysteretic damping of a device
---yn rubber bearing due to non-seismic effects
(-)sis Damping of the structure-insulator
---Mr Angular deformation caused by the
joint system
rotation of a rubber support
(-)Yo Viscous damping of the structure in
---H.H Angular deformation due to earthquake of a rubber
elastic behavior
support
(-)v Viscous damping of the device Damping of
-- dimensionless factor
(-)vn the structure in the modenby viscous
(-)Yo Displacement of the degree of freedomYo
damping of devices
(-)in displacement in the levelYocorresponding to the
moden
(-)XDn Effective mode dampingnfor design offset
-F Coefficient of friction of a sliding
isolator

316
 RECOMMENDATIONS

DIAGRAM
SEISMIC ISOLATION AND ENERGY DISSIPATION

Insulated Systems
seismic

Rubber supports with sliding supports

laminated supports
lead core

side force
side stiffness side stiffness

Displacement
vertical
form factor

Circular Rectangular
FYYield strength of ALNP (eq.
12.17)
F0 Force for a null displacement
in the hysteretic cycle (eq. Period of
12.18) vibrate for
vertical stiffness (h)andElastic stiffness (eq. 12.19) surfaces
(h)p Post-yield stiffness or post-
yield stiffness (Eq. 12.20)

xYYield displacement (eq. 12.21)

side stiffness
limit deformation
strength of
self-centering

Loading capacity Loading capacity

against buckling against buckling

no displacement
side

with displacement
side

317
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Analysis Types for a Base-Isolated System

linear model static analysis dynamic analysis static analysis step by step analysis
equivalent modal step

See limitations, See limitations, See limitations,

See limitations,
subsection subsection subsection Watch
subsection
3.12.2.5.2.1 3.12.2.5.3.1 3.12.2.5.4.1 considerations
3.12.2.5.1.1
generals in the
subsection 3.12.2.5.5

Rigidity stiffness and stiffness and stiffness and

equivalent of damping, damping, damping,
insulator are obtained the same are obtained the same are obtained the same
than the model than the model than the model
linear equivalent linear equivalent linear equivalent
3.12.2.5.1.2 and 3.12.2.5.1.2 and 3.12.2.5.1.2 and
3.12.2.5.1.3 3.12.2.5.1.3 3.12.2.5.1.3
respectively respectively respectively

damping
cash

damping
structure–insulator

318
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Systems with heat dissipating devices

Energy

Dependent Devices Dependent Devices

displacement of the speed

solid devices fluid devices

System damping viscoelastic viscoelastic
structure–sink

force on devices
viscoelastic
knot i (h)go C j-knot

The response of the devices

of viscoelastic fluids is
(h)go evaluated with the equations of
subsection 3.13.3.4.1 (Devices of
viscoelastic solids)
knot i j-knot

Viscous Fluid Devices

The force (F)in the

shock absorbers

Analysis methods

Linear, static, and dynamic analysis methods are

permitted only if the following criteria are met.
requirements of subsection 3.12.3.5

static analysis dynamic analysis static analysis not

step by step analysis
linear modal linear

See requirements in the This analysis should be used To calculate the For this analysis you must
subsection 3.12.3.5.1 in case of not meeting the damping used records
subsection requirements structural equivalent site storms,
3.12.3.5.1 -ekEq. 12.48. real or simulated.
damping
equivalent
In addition you can
The damping is be used for any
calculate according to structure and type
item 3.2.3 sink

319
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.12.1 SCOPE
These recommendations indicate the minimum requirements that must be considered in the seismic
design of structures with passive isolation and energy dissipation systems. The objective is to provide
specifications of a general nature that are useful to most of the structures included in this Chapter
and are not intended to be a complete guide for the calculation of a system with isolation and/or
energy dissipation. Instead, in the Comments section, a comprehensive set of references is provided
that allows the user to complement the information proposed here, and that allows the designer to
develop his or her creativity and capacity within the limitations imposed by these recommendations.

The types of insulators contemplated in this section are:

a. Natural rubber laminated supports

b. Lead Core Rubber Bearings
c. sliding supports

The energy dissipating devices considered in this section are:

d. Displacement Dependent Devices

and. speed dependent devices

3.12.2 SYSTEMS WITH SEISMIC ISOLATION

3.12.2.1 General provisions
The general design criteria in which the applicability conditions and recommendations for the use of
insulation systems are established are described in section 3.12.2.2. Seismic isolation systems are
classified into rubber bearings and sliding bearings. The characteristics and mechanical properties of
laminated rubber bearings and those of rubber bearings with a lead core are defined in section
3.12.2.3. As far as sliding systems are concerned, section 3.12.2.4 presents the recommendations for
their analysis and design. Linear static, modal dynamic, nonlinear static, and stepwise (nonlinear
dynamic) analysis methods are described in Section 3.12.2.5.

3.12.2.2 Design criteria

3.12.2.2.1 General
Isolation systems have the fundamental purpose of reducing the demand for accelerations by
increasing the period of vibration of the system, moving it away from the zone in which the seismic
energy is concentrated. The increase in the period of vibration of the system has as its counterpart
the increase in the displacements of the structure, which can be an inconvenience for its application
in many cases. That is why today's insulation systems generally have an additional energy dissipation
system that contributes to reducing the acceleration and displacement of the system. In this way,

321
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.12.2.2.2 Desirable characteristics of the insulation system

An isolation system must not only provide horizontal flexibility to the structure during design actions,
it must also meet other conditions that allow it to contribute to the proper behavior of the system
during all load stages, including vertical. In general, the insulation system is desirable to have the
following characteristics:

- Have the ability to modify the vibration period of the system in such a way that the ordinates
of the spectra are effectively reduced.

- Have sufficient rigidity and vertical resistance to withstand permanent and accidental actions.

- Be able to be combined with an energy dissipation system to reduce the displacements caused
by the flexibility of the structure.

- Have sufficient stiffness and strength to limit lateral displacements under service conditions
such as service earthquakes, wind effects, etc.

- Have a recovery force or self-centering ability after deformation.

- Have sufficient vertical stability and rotational capacity under service and extreme conditions.

- That its strength and creep displacement, in the case of hysteretic dissipators, are appropriate to
effectively reduce the response of the structure.

- That its ultimate displacement capacity and behavior before collapse are appropriate for the
system in which it is intended to be used.

- That its behavior is not significantly affected by the effect of environmental conditions,
temperature or aging.

3.12.2.2.3 Structures in which the use of insulators is recommended

In general, the use of base insulators is more efficient when some of the following characteristics are
met:

1. The structure is planted on solid ground

2. The acceleration records obtained at the site where the system will be located indicate that the
seismic energy is concentrated in high frequencies

3. The structure is rigid and the increase in lateral displacement is not a problem

4. The structure will not be built in an area affected by earthquakes with near field effects

322
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.12.2.2.4 Protection levels of the insulation system

Two levels of seismic protection can be provided to isolated structures. The first level, called total
isolation, has the purpose of ensuring that the structure remains within the elastic range with the
exception of the isolation system itself. At the second level, called partial isolation, the elements of
the structure are allowed to exceed the yield limits, with limited ductility values.

With the criterion of total isolation, damage to the elements of the structure will be avoided during the
occurrence of the design earthquake, unlike a conventional structure in which the inelastic deformation of its
members is expected to contribute to dissipating the energy introduced by the earthquake. earthquake in the
structure.

On the other hand, with partial isolation, the occurrence of damage during the design earthquake is allowed,
limited to levels lower than those of a conventional design.

3.12.2.2.5 Design procedure

The design procedure for a base-insulated system begins with a pre-design stage, in which typical
values of the mechanical properties of the devices that are intended to be used are used. The
objective of the pre-design stage is to estimate the maximum values of the response of the control
device and those of the structure-insulator system. Based on these results, the insulation system is
designed and the supplier is asked for the real characteristics of the device that will be installed in the
structure, or else the properties are determined from the results of the tests of the insulation system,
and in If necessary, the parameters used in the pre-design are modified during the final design stage.
The tests will be carried out as described in section 3.12.4.3.

3.12.2.2.6 Types of behavior of isolating devices

For the analysis of an isolated structure, it is necessary to identify the linearity and non-linearity
characteristics of the devices. In the simplest case, isolation systems have linear stiffness and linear
damping; in other cases, the device response is nonlinear, but it can be represented reasonably well
as a bilinear model, thus simplifying its analytical modeling. There are also highly nonlinear devices
that require more complex mathematical models to represent them properly. In table 12.1, the
linearity characteristics of the most common insulation systems are presented in a simplified way.

Table 12.1 Behavior characteristics of the most common insulation systems.

insulation system Strength damping

Rubber Laminate Backing (ALH) Linear Viscous

Lead Core Laminate Support (ALNP) non linear hysteretic

Sliding supports (AD) Linear Depends on the sink

323
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Sections 3.12.2.3 and 3.12.2.4 present the mechanical properties of the rubber insulators (ALH and
ALNP) and sliding bearings (AD), respectively. The considerations and analysis methods that must be
applied are presented in section 3.12.2.5.

3.12.2.3 Natural rubber insulators

3.12.2.3.1 Laminated rubber supports (ALH)
Rubber bearings represent a suitable means of providing flexibility to a structure. There are rubber
pads reinforced with steel plates (ALH), rubber pads reinforced with a lead core (ALNP) and rubber
pads with high damping; these recommendations refer only to the first two.

The rubber used in the insulators has a Shore hardness between37Y60,with the properties listed in
Table 12.2. The most used rubber in Mexico has Shore hardness60.The material constant fits the
analytical equations with the experimental results and is obtained experimentally.
Table 12.2 Mechanical properties of vulcanized natural rubber.

Deformation
Hardness module shear modulus Constant of
minimum breakage
shore elasticityE(MPa) G(MPa) materialk
(%)

37 1.35 0.40 0.87 650

40 1.50 0.45 0.85 600

Four. Five 1.80 0.54 0.80 600

fifty 2.20 0.64 0.73 500

55 3.25 0.81 0.64 500

60 4.45 1.06 0.57 400

3.12.2.3.1.1 Lateral stiffness

The horizontal stiffness (k)lhof an ALH can approximate that of a beam in shear, since the steel plates
prevent bending deformations, but do not restrict shear deformations,

GAb
(h)lh- (12.1)
Tr
where
G is the shear modulus of the rubber (table 12.2)
Ab is the effective plan area of the cross-section of the rubber pad is the
Tr sum of the thicknesses of the rubber layers

3.12.2.3.1.2 Viscous damping

In the absence of specific information on the buffering of the ALH, it is allowed to use a buffering
fraction of the5%.

324
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.12.2.3.1.3 Form factor

The form factor of an inner layer of rubber,yesYo, is defined as the surface of the loaded area divided
by the perimeter area free to expand.

For a circular support,yesYo, is given by:

Db
yes
Yo- (12.2)
4tYo

and for a rectangular support:

B.bL b
yesYo- (12.3)
2tYo(Bb-Lb)
where
B.band Lb are the effective width and length of the rubber pad in plan (figure 12.1) is the
Db effective diameter of the circular rubber pad
youYo is the thickness of a layer of rubber

3.12.2.3.1.4 Vertical stiffness

The vertical stiffness of the support is calculated with:

ANDcA r
( k)wh- (12.4)
Tr
where
(h)wh is the vertical stiffness of an ALH
ANDc is the effective compressibility modulus of the rubber is the
Ar reduced area of the rubber

The effective compressibility modulus is a function of the form factor and the properties of the material,

ANDc- E(1- 2kStwoYo) (12.5)

where
AND is the modulus of elasticity of the material (table 12.2) is
k the constant of the material (table 12.2)
yesYo is the form factor (eqs. 12.2 and 12.3)

The reduced area of the ALH,Ar, is equal to the overlapping area between the top and bottom faces of the
support due to the total design horizontal displacementxexperiencing the support, which in any case must
be less thanB.b, (figure 12.1).

For a rectangular support:

- x-
Ar- Ab--1- B-- (12.6)
- b-

For a circular support:

325
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Dtwo
A r- b-- -sen -- (12.7)
4
where
B.b is the effective width of the support (figure 12.1a)
Ab is the effective area of the support in plan (Ab=BbLb, figure 12.1a) is the
Db effective diameter of the circular support (figure 12.1b)
- is a dimensionless factor that is calculated with - -2cos-1-xdb-

(a) Rectangular support (b) Circular support

Figure 12.1 Effective compression area (shaded area is overlapping area).

3.12.2.3.1.5 Limit deformations

The maximum angular deformations allowed for ALHs are:

(-)SC- 2.5 (12.8)

(-)SC- (-)yn- (-)Mr- 5.0 (12.9)

(-)SC- (-)H.H-0.5(-)Mr- 5.5 (12.10)

where
(-)SC is the angular shear strain due to compression and is calculated with Eqs. 12.11 or 12.12

(-)yn is the angular deformation due to displacement due to non-seismic effects, such as those
produced by temperature, prestress, contraction, plastic flow, etc.
(-)Mr is the deformation caused by the rotation of the support and is calculated with Eq. 12.13
(-)H.H is the strain due to displacementxby seismic effect and is calculated with Eq. 12.14

ForyesYo-fifteen

326
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3SN
Yo
(-) SC- (12.11)
2ArG(1- 2k Stwo Yo)

ForyesYo-fifteen

- 8Gk Stwo
Yo--
3N--1-
- AND- -- (12.12)
(-)SC-
4G k SYoAr
where:
AND- is the volumetric compressibility stiffness modulus of the rubber, usually of2,000MPa is
N the maximum vertical service load corresponding to the combination of loads under
review

B.two
b -
(-) Mr- (12.13)
2tYoTr

where
θ is the support rotation
Tr is the sum of the thicknesses of all the rubber layers

x
(-)H.H- (12.14)
Tr

3.12.2.3.1.6 Load capacity against buckling

The stability of the support should be checked against zero lateral displacement and against maximum lateral
displacement. For zero lateral displacement, the critical elastic buckling loadPcris calculated with Eq. 12.15

-twoANDcIGA b
Pcr- (12.15)
3Trtwo
where
Yo is the minimum moment of inertia of the ground support

When there is lateral displacement, the critical buckling loadPc-ris calculated with Eq. 12.16,

Ar
Pcr--PcrAb (12.16)

where
Ar is the reduced area of the rubber (equs. 12.6 or 12.7) is
Ab the effective area of the support in plan

The critical buckling load obtained with Eqs. 12.15 and 12.16, divided by the factor of safety Fs= 3,
must be greater than or equal to the maximum vertical service load for the load combination being
reviewed.

327
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.12.2.3.2 Rolled Lead Core Bearings (ALNP)

Lead Core Laminate Bearings (ALNP) are normally constructed of low damping natural rubber, with
one or more perforations into which a lead element is placed. ALNPs have mechanical characteristics
that ensure good performance under service loads.

3.12.2.3.2.1 Lateral stiffness

ALNPs have a nonlinear force–displacement relationship. A typical hysteretic cycle for an ALNP is
shown in Figure 12.2, where:

FY is the yield strength of ALNP (eq. 12.17)

F0 is the force for a null displacement in the hysteretic cycle (eq. 12.18) is the
(h)and elastic stiffness (eq. 12.19)
(h)p is the post-yield stiffness or post-yield stiffness (Eq. 12.20) is the
xY yield displacement (Eq. 12.21)
xm is the maximum displacement

creep forceFYfor an ALNP is given by the equation

FY- -YApl (12.17)

where
-Y is the yield stress in lead shear, which can be assumed equal to9MPa is the cross-
Apl sectional area of the lead core

Figure 12.2 Typical hysteretic cycle of an ALNP.

The forceF0for null displacement is approximately given by,

F0-0.9FY (12.18)

The elastic stiffness (k)andis calculated with

328
 RECOMMENDATIONS

10GAb
(h) -and (12.19)
Tr
where
Ab is the effective area of the support in plan, discounting the area of the lead core and the
post-yield stiffness (k)pis obtained with

1.1GAb
(h) -p (12.20)
Tr

acquaintancesFYY (k)and, creep displacementxYis equal to

FY
xY- (12.21)
(h)and

3.12.2.3.2.2 Self-centering force

The set of ALNP supports must have a minimum post-creep stiffness after the occurrence of a seismic
event. It is recommended that said stiffness comply with

WT
-(h) p - 0.05 (12.22)
xm
where
WT is the total weight of the structure in service conditions is the
xm maximum displacement of the ALNP

3.12.2.3.2.3 Load capacity against buckling

As for the ALH, the stability of the support must be checked before null lateral displacement and
before maximum lateral displacement. For zero lateral displacement, the critical elastic buckling load
Pcris calculated with Eq. 12.15. When there is lateral displacement, the critical buckling condition of
the ALNP depends on the type of connection of the support with the structure, that is, on whether
they can support shear and bending moment or only shear. For the case of supports that are
subjected to shear and bending, the critical load for the displaced support is calculated with Eq.
12.16. When the supports are installed so that they work only in shear, they can experience a partial
uplift, and the displacement that makes them unstable is calculated with Eq. 12.23.

NBb-F0Hr
Dcr- (12.23)
N-(k)pHr
where
Dcr is the critical buckling displacement of an ALNP
Hr Effective height of an ALNP (Figure 12.1)

329
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.12.2.4 Slide Insulators (AD)

Devices that slide once the friction force between two surfaces is exceeded are contemplated in this
section. The sliding surfaces may be lubricated. It is convenient that the sliding force be as small as
possible, without the displacements in service conditions being excessive.

3.12.2.4.1 Insulation with PTFE sliding systems

Slide insulators consist of two surfaces in contact: the first is a soft material (usually PTFE) that slides
over a second made of rigid material (usually stainless steel).

The properties of the sliding insulators must be determined considering all the variables that
influence their initial behavior and their durability, such as the magnitude of the applied axial load,
the ambient temperature and the rate of application of the load, among others. To obtain them,
experimental tests must be carried out that incorporate all the parameters and determine the
properties for their design, as described in section 3.12.4.3.

The lateral force (F)that develops in a sliding insulator is calculated with Eq. 12.24.

N
(F)- x - -FNsgn (x- ) (12.24)
(R)a
where
x is the horizontal displacement of the insulator
x is the horizontal slip speed of the insulator is the
(R)a radius of curvature of the insulator
-F is the coefficient of friction of the insulator
N is the normal force acting on the insulator, considering gravitational loads, vertical
acceleration and loads produced by overturning moments
sgn is the sign function

The first term of eq. 12.24 corresponds to the restoring force provided by the insulator with radius of
curvature (A)a. When the slip insulator is horizontal, (A)atends to infinity and this term disappears, so
in these cases the sliding insulator must be combined with a device such as those mentioned in
section 3.12.3, which provides the corresponding restoring force. The second term of the above
equation corresponds to the frictional force on the slip surface.

When the structure is displaced laterally, when the contact surface is spherical, the corresponding
vertical displacement can be calculated approximately with Eq. 12.25.

xtwo
Y- (12.25)
2(R)a
where
Y is the vertical displacement of the structure

Smooth PTFE surfaces can be made from virgin resins, reinforced with fiberglass, carbon, or some
other inert material, or made from PTFE mesh. When holes are used

330
 RECOMMENDATIONS

to house lubricant on the PTFE surface, these must not exceed8mmin diameter in plan and must have
at least a depth of2mm,without exceeding half the thickness of the PTFE membrane. The area
occupied by these holes must be between thetwenty%and the 30%from the surface of the PTFE plate
and drilling holes on the periphery of the surface should be avoided.

Table 12.3 Allowable contact stresses in PTFE plates.

ALLOWABLE CONTACT STRESSES

service charges seismic loads

Material
Average stress Effort at the perimeter Average stress

MPa MPa MPa

virgin PTFE 24 3. 4 41

reinforced PTFE 24 3. 4 41

PTFE mesh 24 69 41

When the largest plan dimension of a virgin or reinforced PTFE plate is less than61mm, the minimum
thickness must be4.8mm;For larger dimensions, the minimum thickness must be6.4mmThe
compressed thickness of virgin and reinforced PTFE plates shall not be less than1.6mm In plates
formed with PTFE meshes, the compressed thickness must be between1.6mmY3.2mm

Table 12.4 Coefficients of friction in PTFE plates.

Temperature Average compression stressMPa

surface type
°C 3.5 6.9 13.8 20.7

Lubricated PTFE plate

twenty 0.040 0.030 0.025 0.020
with holes

- 25 0.060 0.045 0.040 0.030

Virgin PTFE plate twenty 0.080 0.070 0.050 0.030

- 25 0.200 0.180 0.130 0.100

Reinforced PTFE plate twenty 0.240 0.170 0.090 0.060

- 25 0.440 0.320 0.250 0.200

PTFE mesh twenty 0.080 0.070 0.060 0.045

- 25 0.200 0.180 0.130 0.100

Rigid surfaces (steel or other material) must be made of stainless materials with good resistance to
corrosion and with roughness no greater than0.8 -m.

331
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

The steel plate of the slip insulators must have a thickness of at least1.6mmWhen the greatest plan
dimension of the plate does not exceed300mmIf the plan dimension of the steel plate is between
300mmY900mm,the minimum thickness will be2.3mmFor plan dimensions greater than the above,
the minimum thickness should be determined based on the results of experimental tests of the
device.

The permissible values of compressive stresses in the contact area of PTFE plates are shown in
table 12.3.

The coefficients of friction between the contact surfaces when using PTFE plates can be determined
as a function of the mean value of the compressive stress under service conditions, as shown in table
12.4. For intermediate values of the stresses indicated there, it can be interpolated linearly.

The steel plates on which the PTFE membranes rest must be anchored to a support plate that
provides them with full support and the contact between both elements must be perfectly sealed to
prevent corrosion. The anchor must be designed to withstand the maximum frictional force
developed by the isolator.

For concave surface insulation systems, the period of vibratingTdis determined with Eq. 12.26,

1/ 2
- (R) a-
Td- 2- - - ( 12.26)
- g -
where
(R)a is the radius of curvature of the spherical surface is
g the acceleration due to gravity

The lateral stiffness of these systems is obtained with Eq. 12.27,

N
(h)ld- (12.27)
(R)a

In these insulation systems, the maximum horizontal displacement of the structure must be limited to1/5
of the radius of the spherical surface.

3.12.2.5 Analysis methods

The analysis must be carried out in two orthogonal horizontal directions, estimating the displacement
and force demands. It is necessary to determine the maximum displacement of each of the degrees
of freedom of the structure and the maximum displacement of the isolation devices.

The structural model must incorporate the spatial distribution of the insulators and the degrees of vertical
freedom, of horizontal translation in two orthogonal directions and of rotation around the vertical axis, when
they are significant in the response.

Bilateral load and/or strain rate effects should be taken into account in those cases where the
insulators are dependent on these effects.
332
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Four analysis methods are supported for a base isolated system:

a) Linear static analysis

b) Modal dynamic analysis

c) Non-linear static analysis

d) Step-by-step analysis

The selection will depend on the design stage, the level of nonlinear behavior expected, and the
complexity of the structure. In the proposed analysis methods, the effects of soil-structure
interaction, geometric non-linearity and material non-linearity should be considered, when
important.

In the static and modal dynamic methods, base insulators can be represented by equivalent linear
properties as described in the next section.

When a dynamic analysis is performed as specified in 3.12.2.5.3 or if nonlinear static analysis is used
as specified in 3.12.2.5.4, the mechanical elements for the design of the isolators and all elements
below the insulation system shall not be less than the90% of the values obtained with a linear static
analysis. For the design of the elements on the isolation interface, the mechanical elements will not
be smaller than the80%of the static values in case the structure has a regular configuration, and of
the100%from static values otherwise.

When a step-by-step analysis is performed as specified in 3.12.2.5.5, the mechanical elements for the
design of the isolators and all elements below the isolation system shall not be less than the80%of
the values obtained with a static analysis. For the design of the elements on the isolation interface,
the mechanical elements will not be smaller than the60%of the static analysis values in case the
structure has a regular configuration and of the80%of the static analysis values otherwise.

For the design of the structural elements on the isolation interface, it is recommended to use a lateral
force not less than1.5times the lateral force required for the isolation system to fully activate.

3.12.2.5.1 Equivalent linear model

The linear equivalent procedure is an approximation to the results of a nonlinear analysis, in which
the inelastic behavior is assumed to be limited to the base insulators. The analysis is performed using
a linear model in which the isolators have an effective stiffness (k)efand an effective damping (-)ef. This
model is used for pre-design purposes only.

3.12.2.5.1.1 Model limitations

To apply the equivalent linear model, the following conditions must be met:

333
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

- The equivalent damping (-)ef, obtained as indicated in 3.12.2.5.1.3, is less than 30%

- The insulation system has a linear or bilinear behavior

- The hysteresis loops of the insulation system are not dependent on load speed, friction or
bidirectional effects.

3.12.2.5.1.2 Effective stiffness(k)ef

Figure 12.3 shows the parameters used to determine (k)effor the case of ALNP, whose hysteretic cycle
is bilinear. The system has an initial stiffness (k)and,an inelastic stiffness (k)p,a secant stiffness related
to the maximum displacement (k)efand a characteristic forceF0,
corresponding to zero displacement. From geometric relations, it is found that the equivalent
stiffness of the insulator (k)ef, corresponding to the design displacement is:

1- --- -1-
(h)ef-(k)and (12.28)
-

Figure 12.3 Idealized bilinear hysteretic cycle for an ALNP.

where
-- is the ductility of the insulator, defined as the maximum displacementxmaxbetween creep
displacementxYof the insulator, and is calculated with Eq. 12.29

x
- -max (12.29)
xY

y - represents the ratio of the inelastic stiffness (k)pbetween the elastic stiffness (k)and, and is obtained by applying Eq.
12.30.

(h)p
-- (12.30)
(h)and

334
 RECOMMENDATIONS

To obtain the mechanical design elements, it is recommended that the effective stiffness values be
obtained from the extreme values of force and displacement resulting from the tests specified in
subsection 3.12.4.3.

Yes (T)andis the period of the ALNP obtained with its elastic stiffness (k)and, then the effective period (T)ef
of the insulation system is:

-
(T)ef- (T)and1----- (12.31)

For the case of sliding insulators, their behavior can be characterized with the hysteretic cycle shown
in figure 12.4.

Figure 12.4 Hysteretic behavior of a sliding insulator with a spherical surface.

The equivalent stiffness of sliding isolators for displacementxmaxis given by eq. 12.32.

- 1 - -F
(h) ef
- N- - - (12.32)
-(R)a xmax-

3.12.2.5.1.3 Effective damping(-)ef

Effective damping (-)ef, for ALNP, can be estimated from the energy dissipated by hysteresis (-)his.

- 1-
2(1--)--1- - --
- - (12.33)
(-) his -
-
-eleven) -
The above equation defines the energy dissipated by hysteresis of the isolation system only, so the
viscous damping (-) must be addedvto obtain the total effective damping of the isolation system, that
is,

(-)ef- (-)his- (-)v (12.34)

The value of (-)vmust correspond to the type of isolation device in question.

For sliding bearings, the effective damping (-)effor a transfer requestxmax

is calculated with Eq. 12.35.

335
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

two-F(R)a
(-) -e-f (12.35)
- -F(R)a-xmax-

The damping of the joint structure-insulator system can be estimated with Eq. 12.36

n
two- (- )Yo (k)Yoef -
-(k ) x -- a -
it is
-
(k)Yoand -
Yo ef Yo

(-) -sis -
i-1 (12.36)
n
two- (k)-i ef-
-(kYo)andFx Yo-1-
i-1 - (kYo)and-

Where the sum refers to then–degrees of freedom and the subscriptit isto the structure on a fixed base.

3.12.2.5.1.4 Influence of axial load

When the effective stiffness and the area of the hysteresis loops of the isolators are dependent on
the axial load level, as is the case with the sliding isolators described in subsection 3.12.2.4, several
nonlinear analyzes must be performed to establish the limits. of the response of the devices.

3.12.2.5.2 Linear Static Analysis (LSA)

3.12.2.5.2.1 Limitations
To apply the AEL, in addition to the requirements specified in this Chapter for the type of structure to
be insulated, the following conditions must be met:

a) The structure is not classified as of special importance (GroupA)

b) The effective damping (-)efobtained as indicated in 3.12.2.5.1.3 is less than30%

c) The structure will be built at a distance greater than15kmof an active fault

d) The insulation system has a linear or bilinear behavior

e) The response of the structure remains in the elastic range (total isolation)

f) The hysteresis loops of the insulation system are not dependent on load speed, friction or
bidirectional effects

g) The structure is located on firm ground (shear wave speed greater than720m/s)

h) The structure on the insulation system has a maximum height of20m,or, its fundamental
period of vibration considering it supported on a fixed base is less than0.6s

i) The effective period of the isolated structure is greater than twice the period of the structure on a
fixed basis

j) The structure on the insulation system has a regular configuration

336
 RECOMMENDATIONS

k) The eccentricity of the structure-insulator system is less than the5%of the smallest dimension in
plan

l) The period of the isolated structure is not greater than the3.0s

3.12.2.5.2.2 Characteristics of the AEL

It is recommended to limit the use of the AEL for pre-design purposes and as a means of establishing expected
values in more complex analyses.

The linear model of the structure above and below the insulation interface should reflect as closely as
possible the actual stiffness distribution. If total isolation of the system is desired, the stiffness of the
reinforced concrete elements can be determined from the uncracked sections. If the elements
experience deformations close to those of yielding, or a pre-design is carried out for a case of partial
isolation, the inertia of the transformed cracked section should be used, or an equivalent effective
inertia derived from the moment-curvature relationships of the elements. The stiffness and damping
of the insulators are obtained using the equivalent linear model, according to Eqs. 12.28 and 12.34
respectively.

As the structure is modeled with its elastic properties, it is necessary to verify that its elements do not
exceed the yield limits of the materials. The displacement demands will be obtained by means of the
displacement spectra derived from the acceleration spectra, as proposed in the corresponding
section of this Chapter. Force demands will be determined from acceleration spectra. The spectral
ordinates will be those corresponding to the effective period of the structure-insulator system
considering the reduction of the spectrum by damping.

The vertical distribution of the lateral force on the structure above the isolation system will
correspond to the deformed configuration of the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure.

For purposes of structural analysis, the stiffness of the joint structure-isolator system and the
effective damping of the joint system should be used.

3.12.2.5.3 Modal Dynamic Analysis (DMA)

3.12.2.5.3.1 Limitations
To apply the ADM, in addition to the requirements specified in this Chapter for the type of structure
to be insulated, requirements a, b, c, and d imposed for the static method (item 3.12.2.5.2.1) must be
met.

3.12.2.5.3.2 Characteristics of the ADM

The structure is considered to remain within the elastic regime or to experience ductility limited to
maximum values of1.5.

The displacement demands will be obtained by means of the elastic displacement spectra derived
from the acceleration spectra. The force demands are determined from the acceleration spectra, as a
function of the effective period of the structure.

337
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

To determine the stiffness of the elements, the inertia corresponding to the transformed cracked section,
or values derived from the moment-curvature relationships of the elements, must be considered. It is
necessary to check that the elements of the structure do not exceed the creep displacement limits of the
materials or the maximum value of ductility that is adopted (maximum1.5).

To evaluate the stiffness and damping properties of the insulators, the use of the equivalent linear
model is allowed if the limitations established in section 3.12.2.5.1.1 are met.

The reduction by damping of the design spectrum must be carried out as indicated in the
corresponding section of this Chapter. The effective damping will be considered only for the modes
affected by the inelastic behavior of the insulator. For this, it is recommended to consider the
effective damping for the fundamental mode and for all modes whose periods are greater than80%of
the basic period. For the other modes, the spectrum must be maintained with 5%of damping.

A number of modes of vibration must be considered such that it guarantees that the sum of the effective modal
mass is at least the90%of the total mass of the structure.

The probable maximum value (A)pof the combined effect of the modal responses,ANDm,is calculated with the
method of the complete quadratic combination:

(R)p---(ANDm)Yorij(ANDm)j
ij
(12.37)

where
Yo Yo-th mode of vibrating j–th
j mode of vibrating (j > i)
rij is the correlation factor, and is defined by

8-two(1- -)-3 / 2
rij- (12.38)
(1- -two)two- 4-two-(1- -)two
where
- is the critical damping fraction
--= (T)j/ (T)Yo,is the period ratio of the modej–th between the period of the modeYo-th

It should be combined100%of the response considering the most unfavorable seismic direction, with the
30%of the response due to the earthquake acting in the orthogonal direction. When its effect is important,
the vertical component should be included in the combination of actions. The maximum displacement for
the isolation system will be the vector sum of the orthogonal displacements.

3.12.2.5.4 Nonlinear Static Analysis (NLEA)

3.12.2.5.4.1 Limitations
To apply the AENL, the following conditions must be met:

a) Requirements a, b and c for the static method are met (item 3.12.2.5.2.1)

b) The structure responds fundamentally in the first mode of vibration

338
 RECOMMENDATIONS

c) The maximum displacement ductility of the structural system is4.0

3.12.2.5.4.2 Characteristics of the AENL

The AENL consists of analyzing the structure under constant gravitational load, a fraction of the live load
(depending on the type of structure in question) and increasing monotonous lateral displacements (or
forces) that represent the horizontal seismic effects until reaching the formation of the mechanism. of
collapse.

The structural model must adequately represent the spatial distribution of mass and stiffness. In
regular structures, with independent resistant systems in two orthogonal directions, the use of two
two-dimensional models to represent each resistant system will be allowed. In irregular systems or
with non-independent orthogonal resistant systems, a three-dimensional analysis must be carried
out considering the degrees of freedom of translation and rotation.

The AENL must be carried out using the hysteretic properties of the insulators corresponding to the
deformation levels that are generated in each load stage.

The linear model of the structure above and below the insulation interface should reflect as closely as
possible the actual stiffness distribution. If total isolation of the system is desired, the stiffness of the
reinforced concrete elements can be determined from the uncracked sections. The stiffness and
damping of the insulators are obtained from the hysteretic models of the insulators as established in
sections 3.12.2.5.1.2 and 3.12.2.5.1.3.

The maximum displacement (or force) that will be applied to the system will be that corresponding to1.5
times the maximum displacement that the structural system admits without exceeding the condition that
produces a collapse mechanism. The maximum displacement limits will be those corresponding to a
maximum displacement ductility of4.0.For higher ductilities it will be necessary to carry out a step-by-step
method as described in section 3.12.2.5.5.

3.12.2.5.4.3 Control of displacements or forces

The displacements (or forces) should increase monotonically until reaching the displacement that
produces a collapse mechanism. The displaced form of the masses must correspond to the
fundamental mode of vibration of the system, which can be obtained from a preliminary linear elastic
analysis, as indicated in 3.12.2.5.2.

The increase in displacements (or forces) must be small enough to detect events such as element
creep, buckling, or failure.

3.12.2.5.5 Step-by-step analysis (APAP)

Given the non-linear nature of most base isolators, the step-by-step analysis method is
recommended for the final design of the structural system. Its application is imperative in the
following situations:

a) In Group structuresA
b) When partial insulation is accepted, that is, ductilities are allowed in the system

339
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

structural superior to1.5.For maximum displacement ductilities of the structural system of4.0
the non-linear static method may also be used
c) In highly asymmetric systems
d) In structures located on flexible ground (shear wave velocities less than 400m/s,or soil
dominant periods greater than1.0s)
e) In structures located at a distance from an active fault less than15km
f) Effective damping greater than35%
g) Shock absorbers with behavior other than linear or bilinear

The analysis procedure will be the same as that established for conventional systems, however, two
main aspects must be monitored: that the acceleration histories used adjust as closely as possible to
the site spectra proposed by the standards, with the purpose of maintain the same level of risk, and
that the inelastic model of the structure and of the insulators be representative of their behavior. For
this it is recommended that:

- At least four pairs of horizontal accelerograms of recorded events are used. The use of artificial
accelerograms is reasonable, but preference is given to the use of natural accelerograms. The
accelerograms must be scaled for the different intensity levels recommended in section 3.1.

- Each pair of horizontal components will be scaled such that the square root of the sum of the
squares of the spectrum with5%of damping, is not less than1.3times the spectrum of the
design earthquake for the same damping, and that does not differ by more than10% in the
range of periods between1.0sY3.0 sec.

- The duration of the accelerograms must be consistent with the characteristics of the project
earthquake focus, and in the case of systems located at distances less than15kmof a major active
fault, they will need to incorporate near-field phenomena.

- If at least seven accelerograms are used for the analysis, the review of deformations,
displacements and stresses will be based on the average of the maximum values of the set of
accelerograms used for each intensity level. Otherwise, the maximum values will be used.

- The effects of friction, vertical, bilateral load and/or load speed must be considered, in cases
where the insulating system is affected by these parameters.

- The deformation characteristics of the elements in which some plastification is allowed, will
approximate the real inelastic behavior as closely as possible.

3.12.3 SYSTEMS WITH HYSTERETIC ENERGY DISSIPATION DEVICES

3.12.3.1 General provisions
The general design criteria that establish the applicability conditions and recommendations for the
use of systems with energy dissipating devices are described in subsection 3.12.3.2. The energy
dissipating devices included in these recommendations are classified as displacement dependent and
speed dependent devices. The features and

340
 RECOMMENDATIONS

mechanical properties of displacement-dependent devices are described in subsection 3.12.3.3.

Subsection 3.12.3.4 presents the recommendations for the analysis and design of speed-dependent
heat sinks. Linear static, nonlinear static, linear dynamic, and stepwise analysis methods are
described in Section 3.12.3.5.

Two levels of seismic protection may be provided to structures with energy dissipators, as stated in
3.12.2.2.4.

3.12.3.2 Design criteria

By adding an energy dissipating system to a structural system, the rigidity and lateral resistance of
the structure-dissipator assembly are increased. The increase in stiffness influences the structural
response, especially when the lateral deformations of the structure are small, that is, when the
structure is subjected to movements within the serviceability limit state.

3.12.3.2.1 Design of the structure-dissipator assembly

When dissipators are placed in a structure, their behavior must be such that the hysteretic area they
develop is large enough, and that the ductility demand is within tolerable limits. In addition, it will be
tried that the creep displacement of the dissipators is small enough compared to that of the system
to be protected, so that the dissipative system flows first and then the elements of the main
structure.

It should be checked that the displacements with which the work of the dissipators begins are lower than those
that cause damage to the structure.

The distribution of dissipators in the plant of a structure must be such that it does not favor torsion.
In addition, it must be ensured that the vertical distribution of these is such that excessive
concentrations of inelastic deformations do not occur in a single level.

3.12.3.2.2 Design values of energy dissipating systems

It must be confirmed, through laboratory tests (section 3.12.4.3), that the load-displacement
relationships assumed in the mathematical models adequately represent the real behavior of the
dissipators under cyclic loads. It must be verified that the demand for ductility developed by the heat
sink is less than or equal to that obtained in the laboratory.

3.12.3.2.3 Bidirectional effects

It should be combined100%of the response considering the most unfavorable seismic direction, with the
30%of the response due to the earthquake acting in the orthogonal direction. When its effect is important,
the vertical component should be included in the combination of actions. The maximum displacement for
the system will be the vector sum of the orthogonal displacements.

341
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.12.3.3 Displacement dependent devices

This subsection includes energy dissipating devices that depend on displacement for their operation
and whose hysteretic behavior is bilinear, trilinear or rigid-plastic. In general, they are grouped into
three types:

1. Due to creep of the material

2. By extrusion
3. By friction

The model must necessarily take into account the distribution in plan and elevation of the dissipation
system. The load-displacement properties of the heatsinks must be determined considering all the
variables that influence their behavior and durability, such as the magnitude of the applied load,
fatigue, aging, the form of connection and the ambient temperature. To obtain them, experimental
tests must be carried out that incorporate all the parameters and determine the properties for their
design as indicated in subsection 3.12.4.3.

The elements used as energy dissipators must be compact sections to avoid instability problems. The
stress concentration in the connection between the heat sink and the structure must also be limited,
and a possible failure in the welding between metallic elements due to fatigue or stress
concentration phenomena must be avoided.

The minimum number of energy dissipating devices should be placed in the analysis direction in such
a way that twisting effects do not occur. All devices must be manufactured to develop a displacement
of the130%of the maximum displacement demand for the maximum design earthquake.

3.12.3.3.1 Damping of the structure-sink system

The damping of the structure-sink system in the analysis direction for the modencan be calculated
with Eq. 12.39:

(-)XDn- (-)Yo- (-)vn -D- (-)HD (12.39)

where
(-)XDn is the mode dampingnfor the design displacement is the viscous damping
(-)Yo of the structure in elastic behavior
(-)vn is the damping of the structure in mode n of the analysis direction, due to the
energy dissipation by viscous damping of the devices for a displacement equal to the yield
displacement of the structure. This value can be neglected for dissipators with hysteretic
or friction behaviour.
- -D is the ductility demand of the structure in the analysis direction, for the design
earthquake
(-)HD is the damping of the structure in the analysis direction due to the behavior
hysteresis of the structural elements and the energy dissipation system for the ductility
demand -D

342
 RECOMMENDATIONS

-DIt must be calculated based on the displacement demand in the center of stiffness of the structure
for the design earthquake. The ductility demand is this displacement divided by the creep
displacement of the structure also evaluated at the center of stiffness. The ductility demand in higher
modes must be considered with a value of1.0.

For the calculation of damping (-)Yothe contribution of structural elements should be considered
and non-structural for displacements of the structure less than the creep one. Unless additional
experimental information is available, this damping should be considered5%of the critical damping
for all modes of vibration.

Hysteretic damping (-)HDcan be obtained experimentally or using Eq. 12.40. In higher modes, unless
experimentally shown otherwise, the value of (-)HDmust be zero.

- 1-
(-)HD- qH[0.64- (-)Yo]--1- - -- (12.40)
- D-

where
whatH is a hysteresis loop adjustment factor

If there are no experimental results to calculate the factorwhatH,can be obtained with Eq. 12.41.

Tb
what
H- 0.67 (12.41)
Te0
where
Tb is the period where the plateau of the design spectrum ends is the
Te0 fundamental period of the structure in the analysis direction

In no case the value ofwhatHcan be less than0.5nor greater than1.0.

The effective damping of the structure in modendue to viscous damping of the devices, (-)vn, is
obtained based on Eqs. 12.42 and 12.43.

-(W)nj
(-) vn -
j
(12.42)
4-(W)n

1
(W)n- -F- in in (12.43)
twoYo

where
(W)nj is the work done in one cycle by the devicej,corresponding to the modenin parsing
direction for modal shift (-)in
(W)n is the maximum strain energy in the analysis direction corresponding to the mode nfor
modal offset (-)in
Fin is the force at the levelYothe wayn
(-)in is the displacement in the levelYocorresponding to the moden

343
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.12.3.3.2 Fatigue in hysteretic heat sinks

The fatigue of the hysteretic dissipators must be considered. For this, the amplitude of the inelastic deformation
and the number of cyclic deformations to failure must be considered.

3.12.3.4 Rate dependent devices

Velocity-dependent devices include viscoelastic solids, viscoelastic fluids, and viscous fluids. The
model of the energy dissipating system is required to include the stiffness of the structural
components that connect the dissipator to the rest of the structure. It is recommended to model the
energy dissipating devices as described in the following subsections.

3.12.3.4.1 Viscoelastic solid devices

To simulate the behavior of viscoelastic solid devices, the Kelvin model will be used, that is, they will
be modeled by means of a spring and a damper connected in parallel, as shown in figure 12.5. To
select the stiffness and damping properties of the devices, their dependence on the fundamental
period of the structural system and the range of service temperatures must be taken into account.

(h)go

knot i j-knot

C
Figure 12.5 Kelvin model for viscoelastic solid devices.

If the response of the device cannot be represented with single values of stiffness and damping, the
response of the structure will be evaluated by multiple analyses, using the expected minimum and
maximum values for the stiffness and damping constants.

The force (F)in viscoelastic devices it is determined by the equation:

(F)-(k)Gox -Cx- (12.44)

where
(h)Go is the stiffness of the device
C is the damping coefficient of the device
x is the relative displacement between the ends of the device is
x the relative velocity between the ends of the device

Experimentally (subsection 3.12.4.3), the stiffness of the dissipator (k)go, also known as stored
stiffnessK',is calculated with the equation:

F--F-
(h)Go-K- - - - (12.45)
x max -xmax

344
 RECOMMENDATIONS

The forces on the device,F+YF–, are those that occur when displacements occur
+ –
highsx maxYx max,respectively. The damping coefficient of the device (usually

is provided by the manufacturer) is calculated using the equation:

K-- (A)D
C- - (12.46)
-e0 - -e0(xmax) two

where
K-- represents the stiffness associated with the dissipated energy
(A)D is the area enclosed by one complete cycle of the force–displacement diagram of the
device
-e0 is the circular frequency of the fundamental mode of the structure is
+
(xmax) the average of the absolute values of the displacementsxmax x–
andmax

3.12.3.4.2 Viscoelastic fluid devices

The response of viscoelastic fluid devices is obtained with the Maxwell model, that is, the devices will
be modeled by a spring and a damper connected in series, as shown in Figure 12.6. To select the
stiffness and damping properties of the devices, their dependence on the fundamental period of the
system and the range of operating temperatures must be taken into account. If the response of the
device cannot be represented with single values of stiffness and damping, the response of the
structure will be evaluated by multiple analyses, using the expected minimum and maximum values
for the stiffness and damping constants.

knot i (h)go C j-knot

Figure 12.6 Maxwell model for viscoelastic fluid devices.

The response of viscoelastic fluid devices will be evaluated with the same equations proposed for
viscoelastic solid devices (item 3.12.3.4.1).

3.12.3.4.3 Viscous Fluid Devices

The response of viscous fluid dampers is obtained based on the Maxwell model, that is, the devices
are modeled by a spring and a damper connected in series (figure 12.6). In the case of viscous
dampers, the stiffness of the spring must be sufficiently large, so that the deformation of the device
is due exclusively to the deformation of the damper. The force (F)in shock absorbers it is evaluated by
the constitutive law:

-F--C x-nsgn-x-- (12.47)

where
C is the damping coefficient of the device
x is the relative velocity between both ends of the device
n is an exponent that characterizes the behavior of the damper

3. 4. 5
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

sgn is the sign function that, in this case, defines the sign of the relative velocity

The values ofCYnthey are obtained experimentally and are provided by the manufacturer of the shock
absorbers.

3.12.3.5 Analysis methods

The objective of the seismic analysis is to evaluate the displacement, velocity and force demands to
check the capacity of the structure-dissipator system and its individual components. The analysis
should be performed in two orthogonal horizontal directions and where significant, such as friction
devices, the vertical direction will be included. The structural model must incorporate the spatial
distribution of the heat sinks. In the proposed analysis methods, the effects of soil-structure
interaction and geometric and/or material non-linearity should be considered when they are
important. In each direction of analysis, the system must have a minimum number of dissipative
devices placed in such a way that they do not generate torsion effects.

a) Linear static analysis

b) Modal dynamic analysis

c) Non-linear static analysis

d) Step-by-step analysis

Linear analysis methods, both static and dynamic, are permitted only if the following requirements
are met:

1. The response of the structure, by incorporating the energy dissipation system, remains in the
elastic range (total protection).
2. The effective damping provided by the dissipators, in each direction of analysis, does not
exceed30%of critical damping.
3. The secant stiffness of each energy dissipating device, calculated for the maximum
displacement of the device, is included in the mathematical model of the dissipating-structure
system.
4. The structure is located more than15kmof an active fault.
5. The structure belongs to the Groupb.

3.12.3.5.1 Linear Static Analysis (LSA)

The AEL is accepted as a method to estimate displacement and force demands in structures where a
dynamic analysis does not provide significant additional information about the behavior. Therefore,
the AEL is suitable for structures whose response is fundamentally due to the first mode of vibration.
In addition to the requirements outlined in 3.12.3.5, AEL is permitted for systems with energy
dissipating devices, if the following requirements are met:

1. The structure is planted on firm ground (shear wave speed >720 m/s).

346
 RECOMMENDATIONS

2. The calculated torsional eccentricity in each floor of the structure-dissipator system is less than
the5%of the smallest dimension of the plan of the structure.

The equivalent structural damping -ekis calculated with Eq. 12.48:

-(W)j
j (12.48)
(-)ek- -and-
4-(E)k
where
-and- is the damping of the structure, generally considered equal to0.05
(W)j is the energy dissipated by the devicejin a complete cycle corresponding to the
displacement of the devicexjand the sum includes all devicesjexisting in the structure

(AND)k is the maximum strain energy in the structure, which is calculated with Eq. 12.49:

- k--1F-
-AND Yo( ) (12.49)
two
Yo

where
FYo is the inertial force associated with the degree of freedomYo
(-)Yo is the displacement of the degree of freedomYo

The sum of eq. 12.49 includes all the degrees of freedom of the structure in the analysis direction.
Once the equivalent structural damping (-) has been determinedek, the ordinates of the elastic
spectrum are reduced as indicated in section 3.2. It must be verified that the displacements produced
by the lateral forces are acceptable, depending on the type of structure in question. For velocity-
dependent devices, the design actions are calculated for the three different deformation stages
described below. The maximum actions will be used for design.

a) Stage of maximum displacement. Lateral forces are calculated using the design spectrum
reduced by damping.
b) Stage of maximum speed and zero displacement. The force in each device is calculated with
Eqs. 12.44 or 12.47, for viscoelastic and viscous dampers, respectively. The relative
pseudovelocityx-is given by -e0x,wherexis the relative displacement between the
ends of the device calculated for the stage of maximum displacement and -e0is the frequency
the fundamental mode. These forces are applied to the model of the structure at the points
where the devices are connected and in directions consistent with the deformation of the
structure at the stage of maximum displacement. Inertial forces will be applied to the model,
together with the forces of the devices, in such a way that the resulting displacements are
null.
c) Stage of maximum acceleration. The design actions are calculated as the sum of the actions
calculated for the maximum displacement stage multiplied byyes1, plus the actions calculated
for the maximum speed stage multiplied byyestwo, where

yes1- cos[tan-1{two(-)ek}] (12.50)

347
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

yestwo- sen[so-1{two(-)ek}] (12.51)

where
(-)ek is calculated with Eq. 12.48

3.12.3.5.2 Modal Dynamic Analysis (DMA)

The ADM must be used in those cases in which any of the requirements of section 3.12.3.5.1 are not
satisfied. To estimate the displacement and force demands, the corresponding design spectra will be
used, reducing them with the damping factor calculated as indicated in section 3.2.

A number of modes of vibration must be considered such that it guarantees that the sum of the
effective modal masses, in the direction of analysis, is at least the90%of the total mass of the
structure. It will be verified that the displacements produced by the lateral forces are acceptable,
depending on the type of structure in question.

For speed-dependent devices, in addition to the direct application of the spectral modal analysis
referred to in this section to obtain the actions in the maximum displacement stage, the actions for
maximum speed and maximum acceleration must be obtained for each significant mode.
Combination Factorsyes1Yyestwowill be calculated using Eqs. 12.50 and 12.51.

If the base shear calculated with the ADM is less than the80%calculated with the AEL of section
3.12.3.5.1, the forces and displacements in the structural elements obtained in the ADM must be
increased proportionally until reaching the80%of the base shear calculated with the AEL.

3.12.3.5.3 Nonlinear Static Analysis (NLEA)

The AENL is used to determine the displacement capacity of a structure upon reaching the formation
of the collapse mechanism and consists of analyzing it under constant gravitational load and
increasing monotonic lateral loads that represent horizontal seismic effects.

The AENL must be carried out using the properties of the materials corresponding to the levels of
deformation that are originating in each load stage. For this, the effective bending stiffnesses of the
structural elements, obtained from the moment-curvature diagrams, will be used. The nonlinear
mathematical model of the structure must explicitly include the force-velocity-displacement
characteristics of the energy sinks, as well as the mechanical characteristics of the components that
support the sinks.

Dissipative devices with stiffness and damping dependent on the driving frequency and/or
temperature should be modeled with properties consistent with: a) the expected strains for the
target displacement, and b) the fundamental mode frequency of the structure. To calculate the
equivalent structural damping (--ekEq. 12.48.

3.12.3.5.4 Step-by-step analysis (APAP)

348
 RECOMMENDATIONS

To carry out an APAP, temporary site records, real or simulated, or combinations of these must be
used, taking into account the inelastic behavior of the different components of the structure, and
especially the behavior of the energy dissipators. Together with the temporary registers, the
permanent actions must be considered, plus all those variable actions that could act simultaneously
with the permanent ones. If the response of energy dissipating devices depends on the excitation
frequency, service temperature (including that which occurs during excitation), strain, speed,
sustained loads, or spatial variation of lateral loads, such dependence must be taken into account in
the analysis,

The APAP can be used for any structure and type of dissipator, and its use is mandatory to study the
behavior of the Group's structures.A,complex structures or located near an active fault. The method
allows to determine the response of the model to compare the required and available local ductilities,
as well as the force and displacement (or speed) demands on the energy dissipators. For Group
structuresA,In addition to this procedure, the structure should be analyzed with the ADM method,
and it is recommended that the results of an APAP not be used to reduce the resulting ADM
requirements.

3.12.4 SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSULATORS AND ENERGY DISSIPATORS

3.12.4.1 Placement, inspection and maintenance

There must be a detailed inspection program for which sufficient space and adequate access must be
provided to carry out maintenance maneuvers and, where appropriate, repair of the control devices.

The devices will be placed in such a way that they are not subjected to stresses not considered in the
tests. The support conditions and the operation of the devices once installed on site must be similar
to those of the prototypes tested in the laboratory.

3.12.4.2 Characteristics and device anchors

The isolation and energy dissipation devices must be designed to adequately support the vertical and
horizontal loads that may occur during the useful life of the structure. In its design, translation and
rotation movements produced by actions due to: dead load, live load, wind, earthquake, plastic flow,
concrete contraction, prestress, temperature and deformations caused by tolerances in construction
must be taken into account. .

To determine the most appropriate type of control device, factors such as: available space, ease of
inspection and maintenance, environmental conditions, initial and maintenance costs, and market
availability should also be considered.

3.12.4.2.1 Horizontal force transmitted by devices

349
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

The horizontal force that the supports are capable of transmitting must be taken into account for the design of the
superstructure, the substructure and the anchorages or connections between the devices and the structural system.

When evaluating the horizontal force, the restriction that retaining walls, buffers and, in general, all
the elements that restrict horizontal displacement must be taken into account.

The insulators and heat sinks must be properly anchored to allow the transfer of forces between the
elements connected through them designed with a safety factor of 1.5. The anchors must be
designed to withstand the maximum forces obtained at the interface of the isolation system, the
substructure and the superstructure, considering the distribution of forces that occurs when the
overstrength of the elements is reached.

In the design of the anchors and connections, no reduction due to ductility will be allowed.

3.12.4.2.2 Clearances
A gap may be left between the control system and the structure to allow movements due to
temperature, contraction, plastic flow, or other similar, as well as to avoid damage to non-structural
elements, as long as this condition is considered in the analysis and design of isolation and energy
dissipation devices

3.12.4.3 Experimental verification

The force-displacement or force-velocity relationships and the damping values considered in the
design of the seismic protection system must be verified by means of laboratory tests in accordance
with the guidelines established in this section, prior to the manufacture of the isolators and/or
dissipators. to be placed on the structure. If the tests are carried out before the structural project, the
results of the tests will be used in the development of the project. The objectives of the laboratory
tests are: a) to confirm the force-displacement properties of the insulators and/or energy dissipators
considered in the analysis, and b) to verify the adequate performance of the insulators and/or
dissipators under extreme seismic excitations. The experimental program, by no means,

The experimental program must be approved by the corresponding authorities and will consider at
least the necessary tests to determine the load-displacement properties of the insulators and/or
dissipators, their stiffness and damping, the dispersion in the test results, the stability of the devices,
the influence of temperature fluctuations, the speed of application of the load and the variation in the
magnitude of the vertical load, as well as the effects of aging in the modification of the mechanical
properties of the devices.

It is recommended that a minimum of two full-scale prototypes be tested for each type and size used
in the design. The tested specimens shall not be placed in the structure.

It will be up to the competent authorities not to require an experimental verification for a particular
work, when insulators and/or heat sinks of similar size, identical materials, the same

350
 RECOMMENDATIONS

manufacturing and quality control have been previously tested by an independent laboratory, as
indicated in the following paragraphs.

3.12.4.3.1 Tests on seismic isolation systems

The following sequence of tests will be carried out, for a vertical load equal to the average of (N)CM
+ (N)waon all insulators of the same type and size. (N)CMis the normal force due to dead load and (N)wa
is the normal force due to instantaneous live load: at least10complete reversible cycles for
displacements of the25%, 50%Y100%of the expected maximum. If normal forces act on the insulators
(N)yesdue to lateral load, additionally the specimens will be tested for the following combinations of
vertical loads:

a) 1.2(N)CM- (N)wa- (N)s

b) 0.8(N)CM- (N)s

In these tests, the combination of vertical loads shall be taken as the typical or average force on all
insulators of the same type and size.

To study the vertical stability of the insulators, static tests must be carried out combining the
maximum vertical load1.2(N)CM- (N)wa- (N)sand the minimum vertical load0.8(N)CM- (N)s with the
maximum expected displacement increased by afifty%.The combination of vertical loads must be the
most unfavorable that occurs in any of the system insulators.

If the force-displacement properties of the insulators depend on the rate of load application, then the
tests should be carried out at a frequency -Dequal to the fundamental of the isolated structure. The
force-displacement properties of an insulator are considered to be dependent on the rate of load
application if there is a difference equal to or greater than the10% in effective stiffness for
displacement equal to design when a) tested at a frequency equal to the fundamental of the isolated
structure, and b) tested at any frequency in the range of 0.1atwotimes the fundamental frequency of
the isolated structure. If the force-displacement properties of the isolators depend on bidirectional
effects, the number of tests should be increased to include the bilateral force for the following
maximum expected displacement increments:0.25Y1.0; 0.50Y1.0; 0.75Y1.0;Y1.0Y1.0.The force-
displacement properties of an insulator are considered to depend on the bidirectionality of the load if
in the bilateral and unilateral force-displacement properties there is a difference equal to or greater
than thefifteen%in the effective stiffness for a displacement equal to the design one.

The force-displacement properties of the isolation system are based on the results of laboratory
tests. To calculate the equivalent stiffness and damping of the isolators, the average of the absolute
values of the positive and negative forces (F+YF–), That
present when the maximum positive and negative displacements occur (x+ max Yx max–),
respectively.

The performance of each prototype will be considered satisfactory if the following conditions are met:

1.The force-displacement diagrams of the tests do not show resistance degradation.

351
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

2. For each displacement increment and for each vertical load combination the following criteria
are satisfied:

a. The equivalent stiffness of the prototype, for any load cycle, does not differ by±15%of the
average of the effective rigidities of the total10earthquake displacement cycles.

b. There is no more than onefifteen%of difference in the average value of the effective stiffness of the
two specimens of the same type and size of insulator, for the10required cycles of each test.

c. For each specimen there is no more than onetwenty%of decrease in damping for the10
required cycles of each test.

3. The isolation system specimens remain stable under the application of the different
combinations of vertical load and maximum expected displacement.

3.12.4.3.2 Tests on energy dissipating devices

During the development of the tests, each dissipating device must be loaded to simulate gravitational
effects, if applicable, also considering the extreme temperatures to which the device in the structure
is expected to be exposed. To each dissipative device must be applied at leasttwentycomplete
reversible cycles at a displacement equal to the maximum expected, and at a
frequency - equal to the fundamental of the structure-sink system. For speed dependent devices it is
recommended that specimens be tested at frequencies of0.5-, -Y2.0-.If necessary, the dependence of
the devices on bidirectional purposes must be taken into account. The force-displacement properties
of the dissipation system are based on the results of laboratory tests. To calculate the equivalent
stiffness and the damping of the dissipators, the average of the absolute values of the positive and
negative forces will be used. (F+YF–), which occur when the maximum positive and negative
displacements occur (xmax +
Y
–
xmax ), respectively.

The performance of each prototype will be considered satisfactory if the following conditions are met:

1. The force-displacement curves of the tests do not show resistance degradation. Speed-
dependent devices are not required to meet this requirement.

2. The equivalent stiffness of the prototype, for each test and for any load cycle, does not differ in
±15%of the average of the rigidities of the total cycles. This requirement does not apply to
viscous dampers.

3. For each test, the force for null displacement of the prototype, for any load cycle, does not
differ in±15%of the average of the forces for zero displacement of the total number of cycles.

4. For each test, the area of each prototype hysteretic loop, for any load cycle, does not differ by±15%
of the average of the areas enclosed by the hysteresis curves of the total number of cycles.

352
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.13

STRUCTURES TYPE 11
TELECOMMUNICATION TOWERS

353
 RECOMMENDATIONS

INDEX SECTION 3.13 TYPE STRUCTURES 11: TELECOMMUNICATION TOWERS

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... .356

FLOWCHART............................................... ..............................................357

3.13.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS................................................ .........................359

3.13.2 MODIFICATION OF THE DESIGN SPECTRUM DUE TO DAMPING ......................359

3.13.3 SEISMIC BEHAVIOR FACTOR ................................................ ............359

3.13.4 OVERSTRENGTH FACTOR.............................................................. .......................360

3.13.5 SELF-SUPPORTED LAttice TOWERS................................................... ............360

3.13.5.1 Behavior of towers in the face of seismic effects................................................... ..........360
3.13.5.2 Choice of type of analysis .................................................. .........................................360
3.13.5.3 Approximate calculation of the base shear.................................................. .........................362
3.13.5.4 Static method.............................................. ........................................................... .......362
3.13.5.5 Simplified dynamic method .................................................. ...........................................363
3.13.5.5.1 Estimation of the periods corresponding to the first three modes of
bending vibration of the tower............................................. ................................................364
3.13.5.5.2 Calculation of the normalized acceleration profileax / Habout the height of the
tower ........................................................... ........................................................... .......................365
3.13.5.6 Spectral Modal Dynamic Method .................................................. ...............................368
3.13.5.7 Second Order Effects ........................................................... .........................................369
3.13.5.8 Combined effects of ground motions ................................................................ .........369

3.13.6 LATTICE MASTS WITH RETAINED LINKS .................................................. ...............370

3.13.6.1 Behavior of masts under seismic effects ................................................ ......370
3.13.6.2 Choice of type of analysis .................................................. .........................................370
3.13.6.3 Static method.............................................. ........................................................... .......371
3.13.6.4 Step-by-step nonlinear method.................................................. .........................................371

3.13.7 ENABLED STRUCTURES OVER OTHER STRUCTURES OF

SUPPORT ................................................. ........................................................... .............372

3.13.8 CONCENTRATED MASS EFFECT................................................... ....................372

355
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

NOMENCLATURE
AD Cross-sectional area of a main diagonal m0 Mass per unit length at the base of the tower
element at the base of the tower Area of
Agi each cable in theYo-th level Cross-sectional MT Total mass of the structure
AL area of a stud element at the base of the M1 Total mass of horizontal elements
tower C1aC6Coefficients that depend both on located at heightha
height M mass matrix
relative to which the acceleration value is Min Mass of the structure associated with then–th
calculateda(x),as of the geometric mode
properties of the tower Ms Mass of a tower section
D Ratio between moments of inertia at the top Pn Horizontal force
and bottom of the structure Modulus of Ps Additional horizontal force Seismic behavior
AND elasticity of the material Q factor Index overstrength factor Parameter
Fyou Factor that takes into account the effect of the R0 that depends on the geometry of the lateral
variation in the cross section of the tower with yes bracing and the relative stiffness of the
height upright and diagonal elements Design
Glaugh Horizontal distance between the base of the mast response
and the anchorage point of the cables (radius of yesD
the cables) in theYo-th level yesn Modal responses
ha,1,2 Length of upright elements between points Te0 Fundamental period of vibration in bending
of bracing They Periods corresponding to the first three modes
h-n height of the center of gravityn–th of vibration in bending of the tower
segment of the structure
H Total height of the structure v Base shear force
Hgi Elevation of theYo-th level wa Average width of tower face Width of tower
Yoyes Average moment of inertia of a tower section weither face at base Weight ofn–th segment of the
Wn structure Total weight of the structure
YoyouandYo0 Moment of inertia of the area of the uprights WT including accessories
at the top of the tower and at its base,
respectively Wtwo Weight of the structure and accessories in the
J Column vector with dimensionless upper section that includes the5%of the total
components equal to 1 height of the tower
kYo Factor that takes into account the effect of Zn n–th modal vector--
shear deformations
KSW Parameter for the classification of self- -Yo Dimensionless frequency associated with the value of
supporting towers the periodTYo

hed Length of the main diagonal elements at

Functions
the base of the tower Length of the
ax / H Normalized acceleration profile
hehe upright elements at the base of the tower
to Te0,- Normalized spectral ordinate
to 0,- Maximum horizontal ground
La Unbraced length of members mounted at
acceleration normalized withg
the base of the structure Length of a
Q-Tand,Q Ductility reduction factor
Ls tower section Length of each cable in the
RTand,Reither Overstrength reduction factor
Lgi Yo-th level
wx Gravitational load profile Damping
mL&DDistributed mass of the uprights and
-Tand,-and factor
main diagonals at the base of the rook

356
 RECOMMENDATIONS

FLOWCHART

TYPE STRUCTURES 11: TELECOMMUNICATION TOWERS

Self-supporting lattice towers

base shear

- Q́ Reither

-and= 2% Q = 1.0 Reither= 1.0

static analysis
(H<30and without irregularities)

The analysis is applied using the steps below.

1. Estimation of the periods corresponding to the first three modes of vibration of the
tower.
2. Evaluation of the distribution of gravitational loads in the height of the tower.
dynamic analysis 3. Determination of the design spectral ordinates corresponding to the periods
H≤150with or without mentioned in step one.
irregularities 4. Calculation of the acceleration profilea(x/H)on the height of the tower.
5. Estimation of the equivalent lateral inertial forces

For the analysis, the corresponding provisions stipulated for Building-type structures
will be applied, in addition to the following recommendations:

a) The frequencies and the natural modes of vibration will be obtained considering
null damping.
dynamic analysis
b) A sufficient number of masses and degrees of freedom should be considered in
spectral modal
order to adequately calculate the structural response.
(any height)
c) An adequate number of Nm modal shapes must be considered in the calculation of
the design responses, in such a way that it complies with:

357
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

- The design spectral ordinates will be obtained in accordance with what is specified
in section 3.13.2.
dynamic analysis - The design responses will be determined with the equation:
spectral modal
(any height)

Lattice masts with guy lines

- Q́ R

-and= 2% Q = 1.0 Reither= 1.0

static analysis
H<350

dynamic analysis no The use of acceleration records that reflect the seismic hazard of the site is
linear stepping recommended.
(Any height) It is suggested that at least four representative motion records be used.

On masts of more than150mhigh, the vertical component of the seismic

excitation must be considered.

358
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.13.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Telecommunication towers are usually designed considering the effects of wind and, when
applicable, those due to the accumulation of ice as the only source of environmental loads. Seismic
effects, as a possible source of damage or loss of service, are usually ignored, even in the design of
structures located in areas of high seismicity. This has originated from the assumption that, due to
their low mass, this type of structure is not very vulnerable to seismic action. Therefore, the anti-
seismic design of telecommunication towers has received much less attention than other structural
systems. As a result, designers have few recommendations for seismic analysis, contributing to these
effects being ignored in design.

The above may be reasonable for small towers in areas of low seismicity. However, for tall structures
in areas of medium to high seismicity, a rational procedure must be available to justify the omission
of seismic effects. There is documented evidence of the unfavorable effects that an earthquake can
have on these structures. In addition, detailed analytical studies have shown that these effects can in
some cases exceed those of the wind.

At present, the constant increase in the construction of this type of structures, of increasing heights
and in many cases located in areas of high seismicity, where the functions they perform may require
them to remain in serviceable conditions after an earthquake. severe, or even during its occurrence,
requires that the decision not to consider the seismic action in the design must at least be justified
with the use of approximate analysis methods.

As in other types of slender structures, in telecommunication towers the contribution of the higher
modes of vibration can be relevant in the global response. In addition, in the event of seismic effects,
they have a lower energy dissipation capacity given their low damping, compared to Building-type
structures.

This section presents recommendations for the evaluation of seismic effects on self-supporting lattice
towers and lattice masts with guy lines, both types identified by the generic name of
telecommunication towers. Recommendations for structures enabled on other support structures are
also included. In all cases, the recommendations apply exclusively to structures built with steel
profiles.

3.13.2 MODIFICATION OF THE DESIGN SPECTRUM BY DAMPING

For telecommunication tower structures, a damping value of two%,for the calculation of design
seismic actions. Therefore, it is necessary to modify the
ordinates of the design spectrum by multiplying them by the damping factor, -Tand,-and,on the
same way as for Building-type structures (eq. 2.1, item 3.2.3). The soil-structure interaction effects can
be neglected in the seismic design of telecommunication towers.

3.13.3 SEISMIC BEHAVIOR FACTOR

Telecommunication towers must be designed using a seismic behavior factor Q = 1.When there are
structures made up of individual elements capable of developing

359
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

ductile behavior in bending, with rigid connections between them, and if it is not essential that the
structure remains in operation after the design earthquake, seismic behavior factors greater than
those stipulated can be used, provided that there is reliable experimental or analytical evidence, that
the structure is capable of developing the assumed level of ductile behavior. The
criterion to define the reduction factor for ductility,Q-Tand, Q ,It is found in section 3.2.4.

3.13.4 OVERSTRENGTH FACTOR

In the seismic design of telecommunication towers, an index overstrength will be usedReither= 1,unless
the use of a higher value can be technically justified. The criterion for defining the factor
overstrength reducer,RTand,Reither,it is found in section 3.2.5.

3.13.5 SELF-SUPPORTING LAttice TOWERS

This section presents the recommendations for the evaluation of seismic actions in self-supporting
lattice towers, hereinafter simply identified as towers.

3.13.5.1 Behavior of towers under seismic effects

Faced with seismic excitation, the towers develop linear dynamic behavior. The response of the
structure is largely defined by the first three bending modes (horizontal translation), with the second
and third modes contributing significantly to the accelerations at the top of the tower. For towers
over80mhigh, the fourth and fifth bending modes may have an important role in the dynamic
response.

The bending modes are usually sufficiently separated from each other, although the torsion and
bending modes are in some cases closely coupled. Vertical modes are usually sufficiently separated
from lateral modes.

The effects of accessories such as stairs, platforms and antennas, among others, are insignificant, with the
exception of equipment whose mass exceeds the10%of the mass of the tower, or are placed with great
eccentricity with respect to the vertical axis of the structure. The effects of the vertical component of the
earthquake are not very relevant in towers of less than100mTall.

In the dynamic behavior of towers, the number of uprights, 3 or 4, is not a parameter that
significantly modifies its response. Given their linear dynamic behavior, the detailed analysis of
towers can be carried out by means of modal superposition, in case the simpler methods (static or
simplified dynamic) are not applicable.

3.13.5.2 Choice of analysis type

In the structural design, seismic effects can be ignored in those towers that, due to their height, use or
location, represent a low risk of loss of life or damage to other facilities in the event of an earthquake.
360
 RECOMMENDATIONS

fails, in addition to being used for optional services or where the delay in resuming service is
acceptable. Seismic effects can also be ignored when the acceleration
maximum horizontal of the terrainto 0,-be less than0.15g

Additionally, in towers with no torsional, stiffness or mass irregularity, seismic actions can be ignored
in the design when the maximum base shear is less than75%of the total horizontal load generated by
wind without the presence of ice. Table 13.1 describes the conditions that must be met to consider
that there is any of the aforementioned irregularities.

When required, seismic analysis of towers can be performed by one of the following methods: a)
static analysis, b) simplified dynamic analysis, and c) spectral modal dynamic analysis. The static
analysis described in section 3.13.5.4 is applicable to towers whose total height does not exceed30m
and that they are free of irregularities.

The simplified dynamic analysis described in Section 3.13.5.5 can be applied in the analysis of towers
up to150mhigh, with or without irregularities, with concentrated masses of equipment whose value
individually does not exceed the5%of the total mass of the tower. Finally, the spectral modal dynamic
analysis described in section 3.13.5.6 can be used for seismic analysis of towers of any height. The
use of this last method is recommended in those towers in which it is essential to guarantee their
operation immediately after a severe earthquake, or even during its occurrence.

Table 13.1 Structural irregularities.

Guy Description

The center of mass of the section, including accessories, is located at a distance

Torsional Irregularity from the vertical axis of the structure greater than30%of the smallest plan
dimension of the section.

Rigidity Irregularity The bending stiffness of the section (Yos/Ls)varies by more thanfifty%relative to the
adjacent section.

The mass per unit length of the section (Ms/Ls), including accessories, varies
Mass Irregularity
by more than200%relative to the adjacent section.

where:
Yos is the average moment of inertia of the section;Msis the total mass of the section;Lsis the length of
the section
Grades:

1) A section of the structure can be considered as the section between connections of the upright
elements
2) Accessories mounted on the tower should not be considered as a stiffness irregularity

361
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.13.5.3 Approximate calculation of base shear

In order to have a first estimate of the magnitude of the base shear in the tower generated by
seismic effects and, based on this, determine whether it is convenient to carry out a seismic analysis,
said base shear can be approximately evaluated using the following empirical equation

V-WTat 0,- (1.91- 0.66Te0) (13.1)

where
v is the base shear in the tower
WT is the total weight of the tower including accessories
to 0,- is the maximum normalized horizontal ground acceleration evaluated inTand- 0
Te0 is the fundamental period of vibration in bending of the tower, which can be calculated with:

Htwo W1-Wtwo
Te0 - (13.2)
1500wa W1
where
-- w -two -
W1-W- T-- a -- -0.15-
-w
-- -either--
Wtwo is the weight of the structure and accessories in the upper section that includes the5%of the height
of the tower
wa is the average width of the tower face is the
weither width of the tower face at the base is the total
H height of the tower

It should be mentioned that the equation for the preliminary estimation of the base shear in the tower,V,it
is rigorously applicable to towers planted on solid ground. However, it is important to emphasize that the
use of this equation is not proposed for design purposes of the tower elements, but with the purpose of
providing the designer with a preliminary estimate of the structure's sensitivity to seismic action on the
site. .

3.13.5.4 Static method

The magnitude of the resultant of the vertically distributed lateral force will be equal to the base
shear force determined in accordance with the provisions for Building-type structures, modified by
the damping factor by which the spectral ordinates are increased in order to take into account that
the damping in towers is less than in said structures. The vertical distribution of the amplified basal
shear force will be carried out by dividing the structure intoNssegments. At the center of mass ofn–th
segment, a horizontal force calculated with the following equation will be applied:

Ns
- Wn to Te0 , -
n-1
Pn- 0.85Wnh-n Ns (13.3)
Q-Te0,QRTe0, R
- Wnh-n either

n-1

do where

362
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Wn is the weight ofn–th segment

h-n is the height of the center of gravityn–th segment, measured from the lunge
to Te0,-is the spectral acceleration, normalized with gravity, corresponding toTe0Y
considering the changes due to damping different from5% Q-Te0,Qis the
reducing factor for ductility
RTe0,Reitheris the reduction factor for overstrength

The values ofWnThey must include the weight of the structural elements, as well as the accessories
placed in each segment of the tower. In order to have an adequate approximation in the valuation of
seismic forces, the structure of interest will be divided into at least10segments. The fundamental
period can be calculated by Eq. 13.2.

To take into account the effects of higher modes of vibration, a horizontal force will be additionally
applied to the upper segment, which is defined as

to Te0,-
Ps- 0.15WTQ-Te0,QRTe0,Reither (13.4)

where
WT is the total weight of the structure

3.13.5.5 Simplified dynamic method

In this method, the equivalent lateral inertial forces due to the excitation at the base are evaluated by
a simplified procedure, which is based on the definition of the profile of pseudo-accelerations at the
height of the tower, by means of modal superposition of the effects of the three first modes of
vibration in bending. The product of this pseudo-acceleration profile and the gravitational load
distribution profile allows the lateral inertial forces to be evaluated.

The method is applied using the steps given below.

1. Estimation of the periods corresponding to the first three modes of vibration in

bending of the tower.
2. Evaluation of the distribution of gravitational loads in the height of the tower and
their concentration on the nodes of the uprights. It is recommended to concentrate
these loads in the connection nodes of the main diagonals with the uprights of the
tower.
3. Construction of the design spectrum for the location of the tower and determination
of the acceleration values for the periods corresponding to the first three modes
of vibration in bending, modified by the damping factor.

4. Calculation of the acceleration profileax / H ,normalized with gravity, over the height
of the tower.

363
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

5. Multiplication of the values of gravitational loads concentrated in each level by the

corresponding value of the acceleration profile, to obtain the forces of
-
equivalent lateral inertiawx ax / H-Q-Te0,QRTe0,Reither--.

Steps 2, 3 and 5 are self explanatory. The application of steps 1 and 4 is described in detail below.

3.13.5.5.1 Estimation of the periods corresponding to the first three modes of

tower bending vibration
In order to avoid performing an analysis of characteristic values and vectors, these periods can be
estimated based on the equation for calculating the natural frequencies of elements of constant
section embedded at the base and free at the end, but corrected to take into account accounts for
the variation of the cross section with height and the shear strains, as follows

2-Htwo m0
They- (13.5)
kYoFyou
Yo- Yo IS0
where
m0 is the mass per unit length at the base of the tower
Yo0 is the moment of inertia of the area of the uprights at the base of the tower is
AND the modulus of elasticity of the material
kYo is the factor that takes into account the effect of shear deformations
Fyou is the factor that takes into account the effect of the variation in the cross section of the tower
with height
-Yo is the dimensionless frequency associated with the period valueThey

The values ofkYoY -Yoare given in Table 13.2 for the first three modes of vibration in bending. The
value ofFyouYoit depends on the ratio between the width of the tower at the base and at its top. Their
Values are plotted in Figure 13.1.

1.40

1.20
mode 1
1.00
mode 2
0.80 mode 3
ft
0.60

0.40

0.20

0.00
0 1 23 4 5 6 78 9 10
DEITHER/DL

Figure 13.1 Correction factorFyou

364
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Table 13.2 ParameterskYoY -Yo.

i-mode kYo -Yo

1 0.90 1,875

two 0.78 4,694

3 0.60 7,855

The calculation ofm0can be done with the use of the following equations:

m0-mLD-M1/ ha For bracing inX

(13.6)
m0-mLD- 2M1/(h1-htwo) For bracing inK
where
mL&D is the distributed mass of the uprights and the main diagonals at the base of the tower is
M1 the total mass of the horizontal elements located at the heightha(bottom panel height for
bracing inX)eitherh1(for contraventing ink)

Figure 13.1 illustrates the values ofha,h1Yhtwo.

a) Contraventing inX b) Bracing inK

Figure 13.1 Values ofha,h1Yhtwo

3.13.5.5.2 Calculation of the normalized acceleration profileax / H about the height of the tower

The acceleration profile is calculated with the following equation

C1 x / H to e1
T ,-two-C x/H
two to Te2 , -two-C 3 x/H to Te3 , -two
ax/H- (13.7)
two
C4 x / H to e1
T ,-two-C 5 x/H to Te2 , -two-C6x/H to Te3,-
where
to Te1,- ,to Te2,- Y to Te3,- are the spectral accelerations, normalized with gravity,
corresponding to the periodsTe1,Te2YTe3calculated in step 1, considering the changes due
to damping different from5%

365
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

C1x/HaC6x/Hare coefficients that depend both on the relative height at which the
acceleration valueax / H ,as of the geometric properties of the tower

The values of the coefficientsC1aC6they are plotted in Figures 13.2 to 13.4. To visualize the values in
greater detail, two graphs are shown, where in one of them the curves are eliminated.C1YC4. The
graph to be used depends on the group within which the tower is classified, according to the
guidelines contained in table 13.3.

Table 13.3 Classification of lattice towers.

Parameter Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

La/H ≤0.1 ≤0.1 > 0.1

D 0.10 – 0.20 0.20 – 0.30 0.25 – 0.35

KSW 0.10 – 0.25 0.10 – 0.25 0.25 – 0.40

1.5
1.0 C1
0.5 C2
0.0 C3
Ci -0.5
- 1.0
C4
- 1.5 C5
- 2.0 C6
- 2.5
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
relative height

0.2

C2
0.1
C3
Ci
C5
0.0
C6

- 0.1
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
relative height
Figure 13.2 CoefficientsCYofor group towersA1

366
 RECOMMENDATIONS

1.5
C1
1.0
0.5 C2
0.0 C3
Ci
- 0.5 C4
- 1.0 C5
- 1.5
C6
- 2.0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
relative height
0.2

0.1 C2
C3
Ci 0.0
C5
- 0.1 C6

- 0.2
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
relative height

Figure 13.3 CoefficientsCYofor group towersA2

1.5
C1
1.0
0.5 C2
0.0 C3
Ci
- 0.5 C4
- 1.0 C5
- 1.5
C6
- 2.0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
relative height
0.2

C2
0.1
C3
Ci
C5
0.0
C6

- 0.1
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
relative height

Figure 13.4 CoefficientsCYofor the Group's towersB.

367
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

La/ His the ratio between the unbraced length of the upright elements at the base of the tower and the
total height of the tower. The values ofDYKSWare calculated using the equations

1/ 3
-Yo -
D- -- you
-- (13.8 )
- Yo0-

La
KSW- 0.29 yes (13.9)
H
where
YoyouandYo0 are the moment of inertia of the area of the uprights at the top of the tower and at its
base, respectively
yes is a parameter that depends on the geometry of the lateral bracing and the relative stiffness
of the upright and diagonal elements

Parameter valuesyescan be calculated by the following equations

2A L
S- -3 -1 For bracing inX
- d / he
ADhe he
(13.10)
8A L
S- For bracing inK
AD-hed/ hehe-3

In the above equations

AL is the cross-sectional area of a stud element at the base of the tower

AD is the cross-sectional area of a main diagonal member at the base of the tower is the
hed length of the main diagonal member
he1 is the length of the upright element

Similarly, the effects of the vertical component of the earthquake can be estimated through a
simplified analysis procedure. More information on this is presented in the Comments section.

3.13.5.6 Spectral Modal Dynamic Method

In the spectral modal dynamic analysis of towers, the corresponding provisions stipulated for
Building-type structures will be applied, taking into account the following recommendations and
caveats:

1. The dynamic parameters of the tower will be determined assuming that the structure has
classical modes of vibration, so that the frequencies and natural modes of vibration will
be obtained considering null damping.

2. The analytical model must consider a sufficient number of masses and degrees of freedom in
order to adequately calculate the structural response. It is recommended to concentrate

368
 RECOMMENDATIONS

the masses at each connection node between the main diagonals and the tower uprights.

3. The number of mode shapesNmto be considered in the calculation of the design responses will be the
one that allows satisfying the following expression

Nm
-Min- 0.9MT (13.11)
n-1
where
Min is the mass of the structure associated with the moden
MT is the total mass of the structure

The values ofMincan be calculated using

(ZTnMJ)two
M-in (13.12 )
ZTnMZn
where
M is the mass matrix is the
Zn n–th modal vector
J is a column vector with dimensionless components equal to1

4. When determining the modal responses, the spectral ordinates will be increased as specified in
subsection 3.13.2, in order to take into account that the damping in towers is less than in
Building-type structures.

5. The design responses will be obtained by combining the maximum modal responses, according
to the equation

1/2
-mN -
yesD- - --yestwon-- (13.13)
-n-1 -

which represents the square root of the sum of the squares of the modal responsesyesn.

3.13.5.7 Second Order Effects

In the seismic analysis of towers, both the effectsP–-,that is, the mechanical elements and additional
displacements caused both by the vertical loads acting on the deformed structure, and by the
influence of the axial load on the stiffness of the tower elements.

3.13.5.8 Combined effects of ground movements

The towers will be analyzed before the action of two orthogonal horizontal components of the ground
movement of the same intensity and the vertical component (item 3.3.5.6). In towers less than 100mof
height, the action of the vertical component can be neglected. The resulting internal forces

369
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

of these seismic stresses will be obtained by applying the rule of the square root of the sum of the
squares. The internal forces thus obtained must be combined with the gravitational ones.

The orthogonal directions for which the analysis will be carried out will be selected in such a way that the
response of the tower to the seismic action is maximum.

3.13.6 LATTICE MASTS WITH RETAINED

This subsection presents the recommendations for the evaluation of seismic actions on lattice masts
with retainers, hereinafter simply identified as masts.

3.13.6.1 Behavior of masts under seismic effects

The behavior of masts in the face of seismic effects is considerably more complex than that of towers,
caused by a marked geometric non-linearity due, firstly, to variations in stiffness in the cables and
their interaction with the mast; and secondly, to the slenderness of the mast. The vertical component
of ground acceleration can increase the interaction effects between the mast and the guys.

In tall masts, the spatial variation of the seismic excitation at the supports can induce additional
dynamic effects that are not present when the synchronized seismic excitation is considered. In
general, the axial force and shear in the mast, as well as the tension in the guys, are increased. The
effects of the spatial variation of the seismic excitation are accentuated with the increase in the
height of the structure.

When two or more groups of guy anchor points are used, sections of the mast are highly sensitive to
seismic effects.

The number of modes that define the response is usually considerably greater in masts than in
towers, in addition to being closely spaced. The higher modes of vibration play an important role in
the response.

Based on the results obtained in numerical simulations of the dynamic behavior of masts, and since
modal superposition is not applicable given its high geometric nonlinearity, it is common to
recommend using a nonlinear step-by-step dynamic analysis for masts located in areas of high
seismicity and that must remain in service after the occurrence of the design earthquake, or even
during it. In contrast, it must be recognized that in a design setting, conducting this type of analysis
may not be feasible.

3.13.6.2 Choice of type of analysis

In structural design, seismic effects can be ignored based on the same criteria established for towers.
When required, seismic analysis of masts should be performed by one of the following methods: a)
static analysis, b) non-linear dynamic step-by-step analysis. The static analysis described in section
3.13.6.3 is applicable to masts whose total height does not exceed350mThe step-by-step nonlinear
dynamic analysis described in Section 3.13.6.4 can be applied to the analysis of masts of any height.
When there are structures in which they must be guaranteed
370
 RECOMMENDATIONS

service conditions after the occurrence of a severe earthquake, the use of this second method of
analysis will be preferred. The modal spectral analysis method is not considered adequate, given the
marked non-linear behavior of the masts.

3.13.6.3 Static method

The method is applied the same as in the towers. When evaluating the weights of each mast
segment, thefifty%of the weight of the cables in the segments that correspond to the support points
of the guys.

To apply this method of analysis, the period of the fundamental mode in mast bending can be
estimated using the following equation

MT
Te0 -0.39 (13.14)
-Kg

n-A giGlaughH
- gi
- K g --- - (13.15)
i-1-- Ltwo
gi
H --
where
MT is the total mass of the structure, including cables, inkg
n is the number of levels above the height of the mast where there are guy wire fixing
points
Agi is the area of each cable placed in theYo-th level, inhmmtwo
Glaugh is the horizontal distance between the base of the mast and the anchorage point of the cables
(radius of the cables) in theYo-th level, inm
Lgi is the length of each wire in theYo-th level, inm is the
Hgi elevation ofYo-th level, inm is the total height of the
H mast, inm

In preliminary calculations of the fundamental period, the following equation can be used

H1.5
Te0- (13.16)
fifty

3.13.6.4 Step-by-step nonlinear method

The step-by-step analysis or calculation of responses to specific earthquakes will be applied as
specified in relation to Building-type structures. The solution of the non-linear dynamic behavior
equation must be carried out by direct integration.

On masts of more than150mhigh, the vertical component of the seismic excitation must be considered.
Likewise, when the horizontal distance between the base of the mast and the anchor points of the anchors
on the ground exceeds300m,The effect of the spatial variation of the seismic excitation at the supports
should be included in the analysis. The delay time will be calculated using the speed

371
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

of shear waves in the soil of the site and the distance between the base of the mast and the anchor points of the
retained.

In section 3.12 of Comments various research works are cited in which aspects of interest in the
application of this technique to the analysis of masts are commented.

3.13.7 ENABLED STRUCTURES OVER OTHER SUPPORT STRUCTURES

In towers and masts on the roofs of buildings or other support structures, whose height does not
exceed30mand in those that do not have irregularities, as defined in table 13.1, the seismic analysis
will be applied as specified in relation to appendices, with the restriction that the calculated
amplification factor may not be less than3.

The evaluation of the seismic forces by the static method will be carried out without considering the
fundamental period of vibration of the tower or mast, for which the corresponding seismic coefficient will
be used.

In the event that the tower or mast has a height greater than30mor presents irregularities, an analysis
must be used that considers the effects of dynamic interaction between the support structure and the
tower or mast that rests on it.

3.13.8 CONCENTRATED MASS EFFECT

The effect of concentrated masses corresponding to the antenna arrays, whose value does not
individually exceed the5%of the total mass of the structure, it will be taken into account by applying
in the structural analysis model a concentrated force equal to the mass of the antenna multiplied by
the acceleration at its height. Said force will be located considering its eccentricity with respect to the
vertical axis of the structure, using rigid extensions from the uprights. However, it should be noted
that amplifications of the action may develop due to the flexibility of the actual connections.

If there are antennas whose mass exceeds the percentage defined above, they should be treated as
exceptional cases that require a detailed seismic analysis.

372
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.14

STRUCTURES TYPE 12
TUNNELS AND PORTS

373
 RECOMMENDATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 3.14 TYPE STRUCTURES 12: UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... .376

FLOWCHART............................................... ..............................................377

3.14.1 TUNNELS IN ROCK OR HARD SOIL ................................................ ........................381

3.14.1.1 Longitudinal strains ................................................................. ......................381
3.14.1.2 Unitary deformations due to ovalization .................................................. ...........................382

3.14.2 GROUND PORTS.............................................................. .........................................384

3.14.2.1 Characterization of the soil system - port................................................... ................385
3.14.2.2 Obtaining shear forces and moments............................................... .............386
3.14.2.3 Determination of seismic actions ................................................ ..........................399

375
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

NOMENCLATURE

a0r Maximum acceleration in rock v0 Port shear wave velocity

ANDL Modulus of elasticity of lining
material v1 Soil deposit shear wave velocity
ANDm Dynamic modulus of elasticity of rock or
hard soil v0 static shear
~
hn thickness ofn-th layer of surface deposits v0 Static shear normalized to the inner and
outer radii of the port
H1 Total thickness of the equivalent ground vd,Md seismic actions
layer -D/DDiametral strain
H0 Port Height Soil Deposit Depth --- Longitudinal strain Allowable strain of the
Hs Flexibility Ratio -a--- lining material in compression
F
Faithv,andMReduction factors that relate the -ov Unit strain due to ovalization Angle
thickness effect --- of incidence
FV,M Dynamic amplification factors -c Critical clearance angle
F' Relationship of properties of the medium -max Maximum angular distortion
with respect to the coating -m Poisson's ratio of rock or hard soil Poisson's
G Dynamic shear modulus of rock -L ratio of lining material

M0 static moment -0 Poisson's ratio of the louvre Poisson's

~
M0 Static normalized moment Inner -1 ratio of the soil deposit Density of then-th
r region of the port withr - r0 -n stratum Density of the soil deposit Density
rand Effective tunnel radius -1 of the louvre
r0 Radius of the port or outer radius -0
r1 Internal radius of the port -0 Port Damping Soil Tank Damping
you Coating thickness Flow raten-th stratum -1
vn Shear wave propagation speed in the
Functions
vs equivalent ground stratum Maximum
to 0,- Maximum ground acceleration
ground speed normalized toTand- 0
vmax Q-Tand,QDuctility reduction factor
RTand, ReitherReduction factor due to overstrength

376
 RECOMMENDATIONS

FLOWCHART

STRUCTURES TYPE 12: TUNNELS AND PORTS

TUNNELS IN ROCK OR HARD SOIL

lined tunnels
(circular section)

Unit Deformations Unit Deformations by

Longitudinal ovalization

Maximum unit strain of

coating

For pre-design purposes

PRODISIS

v0
a0

377
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

GROUND PORTS

KLumb≈ KI usually KLumb≠KI usually

Interaction effects are considered

Soil deformations are estimated dynamic:
in free field
KLumb-KI usually

The port is designed to accommodate SYSTEM CHARACTERIZATION

to these deformations SOIL- LUMBRERA

Floor system-
louver subject to
excitement
horizontal

two

378
 RECOMMENDATIONS

two

OBTAINING SHEAR STRESSES AND

MOMENTS

Shear Stresses moments

Dynamic Amplification Factors

Tables 3.15.1 to 3.15.9
Fvand FM

Reduction Factor
the outer radius
Tables 3.15.10 to 3.15.12
the inner radius Y

Case Heitherreither H1reither Htworeither veitherv1 v1vtwo

A 1 9 4 6 4.5 0.4
two 9 0.333
3 18 0.25
B. 1 12 4 9 4.5 0.4
two 9 0.333
3 18 0.25
C 1 fifteen 4 12 4.5 0.4
two 9 0.333
3 18 0.25

379
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.14.1 TUNNELS IN ROCK OR HARD SOIL

This subsection includes the recommendations for the seismic design of lined tunnels with a circular
section, including galleries. These recommendations do not consider slope failures in portals, tunnels
in geological fault systems, abrupt changes in tunnel stiffness (joints, openings, etc.), changes in
medium stiffness, and the design of tunnel joints.

3.14.1.1 Longitudinal strains

The longitudinal analysis of a tunnel aims to calculate the maximum unitary deformation of the
lining, due to the incidence of a shear wave on it. The equation to be used is:

v to 0,-
--- 0sin(-) cos(-) - randcos3(-) (14.1)
vs vtwo
s

where
- - is the longitudinal strain
to 0,- is the maximum normalized ground acceleration, evaluated inTand- 0 (ec. 1.14). For
structuresA1YA+,recognized soil dynamic response analysis programs should be used

vs is the propagation speed of shear waves in the equivalent ground layer is the effective
rand radius of the tunnel, that is, from the axis of the tunnel to half the thickness of the lining

- - is the angle of incidence

v0 is the maximum ground velocity expected at the site (for structuresA1YA+,Recognized soil
dynamic response analysis programs should be used. For
r
structuresA2, B1YB2,the expression can be usedv0- Fsitvmax,wherev r maxis obtained
of the PRODISIS program

The calculated strain, -, must be less than the allowable strain of the lining material in compression, -a
, which corresponds to its yield strength. For concrete, a compressive unit strain of0.003in the
extreme fiber. ground motion parameters,v0Yto 0,- ,should be determined by deterministic seismic
hazard analysis methods or
probabilistic in accordance with the importance of the structure, in case of not having the necessary
information to carry out said analyses, it is recommended to use the seismic hazard values of the
Mexican Republic proposed in section 3.1.

The speed of wave propagation,vs, can be determined by geophysical field or laboratory tests. In the
specific case that the rock mass presents a high degree of fractures, it is recommended to carry out
field tests, since the laboratory samples do not represent the real condition of the rock mass. These
can be seismic tests (down–hole, up–hole and crosshole) when conditions allow, sonic wave velocity
tests for rock cores and resonant column tests for soils (Geotechnics Chapter B.2.3). It is
recommended to use a value of --= 45ºfor the pre-design of tunnels or in the case of tunnels of small
dimensions, with which acceptable results will be obtained. However, in the case of very important or
large diameter tunnels (rand> 2.0m),the maximum unit strain corresponding to the angle

381
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

critical incidence, -c(ec. 14.2), since, depending on the ground motion or radius parameters, the unit
strains can be very different from those estimated with an incidence angle of45º.Calculating the
maximum value of Eq. 14.1, the critical angle of incidence is obtained:

- -
- 8atwo- 4a -1 -1- v0v s
- c-arcsen-- -; - a- (14.2)
4a - 2 - 3 to 0,- rand
- -

3.14.1.2 Unitary deformations due to ovalization

To estimate the deformations due to ovalization, it is recommended to use the following equation:

v-0- you1Em (1--two L )r-and-

- ov- 3(1-- m) - (14.3)
vs- rand 2EL(1- -m)t-
where:
- -ov is the ovalization strain is the Poisson's ratio of the hard
- -m rock or soil is the Poisson's ratio of the lining material is the
- -L dynamic modulus of elasticity of the hard rock or soil is the
ANDm modulus of elasticity of the lining material is the thickness
ANDL of the lining
you

The Poisson's ratio of the rock can be determined if the wave and shear velocities are known. For
example, a Poisson's ratio of0.2for concrete and0.3for steel. The modulus of elasticity of rock or hard
soil should correspond to the modulus of stiffness in dynamic shear,g.

The ovalization strain should be less than the free-field diametral strain, considering the perforated
medium.

- -D-
-ov- - - - -ov- two- max (1- - m) (14.4)
- D - max

The maximum angular distortion, -max, can be determined with site response analysis programs.
However, a very good approximation is reached from the following relationship:

v0
- max- (14.5)
vs

Good results are obtained using the above equations when the flexibility ratio isF > 20.The flexibility
ratio is defined as:

ANDm(1-two
-L-)-r-and-3
F-2 (14.6)
ANDL(1- -m)-t-

382
 RECOMMENDATIONS

For predesign purposes, Eq. 14.3 as follows:

-ov you1Em(1- -two)rLand

-3 -
v0(1- - rand 2EL (1- -mtwo
)t (14.7)
m)
vs

Inequality 14.4 is simplified by substituting Eqs. 14.5, 14.6 and 14.7:

you1standF- - 2
3 - (14.8)
rand 2t
where
F is the ratio of properties of the medium with respect to the coating, defined as follows:

AND(1- -twoL )
F- -m (14.9)
ANDL(1- -two m)

Figure 14.1 Graphs for predesign by ovalization.

It can be seen that inequality 14.8 depends only on the thickness–effective radius relationship of the
cladding and on the relationship of the properties of the medium. An abacus can then be generated
as a pre-design aid (figure 14.1). In this abacus it is possible to determine the unit strain by
ovalization, -ov, and the unit strain provided by both the normal force and the bending moment (see
Design Aids section). On the other hand, equations corresponding to

383
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

to a range of permissible values of the ratiorand/t,being the value oftwothe limit with the intersection of
the family of curves (figure 14.1). These allowable values are defined as:

-rand- two - 4 - 6F-

-- - (14.10)
-t- min F-

-rand- two - 4 - 6F-

-- - (14.11)
-t-max F-

The discriminant of 14.10 and 14.11 must comply with:

two
0 - F' - (14.12)
3

With the geometric properties of the tunnel, it is verified if it complies with the maximum permissible
deformation due to ovalization (maximum diametral unitary deformation), which must be within the following
interval:

-rand- -r
-- - -r
- -and- - -and-- (14.13)
-t-min -t- -t-max

On the other hand, from figure 14.1 it can be seen that there is a minimum value for the normalized ovalization
unit strain, which corresponds to an optimal value of the relationship of geometric properties of the tunnel, (rand
/t)opt, at this point the deformation induced by the normal force is equal to that induced by the moment.

-rand- 6
-- - (14.14)
-t- opt F-

6
(-ov)min- 6 F- -
-r- (14.15)
-and-
-t-opt

3.14.2 GROUND PORTS

During intense earthquakes, the openings suffer significant curvatures due to ground deformations,
which generate considerable bending moments. The simplest design approach is one that ignores
the interaction of the underground structure with the surrounding soil. According to this approach,
the free-field soil deformations are first estimated and then the structure is designed to
accommodate these deformations. The result is acceptable when the stiffnesses of both elements are
similar. Otherwise, it is necessary to consider the effects of dynamic interaction due to the stiffness
contrast between the floor and the port. This section presents a modal superposition method for
seismic analysis of ports considering the flexibility of the shaft and the buoyancy of the bottom
(flexible floating ports).

384
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.14.2.1 Characterization of the soil - port system

The model consists of an elastic cylinder buried in a soil deposit with a rigid base, (figure 14.2)
forming two regions: an interior one with the port and the supporting soil, and an exterior one with
the surrounding soil. For each element, port or floor, the displacements and forces are expressed by
linear combinations of modal responses and participation coefficients (superposition of modes). The
modes are calculated using the thin layer method, so that the solution is discrete in the vertical
direction and continuous in the horizontal direction. At the interface between the two regions, the
boundary conditions of compatibility of displacements and forces are imposed. As excitation of the
system, the vertical incidence of shear waves is considered.

Figure 14.2 Soil-port system subject to horizontal Figure 14.3 Soil-opening system with two layers
excitation.
where
-1 is the density of the soil deposit
v1 is the shear wave velocity of the soil deposit is the
-1 damping of the soil deposit
-1 is the Poisson's ratio of the soil deposit is the total
H1 thickness of the equivalent ground layer is the louvre
-0 density
-0 is the port damping is the port
-0 Poisson's ratio is the port height
H0
r0 is the outer radius of the port

For analysis purposes, the domain is divided into two regions with the following characteristics:

1) The interior region whose radiusris limited by:r - r0,and the depthzlimited by:
0 - z - Hsfor the port and the support floor, beingr0the radius of the port andHsthe depth of the
soil deposit.
2) The outer region whose radiusris limited by:r - r0,the depthzlimited by:
0 - z - Hsfor the surrounding soil.

385
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

It can be seen from the figure that the outer region is made up of soil strata only, while the inner
region is made up of both soil and skylight strata. To satisfy the boundary conditions of the problem,
the placement method at nodal points was used. From an analysis of the soil-port systems, shear and
moment values were obtained using a two-layer geotechnical soil model (Fig. 14.3). The upper layer
represents the superficial deposits, where the greatest amplification of the seismic response occurs,
while the lower layer represents the deep deposits. For seismic excitation, synthetic accelerograms
compatible with the uniform hazard spectrum in rock for a 475-year return period were simulated.
This level of design corresponds to10%of probability of exceedance during 50 years of useful life of
the work, recommended for important structures.

3.14.2.2 Obtaining shear forces and moments

In tables 14.1 to 14.9, the static values of the shears and moments obtained at different depths of
the opening are presented in a normalized manner (equations 14.16 and 14.17), as well as the
dynamic amplification factors,Fvand FM,the latter, obtained from the averages of maximum values
due to seismic excitation:

~ v0
v0 - (14.16)
-r- 0 1a0Hr 0 two

~ M0
M0 - 3 (14.17)
-r-r0 1a0H0

For its part, tables 14.10 to 14.12 present a reduction factor that considers the effect of thickness,
Faithvfor shear andFaithMfor now, beingr0the outer radius andr1the inner radius of the port. The
design tables presented are for different soil/structure stiffness contrasts and structural slenderness
ratios. The tables presented are referenced according to the following cases:

Table 14.1 Structural slenderness relationships and stiffness contrasts.

Case H0r0 H1r0 Htwor0 v0v1 v1vtwo

A 1 9 4 6 4.5 0.4
two 9 0.333
3 18 0.25
B. 1 12 4 9 4.5 0.4
two 9 0.333
3 18 0.25
C 1 fifteen 4 12 4.5 0.4
two 9 0.333
3 18 0.25

For values ofH0r0and V0v1not tabulated, linear interpolation may be used.

386
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Table 14.2 Response coefficients for case A1

H0/r0- 9.0,v0/v1- 4.5, -0/-1- 0.4

z
H0 ~ v0 ~ M0
v-0 Fv M0- FM
-r- 0 1a0Hr 0 two
-r- 0 1a0Hr 0 3

0.00 0.0000 0.0000

0.05 - 0.0140 - 0.0006
0.10 - 0.0088 - 0.0012
0.15 0.0074 - 0.0010
0.20 0.0294 0.0002
0.25 0.0540 1.68 0.0026
0.30 0.0787 0.0063
0.35 0.1003 0.0111
0.40 0.1138 0.0167
0.45 0.0971 0.0217
0.50 0.0024 0.0220 1.69
0.55 - 0.0282 0.0206
0.60 - 0.0265 0.0192
0.65 - 0.0155 0.0184
0.70 - 0.0020 0.0182
0.75 0.0114 0.0188
1.33
0.80 0.0239 0.0199
0.85 0.0351 0.0216
0.90 0.0436 0.0238
0.95 0.0454 0.0260
1.00 0.0334 0.0277

387
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 14.3 Response coefficients for case A2

H0/r0- 9.0,v0/v1- 9.0, -0/ -1- 0.333

z
H0 ~ v0 ~ M0
v0- Fv M0- FM
-r- 0 1a0Hr0 two
-r -0a1r0H3 0

0.00 0.0000 0.0000

0.05 - 0.0060 - 0.0003
0.10 0.0109 - 0.0001
0.15 0.0396 0.0016
0.20 0.0743 0.0049
0.25 0.1109 1.58 0.0100
0.30 0.1458 0.0170
0.35 0.1750 0.0255
0.40 0.1930 0.0349
0.45 0.1708 0.0437
0.50 0.0145 0.0447 1.65
0.55 - 0.0567 0.0420
0.60 - 0.0662 0.0387
0.65 - 0.0512 0.0360
0.70 - 0.0252 0.0346
0.75 0.0036 0.0347
1.33
0.80 0.0317 0.0362
0.85 0.0561 0.0389
0.90 0.0735 0.0425
0.95 0.0766 0.0463
1.00 0.0566 0.0491

388
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Table 14.4 Response coefficients for case A3

z H0/r0- 9.0,v0/v1-18.0, -0/ -1- 0.25

H0 ~ v0 ~ M0
v0 - Fv M0 - FM
-r- 0 1a0Hrtwo0 -r -0a1r0H3 0

0.00 0.0000 0.0000

0.05 0.0211 0.0007
0.10 0.0627 0.0034
0.15 0.1118 0.0084
0.20 0.1638 0.0160
0.25 0.2149 1.56 0.0261
0.30 0.2612 0.0388
0.35 0.2995 0.0534
0.40 0.3245 0.0693
0.45 0.2993 0.0846
0.50 0.0580 0.0879 1.60
0.55 - 0.0859 0.0839
0.60 - 0.1323 0.0775
0.65 - 0.1328 0.0708
0.70 - 0.1077 0.0653
0.75 - 0.0713 0.0616
1.67
0.80 - 0.0323 0.0599
0.85 0.0037 0.0599
0.90 0.0314 0.0613
0.95 0.0421 0.0634
1.00 0.0282 0.0648

389
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 14.5 Response coefficients for case B1

z H0/r0-12.0,v0/v1- 4.5, -0/ -1- 0.4

H0 ~ v0 ~ M0
v0 - Fv M0- FM
-r- 0 1a0Hr0 two
-r- 0 1a0Hr 0 3

0.00 0.0000 0.0000

0.05 - 0.0083 - 0.0004
0.10 - 0.0006 - 0.0005
0.15 0.0145 0.0001
0.20 0.0328 0.0015
1.78
0.25 0.0504 0.0039
0.30 0.0629 0.0069
0.35 0.0328 0.0091
0.40 - 0.0165 0.0087
0.45 - 0.0182 0.0077
0.50 - 0.0110 0.0071 1.73
0.55 - 0.0027 0.0069
0.60 0.0047 0.0070
0.65 0.0113 0.0075
0.70 0.0172 0.0084
0.75 0.0224 0.0094
1.34
0.80 0.0284 0.0108
0.85 0.0350 0.0126
0.90 0.0409 0.0146
0.95 0.0436 0.0168
1.00 0.0311 0.0184

390
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Table 14.6 Response coefficients for case B2

z H0/r0-12.0,v0/v1- 9.0, -0/ -1- 0.333

H0 ~ v0 ~ M0
v0- Fv M0- FM
-r- 0 1a0Hr0 two
-r -0a1r0H3 0

0.00 0.0000 0.0000

0.05 - 0.0026 - 0.0002
0.10 0.0139 0.0004
0.15 0.0383 0.0020
0.20 0.0653 0.0051
1.79
0.25 0.0896 0.0093
0.30 0.1060 0.0145
0.35 0.0607 0.0184
0.40 - 0.0319 0.0176
0.45 - 0.0465 0.0152
0.50 - 0.0376 0.0133 1.77
0.55 - 0.0210 0.0120
0.60 - 0.0031 0.0117
0.65 0.0141 0.0123
0.70 0.0301 0.0136
0.75 0.0437 0.0157
1.26
0.80 0.0584 0.0186
0.85 0.0718 0.0222
0.90 0.0818 0.0262
0.95 0.0827 0.0304
1.00 0.0571 0.0334

391
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 14.7 Response coefficients for case B3

z H0/r0-12.0,v0/v1-18.0, -0/ -1- 0.25

H0 ~ v0 ~ M0
v0- Fv M0- FM
-r- 0 1a0Hr0 two
-r -0a1r0H3 0

0.00 0.0000 0.0000

0.05 0.0155 0.0006
0.10 0.0486 0.0027
0.15 0.0865 0.0066
0.20 0.1240 0.0125
1.72
0.25 0.1561 0.0200
0.30 0.1782 0.0287
0.35 0.1150 0.0357
0.40 - 0.0441 0.0350
0.45 - 0.0916 0.0307
0.50 - 0.0933 0.0260 1.78
0.55 - 0.0743 0.0220
0.60 - 0.0463 0.0195
0.65 - 0.0160 0.0183
0.70 0.0140 0.0188
0.75 0.0394 0.0206
1.21
0.80 0.0650 0.0238
0.85 0.0862 0.0281
0.90 0.0996 0.0330
0.95 0.0985 0.0380
1.00 0.0647 0.0415

392
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Table 14.8 Response coefficients for case C1

z H0/r0-15.0,v0/v1- 4.5, -0/ -1- 0.4

H0 ~ v0 ~ M0
v0 - Fv M0- FM
-r- 0 1a0Hr0 two
-r- 0 1a0Hr 0 3

0.00 0.0000 0.0000

0.05 - 0.0045 - 0.0002
0.10 0.0031 - 0.0002
0.15 0.0170 0.0006
0.20 0.0316 0.0020
1.70
0.25 0.0400 0.0040
0.30 0.0005 0.0047
0.35 - 0.0126 0.0040
0.40 - 0.0086 0.0036
0.45 - 0.0023 0.0034
0.50 0.0030 0.0035 1.69
0.55 0.0071 0.0038
0.60 0.0106 0.0043
0.65 0.0136 0.0050
0.70 0.0167 0.0058
0.75 0.0200 0.0068
1.29
0.80 0.0238 0.0079
0.85 0.0285 0.0093
0.90 0.0328 0.0109
0.95 0.0378 0.0128
1.00 0.0253 0.0143

393
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 14.9 Response coefficients for case C2

z H0/r0-15.0,v0/v1- 9.0, -0/ -1- 0.333

H0 ~ v0 ~ M0
v0- Fv M0- FM
-r- 0 1a0Hr0 two
-r -0a1r0H3 0

0.00 0.0000 0.0000

0.05 - 0.0001 - 0.0001
0.10 0.0148 0.0005
0.15 0.0360 0.0022
0.20 0.0564 0.0048
1.90
0.25 0.0677 0.0081
0.30 0.0056 0.0095
0.35 - 0.0290 0.0081
0.40 - 0.0273 0.0066
0.45 - 0.0152 0.0058
0.50 - 0.0027 0.0055 1.80
0.55 0.0080 0.0059
0.60 0.0170 0.0066
0.65 0.0249 0.0078
0.70 0.0325 0.0094
0.75 0.0406 0.0114
1.31
0.80 0.0496 0.0137
0.85 0.0599 0.0167
0.90 0.0706 0.0201
0.95 0.0714 0.0237
1.00 0.0494 0.0265

394
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Table 14.10 Response coefficients for case C3

z H0/r0-15.0,v0/v1-18.0, -0/ -1- 0.25

H0 ~ v0 ~ M0
v0- Fv M0- FM
-r- 0 1a0Hr0 two
-r -0a1r0H3 0

0.00 0.0000 0.0000

0.05 0.0131 0.0005
0.10 0.0407 0.0022
0.15 0.0712 0.0056
0.20 0.0985 0.0103
1.85
0.25 0.1141 0.0159
0.30 0.0226 0.0186
0.35 - 0.0524 0.0162
0.40 - 0.0654 0.0130
0.45 - 0.0524 0.0102
0.50 - 0.0333 0.0083 2.03
0.55 - 0.0133 0.0076
0.60 0.0054 0.0076
0.65 0.0220 0.0087
0.70 0.0375 0.0104
0.75 0.0524 0.0129
1.20
0.80 0.0669 0.0161
0.85 0.0806 0.0200
0.90 0.0901 0.0245
0.95 0.0880 0.0289
1.00 0.0546 0.0321

395
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 14.11 Thickness coefficients,FaithV,M, for case A

H0 /r0- 9
r1
v0/v1- 4.5 v0/v1- 9 v0/v1-18
r0
Faithv FaithM Faithv FaithM Faithv FaithM

0.010 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000

0.020 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
0.050 0.998 0.999 0.999 0.999 1,000 1,000
0.100 0.993 0.996 0.996 0.997 0.999 0.998
0.200 0.973 0.982 0.985 0.988 0.993 0.993
0.300 0.941 0.960 0.966 0.971 0.984 0.982
0.400 0.895 0.928 0.938 0.946 0.968 0.965
0.500 0.835 0.883 0.897 0.907 0.944 0.936
0.600 0.756 0.823 0.840 0.852 0.908 0.891
0.700 0.654 0.740 0.759 0.771 0.852 0.821
0.800 0.519 0.625 0.638 0.651 0.761 0.709
0.900 0.331 0.447 0.445 0.467 0.591 0.519
0.950 0.201 0.303 0.291 0.326 0.429 0.363
0.990 0.053 0.096 0.090 0.129 0.160 0.149

396
 RECOMMENDATIONS

Table 14.12 Thickness coefficients,FaithV,M, for case B

H0/r0-12
r1
v0/v1- 4.5 v0/v1- 9 v0/v1-18
r0
Faithv FaithM Faithv FaithM Faithv FaithM

0.010 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000

0.020 1,001 1,002 1,001 1,002 1,002 1,002
0.050 0.999 1,002 0.999 1,000 1,001 1,002
0.100 0.995 0.999 0.999 0.999 0.999 1,001
0.200 0.976 0.989 0.986 0.990 0.995 0.997
0.300 0.945 0.970 0.965 0.976 0.983 0.988
0.400 0.902 0.945 0.935 0.955 0.968 0.972
0.500 0.843 0.907 0.893 0.922 0.941 0.947
0.600 0.765 0.855 0.832 0.873 0.902 0.909
0.700 0.663 0.779 0.748 0.801 0.843 0.847
0.800 0.529 0.668 0.625 0.691 0.749 0.751
0.900 0.342 0.489 0.435 0.514 0.571 0.582
0.950 0.208 0.337 0.286 0.370 0.404 0.425
0.990 0.055 0.108 0.090 0.152 0.152 0.189

397
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Table 14.13 Thickness coefficients,FaithV,M, for case C

H0/r0-fifteen
r1
v0/v1- 4.5 v0/v1- 9 v0/v1-18
r0
Faithv FaithM Faithv FaithM Faithv FaithM

0.010 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000

0.020 1,005 1,005 1,002 1,006 1,009 1,004
0.050 1,002 1,005 1,000 1,003 1,004 1,005
0.100 1,002 1,002 1,013 1,003 1,002 1,004
0.200 0.989 0.992 0.994 0.996 1,006 1,002
0.300 0.968 0.970 0.975 0.989 0.991 0.998
0.400 0.937 0.947 0.952 0.983 0.989 0.987
0.500 0.893 0.907 0.920 0.966 0.971 0.973
0.600 0.829 0.855 0.869 0.940 0.951 0.951
0.700 0.738 0.772 0.798 0.897 0.914 0.912
0.800 0.611 0.650 0.693 0.813 0.841 0.850
0.900 0.419 0.464 0.526 0.639 0.674 0.713
0.950 0.265 0.312 0.380 0.468 0.502 0.547
0.990 0.074 0.098 0.135 0.185 0.236 0.252

398
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.14.2.3 Determination of seismic actions

Seismic actions can be calculated by following the steps below:

1. For the design earthquake, establish the maximum acceleration in rock:ar 0

2. Calculate the shear rate and the average density of the soil to a depth
H1- 4r0,through

H1 H1
v1 - Y - 1-
h h (14.18)
- n - n
n vn n -n

where
vn is the speed ofn-th stratum the
-n density of then-th stratum
hn the thickness ofn-th layer of surface deposits

3. Determine the slenderness ratioH0/r0and the structure-soil stiffness contrastv0/v1, considering

thatv0-G0-0

4. From tables 14.1 -14.9 obtain the normalized static shear and moment, ~ as the v0and M
~ 0,So

corresponding dynamic amplification factors,FvYFM.

5. From tables 14.10 -14.12 obtain the corresponding reduction factors that relate the inner and
outer radii of the port,FaithvYFaithM.

6. Calculate the static values of shear and moment as

v0- - r0-1a0 r H0vtwo

0
~ (14.19)

r 3~
M 0- - r0-1a0H0M 0 (14.20)

7. For design purposes, determine the seismic actions as

FvFaithvv0
vd - (14.21)
Q-Tand,QRTand,Reither

FMFaithMM0
Md - (14.22)
Q-Tand,QRTand,Reither

where
Q'Tand,Q - 2 is the reducing factor for ductility
RTand,Reither-1.5 is the reduction factor for overstrength

399
 RECOMMENDATIONS

SECTION 3.15

STRUCTURES TYPE 13
WIND TURBINES

401
 RECOMMENDATIONS

INDEX SECTION 3.15 TYPE STRUCTURES 13: WIND TURBINES

NOMENCLATURE ................................................. ........................................................... .404

FLOWCHART............................................... ..............................................405

3.15.1 GENERAL CRITERIA.............................................. ........................................407

3.15.2 COMBINED EFFECTS OF GROUND MOVEMENTS .................................407

3.15.3 ROTATIONAL ACCELERATION SPECTRUM ................................................ ........407

3.15.4 STRUCTURAL IMPORTANCE ................................................ ..............................408

3.15.5 STRUCTURAL DAMPING ................................................................ ....................408

3.15.6 SEISMIC BEHAVIOR FACTOR ................................................ ............408

3.15.7 OVERSTRENGTH FACTOR.............................................................. .......................408

3.15.8 CHOICE OF THE TYPE OF ANALYSIS................................................... ...........................408

3.15.9 STATIC METHOD................................................... ................................................409

3.15.9.1 Evaluation of Seismic Forces ................................................ ...........................................409
3.15.9.2 Overturning moments ............................................... ........................................................... 411
3.15.9.3 Second order effects ........................................................... .........................................411

3.15.10 DYNAMIC METHOD................................................... ................................................412

403
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

NOMENCLATURE
a0r maximum acceleration on rock Te0 Fundamental period of the structure Vector of
an,xSpectral acceleration in translation ORand displacements of the system relative to the
ground
an,θ Spectral acceleration in rotation
Displacement ofn-th mode in
Am Modal responses ORn,x
translation
AD Design Answers
Displacement ofn-th mode in rotation
Cand Damping matrix of the structure Diameter of ORn,-

Dand the cross section at the base of the support

vand Statically calculated base shear
structure
force
ANDnYon It is the bending stiffness of the nth element
vd Calculated base shear force
hGR Height of the center of mass of the system
dynamically
nacelle-rotor
vs wave propagation speed
h-n height of the center of gravityn–th
shear in the equivalent ground layer
segment, measured from the setback Effective
v- Equivalent basal shear force caused by
He0 height of the structure, which can be considered
rotational acceleration
equal to0.67hGR
WT Total weight of the structure,W=Ws+WGR
Hn Effective modal heights
Rotational mass of the nacelle-rotor system
We0 Effective weight of the structure equal to0.67WT
ja
WGR Total weight of the nacelle-rotor system Total
Kand Stiffness matrix of the structure
Ws weight of the support structure Weight of the
Kn Elementary stiffness matrix
Wn n-th segment Lateral displacement of the
hen Length ofn-th element
he-,hexUnit vectors for the calculation of the coefs
x upper end of the resistant element

from participation to translation and pitch

ma Translational mass of the nacelle-rotor system -Mb Overturning moment at the base caused by
vertical loads
mand Statically calculated ground moment
- Rotation of the upper end of the resistant element
md Dynamically calculated ground moment
mn Distributed mass -n Natural frequencies of vibrating
-and Structural damping Mode
Mb Overturning moment at the base without
Φand shape matrix
considering second order effects
Mand Mass matrix of the structure Φn N-th modal vector
Mn Elementary mass matrix -n,x Coef of modal participation in translation
-n,- Coef of modal participation in pitch
MGR Moment due to weight of gondolarotor
system Functions
Pn Horizontal force applied at the center of mass a0you Translational ground excitation Design
of the nth segment axTand spectrum for translational acceleration
Pyes Additional horizontal seismic force that allows in directionx Normalized spectral
to consider the effects of higher modes of to Tand,- ordinate
vibrating
Q-Tand,Q Ductility reduction factor
PGR Seismic force concentrated in the center of
RTand,Reither Reduction factor due to overstrength
mass of the nacelle-rotor system
Q Seismic behavior factor Radius of -Tand,-and Damping factor
rGR gyration of the nacelle-rotor system
θa,Tand Rotational acceleration spectrum
Reither Index overstrength
Tb Upper limit of the plateau of the spectrum
---Tand Design Spectrum for Rotational
Tand Structural period Acceleration
--- Ground excitation by pitching-
gyou

404
 RECOMMENDATIONS

FLOWCHART

STRUCTURES TYPE 13: WIND TURBINES

CLUSTERA

-max= 0.01 Q=2.0 Reither= 1.5

- (item 3.2.3) Q (item 3.2.4) R (item 3.2.5)

TYPE OF ANALYSIS

STATIC ANALYSIS DYNAMIC ANALYSIS

The dynamic effects due to earthquake, similar to those of the static

Spectral Modal Analysis
analysis of Chimneys and silos, including the weight of the nacelle-
rotor in the highest part of the support structure.
Euler–Bernoulli beams

The support structure will be divided

into at least 10 segments with:

1. The support structure will be divided into at

least 10 segments with:
2. Formulation of consistent masses for
seismic force turning moment Second Effects each element, to capture the inertial
effects in horizontal translation and
Order
rotation.
The overturning moment in 3. Consider the effect of all modes.
1 4. The dynamic parameters will be
the section of the segmentn
is the resultant of the effectsP-- determined assuming that the structure
moment calculated as the has classical modes of vibration.
5. An appropriate specification of design
integral of the shear force
spectra for translational accelerationsaxand
diagram plusMGR
rotationaθ, with the explicit consideration of
the structural parameters of: Importance,

damping, ductility and

overstrength.

405
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Shear Mode Effects System Weight acceleration of

Side Force
Amplified Basal superiors of Nacelle-Rotor Base Rotation
Vibration of the structure

Shear division of the horizontal load on

determined baseline horizontal force in the center of mass of Distribution gone in the
structure of
as in structures upper segment system centers of mass of
support inN
type Buildings each segment
equal segments
height:

Figure 15.1
-max= 0.01

STATIC ANALYSIS DYNAMIC ANALYSIS

vd> 0.70Vand

Md> 0.70Mand

406
 RECOMMENDATIONS

3.15.1 GENERAL CRITERIA

Wind turbines are structures vulnerable to seismic action because they only have the tower as a
resistant support element. It is necessary to take into account that these are structures of
considerable height, slender and with very low damping, therefore it is possible that the contribution
of the higher modes of vibration in translation and/or rotation to the response of the structure is
important. In addition, there is a piece of equipment placed at the free end, whose dynamic effect,
due to the different operating states, produces actions on the tower that must be considered to verify
the limit states.

The purpose of the recommendations stipulated in this section is to determine the seismic forces that
act on the support elements of wind turbines subjected to earthquakes that are specified by means
of design spectra. These forces are a function of the mass of the structure and the design spectral
acceleration, which depends on the geographical location and the characteristics of the terrain on
which the structure will be placed. For the construction of the design spectrum, all the
recommendations indicated in section 3.1 will be followed, with the explicit consideration of the
importance, damping, ductility and structural overstrength of wind turbine supports and indicated in
this document. Also,

3.15.2 COMBINED EFFECTS OF GROUND MOVEMENTS

The supports of the wind turbines will be analyzed before the action of two orthogonal horizontal
components of the ground movement of the same intensity. Due to the size of wind turbine
foundations, the action of the torsion component (in the horizontal plane) due to
ground accelerations can be neglected. In areas of low seismicity, withar 0-100 Wales (period
reference return) the vertical component may be neglected. The effects resulting from these seismic
stresses will be obtained by applying the rule of the square root of the sum of the squares. The
effects thus obtained must be combined with the gravitational ones.

The choice of the orthogonal directions for which the analysis will be carried out will be based on the
most unfavorable direction of the wind turbine rotor axis, which is when it coincides with the location
of the access doors to the interior of the shaft. The most unfavorable directions will be defined by the
lowest resistance of the structure, both to flexural compression and shear force.

3.15.3 ROTATIONAL ACCELERATION SPECTRUM

The rotational acceleration spectrum is defined analogously to the translational acceleration
spectrum, that is, with a family of oscillators with one degree of freedom in rotation, excited by a
rotational movement. The rotational acceleration spectrum can be defined as:

π to T-
and,
θ a,T and - (15.1)
vsTand

407
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

where
θa,Tand SWn the ordinates of the rotational acceleration spectrum acting in the vertical plane in the
direction in which the earthquake acts
to Tand,- is the normalized spectral ordinate (eq. 1.14) is
Tand the structural period
vs is the speed of the shear waves in the equivalent stratum of the soil profile, as explained
in section 3.1
- -and is the structural damping

To evaluate the rotation spectrum for periods less thanTb,takeTand-Tb.

3.15.4 STRUCTURAL IMPORTANCE

According to their importance, the support structures and foundations of wind turbines belong to the
GroupA.Due to their relationship with CFE, they belong to Class I. This classification defines the type
of design spectra, the type and scope of ground exploration, and the way of constructing the design
spectra.

3.15.5 STRUCTURAL DAMPING

The maximum structural damping for wind turbines will be -and- 0.01.The damping factor -Tand,-and,It is
calculated as indicated in section 3.2.3.

3.15.6 SEISMIC BEHAVIOR FACTOR

The support structures of the wind turbines must be designed using a seismic behavior factorQ-2,
considering that they are made of structural steel. For other materials, values justified by specific
studies, by other standards or by specialized literature will have to be adopted. The criterion to define
the reduction factor for ductility,Q'Tand, Q ,It is found in section 3.2.4.

3.15.7 OVERSTRENGTH FACTOR

In the seismic design of wind turbines, an index overstrength will be usedReither-1.5.The reduction
factor for overstrengthRTand, Reither It will be calculated as indicated in section 3.2.5.

3.15.8 CHOICE OF THE TYPE OF ANALYSIS

For the analysis of wind turbine support structures, the following methods must be used: static and
dynamic. The design loads will correspond to those obtained with the dynamic method. However, in
no situation shall the basal shear force and overturning moment be allowed to

408
 RECOMMENDATIONS

dynamically calculated, are less than the70%from those calculated statically. To meet this constraint,
the design responses will be increased by the factors0.70vand/vdeither
0.70mandmd,as required to ensure that the dynamic basal shear force and overturning moment are
greater than the70%from those calculated statically. In these factorsvandYvdare the statically and
dynamically calculated base shear forces, whilemandYmdare the statically and dynamically calculated
basal overturning moments, respectively. For this, in the static analysis the fundamental period
obtained from a modal analysis will be taken.

3.15.9 STATIC METHOD

For the static analysis of wind turbines, the dynamic effects induced by the earthquake will be simulated
by means of an equivalent lateral force, distributed along the height of the structure and acting in the
direction of the ground movement, in a similar way to the static method for the seismic analysis of
Chimneys and silos, but with the inclusion of the effect of the concentrated mass due to the weight of the
nacelle-rotor system in the highest part of the support structure.

In order to have an adequate approximation in the evaluation of seismic forces, the support structure
will be divided into at least10segments of maximum height not greater than twice the radius of the
cross section at the base (Dand).

3.15.9.1 Assessment of Seismic Forces

The magnitude of the resultant of the vertically distributed lateral force will be equal to the base
shear force determined in accordance with the provisions for Building-type structures, taking into
account the recommended damping for wind turbines.

The vertical distribution of the amplified basal shear force will be carried out by dividing the support
structure intoNsegments of equal height, as shown in Figure 15.1. At the center of mass ofn–th
segment, a horizontal force will be applied that is defined as follows:

N
-Wn-WGR to Te0 , -
n-1
Pn -0.85W h-
nn N (15.2)
Q-Te0,QRTe0,Reither
- W nh -n- WGR
h GR
n-1

where
Wn is the weight ofn-th segment of the support structure is the
WGR weight of the nacelle-rotor system
h-n is the height of the center of gravityn–th segment, measured from the offset is the height
hGR of the center of mass of the nacelle-rotor system

Te0 is the fundamental period of the structure in the analysis direction, obtained from a modal analysis

409
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

Figure 15.1 Seismic forces on a typical wind turbine

To take into account the effects of higher modes of vibration, a horizontal force will be additionally
applied to the upper segment, which is defined as

to Te0,-
Pyes- 0.15WsQ-Te0,QRTe0,Reither (15.3)

where
Ws is the total weight of the supporting structure

Additionally, to consider the effect of the weight of the nacelle-rotor system, a concentrated
horizontal load must be applied to the center of mass of the system, defined as

N
-Wn-WGR to Te0 , -
n-1
PGR -WGR hGR N (15.4)
Q-Te0,QRTe0,R
- Wnh-n-WGRh GR
either

n-1

410
 RECOMMENDATIONS

The contribution of rotational acceleration at the base of the structure should also be considered. For
this purpose, the additional basal shear force due to rotational acceleration can be evaluated by the
following expression:

θa,Te0He0We0
v -- (15.5)
Q-Te0,QRTe0, Reither
where
He0 is the effective height of the structure, which can be considered equal to0.67hGR
We0 is the effective weight of the structure equal to0.67WT
WT is the total weight of the structure,WT=Ws+WGR

The base shear forcev-must be distributed in the centers of mass of each segment in the same
proportion as the forcesPn.Since the effects of translational and rotational accelerations on
base are not in phase, they must be combined using the square root of the sum of squares rule.

3.15.9.2 Turning Moments

The overturning moment in the section corresponding to the center of gravity of the segmentno,is the
resultant of the moment calculated as the integral of the shear force diagram plus the moment due to the
rotational inertia of the nacelle-rotor system, which can be estimated as

to Te0,-
- e0,QRT
MGR -1.5WGRrGRtwo
x Q-T e0,Reither (15.6)

where
MGR is the moment due to the weight of the nacelle-rotor system, applied to the highest part of the
support structure
rGR is the maximum radius of gyration of the nacelle-rotor system, inm
x,- are the lateral displacement and the rotation, respectively, of the upper end of the
resistant element under the action of the inertial forceWGRacting on the mass

3.15.9.3 Second order effects

In the design of wind turbines it is necessary to consider the second order effects (effectsP--- when it
is fulfilled

δMbMb- 0.10 (15.7)

where
-Mb is the overturning moment at the base caused by the vertical loads acting on the
deformed structure
Mb is the overturning moment at the base without considering second order effects

To calculate -Mbthe support element with linear behavior, subjected to statically calculated lateral
loads, will be analyzed. The displacements thus obtained must be increased by the
factorQR Tand,Reither.

411
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

3.15.10 DYNAMIC METHOD

For the dynamic analysis of wind turbine support structures, modal spectral analysis will be used. As
these are structures in which bending deformations dominate, they can be modeled as Euler-
Bernoulli beams. For the calculation of the frequencies and the natural modes of vibration of the
structure, the influence of the rotational inertia of the wind turbine will be taken into account. The
requirements for this analysis are as follows:

1. An adequate discretization of the structure by considering at least 10 segments with a maximum

height no greater than 2 times the radius of the cross section at the base, in order to adequately
calculate the structural response at any level of the support.
2. A formulation of consistent masses for each element, to capture the inertial effects in horizontal
translation and rotation.
3. The effect of all modes should be considered.
4. The dynamic parameters of a wind turbine will be determined assuming that the structure has
classical modes of vibration, so that the frequencies and natural modes of vibration will be
obtained considering null damping.
5. An appropriate specification of design spectra for translational accelerationsaxTand
and rotation ---Tand,with the explicit consideration of the structural parameters of: Importance,
damping, ductility and overstrength.

The vector of displacements and rotations of the structure relative to the base is represented by
OR T --xN,-N,...,x1,-1-, whereNis the number of discretization segments. Given an excitation of
and

terrain with translational componentsa0youand pitch --- gyou,the dynamic balance of the structure
results in the matrix equation of motion

M--OR(t)-
and and
-
CandOR and(t) -KandORand (t)- -Mand{hexa0t-he-θg --t } (15.8)
where
T
he
x-{1, 0,...,1,0}Y he--{hN , 1,...,h1,1}T

The mass arraysMandand stiffnessKandof the system are of order2N-2Nand they are assembled with the
elementary matrices (Chopra, 1995):

-156 -22ln 54 13ln-

ml --22l n -13l n -3ltwo
n--
M n - n n-
4Ltwon
(15.9)
420 - 54 -13ln 156 22ln -
- -
- 13ln -3ltwon 22ln 4L n
two
-

-12 6ln -12 6ln -

--6ln two
4ln -6ln -
AND Yo n -
2ltwo
Kn-
n n

he3 --12 (15.10)

n
-6ln 12 -6ln-
- -
-6ln 2ltwo
n -6ln n -
4ltwo

where
mn is the distributed mass

412
 RECOMMENDATIONS

hen is the lengthn-th element

ANDnYon is the bending stiffness ofn-th element

The stiffness matrix is assembled as follows:

-kN k12N k13

N
N
k14 -
- -
eleven

- kN kN22 -
twenty-one
- -
-kN - - - - - -
-31 -
-kN41 - - - - - -
- - - - - -
- -
Kand- - - - - - - (15.11)
- - -
- -
- - - - - -
- -
- - - - - -
1-
- - - ktwo
33-keleven
1
ktwo
3. 4-k12
- -
- - - 43 - k1
ktwo twenty-one
ktwo
44 - k122-

In eq. 15.11, the elements that overlap must be added, those that are located outside the blocks are
zero, and those that fall outside the matrix are eliminated due to the rigid basis condition.
Translational masses should be considered in the mass matrixmaand rotationaljaof the system
nacelle-rotor, as follows:

-mN -m a
eleven mN12 - - -
- N -
- mN twenty-one
m22-ja - - -
- - - ---- -
- -
- - - ---- -
- ---- -
- -
Mand- - ---- - (15.12)
- - -
- -
- - - - - -
- -
- - - - - -
- - - m33two 1
-meleven 4-m12 -
m3.two 1

- 1 -
- - - mtwo
-m
43 twenty-one m44
two -m221-

For the calculation of natural frequencies -nand from the mode shape matrixΦand--Φ1,Φtwo,...,ΦN-, the
characteristic value problem will be solved

-K and -
--twonMand Φ1- 0 (15.13)

The design responses will be obtained by combining the maximum modal responses, according to
the expression
413
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

-1 / 2-
1 -Nm -N m
AD- -- A m - ---Atwom -- - (15.14)
two --m-1 -m-1 - --

The above expression represents the average of the square root of the sum of the squares and the
sum of the absolute values of the modal responsesAm, which can be displacements, shear forces or
overturning moments. For example, displacements will be calculated as

OR
n,x- -n,xΦn
an,x
(15.15)
-ntwo

ORn ,-- -n ,- Φn an ,-two (15.16)

-n
where
an,x, an ,-are the spectral accelerations for frequency -n
-n,x, -n ,-are the modal share coefficients in translation and pitch, respectively,
given by
ΦTM he
n and x

-n,x- (15.17)
ΦTnMandΦn

ΦTM
n andhe-

-n ,-- T (15.18)
ΦnMandΦn

Note that -n,--Hn-n,x,where

ΦTM andhe-

H-n
n

T (15.19)
ΦnMandhex

are the effective modal heights. Since translational and rotational motions are generally not in phase,
the combined effect can be obtained using the square root of the sum of squares rule.

414
 RECOMMENDATIONS

CONTENTS
GENERAL OF THE MANUAL

Hydrotechnics, Geotechnics and

structures

415
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

yesSECTION A -HHYDROTECHNICS
Theme Chapter Description
1 Hydrology
1 General considerations
two Precipitation
3 runoff
4 Losses
5 Relationship between precipitation and runoff
6 Statistic analysis
7 design storms
8 design avenues
9 Traffic of avenues and simulation of the operation of storage vessels
10 flood forecast
eleven geohydrology
12 Geographic information systems, with application in hydrology
13 Hydrology and hydraulics in small basins
two Hydraulics
1 General considerations
two Planning of hydroelectric exploitation systems
3 Environmental impact assessment for the execution of hydroelectric projects
4 pressure pipes
5 Intake works for hydroelectric plants
6 Intake work and cooling systems for thermoelectric plants
7 Hydraulic machines
8 Hydraulic transients in pressure lines
9 Turbines and dynamic analysis
10 Free surface runoff
eleven Hydrological and hydraulic traffic, in channels
12 diversion work
13 Exceedance work
14 Design of aerators in spillway structures
fifteen river hydraulics
16 Sedimentation in reservoirs and sand traps
17 Maritime works
18 Terminal structures for receipt and handling of fuels
19 Sea - land interaction
twenty dredging
twenty-one Instrumentation
22 Experimental techniques
23 Numerical methods
24 Risk and reliability analysis
25 Evaluation of the hydraulic safety of structures
26 Hydraulic rehabilitation of structures

416
 RECOMMENDATIONS

yesSECTION B -GEOTÉCNIA
Theme Chapter Description
1 geology
1 Existing geological information
two Obtaining and analysis of geological information
3 Presentation of geological information.
4 Seismic hazard studies
two Soil mechanics
1 Classification and characterization of soil deposits
two Laboratory tests to determine the properties of soils and riprap
3 Field tests to determine soil properties and riprap
4 Behavior of partially saturated soils and applications
5 Foundations in soils
6 retention structures
7 Stability of slopes, excavations and slopes
8 soil improvement
9 Water flow in soils
3 rock mechanics
1 Lab tests
two Field tests
3 Characterization of rock masses
4 rock foundations
5 Stability and treatments of rock slopes
6 injections
7 Excavation methods
9 Characterization of boundary geomaterials
4 Dam Design
1 General considerations
two Clay core rockfill
3 Rockfill with concrete face
4 Asphalt core rockfill
5 tailings
6 hard-fill
5 Tunnels and skylights
1 on floors
two on rocks
3 Caverns for powerhouse
6 QA
1 Geotechnical construction control
two Risk and reliability analysis
7 Instrumentation
1 General considerations
two Geotechnical
3 Structural
4 Geotechnical Safety Assessment of Structures
5 Geotechnical rehabilitation of structures
8 General Applications
1 Criteria for exploration and field and laboratory tests
two Criteria for the use of numerical methods

417
 CHAPTER OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN MDOC 2015

yesECTIONC-ANDSTRUCTURES
Theme Chapter Description
1 General analysis and design criteria
1 design methods
two Actions
3 earthquake design
4 wind design
5 Structure analysis
two Design of Special Structures
1 Structural design of foundations
two Lines of transmission
3 cooling towers
4 Tanks and reservoirs
5 Pipelines
6 Chimneys
7 bridges
8 Structural topics in hydraulic works
9 industrial structures
10 Substations
eleven Gates
12 House of machines
13 Tunnels and skylights
3 Monitoring and control of structural responses
1 Structure monitoring
two Design of structures with base isolation
3 Design of structures with seismic energy dissipators
4 Safety assessment and rehabilitation of structures
1 Safety assessment of existing structures
two Rehabilitation of structures
5 Construction materials
1 Steel, polypropylene, carbon and glass fibers
two massive concrete
3 Roller Compacted Concrete
4 self compacting concrete
5 asphalt concrete
6 concrete technology
6 Design of concrete or masonry dams
1 General considerations
two Gravity (Conventional and Roller Compacted Concrete)
3 Bow
4 bumps

418